2297

T-Series Mid-Range Libraries
T200, T380, and T680
User Guide
SpectraLogic.com
Copyright Copyright © 2008–2009 Spectra Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. This item and the
information contained herein are the property of Spectra Logic Corporation.
Notices Except as expressly stated herein, Spectra Logic Corporation makes its products and
associated documentation on an “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, BOTH OF WHICH ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. In no
event shall Spectra Logic be liable for any loss of profits, loss of business, loss of use or
data, interruption of business, or for indirect, special, incidental or consequential
damages of any kind, even if Spectra Logic has been advised of the possibility of such
damages arising from any defect or error.
Information furnished in this manual is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, no
responsibility is assumed by Spectra Logic for its use. Due to continuing research and
development, Spectra Logic may revise this publication from time to time without notice,
and reserves the right to change any product specification at any time without notice.
If you do not agree to the above, do not use this Spectra library; instead, promptly contact
Spectra Logic for instructions on how to return the library for a refund.
Trademarks Python, Spectra, SpectraGuard, Spectra Logic, TeraPack, and the Spectra Logic logo are
registered trademarks. BlueScale, Endura, EnergyAudit, PreScan, PostScan, RXT, T-Finity,
and Tape without Pain are trademarks of Spectra Logic Corporation. All rights reserved
worldwide. All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their
respective owners.
Part Number 91010000 Revision D
Revision
History Revision Date Description
A January 2008 Initial release, T380 library.
B April 2008 Added T200.
C November 2008 Added T680.
Added information about MLM, HHM, Auto
Configuration Save, and Automatic Drive Cleaning
features
Updated information about encryption, AutoSupport,
and other topics throughout.
D December 2009 Updated/added information about MLM and HHM,
DLM, Auto Configuration Save, Auto Drive Clean,
BlueScale Vision, and other new features.
Note: To make sure you have the release notes for the most current version of
the BlueScale firmware, check the Spectra Logic Web site at
www.spectralogic.com/documents.
2
User Guide 91010000
License You have acquired a Spectra product that includes software owned or licensed by
Spectra Logic from one or more software licensors (“Software Suppliers”). Such
software products, as well as associated media, printed materials and “online” or
electronic documentation (“SOFTWARE”) are protected by copyright laws and
international copyright treaties, as well as other intellectual property laws and treaties.
If you do not agree to this end user license agreement (EULA), do not use the Spectra
product; instead, promptly contact Spectra Logic for instructions on return of the Spectra
product for a refund. Any use of the Software, including but not limited to use on the
Spectra product, will constitute your agreement to this EULA (or ratification of any
previous consent).
Grant of License. The Software is licensed on a non-exclusive basis, not sold. This EULA
grants you the following rights to the Software:
You may use the Software only on the Spectra product.
Not Fault Tolerant. The Software is not fault tolerant. Spectra Logic has independently
determined how to use the Software in the Spectra product, and suppliers have relied
upon Spectra Logic to conduct sufficient testing to determine that the Software is
suitable for such use.
No Warranties for the SOFTWARE. The Software is provided “AS IS” and with all
faults. The entire risk as to satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy, and effort
(including lack of negligence) is with you. Also, there is no warranty against
interference with your enjoyment of the Software or against infringement. If you have
received any warranties regarding the SOFTWARE, those warranties do not originate
from, and are not binding on Software suppliers.
Note on Java Support. The Software may contain support for programs written in
Java. Java technology is not fault tolerant and is not designed, manufactured, or
intended for use of resale as online control equipment in hazardous environments
requiring fail-safe performance, such as in the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft
navigation or communications systems, air traffic control, direct life support machines,
or weapons systems, in which the failure of Java technology could lead directly to
death, personal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage.
No Liability for Certain Damages. Except as prohibited by law, Software suppliers
shall have no liability for any indirect, special, consequential or incidental damages
arising from or in connection with the use or performance of the Software. This
limitation shall apply even if any remedy fails of its essential purpose. In no event shall
Software suppliers, individually, be liable for any amount in excess of U.S. two hundred
fifty dollars (U.S. $250.00).
Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation, and Disassembly. You may
not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the Software, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this
limitation.
Software Transfer Allowed with Restrictions. You may permanently transfer rights
under this EULA only as part of a permanent sale or transfer of the Spectra product,
and only if the recipient agrees to this EULA. If the Software is an upgrade, any transfer
must also include all prior versions of the Software.
Export Restrictions. Export of the Software from the United States is regulated by the
Export Administration Regulations (EAR, 15 CFR 730-744) of the U.S. Commerce
Department, Bureau of Export Administration. You agree to comply with the EAR in
the export or re-export of the Software: (i) to any country to which the U.S. has
embargoed or restricted the export of goods or services, which as May 1999 include, but
are not necessarily limited to Cuba, Iran, Iraq, Libya, North Korea, Sudan, Syria, and
the Federal Republic of Yugoslavia (including Serbia, but not Montenegro), or to any
national or any such country, wherever located, who intends to transit or transport the
Software back to such country; (ii) to any person or entity who you know or have
reason to know will utilize the Software or portion thereof in the design, development
or production of nuclear, chemical, or biological weapons; or (iii) to any person or
entity who has been prohibited from participating in U.S. export transactions by any
federal agency of the U.S. government. You warrant and represent that neither the BXA
nor any other U.S. federal agency has suspended, revoked or denied your export
privileges. For additional information see www.microsoft.com/exporting/.
3
January 2010 Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Warnings and Cautions
Warnings and Cautions

Risk of electrical shock. Hazardous moving parts. Use caution when removing the
Warning library’s front or side panels. Spectra Logic recommends turning off the power to
the library before removing the front or side panels.
German: Gefahr eines elektrischen Schlages. Gefährliche bewegliche Teile. Seien
Sie vorsichtig, wenn Sie die Library der Vorder-oder Seitenwänden. Spectra Logic
empfiehlt Drehen Sie das Gerät in die Library, bevor Sie den Front-oder seitlichen
Platten.
Risk of electrical shock. To prevent the possibility of electrical shock, install cord
Warning locks on the AC power cords and a permanent grounding wire between the chassis
and earth ground.
German: Gefahr eines elektrischen Schlages. Um zu verhindern, dass die
Möglichkeit eines elektrischen Schlages, der Installation von Kabel-Sperren auf
den AC Netzkabel und eine ständige Erdung Draht zwischen den Chassis und
Masse.
Tipping Hazard. The library must be installed in a standard 19-inch (48 cm) rack to
Warning prevent tipping. The rack must be located on a level, hard-surfaced floor such as
cement or tile.
German: Kipp-Gefahr. Die Library muss installiert sein, in einem Standard-Rack 48
cm blagerung zu verhindern. Das Rack muss sich auf eine ebene, harte Oberfläche
Stock wie Zement oder Fliese.
The T200 library weighs approximately 230 lb. (104 kg), the T380 library weighs
Warning approximately 305 lb. (138 kg), and the T680 library weighs approximately 765 lb.
(347 kg) without controllers, drives, and media installed. Use extreme caution
when moving it.
German: Die Library T200 wiegt ca. 104 kg, die Library T380 wiegt ca. 138 kg und
die Library T680 wiegt ca. 347 kg ohne Controller, Laufwerke und Medien installiert
werden. Verwenden Sie extreme Vorsicht walten lassen, wenn sie abwandern.
The library is very heavy. Always use four people, two on each side, when lifting or
Warning moving the library.
German: Die Library ist sehr schwer. Benutzen Sie immer vier Personen, zwei auf
jeder Seite, beim Heben oder Fortbewegen der Library.
Do not place the rack on a carpeted floor or anywhere else that poses risk for static
Caution discharge that could damage your library and its drives.
Use only the media approved by Spectra Logic for use in the drives installed in your
Caution library. Improper media will result in damage to the drives, library, and media.
If the library is loaded with media packs (RXT media packs or media in TeraPacks),
Caution Spectra recommends that the library not be moved. If you must move the library,
contact SpectraGuard Technical Support for recommendations before proceeding.
4
User Guide 91010000
Contacting Spectra Logic

To obtain general information
Spectra Logic Web Site: www.spectralogic.com
United States Headquarters European Office
Spectra Logic Corporation Spectra Logic Europe Ltd.
1700 North 55th Street Magdalen Centre
Boulder, CO 80301 Robert Robinson Avenue
USA Oxford Science Park
Phone: 1.800.833.1132 or 1.303.449.400 OXFORD
International: 1.303.449.6400 OX4 4GA
Fax: 1.303.939.8844 United Kingdom
Phone: 44 (0) 870.112.2150
Fax: 44 (0) 870.112.2175
SpectraGuard Support
Web Site: www.spectralogic.com/support
Knowledge Base: www.spectralogic.com/knowledgebase
United States and Canada Europe, Middle East, Africa
Phone: Phone: 44 (0) 870.112.2185
Toll free US and Canada: 1.800.227.4637 Email: support@spectralogic.com
International: 1.303.449.0160 Deutsch sprechende Kunden
Email: support@spectralogic.com Phone: 49 (0) 6028.9796.507
Email: spectralogic@stortrec.de
Mexico, Central and South America, Asia, Australia, and New Zealand
Phone: 1.303.449.0160
Email: support@spectralogic.com
Spectra Logic Sales
Web Site: www.spectralogic.com/shop
United States and Canada Europe
Phone: 1.800.833.1132 or 1.303.449.6400 Phone: 44 (0) 870.112.2150
Fax: 1.303.939.8844 Fax: 44 (0) 870.112.2175
Email: sales@spectralogic.com Email: eurosales@spectralogic.com
Media Sales
Email: media@spectralogic.com
5
Notes
6
User Guide 91010000
Contents
About This Guide 17
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Related Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Register Your Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Chapter 1 – Library Overview 21

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Library Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
BlueScale Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Library Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Front Panel Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Interior Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Rear Panel Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Operator Panel and Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
TeraPack Access Port (TAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Library Control Module (LCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Quad Interface Processors (QIPs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
F-QIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
E-QIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
SCSI Bus Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Media Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
TeraPack Tape Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
RXT Media Packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Chapter 2 – Architecture Overview 45

Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Data Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Cleaning Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Media Pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Auto Drive Clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Component Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
7
Contents
Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Transporter Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Drive Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Failover Using Direct-Attached LTO-4 Fibre Channel Drives . . . . . . 59
Chapter 3 – Installation Overview 61

Installation Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Unpack and Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Update Firmware and Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Changing the Library Hardware Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Updating or Servicing the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
System Configuration Settings Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Chapter 4 – Introducing the BlueScale User Interface 69

Overview of the BlueScale User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Access Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
User Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
User Interface Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Using the BlueScale User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Logging Into the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Logging Off or Switching Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Entering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Chapter 5 – Operating the Library 83

Turning the Library On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Power On the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Power Off the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Monitoring Your Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Checking Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Using Performance Metrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Using BlueScale Hardware Health Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Viewing Drive Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Viewing a Fibre Channel Partition’s World Wide Name . . . . . . . . . 100
Using the BlueScale Vision Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
8
User Guide 91010000
Contents
Using a USB Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Continuing Library Operations While Using a USB Drive . . . . . . . . 105
Connecting a USB Drive to the LCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Saving Data From the Library to a USB Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Copying Data From a USB Drive to the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Using a Global Spare Tape Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Using the Global Spare Tape Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Reclaiming the Global Spare Tape Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Restoring the Library Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Restoring From an Auto Save Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Restoring the Library Configuration Using a
Saved Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Restoring the MLM Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Chapter 6 – Importing, Exporting, and Moving Media 119

Understanding the Media Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Viewing the Partition Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Preparing Media for Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Tape Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
RXT Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Importing Media and Cleaning Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Overview of Import and Export Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Importing Media into the Entry/Exit Pool or a Cleaning Partition . 128
Importing Media into a New Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Exporting or Exchanging Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Exporting or Exchanging Media in a Data Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Exporting or Exchanging Cartridges in a Cleaning Partition . . . . . 144
Importing Media To or Exporting Media From a Specific Location . . . 147
Moving Media Within a Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Locate the Desired Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Move the Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Updating the Media Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
9
Contents
Chapter 7 – Media Lifecycle Management 155

BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Spectra-Certified Media with MLM-Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Media Auto Discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
MLM Tracking and Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
MLM PreScan and PostScan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Additional MLM Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Media Lifecycle Management Best Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Configuring Media Lifecycle Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Configure Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Configuring Media Auto Discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Displaying MLM Capacity as Broadcast Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Configuring PostScan Blackout Periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Getting Started with Using Media Lifecycle Management . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Media Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Initiating or Stopping Media Discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Using Media Lifecycle Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Generating Media Lifecycle Management Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Saving an MLM Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Using MLM PreScan and PostScan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Using PreScan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Using PostScan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Managing the MLM Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Backing Up the MLM Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Restoring the MLM Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Deleting Records From the MLM Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Downloading the MLM Database as a CSV File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Chapter 8 – Drive Lifecycle Management 195

BlueScale Drive Lifecycle Management Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Enabling Drive Lifecycle Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Monitoring Drive Health Using DLM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Use the Drive Health Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
View a Detailed Heath Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Using DLM to Test a Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
10
User Guide 91010000
Contents
Chapter 9 – Using Partitions 205

Before you Begin... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Configuration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Configuring a New Data Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Enter the Initial Partition Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Choose the Robotic Control Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Configure Global Spare Tape Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Configure a Direct-Attach Fibre Channel Drive Partition . . . . . . . . 217
Configuring a Direct-Attach SCSI Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Configuring an F-QIP-Attached SCSI Drive Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Configuring an E-QIP-Attached SCSI Drive Partition . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Configuring a Cleaning Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Enter the Initial Partition Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Configure the Chambers for the Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Modifying an Existing Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Deleting a Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Chapter 10 – AutoSupport 247

AutoSupport Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Configuring AutoSupport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Configure Mail Recipients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Configure AutoSupport Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Configure Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Configure Log Set Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Using AutoSupport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Creating New Support Tickets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Updating Existing Support Tickets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
11
Contents
Chapter 11 – Configuring the Library 265

Configuring Library Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Adding a New User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Modifying an Existing User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Deleting an Existing User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Accessing the System Setup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Enabling Purchased Options and Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Determine the Library Hardware ID and Purchase the Option . . . 271
Enable the Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Modifying the Library Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Configuring System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Enabling and Disabling Performance Metrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Enabling and Disabling Soft Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Enabling the Camera Icon (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Configuring Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Configuring Mail Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Enabling Email for the Automatic Configuration Save Feature . . . 282
Configuring SNMP (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Backing Up the Library Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Use the Auto Save Configuration Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Back Up the Library Configuration Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Verify the Configuration Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Setting the Camera IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Configuring Emulation (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Configuring and Using Observatory (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Enabling and Configuring Observatory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Using Observatory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Configuring a Firmware Package Server (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Configuring Rotation Manager (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Configuring the Library for Use with StorNext Software (Optional) . . 301
Configure the Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Configure StorNext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
12
User Guide 91010000
Contents
Chapter 12 – Configuring and Using Encryption 305

BlueScale Encryption Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Site-Specific Decisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Site Security Example: Low Security Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Configuring Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Log Into the Encryption Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Configure the Encryption Initialization Mode and Password . . . . . 314
Create an Encryption Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Assigning the Encryption Key to a Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Enable Encryption Using an F-QIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Enable Drive-Based Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Exporting and Protecting Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Export the Encryption Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Verify Backups of Encryption Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Protect the Encryption Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Restoring Encrypted Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
The Required Key is Stored in the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
The Required Key is Not Stored in the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Using the Endura Decryption Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Deleting an Encryption Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Recycling Encrypted Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Chapter 13 – Library Troubleshooting 333

Capturing Traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Recovering a Media Pack after a Power Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Recovering a Cartridge From a Global Spare Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Resetting the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Resetting Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Resetting the LCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Resetting a QIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Resetting the BlueScale Vision Camera IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Troubleshooting Blockages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Accessing the Interior of the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Prepare the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Access the Interior from the Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Access the Interior from the Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
13
Contents
Chapter 14 – Drive Troubleshooting 359

Resetting a Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Using the Drives Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Using the Reset Controller Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Using the Power Drive On/Off Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Retrieving a Drive Dump File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Troubleshooting All Drive Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Troubleshooting LTO Tape Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Interpreting the LTO Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Interpreting the Display Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Troubleshooting SDLT Tape Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Interpreting the SDLT LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
SDLT Tape Drive Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Troubleshooting RXT Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Interpreting RXT Drive SCD Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Chapter 15 – Maintaining the Library & Drives 385

Maintaining the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Replacing the Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Updating Library Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Installing Cord Locks and Chassis Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Calibrating the Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Maintaining Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Cleaning a Tape Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Updating Drive Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Adding or Replacing a Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Appendix A – Best Practices 421

Backing Up the Spectra Library Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Back Up the Library Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Verify and Protect the Metadata Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Working with Tape Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Use Only Spectra Certified Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Labeling Tape Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Handling Tape Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Storing Tape Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Using Tape Media in the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Tape Media Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
14
User Guide 91010000
Contents
Working with RXT Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

RAID Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Optimizing Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Using RXT Media in the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Handling RXT Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Storing RXT Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Operating in Gigabit Ethernet Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Best Practices for IP SANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Best Practices for iSCSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Appendix B – Media & Upgrades 441

Media and Media Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Spectra Certified Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Media and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
How To Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Library Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Service Contract Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Firmware Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Library Option Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Hardware Expansion and Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
How to Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Replaceable Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Appendix C – Service and Support 447

Problem Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
How to Open a Support Ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Returns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Appendix D – Specifications 449

Library Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Data Storage Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Size and Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Service Access Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Shipping and Storage Size and Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Power Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Shock and Vibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
15
Contents
Interoperability and Software Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

Interface Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Component Interface Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Network Interface Cable Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Ethernet Cable Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Tape Drive and Media Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
LTO Tape Drive Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
SDLT Tape Drive Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Tape Media Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Bar-Code Label Specifications for Half-Inch Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
RXT Drive and Media Pack Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
RXT Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
RXT Media Packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Appendix E – Regulatory & Safety Standards 475

EU Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Korean Regulatory Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
FCC Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Safety Standards and Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
UL Accreditation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Hazardous Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Waste of Electronic and Electrical Equipment (WEEE) Directive . . 478
Restriction of Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic
Equipment (RoHS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Measures for the Administration of the Control of Pollution by
Electronic Information Products (China) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Glossary of Terms 481
Index 491
16
User Guide 91010000
About This Guide
This guide describes how to configure, use, maintain, and troubleshoot the
Spectra® T-Series Mid-Range libraries, the T200, T380, and T680. It also
provides specifications for the library.
INTENDED AUDIENCE
This guide is intended for data center administrators and operators who
maintain and operate backup systems. The information in this guide
assumes a familiarity with SCSI and Fibre Channel command protocols, as
well as with network connectivity protocols such as Fibre Channel,
Ethernet, and iSCSI (Gigabit Ethernet). It also assumes a knowledge of
technical tasks such as configuring operating systems and installing
drivers.
RELATED INFORMATION
This section contains information about this document and other
documents related to the T200, T380, and T680 libraries.
BlueScale User Interface Screens

The BlueScale interface changes as new features are added or other
modifications are made between firmware revisions. Therefore, the screens
on your library may differ from those shown in this document.
Additional Publications
For additional information about the Spectra T200, T380, and T680 libraries
and their drives, refer to the publications listed in this section.
Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries

This guide and the following documents related to the Spectra T200, T380,
and T680 are available as PDF files on Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
Documentation and Software CD included with your library. They are also
available the Spectra Logic web site at www.spectralogic.com/documents.
The Spectra Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries Quick Reference Guide
provides a quick reference for the user interface and instructions for
performing day-to-day library operations such as powering on and off,
and preparing, importing and exporting media.
17
About This Guide
The Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries Site Preparation Guide
provides information about preparing your site for the installation of
the T200, T380, or T680 library.
The BlueScale Vision Camera User’s Guide provides detailed information
about installing and using the BlueScale Vision software.
The Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries Release Notes and
Documentation Updates provides the most up-to-date information about
the T200, T380, and T680 libraries, drives, and media.
Note: The release notes are not included on the Spectra T200, T380, and
T680 Libraries Documentation and Software CD.
The BlueScale Encryption User Guide provides detailed information
about using BlueScale Encryption Professional Edition. It also provides
useful information about encryption best practices and recycling
encrypted media.
The Spectra T-Series Library SCSI Developer Guide provides detailed
information about the SCSI and Fibre Channel commands used in the
library.
Drives
LTO Ultrium Tape Drives Check the IBM web site at www.storage.ibm.com/
tape/lto/oem/index.html to locate documentation for LTO Ultrium tape
drives.
SDLT Tape Drives Check the Quantum web site at www.quantum.com/
ServiceandSupport/Index.aspx to locate documentation for SDLT tape
drives.
SAIT Tape Drives Check the Sony web sit at sony.storagesupport.com/
node/26?product=3&name=S-AIT&tab2=drivers to locate drivers and
documentation for SAIT tape drives.
RXT Drives The following documents related to the RXT drives are
available as PDF files on the Spectra Logic web site at
The Spectra RXT150 User Guide provides information about operating
the RXT150 drive.
The Spectra RXT150 Release Notes provides the most up-to date
information about the RXT150, including information about the latest
firmware releases.
The Spectra RXT Troubleshooting Guide provides troubleshooting
information for RXT drives.
The Spectra RXT SCSI Differences Guide outlines differences between
RXT SCSI commands and LTO-2 (Ultrium-TD2) commands.
18
User Guide 91010000
Register Your Library
Typographical Conventions
This document uses the following conventions to highlight important
information:
Note: Read notes for additional information or suggestions about the
current topic.
Important Read text marked by the “Important” icon for information that will help you
complete a procedure or avoid extra steps.
Read text marked by the “Caution” icon for information you must know to avoid
Caution damaging the library, the tape drives, or losing data.
Read text marked by the “Warning” icon for information you must know to avoid
Warning personal injury.
German: Lesen Sie markierten Text durch die “Warnung”-Symbol für die
Informationen, die Sie kennen müssen, um Personenschäden zu vermeiden.
This document uses an arrow (>) to describe a series of menu selections.

For example:
Select Configuration > Partitions > New.
— means —
Select Configuration, then select Partitions, then select New.
REGISTER YOUR LIBRARY

Register your library quickly and easily on the Spectra Logic Web site, by
visiting www.spectralogic.com/register.
19
About This Guide
Notes
20
User Guide 91010000
Chapter 1
Library Overview
This chapter provides an overview of the Spectra® T200, T380, and T680
libraries features and components.
Topic Described beginning on...

Overview page 22
Library Features page 23
Library Components page 27
Operator Panel and Touch Screen page 33
TeraPack Access Port (TAP) page 34
Library Control Module (LCM) page 35
Quad Interface Processors (QIPs) page 39
Drives page 36
Media Handling page 42
21
Chapter 1 — Library Overview
OVERVIEW
The Spectra® T200, T380, and T680 libraries (the libraries) are highly
scalable, modular libraries that provide fast, affordable storage that meets
the stringent requirements for data integrity, data security, and high
reliability in the enterprise environment. The unique TranScale™ modular
design makes it possible to increase capacity or number of drives in the
library to meet the storage and performance needs as they evolve within an
organization.
With the exception of the maximum number of drives, the total storage
capacity, and the number of Quad Interface Controllers (QIPs) or bus
expansion modules each supports, the T200, T380, and T680 libraries are
functionally and operationally identical. The differences between the
libraries are noted where appropriate.
22
User Guide 91090000
Library Features
LIBRARY FEATURES
This section provides an overview of the library’s BlueScale™ user
interface and the hardware features that make the T200, T380, and T680
libraries highly versatile enterprise storage solutions.
BlueScale Software
The BlueScale software and firmware provide control over every aspect of
the library’s operation. The BlueScale software includes the following
features (listed in alphabetical order).
Auto Drive Clean

Auto Drive Clean lets you configure a dedicated cleaning partition to be
used for cleaning cartridges. The cleaning partition can be shared by
multiple data partitions and is used by the library to automatically clean
drives whenever necessary. See Using Auto Drive Clean on page 50 for
more information.
Auto-Save Configuration
Auto-Save Configuration automatically generates an auto-save file
containing a backup of the library configuration and MLM database and
stores it on the LCM compact flash once a week and whenever a partition
is created or modified. If desired, the library can automatically email the
auto-save file each time it is created. This external copy of the auto-save file
ensures that you can recover your MLM database and library configuration
in the event of a disaster. See Use the Auto Save Configuration Feature on
page 286 for more information.
AutoSupport
AutoSupport configures the library to automatically contact library users
with messages or when specific events occur. It can also be used to open or
update a support ticket and send it to a specified email recipient or to
SpectraGuard™ Support. See Chapter 10 – AutoSupport for detailed
information.
Drive Lifecycle Management

BlueScale Drive Lifecycle Management (DLM) helps you identify drives
that are experiencing high error rates or other problems. You can use this
information to determine whether the drive requires maintenance or
whether it needs to removed from the library. A health icon next to each
drive indicates the overall health of the drive. DLM is automatically
enabled when Media Lifecycle Management (MLM) is enabled.
23
Encryption and Key Management

BlueScale Encryption and key management are tightly integrated into the
BlueScale environment. Encryption can be performed either through an
encryption-enabled Fibre Channel QIP, if installed, or through encryption-
capable LTO-4 drives using either LTO-3 or LTO-4 media. Encryption key
management is provided through the library’s BlueScale user interface. See
Chapter 12 – Configuring and Using Encryption for detailed information.
Note: BlueScale encryption is not supported with LTO-2 or earlier
media or with LTO-3 or earlier tape drives.
EnergyAudit™
BlueScale EnergyAudit lets you display and record actual power
consumption, giving you greater control of your data center and budget.
See Using Performance Metrics on page 88 for information.
Global Spare
Global Spare provides a way to remotely replace a failed drive in the
library. You simply configure an installed drive as a designated spare for
other drives in the library. This drive can then be substituted for a failed
drive in any partition that is configured to use the Global Spare drive.
When a drive fails, you simply log into the BlueScale web interface from
any location, select the Global Spare option for the failed drive, and
continue normal operations. You can then physically replace the failed
drive at your convenience. See Configure Global Spare Tape Drives on
page 213 and Using a Global Spare Tape Drive on page 107 for more
information.
Hardware Health Monitoring

BlueScale Hardware Health Monitoring (HHM) tracks maintenance
thresholds for key library components and notifies you when a
maintenance threshold is reached. When the maintenance icon appears in
the status bar, you can click on it to view the message. You can also choose
to send the AutoSupport Log (ASL) file to SpectraGuard Support so they
can review the log files and determine if any maintenance tasks are needed
to prevent future failures. See Using BlueScale Hardware Health
Monitoring on page 92 for more information.
IPv6 Support
The library supports link-local addressing from a web browser. When the
library connects to a routed IPv6 network it requests a link-local IPv6
address. You can then use this link-local address to connect to the library
without changing the IP address configuration settings in your library. See
Configuring Network Settings on page 278 for additional information.
24
User Guide 91090000
Library Features
Media Lifecycle Management

BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management (MLM) helps you manage your
tape media by giving you tools to pro-actively detect potential media
errors well before they happen—all consolidated within the same
application you use to manage your library. When used in combination
with Spectra Logic Certified Media with MLM support, MLM lets you
manage, track, and report all facets of tape usage from creation to
retirement. When used with media that is not MLM-enabled, MLM tracks
and reports the general health of the media. See Chapter 7 – Media
Lifecycle Management for detailed information.
Shared Library Services (SLS) Partitioning

Shared Library Services™ (SLS) partitioning logically divides the library
into multiple virtual libraries. With SLS, one library can support multiple
media types and provide dedicated library services to multiple user
groups. See Partitions on page 45 and Chapter 9 – Using Partitions for
detailed information
Soft Power Control

The Soft Power option lets superusers disable the front panel power button
and instead enable a “soft power” button on the General Status screen of
the BlueScale user interface. It also provides a confirmation message before
power to the library is turned off. Enabling the Soft Power option gives
superusers exclusive control over powering the library off, preventing
other users from powering the library off from the front panel. See Use the
Soft Power Feature on page 85 for more information.
User Interface
The library’s BlueScale user interface lets you set configuration options,
view library and drive information and metrics, manage cartridges, and
monitor library operations. You can access the user interface using the
touch screen on the library’s operator panel, a direct connection to the
library controller module (LCM), or through the BlueScale web interface
using standard web browser. Access to the user interface is controlled by
assigning users to one of three groups, each with specific privileges. See
Chapter 4 – Introducing the BlueScale User Interface for detailed
information about the features and controls provided by the BlueScale user
interface.
25
Hardware Features
The library’s unique modular design lets you tailor its to suit your current
data requirements and easily expand it to keep up with data growth and
technology changes by adding storage capacity and incorporating new
drive technology as it becomes available. The library includes the
following hardware features (listed in alphabetical order).
BlueScale Vision Camera

The BlueScale Vision™ camera lets you use the browser-based BlueScale
Vision software to view the interior of the library while it is operating. See
BlueScale Vision Camera on page 29 for more information.
Flexible Connectivity
The library’s transporter (the robotics) and drives connect to the host
systems using either of the following methods:
Direct-attach Fibre Channel or SCSI drives connect directly to the Fibre
Channel fabric or the host SCSI bus, respectively. One drive in each
partition provides pass-through connectivity to the transporter.
Intelligent controllers called a Quad Interface Processors (QIPs)
provide Fibre Channel or Gigabit Ethernet (iSCSI) network connectivity
for the transporter installed in the library.
QIPs serve as a bridge from the Fibre Channel or Gigabit Ethernet
(iSCSI) network environment to the transporter, eliminating the need
for external bridges or other specialized devices to handle data stream
translation.
Note: Connecting SCSI drives through a QIP is only supported as a
legacy solution.
See Connectivity on page 52 for more information.
High-Density TeraPack Media Storage

The library optimizes space usage by storing media on horizontal shelves.
This horizontal storage provides very high density by using space within
the library instead of the limited space provided by the vertical library
walls. Each horizontal shelf is divided into multiple equal-size media
storage chambers. Each chamber accommodates a single TeraPack
magazine or an RAID eXchangeable TeraPack (RXT™) media pack. See
Media Storage Chambers on page 29 and Media Handling on page 42 for
more information.
26
User Guide 91090000
Library Components
Support for Multiple Tape Formats

The library supports multiple generations of the high-performance, high-
capacity LTO and SDLT tape drives. Shared Library Services (SLS)
partitioning makes it possible to use multiple tape technologies a single
library. See Drives on page 36 for additional information.
LIBRARY COMPONENTS
The following sections show the locations of and briefly describe the major
front panel, internal, and rear panel components of the library.
Front Panel Components

Figure 1 shows the library front and side panel components.
Stylus
Operator Panel
(touch screen and
power button)
TeraPack Access
Port (TAP) Access panels
Front panel
Fans and air filter

(behind cover panel) Handles
Figure 1 Library front and side panel components (T380 shown).
Operator Panel The operator panel includes a color LCD touch screen and
the library power button. To learn more, see Operator Panel and Touch
Screen on page 33. A stylus for making selections and typing entries on the
touch screen can be conveniently stored near the screen.
TeraPack Access Ports (TAPs) The TAP functions as an entry/exit port that
lets you import media into or remove media from the library. The T200 and
T380 each have a single TAP; the T680 has two TAPs, one above the other.
To learn more about the TAP, see TeraPack Access Port (TAP) on page 34.
27
Fans and Air Filters The air filters on the front of the library prevent
particulate contaminants from being pulled into the library by the air
circulation system. Fans behind the filters circulate clean air throughout
the library for climate control inside the library.
Access Panels and Handles The removable panels on each side of the
library provide service access to the interior components of the library. The
access panels are equipped with safety interlocks that power down the
library robotics when removed. Two handles on each side of the library
simplify moving and lifting the library when installing it in a rack.
Note: Most service procedures can be done through the front of the
library while it is installed in a rack. Using a rack that provides
side access simplifies many of these procedures.
The side panels on the T680 rack can be removed to
expose the access panels.
Doors (not shown) Doors on the T680 rack enclose the front of the library.
Interior Components
Figure 2 shows the interior components of the library.
Note: The interior components are shown for reference only. They are
not accessible during normal operation.
Media
chambers
DBA cover
Media chambers
(also behind fan
assembly)
Transporter with
bar code reader
Fan assembly
Figure 2 Library interior components (T380 shown).
28
User Guide 91090000
Library Components
Media Storage Chambers The media storage chambers hold all of the
media stored in the library. Each chamber provides storage for one TeraPack
magazine or one RXT media pack. TeraPack magazines, individual
cartridges, and the RXT media packs can all be labeled with unique bar
codes for easy identification.
In addition to the chambers indicated in Figure 2, chambers can also be
installed in the flex bays at the back of the library (see Rear Panel
Components on page 30). The maximum amount of media that can be
stored in the library depends on the type of media and the number of
drives installed (see Data Storage Capacity on page 450).
Transporter The robotic transporter moves a TeraPack magazine or RXT
media pack from one location to another in the library. A picker on the
transporter removes an individual cartridge from a magazine and inserts it
in a tape drive. When the tape drive is finished using the cartridge, the
picker retrieves the cartridge and returns it into the original magazine.
The transporter moves along the vertical and horizontal axes to perform
all media movement within the library. The integrated bar-code reader
mounted on the transporter reads the bar-code labels on individual
TeraPack magazines, cartridges, and RXT media packs. The library uses
the bar-code label information to maintain an inventory of the media
currently stored inside the library.
BlueScale Vision Camera The BlueScale Vision camera is mounted at the
top rear of the library. Two LEDs illuminate the interior of the library. The
camera lets you can observe import and export operations, tape mounts,
cartridge moves, and robotic operations in real time using the browser-
based BlueScale Vision viewer software. The ability to view the interior of
the library without removing the side access panels provides an additional
level of monitoring for your library.
LEDs (one on each

side of camera)
Camera lens
Ethernet and
power cables
Figure 3 The BlueScale Vision camera and LEDs.
29
Rear Panel Components

Figure 4 shows the library’s rear panel components.
Tool storage
Chambers (3)
(behind cover)
Empty drive bay

(cover removed)
Drive
Flex bays (for DBAs
or TBAs)
Empty controller bay

(cover removed)
Drive Bay Assembly QIP or bus

(DBA) expansion module
Library Control BlueScale Vision

Module (LCM) camera connector
Power supply Main AC power cord

Bay connector and switch
Figure 4 Library rear components (T380 2N redundant power supply option

shown).
Flex bays Depending on requirements, flex bays let you increase the
number of drives or amount of media installed in the library. Flex bays can
accommodate additional drive bay assemblies (DBAs) for increased
performance or TeraPack Bay Assemblies (TBAs) for increased storage
capacity.
Drive Bay Assemblies (DBAs) Modular drive bay assemblies house the
drives and QIPs installed in the library. Each DBA accommodates up to
four full-height tape drives or four RXT drives and provides the electrical
and internal interface connections for the drives. Each DBA also includes a
bay for a QIP to the right of the drives. Use of a QIP or bus expansion
module is optional, depending on how the drives in the DBA connect to
the network.
30
User Guide 91090000
Library Components
A minimum of one DBA must be installed in the library. One additional

DBA can be installed in the flex bay above the first DBA in the T200 library;
up to two additional DBAs can be installed in the T380 and T680 library.
TeraPack Bay Assemblies (TBAs) Modular TeraPack bay assemblies
accommodate four TeraPack magazines or RXT media packs. Each TBA
contains four chambers and occupies the same physical space as a single
DBA. Depending on the library configuration, a TBA can replace a drive
bay assembly (DBAs) to provide increased storage capacity.
Library Control Module (LCM) A dedicated on-board computer module
runs the BlueScale firmware that controls all aspects of the library
operation. To learn more, see Library Control Module (LCM) on page 35.
Power Supply Bay The power supply bay accommodates two sets of three
power supply modules. Figure 5 shows the location of the AC power
connectors, main AC power switches, and the power supply modules in
the power supply bay.
Note: Any slots that do not have power supply modules installed have
covers installed to maintain proper air circulation through the
library.
Power supply bay with AC power cord

Main AC switch six power supply modules with cord lock
DC power
status
AC power
status
Ground
wire
Figure 5 The library power supply components (2N configuration shown).
Power supply modules convert the AC input power to the DC power

used by the robotics, drives, and QIP installed in the DBAs. They also
provide power to the LCD operator panel.
The standard configuration uses one power supply module per DBA. A
second power supply per DBA, in combination with the dual AC power
inputs, provides 2N redundancy and failover protection. Connecting
each AC input to a separate circuit provides failover protection in the
event of a power failure in one of the circuits. The failover feature
requires the 2N power redundancy option. The power supply modules
needed for the 2N power redundancy configuration are an option you
can purchase separately or when you order the library.
31
Each power supply module has two indicator LEDs (shown in

Figure 5), one for AC power status and one for DC power status. The
color of the LED indicates the status:
Green—The power is on and functioning normally.
Orange—The power supply has a fault condition.
Off—The power is not on or the power supply module is not
functioning normally
Each set of three power supply modules has its own AC power
connector. The AC switch above the connector turns the main AC
power to the power supply modules on and off.
The AC connector and switch on the right side of the chassis control
power to the three power supply modules to the immediate left of
the connector. If you are not using 2N redundant power supplies,
these modules are typically installed first.
The AC connector and switch on the left side of the chassis control
power to the power supply modules installed to the immediate
right of the connector.
Cord locks on each power cord secure the cord to the library to
prevent it from being inadvertently disconnected.
A permanent ground wire is connected to the power supply bay to
ensure that the library is properly grounded at all times.
Tool storage. The compartment above the DBAs can be used to store the
tool kit that is included with the library.
Drives The library accommodates multiple generations of the high-
performance, high-capacity full-height LTO drives and SDLT tape drives, as
well as RXT drives. The drives are installed in modular Drive Bay Assemblies
(DBAs), each accommodating up to four drives. Drives are hot-swappable to
provide uninterrupted operation. To learn more, see Drives on page 36.
Note: Any drive bays that do not have drives installed have covers
installed to maintain proper air circulation.
Quad Interface Processors (QIPs) QIPs connect the library’s SCSI
transporter and drives to a Fibre Channel or Gigabit Ethernet (iSCSI)
network environment. QIPs are installed in the vertical controller bays to
the right of the drives in each DBA. To learn more, see Quad Interface
Processors (QIPs) on page 39.
Bus expansion module. When using direct-attach SCSI drives, a bus
expansion module is required. Like QIPs, bus expansion modules are
installed in the vertical controller bays to the right of the drives in each
DBA. To learn more, see SCSI Bus Expansion Module on page 41.
BlueScale Vision Connector The dedicated Ethernet port for the BlueScale
Vision camera lets you connect the camera to an Ethernet network and use
the web-based BlueScale Vision software to monitor the interior of the
library.
32
User Guide 91090000
Operator Panel and Touch Screen
Additional Components In addition to the components shown in Figure 4

on page 30, the following additional components are present on the rear
panel during normal operation.
A DBA cover (shown in Figure 2 on page 28) is installed over the drives
in the T200 and T380 libraries.
Doors on the T680 rack enclose the back of the library.
Cord locks are installed to prevent the AC power cords from being
disconnected (see Figure 5 on page 31).
A permanent grounding wire is connected to the chassis (see Figure 5
on page 31).
Any bays that do not contain components have covers installed to
maintain proper air circulation through the library.
OPERATOR PANEL AND TOUCH SCREEN

The operator panel and touch screen on the front of the library provides
local access to the BlueScale user interface through the Library Controller
(LC). You can select options and enter information by simply touching the
appropriate location on the screen. For detailed information about using the
BlueScale user interface through the touch screen, see Chapter 4 –
Introducing the BlueScale User Interface.
LCD touch Power button

screen
Figure 6 The library operator panel displaying the General
Status screen of the BlueScale user interface.
LCD touch screen The 8.4-inch color LCD touch screen operator panel lets
you monitor library operations and select configuration options using the
BlueScale user interface.
33
Power Button The power button provides front panel on/off control of the
library.
Stylus (not shown) A stylus for making selections and typing entries on
the touch screen can be conveniently stored near the screen.
TERAPACK ACCESS PORT (TAP)

The TeraPack Access Port (TAP) is used to move TeraPack magazines into
and out of the library. A TeraPack magazine can contain one or more
cartridges or it can be empty. The T200 and T380 libraries each have one
TAP; the T680 has two TAPs.
TeraPack
magazine
TAP Door
Figure 7 The library TAP with a TeraPack magazine loaded.
When you request an import operation from the BlueScale user interface,
the library opens the TAP door and waits for you to insert a magazine
containing one or more cartridges. After you insert the magazine and close
the door, the transporter moves the magazine to a chamber in the library.
When the move is complete, the library updates its inventory to include the
newly imported media.
Similarly, when exporting media from the library, the transporter delivers
the magazine containing the requested media pack to the TAP. You can
then remove the entire magazine from the TAP or you can remove one or
more cartridges from the magazine.
During import or export operations involving more than one magazine,
the TAPs on the T680 library alternate so that the operation completes
more quickly.
34
User Guide 91090000
Library Control Module (LCM)
Using the TAP to move media in and out of the library provides these key
advantages:
Data Security. Media is never stored in the TAP. A newly inserted
TeraPack magazine is automatically moved into the library and placed
in a storage chamber. A magazine already in the library is only moved
to the TAP when you request an export operation through the user
interface. Data security and backup integrity are enhanced because the
media stored in the library can only be accessed using the password-
protected BlueScale user interface.
Convenience. Instead of individually importing or exporting multiple
single cartridges as you would with a traditional entry/exit port, using
a TAP lets you handle up to ten cartridges in a single operation, thus
reducing the time spent on import and export tasks.
LIBRARY CONTROL MODULE (LCM)

The library uses a dedicated on-board computer module, the Library
Control Module (LCM), to run the BlueScale software and firmware that
controls all aspects of the library operation.
The BlueScale software running on the LCM provides user interface used
to perform all configuration, import/export, and management functions.
The BlueScale user interface is accessed locally through library's touch
screen. An embedded web server provides remote access to the BlueScale
web interface using a standard web browser.
The BlueScale firmware running on the LCM controls the operation of the
robotics, drives, and QIPs. As part of this function, the LCM stores all of
the information relating to the logical library, including information about
the location and status of each element in the library, as well as the raw
media inventory in its non-volatile memory.
Keyboard Compact flash card

connector Reset Monitor connector (behind cover) Fan
Mouse USB port Ethernet connector

connector
Figure 8 The connectors and components on the LCM.
35
In addition to providing the user interface and robotics control, the LCM
maintains and stores the MLM database, system logs, and other
information related to the current system status. It also stores the auto-
configuration save file and handles emailing it and AutoSupport logs to
preconfigured recipients.
Keyboard, Mouse, and Monitor Connectors For convenience, you can
connect a PS2 mouse, PS2 keyboard, and an SVGA monitor to the
appropriate connectors on the LCM and use them to access the user
interface. This connection provides access to all of the options available
from the library’s front panel touch screen.
Compact Flash Card The compact flash card in the LCM stores the library’s
configuration information, which includes option keys, system settings,
and partition settings, as well as other configuration information.
Ethernet Connector If desired you can use the Ethernet connector (the web
server port) on the LCM to connect the library to an Ethernet network and
access the library through the BlueScale web interface using the Remote
Library Controller (RLC). The BlueScale web interface provides access to
all of the options available from the library’s operator panel except those
that require physical interaction with the library (for example, importing
or exporting media).
USB Port The USB port is used to connect a USB drive to the LCM for
transferring encryption keys, saving configurations, and uploading
firmware packages.
Notes: The USB port cannot be used to connect a keyboard or mouse
to the LCM.
The USB port on the RCM is used when capturing motion
traces.
DRIVES
The library supports the following media technologies.
IBM LTO Ultrium tape drives (LTO-2 through LTO-4). See LTO Tape
Drive Specifications on page 462 for information about the transfer
rates and storage capacities of LTO drives.
Quantum SDLT 600 tape drives. See SDLT Tape Drive Specifications
on page 465 for information about the transfer rates and storage
capacities of SDLT drives.
36
User Guide 91090000
Drives
Spectra Logic RXT150 drive and RXT media packs. No changes to

backup strategy are necessary, because the RXT drive appears as an
LTO tape drive to the backup software. See RXT Drive and Media Pack
Specifications on page 471 for information about the transfer rates and
storage capacities of RXT drives and media.
Important RXT drives and media packs are only supported as legacy devices. They are no
longer available for purchase.
The library’s drives are installed in modular drive bay assemblies (DBAs).
Each DBA has four drive bays and can accommodate up to four full-height
tape drives or four RXT drives. Drives are hot-swappable to provide
uninterrupted operation.
Each drive is mounted in a drive sled which provides the electrical and
logical connections to the library. The drive sled circuitry includes
intelligence which assigns an identifier to the drive based on its location in
the library. This identifier is used both by the library and by any backup
software that accesses the drive. Because this identifier is location-based, it
remains constant even if the physical drive is replaced by a new drive. The
new drive assumes the location-based identifier, making drive replacement
completely transparent to the backup software.
In addition to the electrical and logical connections for the drive, the drive
sled includes interface connections for the drive, a handle to simplify
sliding the drive into or out of a drive bay, and a lock to prevent the drive
from being accidentally pulled out of the library.
Fibre Channel Handle Lock SCSI terminator Handle Lock

connectors (2) release release
Figure 9 The Fibre Channel drive sled. Figure 10 The SCSI drive sled.
37
The method used to connect the library’s tape drives to the network
depends on the type of network and the drive interface. The tape drives
used in the library have either a native Fibre Channel interface or an
Ultra320 SCSI interface. RXT drives have an internal Ultra320 SCSI
interface.
Fibre Channel drives in the library connect directly to the Fibre Channel
network. Each drive has two dual-channel ports (Port A and Port B)
that can be used to connect the drive directly to a Fibre Channel
network. See Partitions Using Direct-Attach Fibre Channel Drives on
page 55 for information about using direct-attach Fibre Channel tape
drives.
Connecting SCSI tape drives directly to a SCSI bus requires a bus
expansion module to provide the second SCSI bus connection for each
drive. An LVD SCSI terminator is installed on the single LVD SCSI
connector on the drive sled. To learn more about the bus expansion
module, see Partitions Using Direct-Attach SCSI Drives on page 55.
Connecting SCSI drives to a Fibre Channel network requires an F-QIP.
See Partitions Using QIP-Attached SCSI Drives on page 57 for
information about using SCSI drives.
Important Connecting SCSI drives through a QIP is only supported as a legacy solution.
Depending on the type of drive, the drive sled includes the one of the
interface connector types shown in the following table. See Component
Interface Connectors on page 460 additional information.
Drive Interface Type Connector

Fibre Channel Two multi-mode optical SC connectors (see Figure 9). Used to connect direct-
attach Fibre Channel tape drives to a Fibre Channel network.
SCSI a Ultra-3 SCSI “LVD” 68-pin Micro D female connector. A SCSI terminator is
installed on the connector (see Figure 10).
a. Requires either a QIP or a bus expansion module to connect to the network.
38
User Guide 91090000
Quad Interface Processors (QIPs)
QUAD INTERFACE PROCESSORS (QIPS)

Intelligent controllers called Quad Interface Processors (QIPs) can be used
to provide the control path for SCSI motion commands from the host to the
transporter. QIPs are also required to provide the Fibre Channel or Gigabit
Ethernet connectivity to any SCSI drives installed in the library. To learn
more about the role QIPs play in the library, see Drive Connectivity on
page 55.
Note: QIPs are mounted in the vertical controller bay along the right
side of each DBA. The QIPs in Figure 11 and Figure 12 are
shown in a horizontal position for reference only.
F-QIP
A Fibre Channel QIP (F-QIP) can be used to connect the transporter to a
Fibre Channel arbitrated loop or fabric. The F-QIP has two integrated dual-
channel ports (Port A and Port B), which can be used to provide
connections to two separate networks or to provide redundant connections
to a single network. One F-QIP in each partition provides the Fibre
Channel connectivity to the transporter. Each F-QIP port also provides
any-to-any connections to SCSI drives housed in the DBA where the F-QIP
is installed.
Activity LEDs indicate SCSI bus activity (data transfer to or from the
attached drives). Another LED indicates whether the data passing to the
attached drives is being encrypted or decrypted.
Fibre Channel ports Activity LEDs QIP Reset

Figure 11 The Quad Interface Processor (F-QIP).
39
In addition to providing Fibre Channel network connectivity between the

drives and the host, the F-QIP can encrypt data before it is written to tape.
This capability is useful if the SCSI drives installed in the library cannot
perform encryption. Encryption key management is provided through the
library’s BlueScale user interface (see Chapter 12 – Configuring and Using
Encryption).
Note: The encryption performed by the QIP is not compatible with
LTO-4 encryption. Data encrypted by the QIP cannot be
decrypted by an encryption-enabled LTO-4 drive and vice versa.
E-QIP
Important Ethernet QIPs (E-QIPs) are only supported as legacy devices. They are no longer
available for purchase.
Using SCSI drives on a Gigabit Ethernet (iSCSI) network requires an

Ethernet QIP (E-QIP). The E-QIP has two integrated dual-channel ports
(Port A and Port B), which can provide connections to two separate
networks or redundant connections to a single network. Each port
provides an any-to-any connection to the four tape drives controlled by the
E-QIP. Activity LEDs indicate SCSI bus activity (data transfer to or from
the attached drives).
Gigabit Ethernet ports Activity LEDs QIP Reset

Figure 12 The Quad Interface Processor (E-QIP).
40
User Guide 91090000
SCSI Bus Expansion Module
SCSI BUS EXPANSION MODULE

When using direct-attach SCSI drives, a bus expansion module must be
installed in the controller bay to the right of the drives in the DBA. The bus
expansion module has four Ultra-3 SCSI “LVD” Fast & Wide, 68-pin
Micro D female connectors to provide the second SCSI bus connection for
each drive. To learn more about the role the bus expansion module plays
when using direct-attach SCSI drives, see Partitions Using Direct-Attach
SCSI Drives on page 55.
Note: The bus expansion module is mounted vertically along the right
side of the DBA. The bus expansion module in Figure 13 is
shown in a horizontal position for reference only.
LVD SCSI connectors

Figure 13 The SCSI bus expansion module.
41
MEDIA HANDLING
Spectra’s TeraPack media architecture provides support for both
traditional tape media and RXT media.
TeraPack Tape Media

The library uses TeraPack magazines to import and export cartridges
through the TAP and to store cartridges inside the library. Each magazine
holds up to 10 LTO cartridges or 9 SDLT cartridges. The magazine has
guides along each side and grooves on the bottom to ensure proper
alignment when it is inserted in the TAP. TeraPack magazines can be
purchase preloaded with Spectra Certified Media. You can also purchase
empty magazines.
Figure 14 TeraPack with bar-code labeled cartridges and plastic dust cover.
Storing and handling cartridges in TeraPack magazines helps eliminate

errors resulting from mishandling individual tapes, which is the leading
cause of tape damage. When inside the library, TeraPack magazines are
stored in semi-enclosed chambers. When not in the library, a clear plastic
dust cover snaps onto the magazine to protect the cartridges. The
cartridges are continually protected by the TeraPack magazine, both inside
and outside the library.
Using TeraPack magazines offers the following advantages:
Bar code labeling. All of the cartridges in a TeraPack magazine, as well
as the magazine itself, are bar-code labeled for easy identification. The
bar-code information is stored by the library as part of its inventory
data in non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM). Even after a
power-down and restart, the library retains its inventory.
42
User Guide 91090000
Media Handling
Grouped media. The cartridges in a TeraPack magazine are treated as a

unit during import and export operations. This grouped media
handling simplifies media management tasks by eliminating the need
to import or export cartridges one by one. TeraPack magazines
eliminate at least 90 percent of operator time spent on these types of
tasks.
Mixed media support. If multiple drive types are installed in the
library, individual TeraPack magazines can be loaded with media and
imported into separate partitions to support each drive type. Media
types cannot be mixed within a single TeraPack magazine.
RXT Media Packs
An RXT media pack is the same size and shape as a TeraPack magazine.
Each RXT media pack contains multiple Serial ATA (SATA) disks sealed in
a sturdy protective enclosure, as shown in Figure 15. RXT media is set to
the RAID level specified when the pack was ordered.
Status LEDs
Write-protect switch
Alignment guides
Figure 15 An RXT media pack and its internal disk drives.
The media pack has guides along each side to ensure proper alignment
when it is inserted in the TAP.
LEDs along the front edge of the media pack indicate the operational
status of the drives.
A write-protect switch can be set to prevent data from being written to
or erased from the media pack.
The transporter moves an RXT media pack and loads it into an RXT drive
in much the same manner as a tape cartridge is loaded into a tape drive. As
with a TeraPack magazine filled with cartridges, RXT media can easily be
moved off-line and off-site.
43
Notes
44
User Guide 91090000
Chapter 2
Architecture Overview
The T200, T380, and T680 libraries are designed to provide maximum
configurability and ease of use. This chapter provides an overview of the
software and hardware architecture behind this versatility.

Partitions this page
Media Pools page 48
Auto Drive Clean page 49
Component Identifiers page 51
Connectivity page 52
PARTITIONS
Partitions divide the library logically, so that the partitioned library looks
to the enterprise environment like one or more physical libraries—one
library per configured partition. The library uses Shared Library Services
(SLS) virtualization technology to partition the library. Partitioning
simplifies storage consolidation through the creation of virtual libraries,
each with its own drives and media. SLS support is a keyed option you can
add to the library by purchasing an activation key from Spectra Logic.
When partitions are configured, each partition:
Has exclusive access to the tape drives and media storage assigned to it.
Can control the transporter to move media within the partition.
45
Chapter 2 — Architecture Overview
The library supports two types of partitions, data partitions and cleaning
partitions. The library requires, at a minimum, one data partition. Each
data partition must have at least one drive assigned to it. Up to eight data
partitions, plus one or more cleaning partitions, can be configured in a
single library. A single cleaning partition can be associated with multiple
data partitions. The cleaning partitions do not count against the eight
partition maximum.
Figure 16 shows a conceptual illustration of a library configured with two
data partitions and a shared cleaning partition.
Storage Pool chambers

(each with a loaded
TeraPack magazine)
Entry/exit pool chambers

(each with an empty
TeraPack magazine)
Entry/exit pool chambers

(each with an empty
TeraPack magazine)
Cleaning partition
shared by Partition 1
and Partition 2
Partition 2 drives
Partition 1 drives
Storage pool chambers

(each with a loaded
TeraPack magazine)
Partition 1 – Virtual library 1

Partition 2 – Virtual library 2
Figure 16 A library (T680) with two partitions and a shared cleaning partition.
46
User Guide 91090000
Partitions
Data Partitions
In some environments, using multiple data partitions is crucial to data
center efficiency and growth. For example, multiple partitions are
extremely useful in the following situations:
Multiple Backup Software Packages If groups within your company use
different backup software packages, each software package requires its
own dedicated library. Instead of maintaining multiple physical libraries—
one per backup package—the data center can use a single Spectra Logic
library with multiple partitions, in which each partition appears to the
software as a dedicated library.
Multiple Databases f your company uses multiple databases, partitioning
the library preserves the backup processes associated with each type of
database.
Shared Resources f each department in the company must keep their data
segregated, partitioning the library supplies this segregation, as well as the
subsequent integrity of the data set. Each partition can only access the
drives and cartridge locations assigned to it. Data from other partitions
cannot become intermixed with the data stored on the media in the
partition’s inventory.
Multiple Network Protocols If your company uses multiple network
protocols, such as Fibre Channel and Gigabit Ethernet, then each protocol
is assigned to its own partition within the same physical library.
Multiple Drive Technologies If your data center uses both LTO and SDLT
drive technologies, then the media associated with each drive technology
must have its own partition.
Encryption If you do not want to encrypt all of your backups but only
some of them, your can partition the library into an Encryption partition
and non-encryption partition to segregate which data to encrypt.
Cleaning Partitions
Cleaning partitions provide permanent storage for cleaning cartridges
inside the library when using the Auto Drive Clean feature (see Auto Drive
Clean on page 49). These special-purpose partitions do not have an entry/
exit pool or any drives associated with them.
Tape drives that are configured in a data partition that has an associated
cleaning partition are cleaned automatically when cleaning is required. In
addition, you can use the BlueScale user interface to initiate a manual
cleaning using a cleaning cartridge stored in the cleaning partition.
47
A single cleaning partition can be used with every data partition that has a
drive type that is compatible with the cleaning cartridges in the cleaning
partition. Multiple cleaning partitions are required only when the data
partitions use different drive technologies. For example, if one data
partition uses LTO-4 drives and another uses SDLT 600 drives, two
cleaning partitions are required, one with LTO cleaning cartridges and one
with SDLT cleaning cartridges.
Cleaning cartridges must be identified with “CLN” at the beginning of the
bar code sequence on their labels. They must be stored in specially labeled
Maintenance TeraPack magazines. The cleaning cartridges are imported
into and exported from a cleaning partition through the TAP in the same
way that data cartridges are. The library automatically prevents importing
cleaning cartridges and magazines that are not properly identified into a
cleaning partition.
Cleaning partitions are not accessible to the application software that uses
the media in the data partitions. This means that software-initiated drive
cleaning operations cannot use the cleaning cartridges in the cleaning
partition.
MEDIA POOLS
Inside the library, media is logically grouped through the use of pools. The
library has three different types of pool, each of which has a different
purpose.
Free pool Chambers that are not assigned to a partition are in the free
pool. These chambers can be assigned to a data partition or a cleaning
partition. Media in the free pool is not accessible through the BlueScale
user interface or the backup software until it is added to a partition.
Entry/Exit pool Chambers in the entry/exit pool provide an interim
storage location for media during import and export operations. Media is
not accessible to the backup software for writing or reading data while it is
in the entry/exit pool.
Important Although a entry/exit pool for importing and exporting the media in a partition is
not required, configuring one is highly recommended. The code load tapes used
for updating drive firmware can only be imported into a partition’s entry/exit pool.
The media in the entry/exit pool either:

Was ejected from the storage pool by the backup software and is
waiting to be exported from the library through the TAP.
—OR—
Was imported into the library through the TAP and is waiting to be
moved into the storage pool by the backup software.
48
User Guide 91090000
Auto Drive Clean
When media is exported by the backup software it is not moved to a

physical entry/exit port for immediate removal. Instead, it is moved to the
internal entry/exit pool, where it is temporarily stored until it is removed
from the library. When it is time to remove media from a library, the
operator simply uses the Import/Export screen on the library’s user
interface to move the TeraPack magazine to the TAP, where it can be
removed. Together, the entry/exit pool and the TAP function as a
configurable entry/exit port. Using an entry/exit pool greatly speeds tape
cartridge exports because the operator does not have to handle individual
cartridges.
Similarly, the entry/exit pool speeds up import operations. Instead of
loading individual tapes into slots in an entry/exit port, the operator inserts
full media packs through the TAP. The media packs are moved to the
entry/exit pool, from which they are later imported into the storage pool
using the backup software. Using TeraPack magazines makes it possible to
load multiple cartridges into the library using a single operation.
Storage pool Chambers in the storage pool contain the media for the data
partition. This media is available to the backup software for writing or
reading data.
When you configure a partition, you assign a certain number of chambers
to the partition. If the partition is a data partition, you specify how many
chambers are assigned to the storage pool and how many chambers are
assigned to the entry/exit pools.
AUTO DRIVE CLEAN

Auto Drive Clean is an option that provides library-based tape drive
cleaning with minimal user intervention. Automated drive cleaning results
in fewer failed tape read/write operations and is the preferred method for
cleaning drives. When you enable MLM and use MLM-enabled cleaning
cartridges, the library tracks the number of uses for each cartridge and
notifies you when a cartridge is nearing the end of its useful life. This helps
prevent failed cleanings resulting from using an expended cleaning
cartridge. See Chapter 7 – Media Lifecycle Management for detailed
information about the library’s Media Lifecycle Management (MLM)
feature.
49
Using Auto Drive Clean

Tape drives that are configured in a data partition that has an associated
cleaning partition are cleaned automatically when cleaning is required. In
addition, you can use the BlueScale user interface to initiate a manual
cleaning. The option to perform a manual cleaning operation using a
cleaning cartridge in a cleaning partition is only available with drives that
are in data partitions associated with a cleaning partition.
Note: If a cleaning partition is not configured, you must either use
your backup software to perform the cleaning or import a
cleaning cartridge into the data partition (see Manually Cleaning
a Tape Drive on page 411).
Requirements The Auto Drive Clean feature requires a cleaning partition
to be associated with the data partition (see Configuring a Cleaning
Partition on page 236). The cleaning partition is assigned to the data
partition when the data partition is configured (see Configure the Drives
and Chambers for the Partition on page 215).
How Auto Drive Clean Works When a drive is unloaded in response to a
host request and the data cartridge is moved to its storage location, the
library queries the drive to determine if it needs cleaning. If cleaning is
required, the library delays notifying the host that the SCSI move
command for the unloaded data cartridge is complete until an automatic
drive cleaning is performed.
The library then determines which cleaning cartridge to use, retrieves the
cleaning cartridge from the cleaning partition, inserts it in the drive, and
then returns it to the cleaning partition after the cleaning is complete. The
library then notifies the host that the move is complete.
Expired Cleaning Cartridges When an expired cleaning cartridge is loaded
into a drive it is immediately ejected without completing the cleaning. The
library then flags the cleaning cartridge as expired. The library generates
system messages to notify you of expired cleaning cartridges, completed
automatic drive cleanings, and failed automatic drive cleanings.
If the cleaning partition contains other, good cleaning cartridges, a cleaning
that failed because the cleaning cartridge was expired will be re-attempted
the next time the host unloads a data cartridge from the drive. Drives in a
partition with Auto Drive Clean enabled are cleaned no more than once in
any 12 hour period. If you want to clean the drive immediately, you can
initiate a manual cleaning.
MLM Tracking of Cleaning Cartridges

When you use MLM-enabled cleaning cartridges in a cleaning partition,
the library stores usage information, which includes the number of cleans
remaining and the cartridge health (good, near expiration or expired), in
the MLM database. This information is retained in the MLM database even
when a cleaning cartridge is exported from the library.
50
User Guide 91090000
Component Identifiers
The library does not maintain any information about non-MLM cleaning
cartridges in the MLM database. However the library does mark an expired
cleaning tape and does not attempt to use it again as long as it remains in the
library. If an expired cartridge is exported and then reimported into the
library, it is identified as expired the next time it is loaded into a tape drive.
COMPONENT IDENTIFIERS
The library’s BlueScale interface identifies a drive or QIP based on its
location relative to the drive bay assembly (DBA) where it is installed.
Figure 17 shows the relationship between the DBAs and the drives and
QIPs installed in them.
Drive 3 Drive 4 QIP

DBA 3 3
Drive 1 Drive 2
Drive 3 Drive 4 QIP

DBA 2 2
Drive 1 Drive 2
Drive 3 Drive 4 QIP

DBA1
1
Drive 1 Drive 2
Figure 17 The relationship between QIPs and drive locations and their identifiers (T380 shown).
51
QIP Identifiers
Quad Interface Processors (QIPs) are identified in the library’s BlueScale
interface as DBAx/Y-QIPx, where:
DBAx is the number of the drive bay assembly (DBA) containing the
QIP (see Figure 17).
Y is the QIP type (F for Fibre Channel or E for Gigabit Ethernet).
QIPx is the number of the controller bay in the DBA. Each DBA contains
one controller bay, so x is always 1.
Drive Identifiers
The library’s BlueScale interface uses the following identifiers for drives
(see Figure 17). Drive identifiers appear as DBAx/Y-DRVx, where Y is a
drive type and x is a number.
DBAx is the number of the drive bay assembly (DBA) containing the
drive.
Y is the drive type (either LTO, SDLT, or RXT)
DRVx is the number of the drive bay in the DBA, as viewed from the
back of the library.
CONNECTIVITY
The transporter and drives in the library are typically connected to the
hosts through a Fibre Channel arbitrated loop or fabric or, less often, over a
SCSI bus. These connections carry two types of information:
The data being transferred to and from a drive by the host
The commands from the backup software that control the transporter
motion and the read/write operation of the drives
Transporter Connectivity
The transporter requires either a direct-attach drive or a QIP to provide the
control path for SCSI motion commands issued by the host to control the
robotics.
When no QIP is present, a direct-attach Fibre Channel or SCSI drive
provides the robotics control path, as described in Control Path
Through a Direct-Attach Drive.
When a QIP is present, it can be used to provide the robotics control
path, as described in Control Path Through a QIP on page 54.
52
User Guide 91090000
Connectivity
Control Path Through a Direct-Attach Drive

In a direct-attach drive configuration, one drive in a data partition is
designated as the exporting or master drive. The SCSI commands to control
the motion of the transporter within the partition are sent from the host to
the master drive’s logical unit number 1 (LUN 1). The master tape drive
passes the robotic control commands to the transporter. SCSI commands to
control the operation of the master drive are sent from the host to LUN 0 of
the drive.
Figure 18 is a simple representation of how the drives and robotics in a
library with a single direct-attach Fibre Channel partition are connected to
a Fibre Channel SAN through a switch or hub.
Figure 18 An example of a direct-attach Fibre Channel partition

with the robotic control path provided by Drive1 in DBA1.
53
Control Path Through a QIP
In a QIP-based configuration, one QIP in a partition provides the

connectivity for the transporter. This QIP is referred to as the exporting
QIP. Depending on the configuration, one or both of the external ports on
the exporting QIP provide the network connectivity for the transporter.
See Figure 21 on page 58 for an example of a partition that uses an F-QIP to
provide the robotics control path.
Depending on the configuration, the exporting QIP can support multiple
partitions, with each partition appearing as a unique physical library to the
hosts connected to the library. For example, if the library contains two
partitions, each with two drives connected to the exporting QIP, the
exporting QIP provides the robotic control path for both partitions.
As part of providing network connectivity, QIPs perform the following
additional functions within the library.
Each F-QIP presents a unique, location-based identifier to the network.
This identifier is based on the physical location of the F-QIP in the
library and a unique identifier for the library. Because the identifier is
location-based, it remains constant even if the physical F-QIP is
replaced. When a new F-QIP is installed, it assumes the existing
location-based identifier, making QIP replacement completely
transparent to the backup software.
Each F-QIP is identified by a World Wide Name (WWN). Each port on
the F-QIP has a World Wide Port Name (WWPN), which is derived
from the WWN. The WWPN is used by the host software to address the
drives and robotics controlled by the QIP.
Optionally, F-QIPs can use BlueScale encryption to encrypt data before
it is written to tape, thereby extending encryption to drive technologies
that do not have native encryption capabilities. BlueScale encryption is
not compatible with the encryption performed by encryption-enabled
LTO-4 tape drives. You must use one type of encryption or the other.
Each port on an E-QIP is identified by an iSCSI target name. The iSCSI
target name is used by the host software to address the drives and
robotics controlled by the QIP.
Note: The E-QIP does not have BlueScale encryption capability. You
must rely on the tape drive’s encryption capabilities, if present.
54
User Guide 91090000
Connectivity
Drive Connectivity
The drives in the library can have either a Fibre Channel interface or a SCSI
interface.
Fibre Channel drives connect directly to the host using a Fibre Channel
arbitrated loop or fabric, as described in Partitions Using Direct-Attach
Fibre Channel Drives.
SCSI drives can be connected directly to a SCSI HBA in the host
through a bus expansion module, as described in Partitions Using
Direct-Attach SCSI Drives. Each DBA provides the internal SCSI bus
that connects the drives to the bus expansion module. The terminator
for each SCSI bus is installed on the drive’s external LVD SCSI
connector.
—OR—
They can be connected to a Fibre Channel arbitrated loop or fabric
using an F-QIP, as described in Partitions Using QIP-Attached SCSI
Drives on page 57.
Keep in mind that all of the Fibre Channel drives on an arbitrated loop or
SCSI bus must share the data transfer capacity (bandwidth) of the
interface. Having multiple devices on the same loop or bus can negatively
impact the performance of all the devices.
Partitions Using Direct-Attach Fibre Channel Drives

When a partition includes Fibre Channel drives, the drives are connected
directly to the Fibre Channel arbitrated loop or fabric. Figure 18 on page 53
is a simple representation of how direct-attach Fibre Channel drives
connect to the network and provide the robotics control path.
Partitions Using Direct-Attach SCSI Drives

When using direct-attach SCSI drives in the library, a bus expansion
module is required to create the wide LVD SCSI bus within the DBA.
Although the bus expansion module resembles a QIP, it does not provide
any functionality beyond supplying a second SCSI connection to each SCSI
drive in the SCSI DBA (the SCSI drives only have one external SCSI
connector). The bus expansion module does not handle robotic control
commands from the host nor does it provide any encryption capability. If
you use direct-attach SCSI tape drives, you must rely on the tape drive’s
encryption capabilities, if present.
55
Each SCSI bus expansion module has four external SCSI connectors which
provide SCSI bus connections to the four SCSI drives in the DBA, as
illustrated in Figure 19. Each drive in a DBA is on a separate SCSI bus and
can only be accessed by the host that is connected to it through the bus
expansion module. If a partition contains multiple drives, each drive
connection requires a separate SCSI HBA in the host.
Important Spectra Logic does not support daisy-chaining multiple SCSI drives on a single
SCSI bus, nor does it support daisy-chaining other devices on the same SCSI bus
as a drive.
Important Although a maximum of 15 devices can be connected to a single wide LVD SCSI
bus, attaching more than two devices (including the SCSI HBA) to a single SCSI bus
can potentially have a negative impact on the performance of all devices on the
bus.
Note: One of the drives in a partition also provide the robotic control
path.
Drive Bay Assembly (DBA)

Drive 3 Drive 4
Bus expansion
module
Drive 1 Drive 2
Internal SCSI bus

External Wide SCSI connector
Figure 19 The internal SCSI bus architecture in the bus expansion
module.
Because the bus expansion module does not provide any control function,
it is not assigned an identifier by the BlueScale interface. As a result, it is
not listed as an available controller when configuring a partition with
direct-attach SCSI drives (see Choose the Robotic Control Path on
page 212).
56
User Guide 91090000
Connectivity
Partitions Using QIP-Attached SCSI Drives
When a partition includes SCSI drives, a QIP can be used to provide the
connectivity to the host. Each DBA provides the internal SCSI bus that
connects the drives to the QIP. The terminator for each SCSI bus is installed
on the drive’s external LVD SCSI connector.
The F-QIP (or E-QIP) acts as a bridge to connect SCSI drives in the DBA to
a Fibre Channel fabric or arbitrated loop (or Gigabit Ethernet network).
Each QIP has two external ports and provides connectivity for up to four
SCSI drives. If a partition contains more than four drives, additional QIPs
are required to provide the connectivity for those drives.
Note: One QIP in the partition also provides the robotic control path.
As illustrated in Figure 20, a QIP provides any-to-any connectivity to the
SCSI drives it controls. Every drive (target) is potentially visible to servers
through both ports on the QIP. This permits flexibility in configuring
which servers can access which drives (target visibility).
Drive Bay Assembly (DBA)
Drive 3 Drive 4
QIP
Drive 1 Drive 2
Internal cabling
Fiber port (Fibre Channel or Gigabit Ethernet)
Figure 20 The QIP architecture.
For example, a QIP can be configured so that Drives 1 and 2 are only
accessible through Port A and Drives 3 and 4 are only accessible through
Port B. As a result, Drive 1 and Drive 2 can only be accessed by the host
connected to Port A; Drive 3 and Drive 4 can only be accessed by a host
connected to Port B.
57
To consolidate port usage on a switch, all four drives can be configured for
access through a single port. In a more complex configuration, the QIP can
be configured so that all drives are visible through both ports. Such a
configuration is typically used in a shared storage environment or an
environment with failover capabilities.
Important If drives are visible to multiple servers, your backup software must support this
visibility. Otherwise server contention for a single drive can create network and
system problems.
When a partition includes SCSI drives connected through a QIP, the QIP
provides the connectivity to the drives. Figure 21 is a simple representation
of how the drives and robotics in a library with a single QIP-based
partition are connected to a Fibre Channel arbitrated look or fabric through
a switch or hub.
Figure 21 An example of a QIP-based partition with

QIP-attached drives connected to a SAN.
In this example, the 12 SCSI drives in the partition (four drives per DBA)
are connected to the Fibre Channel arbitrated look or fabric through Port B
of the F-QIP in the DBA. Port A of F-QIP 3 provides the path over which
the SCSI commands to control the motion of the robotics within the
partition are sent from the host. These commands are relayed to the LCM,
which in turn controls the motion of the robotics.
This configuration minimizes the number of switch ports required to
access all of the drives in the partition and takes advantage of the partition
and connectivity features provided by a QIP. The configuration is
especially useful for providing Fibre Channel or Gigabit Ethernet
connectivity for drives that do not support these protocols directly.
58
User Guide 91090000
Connectivity
Failover Using Direct-Attached LTO-4 Fibre Channel Drives

The LTO-4 Fibre Channel drives used with the library are equipped with
two Fibre Channel ports. Although the two ports on an LTO-4 Fibre
Channel drive cannot be used simultaneously, they can be used to provide
failover capability in the event that communication to the port currently in
use is interrupted. This failover can be can be accomplished several ways,
including:
Manually disconnect the fiber optic cable from the failed port and
connect it to the other port. You may need to reconfigure your host
software to recognize the alternate port.
Connect each port on the drive to a separate Fibre Channel HBA in the
host. You can also use a dual-port Fibre Channel HBA. Configure one
HBA (or HBA port) as the primary connection and the other HBA (or
HBA port) as the failover connection. Install failover software on the
host computer to control the transfer of I/O from one HBA (or HBA
port) to the other in case of a failure. You may also need to configure
your backup software to correctly recognize both ports. Refer to your
failover software, HBA, and backup software documentation for
instructions.
Connect each port on the drive to a separate Fibre Channel switch or
hub. Configure one switch (or hub) as the primary connection and the
other switch (or hub) as the failover connection. Install failover
software on the host computer to control the transfer of I/O from one
connection to the other in case of a failure. You may also need to
configure your backup software to correctly recognize both
connections. Refer to your failover software, switch or hub, and backup
software documentation for instructions.
59
Notes
60
User Guide 91090000
Chapter 3
Installation Overview
This chapter provides an overview of the hardware installation and initial
configuration performed by the Spectra-Logic-certified field engineer who
installed your library. A checklist at the end of the chapter provides space
for recording your library configuration settings for future reference.

Installation Steps this page
Changing the Library Hardware page 64
Configuration
Updating or Servicing the Library page 64
System Configuration Settings Checklist page 65
Important The information in this chapter is for reference only. It provides a high-level
summary of the installation steps but is not intended for use as an installation
guide.
INSTALLATION STEPS
During installation, the engineer performs the procedures described in the
following sections.
Unpack and Set Up

1. Confirm that all of the pre-installation requirements, as specified in the
T-Series Mid-Range Libraries: T200, T380, and T680 Site Preparation Guide,
have been met. This includes ensuring the installation site is located
near easily accessible AC power outlets and away from potential
sources of static discharge (for example, carpeted flooring).
2. Move all of the components to the installation location.
3. Uncrate the library and all additional components.
4. Verify that there was no shipping damage to any of the components
5. Remove all packing materials from the interior of the library.
61
Chapter 3 — Installation Overview
6. Install the BlueScale Vision camera if it was ordered with the library.
Note: The BlueScale Vision camera is pre-installed in the T680 library.
7. Install the library in a standard four-post, 19-inch rack at the requested
location, ensuring that it is located near an easily accessible AC power
outlet and away from potential sources of static discharge (for example,
carpeted flooring).
Note: The T680 library is shipped already installed in its own rack.
For stability, the library is installed at the bottom of the rack.
Tipping Hazard. The library must be installed in a standard 19-inch (48 cm) rack to
Warning prevent tipping. The rack must be located on a level, hard-surfaced floor such as
cement or tile.
German: Kipp-Gefahr. Die Library muss installiert sein, in einem Standard-Rack
48 cm Ablagerung zu verhindern. Das Rack muss sich auf eine ebene, harte
Oberfläche Stock wie Zement oder Fliese.
Do not place the rack on a carpeted floor or anywhere else that poses risk for static
Caution discharge that could damage your library and its drives.
If the library is loaded with media packs (RXT media packs or media in TeraPacks),
Spectra recommends that the library not be moved. If you must move the library,
contact SpectraGuard Technical Support for recommendations before proceeding.
8. Install the QIPs, drives, and power supply modules that were ordered
with the library. Ensure that the LCM and all of the RCMs are installed.
9. Connect cables and attach the power cords to the library. Install cord
locks and attach a permanent grounding wire to the library.
Interface cables—See Rear Panel Components on page 30 for the
locations of the interface cable connections. In addition to the
network connections to the QIPs and drives, each BlueScale vision
camera requires a separate Ethernet connection.
AC power inputs—The library comes with dual AC power inputs.
If the library uses 2N redundant power supply modules, each of
these inputs is connected to a separate 15 Amp circuit, which allows
for failover in the event of a power failure in one of the circuits.
Cord lock and grounding wire—Install the provided cord locks to
keep the power cords from becoming disconnected from the AC
input plugs. Install the grounding wire to provide additional chassis
grounding. See Installing Cord Locks and Chassis Grounding on
page 403 for installation instructions.
10. Power on the library and allow it to complete its initialization process.
See Turning the Library On and Off on page 84 for power-on
instructions.
62
User Guide 91090000
Installation Steps
Update Firmware and Configure

1. Configure user profiles (user name, password, and user group), the
library IP address, the BlueScale Vision camera IP addresses, email
notification profiles, and AutoSupport.
See Chapter 11 – Configuring the Library if you need to update or
change any of these settings.
2. Verify that you can access the library user interface using the BlueScale
web interface through a standard web browser.
See BlueScale Web Interface on page 70 for information about accessing
the library from a remote location.
3. Update the library and drive firmware to the most current versions, if
necessary.
If you need to update the library or drive firmware after your library is
installed, see Updating Library Firmware on page 388.
4. Install the license keys for all of the options you purchased. At a
minimum, the licensed options include the initial BlueScale Software
Support key and the capacity key.
If you purchase additional options, see Enable the Option on page 271
to learn how to enter license keys and enable the options for use.
5. Configure one or more library partitions to meet your requirements.
The library must have a minimum of one partition configured.
See Chapter 9 – Using Partitions if you want to add new partitions or
modify existing partitions.
6. Import all prepared TeraPack magazines and RXT media packs (if
used).
Chapter 5 – Operating the Library provides detailed information about
importing and exporting all types of media.
7. Use the library diagnostics to test the transporter by moving media to
and from all locations in the library, including the drives.
8. Connect the library to the hosts in your operating environment. If using
partitions, ensure that the transporter and appropriate drives are
accessible to each host.
See Chapter 9 – Using Partitions for information about setting visibility.
9. Use backup software or other application software to perform a read/
write test to each drive. See your software documentation for
information about reading and writing data.
Important Some operating environments require you to install device drivers before the
application software can correctly communicate with the drives.
63
CHANGING THE LIBRARY HARDWARE CONFIGURATION

Installing Additional Drives
Installing an additional drive into a partially filled DBA causes the library
to reassign element addresses. To avoid errors, reconfigure your backup
software after adding a new drive (refer to your software documentation
for instructions).
Moving the Library

The library hardware is configured to ensure proper thermal control, air
flow, and dust filtering. After the library is installed, do not move the
library. Do not remove the doors from the back of the T680 library or any
library components (except TeraPack magazines or RXT media packs).
In the event a change is required, make sure that you have instructions for
performing the procedure and you either:
Have been instructed to do so by SpectraGuard Support, or
Have a support contract such as Assisted Self-Maintenance (ASM).
UPDATING OR SERVICING THE LIBRARY

Contact SpectraGuard Support before making any changes to your library
hardware or performing any service operations.
You must have a current support agreement and corresponding BlueScale
Software Support key entered in the library before you can update the
library’s firmware, which includes the BlueScale software. If you do not
have a current support agreement and the relevant documentation, contact
SpectraGuard Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).
Important Updating the library firmware and BlueScale software requires a current service
contract with SpectraGuard Support. The BlueScale Software Support key
associated with your service contract must be stored in the library by entering it
into the System Configuration screen. See Enabling Purchased Options and
Upgrades on page 270 for additional information.
If you have questions about your service agreement, contact SpectraGuard
Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).
64
User Guide 91090000
System Configuration Settings Checklist
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SETTINGS CHECKLIST

If desired, use the following form to record the configuration settings for
your library for future reference.
Component Description Value

Network The network on which the library operates Library IP address
Settings uses either DHCP addressing or static IP _______ . _______ . _______ . _______
addressing to determine the IP address of
the library. Subnet mask
If the network uses static IP addressing, _______ . _______ . _______ . _______
record the library IP address, subnet mask,
and network gateway (see Configuring Network gateway
Network Settings on page 278). _______ . _______ . _______ . _______
IPv6 link address

______::______:______.______:______
Web server port number ____________

Library The name used to identify the library, Library name
Name regardless of library size or subsequent
expansion (see Modifying the Library
Configuration Settings on page 273).
Mail The library can be configured to Email address 1
Recipients automatically send email messages to notify __________________________________
specified users about specific library
conditions (see Configuring Mail Users on Notification Types
page 280). Fatal
Identify the mail users to receive email Error
notifications and AutoSupport Warning
information. Informational
Specify the types of notification(s) the
library should send automatically. SMPT Server IP Address
Specify the library name so that the _______ . _______ . _______ . _______
recipient of the message knows which
library originated the message.
Email address 2
Specify the IP address of the SMTP server
__________________________________
used to send the email.
Notification Types
Fatal
Error
Warning
Informational
SMPT Server IP Address

_______ . _______ . _______ . _______
65

AutoSupport The library can be configured to Customer/Contract Number
Profiles automatically send AutoSupport __________________________________
information (see Configure AutoSupport
Profiles on page 251). Profile 1
Contact Name (First and Last)
__________________________________
Primary Phone Number

__________________________________
Email address 1
__________________________________
AutoSupport Profile
Mail To
autosupport@spectralogic.com
__________________________________
__________________________________
__________________________________
Profile 2
Contact Name (First and Last)
__________________________________
Primary Phone Number

__________________________________
Email address 1
__________________________________
AutoSupport Profile
Mail To
autosupport@spectralogic.com
__________________________________
__________________________________
__________________________________
Camera IP If a BlueScale Vision camera is installed, it
Addresses uses a separate, static IP address for _______ . _______ . _______ . _______
accessing the camera through the web-based
Network Camera viewer (see Setting the
Camera IP Address on page 290).
66
User Guide 91090000
System Configuration Settings Checklist

SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol System Contact
(SNMP) is a widely used protocol for __________________________________
monitoring the health and welfare of your System Location
library by using integrated alerts (see __________________________________
Configuring SNMP (Optional) on page 283). Communities
__________________________________
__________________________________
Trap Destinations
Community 1
__________________________________
Description
__________________________________
IP Address
_______ . _______ . _______ . _______
Community 2
__________________________________
Description
__________________________________
IP Address:
_______ . _______ . _______ . _______
67
Notes
68
User Guide 91090000
Chapter 4
Introducing the BlueScale User
Interface
This chapter describes the library’s BlueScale user interface and how it is
used.

Overview of the BlueScale User Interface page 70
Access Options page 70
User Security page 71
User Interface Features page 72
Using the BlueScale User Interface page 70
Logging Into the User Interface page 79
Logging Off or Switching Users page 81
Entering Information page 81
69
Chapter 4 — Introducing the BlueScale User Interface
OVERVIEW OF THE BLUESCALE USER INTERFACE

The BlueScale user interface lets you set configuration options, view
library and drive information and metrics, manage media, monitor library
operations, and perform maintenance operations.
Access Options
The BlueScale user interface is accessed using either the touch screen on
the library operator panel or through the BlueScale web interface.
Touch Screen Interface

The touch screen on the library’s operator panel lets you select options and
enter information by simply touching the appropriate location on the
screen. The touch screen interface includes a soft keyboard that you can
use to enter alphanumeric characters into text fields. This soft keyboard
can be accessed from the keyboard icon that displays whenever text input
is required.
In addition to using the touch screen, you can access the local user interface
using a monitor, keyboard, and mouse connected directly to the LCM (see
Figure 8 on page 35).
BlueScale Web Interface

The BlueScale web interface lets you access the user interface through the
Remote Library Controller (RLC) using a standard web browser. Simply
enter the library’s IP address into the browser running on a computer
connected to the library’s LCM over an Ethernet network.
The BlueScale web interface provides access to the same features and
functions that are available through the touch screen, excluding functions
that involve physical interaction with the library (for example, using the
TAP to import or export a TeraPack magazine).
Important When accessing the library remotely through a web browser, do not use the Enter
key on your keyboard when making selections in the BlueScale user interface.
Various web browsers handle the Enter key differently, causing inconsistent
behavior in the BlueScale interface.
Always use your mouse to make selections and click the buttons in BlueScale
screens instead of using your keyboard.
70
User Guide 91090000
Overview of the BlueScale User Interface
When using the web interface, keep the following requirements in mind:
Number of Sessions The BlueScale web interface does not support using
more than two simultaneous sessions. When you attemptto establish more
than two simultaneous web interface sessions, the existing session with the
longest idle time is terminated.
Supported Browsers Remote access to the library through the web
interface is only supported using the following web browsers:
Microsoft ®Internet Explorer® versions 6.0 and above
Mozilla® Firefox® versions 1.0.7 and above
Using an unsupported browser may result in the BlueScale web interface
not displaying or operating as expected.
User Security
Library users are assigned to one of three groups, each with its own set of
pre-defined library privileges (also known as permissions). These
privileges determine the type of operations a user can perform on the
library. These privileges are the primary means for configuring library
security. See Configuring Library Users on page 266 for information about
adding users.
The following table describes the three user groups and the privileges of
each.
User Group Type Description Default User Name

Superuser Controls all aspects of library use and configuration. Users su
assigned to the Superuser group can control all aspects of
the library’s configuration and operation, including
defining other library users and their groups.
Note: The library requires a minimum of one superuser.
You cannot delete the last member of the Superuser group.
Administrator Configures and uses the library. With the exception of administrator
creating or modifying library users, users in the
Administrator group have the same privileges as users in
the Superuser group.
Operator Performs day-to-day operations. Users assigned to the operator
Operator group can move, import, and export media, but
cannot access the more sensitive library operations such as
configuration, diagnostics, and security.
71
User Interface Features

The following sections describe the common features that appear in all
screens in the user interface.
Current
toolbar
Additional
tool bars
Status bar
Figure 22 The BlueScale user interface (T680 shown).
Toolbars
The toolbar panel appears along the left edge of each screen (see Figure 22)
and lets you navigate through the available toolbars to select options.
Clicking on a toolbar expands it to display the available options. The
screen for the previously selected option remains displayed until you select
another option, either from the same toolbar or another one.
72
User Guide 91090000
The following table provides an overview of the options available under

each toolbar. Figure 23 on page 75 shows the sequence of the screens under
each option.
Toolbar Available Options

General The General toolbar (shown in Figure 22 on page 72) accesses the most
frequently used library screens and controls:
General Status—Displays the current status for all of the major library
components for the selected library partition. Moving the cursor over the
name of the component highlights the component in the system graphic.
Click on Drives to display the Drives screen for more detailed information
about the status of the drives (see Viewing Drive Status Information on
page 98).
Click on Media to display the Inventory screen to view the library’s
physical inventory information (see Viewing the Partition Inventory on
page 120).
Inventory—Displays controls for viewing the library’s media inventory and
moving media from one location in the library to another. See Understanding
the Media Inventory on page 120 to learn about using the options available
from this screen.
Import/Export—Displays controls for importing and exporting media. See
Importing Media and Cleaning Cartridges on page 127 to learn about using
the options available from this screen. This option is not available when using
the BlueScale web interface.
Metrics—Displays metrics for tape drive performance, power consumption,
and storage density for the media types in the library. See Using Performance
Metrics on page 88 for information about the metrics available for the library.
Media Lifecycle Management—Displays controls for generating media
lifecycle reports. See Using Media Lifecycle Management on page 175 to
learn about using the options available from this screen.
73

Configuration The Configuration toolbar accesses controls for configuring all aspects of the
library’s operation:
Partitions—Displays information about the currently selected partition and
lets you define new partitions or modify existing partitions. See Chapter 9 –
Using Partitions to learn about configuring and using both data and cleaning
partitions in your library.
Drives—Displays information about the drives installed in the library. If the
Automatic Drive Cleaning feature is enabled and a cleaning partition is
associated with a drive’s partition, you can also use the Drives screen to
launch a manual cleaning operation. A status icon next to each drive
provides at-a-glance information about the general health of the drive. See
Chapter 8 – Drive Lifecycle Management to learn about using the options
available from this screen.
Controllers—Displays information about the QIPs installed in the library.
System—Provides controls for enabling purchased library options and
configuring the library’s system-wide operating parameters. See Chapter 11 –
Configuring the Library for information about using the controls available
from this option.
Media Lifecycle Management—Displays controls for enabling MLM and
selecting the media lifecycle management events for which you want alerts.
See Chapter 7 – Media Lifecycle Management to learn about using the
options available from this screen.
Maintenance The Maintenance toolbar accesses maintenance and troubleshooting options for
the library and drives.
Package Update—Displays the version of the currently running firmware and
provides controls for updating and managing firmware packages, as well as
for configuring and managing servers used for loading firmware package
updates for multiple libraries. See Updating Library Firmware on page 388
for detailed information.
Tools—Accesses utilities for viewing firmware versions, calibrating the touch
screen, and generating operational traces of various library components for
use during troubleshooting procedures. See Chapter 13 – Library
Troubleshooting for more information.
Diagnostics—Accesses diagnostic tests to be used for testing the library and
during troubleshooting procedures. See Chapter 13 – Library
Troubleshooting for more information.
AutoSupport—Provides controls for creating and maintaining AutoSupport
profiles and for opening and updating support tickets. See Chapter 10 –
AutoSupport for detailed information about configuring and using
AutoSupport.
Media Lifecycle Management—Displays controls for manually starting and
stopping the MLM media discovery process. See Using MLM PreScan and
PostScan on page 181 to learn about using the options available from this
screen.
74
User Guide 91090000

Security The Security toolbar accesses options for creating and managing users. If you
purchased the BlueScale Encryption option for your library, the Security toolbar
also provides access to the BlueScale Encryption options.
Switch User—Displays the Login screen to allow a different user to log into
the library.
Edit Users—Provides tools for adding, deleting, and managing users. See
Configuring Library Users on page 266 for detailed information.
Encryption—Accesses the BlueScale Encryption options, including the
library’s built-in encryption key management. BlueScale Encryption Basic
Edition capability is included with the library. BlueScale Encryption
Professional Edition provides additional encryption capabilities. Refer to
Chapter 12 – Configuring and Using Encryption for information about
configuring and using encryption with the library.
General General (Cont.) Configuration Configuration (Cont.) Configuration (Cont.)
General Status O, A, S Metrics O, A, S Partitions A, S Drives (DLM) A, S Media Lifecycle

General Status Metrics Shared Library Services Drives Management A, S
Partition Status Metric New Add 1 Media Lifecycle Management

– Drives > Drives screen – Power Consumption Summary Remove 1 Settings
1
– Media > Inventory screen (EnergyAudit) Edit Replace
– Drive Write Performance Enable MLM
Robotics Status Delete Clean
– Drive Read Performance Enable Alerts for Non-Certified
Power Status Global Spare Detail
– Storage Density Media
Fans Status – Global Spare Usage — Drive Lifecycle Management Report
Display parameters Enable Alerts for Load Count
TAP Status (two for T680) Name and Media Type Test
Discrepancies
Power Usage Name Reset
Media Lifecycle Minimum Cleaning Passes
Density <Media Type> (data partition) Before Warning
Management O, A, S Clean (LTO only) Controllers A, S
Maximum Tape Loads Before
Advanced Controllers Warning
Inventory Media Lifecycle Management
O, A, S – Emulation Add 1 Enable Media Auto Discovery
Report
Inventory Partition Robotic Control Path Remove 1 Convert to Broadcast Hours
2
Partition
Report Spare Drives (Global Spares) Replace 1 PostScan Blackout Periods
Source (for media move) Release 1
– Media Health Ethernet Protocol (E-QIP only)
Destination (for media move)
– Remaining Capacity Chambers and Drives
Move Queue (defined moves) – Load Count System A, S
– Delete (selected move) – Write Errors Encryption (If logged in)
– Delete All (moves) System Setup
– Cleans Remaining MLM Media Verification
View Source Slot Enable PreScan Option Enablement
– Born on Date
Find by Barcode Scan After Time (Days) 2 Hardware ID 3
– Exported Media
Start Moves (defined moves) Scan After Write
2 Key
– Last Write Time
Scan After Read
2 – Save
– Last Read Time
Import/Export 1 O, A, S
Save Report
Currently Installed Keys
Fibre Channel Loop IDs
Import/Export TeraPack Cases Find by Barcode Other Settings
(Direct-Attach FC drives)
Data Partition Library Name
Storage pool (superuser only) SCSI IDs (Direct-Attach SCSI Web Server Port
– Import drives) Refresh Rate
– Export/Exchange Partition Users Auto Logout Timeout
– Import Robotic Path Visibility Online Access to Spectra
Entry/Exit Pool Logic
Drive Visibility (QIP-Attach Drive Performance Monitoring
– Import
drives only) Power Consumption
– Export/Exchange (Full Chambers)
– Export/Exchange (Pop. Chambers) QIP Configuration Settings Monitoring
Cleaning Partition (depend on QIP type and use) Soft Power Control
– Import Save Library Configuration Enable SNMP Agent
– Export/Exchange SNMP Settings
Save Partition BlueScale Vision IP Address
– Export/Exchange Expired
Rotation Manager Network Settings
Recycle Encrypted Media Go to Configuration (Cont.) Mail Users
Advanced Auto Configuration Save
– Advanced Import/Export Routine Maintenance
Date and Time
Go to General (Cont.)
Go to Configuration (Cont.)
Maintenance Maintenance (Cont.) Security Status Bar

Refresh
Package Update A, S AutoSupport A, S Switch User O, A, S
HHM Notification (when maintenance
Package Update Send Log Set threshold is reached)
Begin Package Update Select Profile to Send Edit Users A, S Send AutoSupport Ticket > Send Log Set
Manage Packages Log Set Library Users System Status
Manage Package Select Ticket Type Users System Messages
Servers Profile Summary – Delete – Delete Selected
Confirm and Submit – Edit – Delete All
Tools A, S Ticket Add/Update User
Manage Profiles Remote Support
Utilities – User
Upload Backup Configuration New Profile – Password BlueScale Vision Camera (when
Basic Utilities Remove – User Type enabled)
– Show Advanced Edit Profile Last Refresh (time and date)
– Basic Utilities List Configure Alarms Encryption S BlueScale Software Version
Advanced Utilities 4 Log Forwarding Encryption User Login Library IP Address (local access)
– Advanced Utilities List – OR–
Encryption Configuration
– Save MLM Database Media Lifecycle Library Name (remote access)
Configure
– Restore MLM Database
Management A, S – Single User Mode
– HHM: View Data
– Multi-User Mode (BlueScale
– Show Basic Media Lifecycle Management Encryption Pro only) Notes:
Traces Tools Check Key Files
System Traces Discover Media 1) Available only on the touch screen.
Import Key
– Select Partition 2) Available only with direct-attach Fibre Channel drives.
2 Add Key
Diagnostics A, S Stop Discovery (only visible – Moniker 3) The Hardware ID is needed to purchase new options.
when running) Export Key 4) Do not use any Advanced Utilities except those listed here unless instructed
Motion Diagnostics
Pause PostScan (only visible 2 Delete Key to do so by SpectraGuard Support.
Motion Diagnostics List
when running)
Previous Results 2
Manual PostScan
– Select Tapes Library user types: Superuser, Administrator, and Operator
Go to Maintenance (Cont.) – Submit Feature Availability: This feature is available to this user type:
Delete MLM Records S) Superuser – Controls all aspects of library use, configuration, and security.
– Select Records A) Administrator – Performs all actions except creating or editing library users,
– Delete Selected and accessing encryption.
Download MLM Database
O) Operator – Moves, imports, and exports media.
(remote access only)
– Save as CSV file
Figure 23 Map of BlueScale Toolbar options.
75
Status Bar
The status bar is located along the bottom edge of most screens. The
information and icons displayed on the status bar depend on the status of
the system and whether you are using the using the operator panel or the
BlueScale web interface.
System
Status
Refresh Last refresh time BlueScale IP address

display and date software version (or library name)
Figure 24 The basic BlueScale status bar.
Refresh Button Refreshes (updates) the information currently displayed

on the user interface. If you set a long interval for the refresh rate or
disabled the automatic screen refresh by setting the refresh rate to zero (see
Refresh Rate on page 274), you can refresh the screen manually by
selecting the refresh button.
System Status Icon Indicates the status of library components. The
BlueScale user interface uses the following icons to indicate the status of
library components. Click the status icon to view system messages (see
Checking Messages on page 88 for information about these messages).
Note: These status icons also display next to the major system
components shown on the General Status screen (see Figure 22
on page 72).
Icon Description Meaning

A check mark (9) in a All system components are functioning correctly.
green circle
An i in a blue circle. An informational message about a system component is available.

Check messages to determine the component.
An exclamation point A system component requires attention. Check messages to

( ! ) in a yellow triangle. determine the component.
An X in a red circle. A system component has experienced an error condition. Check

messages to determine the component.
76
User Guide 91090000
Last Refresh Time and Date shows when the displayed information was
last updated. The library refreshes different screens at different rates,
depending on the type of data displayed. The screen refresh rate can be set
for a specific interval or disabled (see Refresh Rate on page 274). The
displayed information can be refreshed manually by selecting the Refresh
button.
BlueScale Software Version Shows the version of the BlueScale software
being run by the library.
IP Address or Library Name Shows the IP address or name for the library. If
you are managing the library from the touch screen operator panel, the
library’s IP address is displayed on the status bar. If you are using the
BlueScale web interface, the library’s name is shown instead of the IP
address.
Note: If you are using the BlueScale web interface and you have not set
the library name, the right-hand side of the status bar is blank.
If you need to view or set the library’s IP address, see Configuring
Network Settings on page 278. See Library Name on page 274 for
information about setting the library name.
Additional Status Bar Icons

The status bar can also include the following additional icons.
Remote Support Icon Provides you with online access to the support
section of the Spectra Logic web site where you can search the Knowledge
Base, access the Product Documentation, and download firmware and
drivers. If you need additional assistance, contact SpectraGuard Support
(see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).
Remote
support
Figure 25 The BlueScale status bar.
The remote support icon is also used to activate secure remote access
capabilities using Cisco WebEx™ technology. This remote access helps
SpectraGuard Support provide faster resolution of support calls. This
capability is only enabled on an as-needed basis during a support call.
Notes: The remote support icon is only visible when you are
accessing the library through the BlueScale web interface.
When SpectraGuard Support needs to launch a WebEx
session to access your library, they will send you a link via
email.
77
HHM Icon When the library or one of its components reaches its
maintenance threshold the Hardware Health Monitor (HHM) icon appears
in the status bar. You can click on the icon to view information about the
notification. If desired, you can send the Hardware Health Monitoring
notification and an AutoSupport Log (ASL) file to a contact person or to
SpectraGuard Support so they can review the logs and determine if any
maintenance tasks are needed to prevent future failures (see Responding to
HHM Notifications on page 93).
Note: The HHM icon only displays if an HHM threshold has been
reached. After any required tasks are complete, the threshold
can be reset. The HHM icon disappears until the next threshold
is reached.
HHM icon
Figure 26 The Status bar showing the HHM icon.
Camera Icon If the P address for the BlueScale Vision camera is entered
into the BlueScale user interface (see Enabling the Camera Icon (Optional)
on page 277), a camera icon appears in the status bar. Click on the icon to
launch the web-based Network Camera viewer and use it to observe the
interior of the library over an Ethernet network or the internet (see Using
the BlueScale Vision Camera on page 102).
Note: The Camera icon only appears on the BlueScale web interface; it
does not appear on the front panel touch screen interface.
Camera icon
Figure 27 The Status bar showing the Camera icon.
Progress Bar
When the library is busy processing a command, a horizontal progress bar
displays above the status bar. Do not use the touch screen (or access the
user interface from the BlueScale web interface) until the progress bar
disappears.
78
User Guide 91090000
Using the BlueScale User Interface
USING THE BLUESCALE USER INTERFACE

The library’s BlueScale user interface lets you set configuration options,
view library and drive information and metrics, manage media, and
monitor library operations.
Note: Unless otherwise specified, references to the user interface
screens apply to both the touch screen on the library operator
panel and the screens presented through the BlueScale web
interface.
The following sections describe the library controls and options available
through the user interface.

Logging Into the User Interface page 79
Logging Off or Switching Users page 70
Entering Information page 81
Logging Into the User Interface

Before you can manage or configure the library, you must log into the
BlueScale user interface. The Login screen displays on the library operator
panel after the library completes its power-on initialization. The Login
screen also displays when you switch users.
Touch the keyboard icon

to open the soft keyboard.
Touch the icon with the stylus to

switch between letters and numbers.
Figure 28 The user interface main login screen.
79
Use the following steps to log into the library.

1. If you are connecting to the library remotely, enter the library’s IP
address in the address bar of your web browser. The Login screen
displays when the connection is established.
2. Select the User text box. A cursor appears in the box.
Note: When using the touch screen on the library operator panel,
touch the keyboard icon (Figure 28) on the Login screen to
activate the soft keyboard on the library’s touch screen. Use the
stylus or your finger to select fields and to type information
using the soft keyboard.
Selecting the keyboard icon again closes the soft keyboard.
3. Type your user name (su is the default user name for a superuser).
The options and controls provided through the user interface depend
on to which user group you belong. See Configuring Library Users on
page 266 for information about user groups.
4. Type your password in the Password text box. If you log in as the
default superuser su, the password is blank (unless you changed it).
Note: By default, passwords are not required to log into the library. If
you want to password-protect access to the library, set
passwords for each user as described in Configuring Library
Users on page 266.
5. Click the Login button. After you log in, the library completes its
initialization and displays the library’s General Status screen.
Figure 29 The BlueScale user interface General Status

screen.
6. If Encryption is enabled on your library and you have set the

Encryption login password, you will be prompted to enter that
password as well (see Log Into the Encryption Application on page 313
for detailed information).
80
User Guide 91090000
Using the BlueScale User Interface
Logging Off or Switching Users

1. If a screen other than the Login screen is displayed, select the Security
toolbar to display the Security options..
Security toolbar
Switch User
Figure 30 The Security toolbar.
2. Select Switch User to display the Login screen. Select Switch User to log
out the currently logged in user and redisplay the Login screen.
3. If desired, log in again using a different user name and password.
Entering Information
Entering information on a user interface screen requires using one of the
following methods.
BlueScale Web Interface

The BlueScale web interface lets you use your computer keyboard to enter
information into the user interface (see BlueScale Web Interface on
page 70). Using the web interface is the most convenient way to enter large
amounts of information when you are configuring the library.
Important When accessing the library remotely through a web browser, do not use the Enter
key on your keyboard when making selections in the BlueScale user interface.
Various web browsers handle the Enter key differently, causing inconsistent
behavior in the BlueScale interface.
Always use your mouse to make selections and click the buttons in BlueScale
screens instead of using your keyboard.
Note: Functions that require physical interaction with the library (for
example, importing or exporting media packs) are not available
when BlueScale web interface.
81
Soft Keyboard
When using the touch screen on the operator
panel, select the keyboard icon in the lower right
corner of any screen to activate the on-screen keyboard. When the
keyboard is extended, an icon in the lower right corner lets you choose
between alphabetic or numeric characters. Use a stylus or your finger to
select fields and enter alphanumeric information using the keyboard.
Touching the keyboard icon again closes the keyboard.
Use an External Keyboard and Mouse Connected to the

LCM
You can connect a standard USA-type PS2 keyboard to the keyboard
connector on the LCM (see Figure 8 on page 35). You can also connect a
PS2 mouse to the LCM and use it for making selections on the user
interface. Using an external keyboard and mouse is the most convenient
way to enter large amounts of information if you cannot use the BlueScale
web interface. The user interface options available when you use an
external keyboard connected to the LCM are the same as when you use the
library’s touch screen operator panel.
Important Not all characters on a PS2 keyboard are supported in the BlueScale user interface.
If a character does not appear on the soft keyboard, then its use is not supported.
Note: If using a non-USA type keyboard, you will need to find the
equivalent for some characters like the back slash or forward
slash.
82
User Guide 91090000
Chapter 5
Operating the Library
This chapter describes the following procedures for day-to-day operation
of your library:
Turning the Library On and Off page 84
Monitoring Your Library page 87
Checking Messages page 88
Using Performance Metrics page 88
Using BlueScale Hardware Health page 92
Monitoring
Viewing Drive Status Information page 98
Viewing a Fibre Channel Partition’s page 100
World Wide Name
Using the BlueScale Vision Camera page 102
Using a USB Drive page 104
Using a Global Spare Tape Drive page 107
Using the Global Spare Tape Drive page 108
Reclaiming the Global Spare Tape Drive page 110
Restoring the Library Configuration page 111
83
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library
TURNING THE LIBRARY ON AND OFF

Before powering on the library, make sure that one or both of the library’s
power cables are plugged into AC outlets and the main AC breakers
switches on the back library are set to the on position (see Figure 6 on
page 33).
Power On the Library

Press and hold the front panel power button until the button’s LED
illuminates. Wait while the library completes its power-on sequence, which
initializes all of installed components. When initialization is complete, the
BlueScale login screen displays.
Power button
Figure 31 Press and hold the front panel power button.
Power Off the Library

Before powering off the library, use the following steps to prepare for shut-
down.
1. Use your backup software to stop any backups running to the library.
2. Use your backup software to move any cartridges that are currently in
tape drives back their storage locations.
If you cannot use your backup software, then move the cartridges as
described in Moving Media Within a Partition on page 150.
3. Pause PostScan if it is running (see Pause the PostScan Process on
page 186). Any tapes currently being scanned are returned to their
storage locations.
4. Power off the library using one of the methods described in the
following sections.
84
User Guide 91090000
Turning the Library On and Off
Using the Front Panel Power Button

To power off the library, press and hold the front panel power button until
the button’s LED starts flashing. The library begins its power-off sequence,
which allows the BlueScale firmware and components to shut down
gracefully.
Note: If you intend to leave the library powered down for an extended
length of time, set the AC breaker switches on the back of the
library to the off position.
Use the Soft Power Feature

The Soft Power feature disables the physical power button on the library
front panel and enables the soft power button on the General Status screen.
Using the Soft Power feature gives superusers exclusive control over
powering the library off, preventing other users from powering the library
off from the front panel. The Soft Power feature requires a confirmation
before power to the library is turned off.
Notes: The Soft Power feature is only available from library’s front
panel touch screen interface; it is not available through the
BlueScale web interface.
The Soft Power feature must first be enabled via the
configuration menu (see Enabling and Disabling Soft Power
on page 276). The feature can only be enabled or disabled by
a superuser
Follow these steps to power off the library using the Soft Power feature.
1. Log into the library as a superuser.
2. From the toolbar, access the General Status screen.
85
3. Using the stylus, touch the blue power button on the picture of the
library.
Soft power
button
Figure 32 The Soft Power button on the General Status screen.
When the cursor comes near the button, it changes to a pointing finger,
as shown in Figure 32.
4. When you touch the button, the Soft Power Shutdown confirmation
screen displays after a brief delay. Select Continue to send a command to
the power control module (PCM) to power off the library.
Figure 33 The Soft Power Shutdown confirmation screen.
86
User Guide 91090000
Monitoring Your Library
MONITORING YOUR LIBRARY

The BlueScale user interface provides a number of tools for monitoring the
health and performance of the library, its components, and its media.
Icons and bar graphs on the General Status screen (Figure 22 on
page 72) provide at-a-glance information about the status of major
system components and resource usage, respectively.
The icons in the status bar (see Status Bar on page 76) provide
additional system-level status information.
System messages provide important information about the library and
its operation. See Checking Messages on page 88 for details.
Performance metrics let you monitor the performance of your library
and its drives. See Using Performance Metrics on page 88 for details.
Hardware Health Monitoring (HHM) tracks maintenance thresholds
for key library components and alerts you when a component reaches
its maintenance threshold. See Using BlueScale Hardware Health
Monitoring on page 92 for details.
The Drive Status screens provide information about cleaning status,
firmware level, and tools for using a Global Spare drive, manually
cleaning an individual drive, and removing or replacing a drive. The
Drive Details for each Fibre Channel drive shows the World Wide
Name (WWPN) for the drive.
See Viewing Drive Status Information on page 98 and Using a Global
Spare Tape Drive on page 107 for details.
When a partition includes an F-QIP, the Shared Library Services screen
shows the WWN of the F-QIP that provides the robotic control path
(the exporting F-QIP). See Viewing a Fibre Channel Partition’s World
Wide Name on page 100 for details.
The BlueScale Vision camera lets you view the interior of the library.
See Using the BlueScale Vision Camera on page 102 for detailed
information.
Media Lifecycle Management (MLM) provides an array of tools for
monitoring the usage and health of the MLM-enabled media in the
library. See Chapter 7 – Media Lifecycle Management for detailed
information.
Drive Lifecycle Management (DLM) provide tools for monitoring the
usage and health of the LTO tape drives in the library. It also provides
tools for generating reports and testing a drive. See Chapter 8 – Drive
Lifecycle Management for detailed information.
87
Checking Messages
Check the library’s system messages regularly. These messages provide
important information about the library and its operation. Reviewing the
messages, which provide important information about library problems, is
also the first step in troubleshooting.
Use the following steps to view messages.
1. Log into the library.
2. Select the System Status icon on the status bar. The System Messages
screen displays.
See Status Bar on page 76 for the location and description of the System
Status icon.
Figure 34 The System Messages screen.
3. Read the message(s), and follow any recommended steps.

If you need assistance, contact SpectraGuard Support (see Contacting
Spectra Logic on page 5).
4. When you are finished reading the messages and have completed the
appropriate actions, you can select and delete individual messages or
you can delete all of the messages.
Using Performance Metrics

The library includes the following metrics for monitoring the performance
of your library and its drives. These metrics must be enabled before they
can be used (see Enabling and Disabling Performance Metrics on
page 276).
Drive Performance on page 89
Power Consumption on page 91
Storage Density on page 91
88
User Guide 91090000
Drive Performance
The Drive Performance metric lets you monitor the performance of your
drives. This innovative feature helps you optimize drive performance
through load-balancing, tuning your SAN, and identifying performance
bottlenecks. The Drive Performance Monitoring screen provides a
graphical display of drive performance.
The Drive Performance Monitor displays the following for the selected
drive set:
Drive performance in MB/second
Data transferred in total MBs
Summary information for the displayed graphs
Use the following steps to view the performance data for the drives
installed in the library.
1. Select General > Metrics from the toolbar menu. The screen for the last
metric you viewed displays.
2. Select the drive performance you want to view from the available
options:
Total Library
Partition n
A specific drive
3. Select either Drive Write Performance or Drive Read Performance from the
Metric pull-down menu.
Note: If you enabled or disabled the Drive Performance Monitor
option when a drive contains a cartridge, the drive is reported as
empty.
89
4. Select Go. A screen showing the selected metric displays.
Figure 35 Drive Performance Monitor screen (Write

Performance shown).
5. Alternatively, you can view the Drive Performance metrics by selecting

Configuration > Drives and then selecting the Drive Performance button
in the upper right of the screen.
Figure 36 The Drives screen.
90
User Guide 91090000
Power Consumption
In addition to the Power bar graph on the General Status screen, the
BlueScale EnergyAudit feature provides a configurable graphical display
of the library’s power consumption.
Use the following steps to view the power consumption data for the
library.
2. Select which power consumption metric you want to view from the
Metric pull-down menu:
Power Consumption (kWh)
Power Consumption (kWh/Ft2)
Power Consumption (kWh/Ft3)
Power Consumption (kWh/TB)
3. Select Go. A screen showing the selected metric displays.
Figure 37 The Power Consumption metrics screen.
Storage Density
The Storage Density metric lets you to monitor the amount of data your
library is capable of storing based on the amount of the selected media
type is currently in the library.
Use the following steps to view the power consumption data for the
library.
2. Select Storage Density from the Metric pull-down menu.
91
3. Select the media type for which you want the density metrics and the
unit of measure for the density values.
4. Select Go. The Storage Density screen showing the selected metrics
displays.
Figure 38 The Storage Density metrics screen.
Using BlueScale Hardware Health Monitoring

BlueScale Hardware Health Monitoring (HHM) tracks maintenance
thresholds for key library components. When a component reaches the
maintenance threshold, an HHM icon displays on the status bar.
HHM icon
Figure 39 The Status bar showing the HHM icon.
To send an AutoSupport log to a contact person, see Responding to

HHM Notifications on page 93.
To view a report showing the current HHM data, see Viewing
Hardware Health Monitoring (HHM) Data on page 96.
92
User Guide 91090000
Responding to HHM Notifications

Use the following steps to send the Hardware Health Monitoring
notification and AutoSupport Log (ASL) file to the contact person in a
predefined AutoSupport profile. You can also choose to send the ASL files
to SpectraGuard Support so they can review the logs and determine if any
maintenance tasks are needed to prevent future failures.
1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges.
2. If not already completed, configure the mail recipients who should
receive AutoSupport information. Also configure one or more
AutoSupport profiles.
Mail recipients—See Configure Mail Recipients on page 251. At a
minimum, configure SpectraGuard Support as a mail recipient if
you want the library to email AutoSupport ticket requests to Spectra
Logic.
AutoSupport profiles—See Configure AutoSupport Profiles on
page 251. You can configure one of the mail recipients to receive
critical alarm log sets automatically sent by the library.
3. Select the HHM icon (see Figure 39). The Hardware Health Monitoring
screen displays.
Figure 40 The Hardware Health Monitoring screen.
4. If you want to save the AutoSupport ticket information to a USB drive,

insert the USB drive into the USB port on the LCM (see Using a USB
Drive on page 104).
Note: The option to save the ticket to USB is only available if you plug
a USB drive in to the USB port before you select Send
AutoSupport Ticket.
93
5. Select Send AutoSupport Ticket. The main AutoSupport screen displays.
Figure 41 The main AutoSupport screen.
6. Select Send Log Set. The Select Profile to Send Log Set screen displays.
Figure 42 AutoSupport Profiles screen.
7. Click the Select button next to the profile for the main contact person
for HHM issues. The Select Ticket Type screen displays.
Figure 43 The Select Ticket Type screen.
The Create a New Hardware Health Monitor ticket option is automatically

selected. The options for entering an existing support ticket number
and a problem description are not available.
94
User Guide 91090000
8. If you do not need to make any changes to the contact person’s

information for this support ticket, skip to Step 9.
If you need to temporarily change the contact person’s information for
this ticket, select Profile Data. The Profile Summary screen displays (see
Figure 163 on page 260). Make any necessary changes in the Profile
Summary screen. Select Use Settings to save your changes and return to
the Select Ticket Type screen.
9. Select Next. The Confirm and Submit Ticket screen displays.
Figure 44 The Confirm and Submit Ticket screen.
10. Verify that all information is correct.

To save the ticket information to a USB drive instead of emailing it
from the library, check the box at the top of the screen (shown in
Figure 44).
Note: The USB option is only available if you plugged a USB drive in
to the LCM’s USB port in Step 4 on page 93.
If all of the information is correct, proceed to Step 11.
If something needs to be changed, select Previous to return to the
Select Ticket Type screen and make any necessary changes.
95
11. Select Submit to send the Hardware Health Monitor ticket to the
selected recipient. Select Cancel to return to the AutoSupport Profiles
screen.
A progress screen indicates that the ticket request (with log
information) is being sent. When completed, the AutoSupport Profiles
screen displays.
Viewing Hardware Health Monitoring (HHM) Data

The advanced utility called HHM: View Data generates a report showing
the current status of the HHM counters. This information includes
information about the following:
Library serial number and name (if configured)
Information about key library components monitored by HHM,
including the type of reminder generated when the component reaches
its maintenance threshold
Transporter moves: Drive To Drive Moves, Drive To Slot Moves, Slot To
Slot Moves, Slot To Drive Moves, Tap In Moves, and Tap Out Move.
In addition to the HHM: View Data utility, two additional HHM utilities configure
Caution the HHM counters and thresholds for the monitored components. Do not change
the values for any counters or thresholds unless specifically instructed to do so by
SpectraGuard Support.
Use the following steps to view the current HHM data.

2. Select Maintenance > Tools > Utilities. The Utilities screen displays.
3. If you want to save the HHM report to a USB drive, insert the USB drive
into the LCM’s USB port; otherwise, skip to the next step.
Note: The option to save the HHM report to USB is only displayed if
you plug a USB drive in to the LCM’s USB port before you select
Show Advanced (see Using a USB Drive on page 104).
4. Select Show Advanced. The Advanced Utilities Confirmation screen
displays.
5. Select Next. The Utilities screen refreshes to show a list of the advanced
utilities.
96
User Guide 91090000
6. Scroll through the list of advanced utilities and select HHM: View Data.
The screen refreshes to show the details for the utility.
Figure 45 The HHM: View Data utility.
7. If you want to save the results from the utility, use the check boxes at
the top of the screen to select the location; otherwise skip to Step 8.
Selecting this
option... Saves the report...
Mail results to As an attachment to an email sent to the specified mail recipient. Use the drop-
down list to select the recipient for the report file.
To send the email with the attached library configuration file to someone who is
not already listed as a library user, you must first configure that person as an
email recipient (see Configure Mail Recipients on page 251).
Note: Do not use the default autosupport@spectralogic.com email recipient
unless SpectraGuard Support specifically instructs you to do so. Spectra Logic
does not save emailed HHM report files unless they are specifically requested
for troubleshooting.
Save results to To the library’s compact flash card in the LCM.
Compact Flash file Note: Select this option only if specifically instructed to do so by SpectraGuard
Support.
Save to USB To a USB drive connected to the USB port on the LCM.
Note: This option is only available if you inserted a USB drive in Step 3 on
page 96.
97
8. Select Run Utility.

After a brief delay, the Utility Results screen displays the current HHM
data. Scroll as necessary to view all of the data.
Figure 46 The HHM: View Data Utility Results screen.
9. If you chose to save the file to a USB drive, a message displays showing
file name for the trace file (tracen.txt, where n increments each time
the file is saved to the same location).
10. Select Previous to return to the list of advanced utilities.
Viewing Drive Status Information

The drives status icon on the General Status screen indicates the overall
status of the library’s drives. If the status icon indicates that a drive is
experiencing a problem, view the Drive Details screen detailed information
about as specific drive. The Drive Details screen includes the drive
firmware version and manufacture’s serial number, as well as more
detailed status information. From the Drive Details screen you can access
the Drive Lifecycle Management (DLM) report for the drive.
1. Select Configuration > Drives. The Drives screen displays (see Figure 36
on page 90.
98
User Guide 91090000
2. Select Detail next to the drive you want to check. The Drive Details
screen displays.
Figure 47 The Drive Details screen.
For Fibre Channel drives, the Drive Details screen also shows the
drive’s World Wide Name (WWN).
Note: The WWN is actually the World Wide Node Name (WWNN) for
the drive.
Beginning with BlueScale 10.4, the format for the drive WWN is:
2n xy 00 90 a5 00 zz zz, where n, x, y, and zz zz are variables.
Variable Equals...
n The port number, which is determined as follows:
Port A = the frame number (always=1)
Port B = the frame number + 1
x The DBA number (1 – 6), as numbered from the bottom of the
library to the top
y The drive number in the DBA (1 – 4)
zz zz The frame ID of the library, where each z is a hexadecimal
number from 0 – F.
In Figure 47 the WWNN indicates that the drive is located in DBA 1,

and connected to the network using Port A.
3. From the Drive Details screen select DLM to access the Drive Lifecycle
Management (DLM) report for the drive (see View a Detailed Heath
Report on page 198).
99
4. Use the information on the Drive Details screen and the DLM report to
troubleshoot drive problems. If the drive is in an error state, contact
Troubleshooting All Drive Types on page 364
Troubleshooting LTO Tape Drives on page 365
Troubleshooting SDLT Tape Drives on page 379
Troubleshooting RXT Drives on page 381
Viewing a Fibre Channel Partition’s World Wide Name

When monitoring connections to multiple libraries through a Fibre
Channel switch, knowing the World Wide Name (WWN) for a data
partition is useful for identifying a particular library.
Note: Each data partition defined in the library appears as an
independent library connected to the Fibre Channel arbitrated
loop or fabric.
To view the WWN for each data partition configured in the library, select
Configuration > Partitions. The Fibre Channel WWN for each data
partition is shown on the Shared Library Services screen.
Figure 48 The WWN assigned to the partition.
100
User Guide 91090000
The format for the partition WWN is: 2xyf0090a500zzzz, where x, y, and
zzzz are variables.
Variable Equals...
x 1 – when the library is connected through Port A on the F-QIP
2 – when the library is connected through Port B on the F-QIP
Note: The Shared Library Services screen only shows the WWN for
Port A of the F-QIP, regardless of whether Port B is in use or not.
y The DBA number (1 – 6), as numbered from the bottom of the
library to the top
zzzz The frame ID of the library, where each z is a hexadecimal
number from 0 – F.
For example, in Figure 48 the WWN for Partition 1 indicates that the
exporting F-QIP is located in DBA 1 and that it is connected to the Fibre
Channel arbitrated loop or fabric using Port A.
Notes: When one of the direct-attach Fibre Channel drives in the
partition provides the robotics control path, the partition
WWN is the same as the drive’s WWN (see Viewing Drive
Status Information on page 98).
The partition WWN is actually the World Wide Port Name
(WWPN) for port on the exporting F-QIP.
If multiple partitions use the same F-QIP port to provide the
robotics control path, all of the partitions have the same
World Wide Name (WWN).
If Port A and Port B are used by separate partitions, the
WWNs for the two partitions are identical except for the
second digit from the left (x). Only the WWN for Port A is
shown on the Shared Library Services screen.
See Spectra Logic Knowledge Base article 373 for more
information about the WWNs for F-QIPs.
101
Using the BlueScale Vision Camera

The BlueScale Vision camera and web-based BlueScale Vision viewer lets
you see the interior of the library to observe import / export operations,
tape mounts, cartridge moves, and robotic operations in real time.
Note: Using the camera icon to connect to the BlueScale Vision viewer
is not required. You can also connect to the viewer directly by
entering the IP address for the desired camera in your web
browser’s Address bar.
Use the following steps to launch BlueScale Vision viewer application.
1. Connect an Ethernet cable from camera’s Ethernet port on the back of
the library to an Ethernet network.
BlueScale Vision
camera connector
Figure 49 Location of the camera Ethernet port.
2. Connect to the BlueScale Vision viewer application.

Using the Camera Icon
a. Using a remote connection, log into the library’s BlueScale web
interface using a standard web browser (see Logging Into the User
Interface on page 79).
b. Select the Camera icon in the status bar.
Camera icon
Figure 50 The Status bar showing the Camera icon.
Note: The camera icon used to launch the BlueScale Vision viewer is
not present until you enter the IP address for the camera in the
System Configuration screen (see Enabling the Camera Icon
(Optional) on page 277).
102
User Guide 91090000
Using a Web Browser

a. Determine the IP address of the camera (see Setting the Camera IP
Address on page 290).
b. Enter the camera’s IP address in your browser’s Address field.
3. The start page for the BlueScale Vision viewer opens in a new web
page.
Figure 51 The BlueScale Vision viewer start page.
4. Select View Video to see the camera’s view of the library’s interior.
Figure 52 The interior of the library as viewed by the

BlueScale Vision camera.
103
Buttons on the screen let you control the motion of the camera lens.
Click this
button... To...
Move the camera lens through the Preset positions in the sequence
defined by the Camera Administrator.
Pan the camera lens from left to right automatically.
Move the camera lens to the Motion Detection Preset position.
Point the camera lens to the position corresponding to the arrow

on the button. There may a short delay after clicking the desired
icon. Wait a couple of seconds instead of clicking again.
5. Read the BlueScale Vision Camera User’s Guide, included on the Product
Documentation and Software CD that came with your library, for detailed
information about configuring and using the BlueScale Vision camera.
This guide also describes installing and using the camera’s Viewing/
Recording Utility.
To view the camera documentation:
a. Insert the library’s Product Documentation and Software CD in the
CD/DVD drive of a Windows-based computer. Adobe® Reader®
launches automatically and opens the welcome.pdf file.
b. Select the BlueScale Vision Camera link on the opening page to
display links to the camera documentation and descriptions of the
camera software included on the CD.
USING A USB DRIVE

You can plug a USB drive into the USB port on the library’s operator panel
or into the LCM to copy the following types of information to and from the
library.
Use Description
Configuration Saving and restoring the library configuration and MLM database.
information
AutoSupport tickets Saving AutoSupport tickets and log files
Traces Saving results of traces run on the library and its components.
Firmware Transferring firmware to the library for updating the library and its
components.
Encryption export Exporting a BlueScale encryption key for safekeeping.
Encryption import Importing a previously exported BlueScale encryption key
104
User Guide 91090000
Using a USB Drive
Continuing Library Operations While Using a USB Drive

When using a USB drive, keep the following requirements in mind:
It is... to continue library operations, such as data backup, while...

Safe exporting or importing a BlueScale encryption key using a USB drive.
saving library configurations and other information to a USB drive.
capturing traces (trace results are the data most often saved to a USB drive).
Not Safe restoring a saved library configuration and other information from a USB drive.
the library is performing a firmware update using a firmware package
previously copied to the library.
Do not run backups while the library is performing a firmware update. Updated
Caution components automatically reset (including a library reset) when updates are
complete, which could interrupt a backup operation.
Connecting a USB Drive to the LCM

Notes: Not all USB drives are compatible with the library. If you are
unable to access a USB drive from the library, remove it and
use a different one. If the LCM stops responding after you
insert an incompatible USB drive, reboot the LCM as
described in Resetting the LCM on page 338.
Plug the USB drive into the LCM before beginning a
procedure that reads or writes data to allow time for device
recognition. For many utilities, the option to read or write
data from a USB drive is not available if one has not been
plugged into the LCM before you select the utility.
Do not leave a USB drive plugged into the LCM indefinitely,
unless directed to do so by SpectraGuard Support.
Use the following steps to connect a USB drive to the LCM.
1. Locate the LCM (see Figure 4 on page 30).
2. Plug the USB drive into the USB port on the LCM.
USB port
Figure 53 Location of the USB port on the LCM.
105
Saving Data From the Library to a USB Drive

You can save (upload) the following types of data from the library to a USB
drive:
This type of data... Saves...

Library The library configuration whenever you modify the configuration of the library
configurations or a partition. The library gives you the option to save the configuration
whenever you create or modify a partition. The library user interface also
includes a utility for saving the configuration to a USB drive. See Backing Up
the Library Configuration on page 285 for more detailed information.
MLM reports The MLM reports so you can maintain an external record of the health of the
media in your library. See Generating Media Lifecycle Management Reports on
page 175 for information about the types of reports you can generate.
MLM database A backup of the MLM database. Backup the MLM database regularly so that
you can easily restore it instead of rebuilding it in the event of a disaster. See
Backing Up the MLM Database on page 187 for detailed information.
Note: The MLM database also includes the Drive Lifecycle Management data.
BlueScale An exported encryption key. Export encryption keys as soon as possible after
encryption keys you create them. Store the exported keys in a safe, secure location so that you
can import a key back into the library if needed. Exporting and Protecting Keys
on page 320 provides instructions for exporting BlueScale encryption keys.
System and System logs and AutoSupport logs (ASLs) for use when troubleshooting library,
AutoSupport logs drive, or media problems.
Trace results Trace results, which include diagnostic information that can be used to
troubleshoot library problems. Trace results saved to a USB drive can be
reviewed from any device that can read data from a USB drive. See Capturing
Traces on page 334 for additional information.
106
User Guide 91090000
Using a Global Spare Tape Drive
Copying Data From a USB Drive to the Library

You can copy (download) the following types of data from a USB drive to
the library:
Data Description
Firmware package Save downloaded firmware package updates to USB drive and then copy the
updates package to the library. The library executes the updates after they are copied to
the library (see Updating Library Firmware on page 388).
CAUTION! Wait until all currently running backup processes are complete
before executing a firmware update. If necessary, use your backup software to
stop the backup processes.
Saved library Use a previously saved library configuration to restore a lost configuration. (see
configuration Restoring the Library Configuration on page 111).
You can also copy a previously emailed Auto Save Library Configuration,
which contains the MLM database to a USB drive and use it to restore the
library (see Restoring From an Auto Save Configuration File on page 111).
MLM database Use a previously saved backup to restore the MLM database instead of
rebuilding the database by loading each cartridge into a drive (see Restoring the
MLM Database on page 190).
Exported BlueScale Import a deleted an encryption key from the library so that you can decrypt
encryption key data stored on cartridges that were encrypted with the deleted key (see
Restoring Encrypted Data on page 326).
USING A GLOBAL SPARE TAPE DRIVE

The Global Spare option lets you replace a failed drive remotely using a
spare drive in the library. You simply configure an installed drive to
designate it as a replacement (spare) so it is available, if needed. Using a
Global Spare allows you to continue your backup operations and replace
the failed drive the next time you are physically present at the library.
Requirements Before you can use the Global Spare option, the following
requirements must be met.
The Global Spare option is only available for direct-attach Fibre
Channel tape drives.
A Global Spare drive of the same technology generation as the failed
drive must be available. For example, if the partition uses direct-attach
Fibre Channel LTO-4 drives, a direct-attach Fibre Channel LTO-3 drive
cannot be used as a spare for that partition.
The library partition with the failed drive must be idle with respect to
the failed drive before the Global Spare drive is used.
If the only available Global Spare drive is in use by the MLM
PostScan™ process, you must pause PostScan to make the spare drive
available. See Using PostScan on page 182 for detailed information.
107
Setup. The Global Spare tape drive must already be configured in the
partition where the failed drive is located (see Configure Global Spare Tape
Drives on page 213).
Important The tape drives that are configured as Global Spares must be connected to the
network. If they are not connected to the network, they will not be accessible to the
application software.
You may need to reconfigure your switch to access the spare tape drive.
Backup Application Guidelines Follow these backup application

guidelines:
Backup Exec™ v12.5 software running on a Windows server—After
sparing or unsparing a tape drive, you must restart the Backup Exec
Device and Media Service for the software to function properly with
the spared tape drive.
General guidelines—In a few rare cases, your backup may fail if a
cartridge is loaded into any tape drive in the partition at the same time
that the library is in the process of assigning a Global Spare tape drive
for use (as described in this section). Most applications will initiate the
backup again, but some will fail the backup operation. If your backup
operation fails, wait for the library to complete the Global Spare
assignment and re-start the backup.
Using the Global Spare Tape Drive

Follow these steps to use a Global Spare tape drive as a temporary
replacement for a failed tape drive.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Partitions to display the
Shared Library Services screen.
Figure 54 The Shared Library Services screen with a Global

Spare.
108
User Guide 91090000
Using a Global Spare Tape Drive
3. Select Global Spare > Use Spare to display the Global Spare Usage
screen and substitute the partition’s spared drive for the failed drive.
Figure 55 The Global Spare Usage screen (Use Spare).
Notes: When you select the drive to replace, the BlueScale firmware
disables the failed drive and configures a Global Spare drive
to report the same WWN and Serial Number as the failed
drive.
The Global Spare drive “logically” replaces the failed drive,
which can then be removed and replaced the next time you
are physically at the library.
If you have more than one available Global Spare tape drive,
the library automatically selects a drive in no particular order.
4. Wait for the library to complete the sparing operation.
5. If desired, select Configuration > Drives to view the Drives screen. The
drive icons on the screen change to indicate the failed drive and the
Global spare that replaced it.
Failed drive
Available
Global Spare
drive
Global Spare
replacing
failed drive
Figure 56 The Drives screen with a failed drive replaced by a Global Spare.
109
6. Use your backup application to bring the new tape drive online. Refer
to your backup application documentation for instructions.
Important Replace the failed tape drive as soon as possible and reconfigure the spare tape
drive to return it to a Global Spare configuration.
Reclaiming the Global Spare Tape Drive

Follow these steps to begin using the replacement drive and return the
Global Spare to the pool of available spare drives.
2. Replace the failed tape drive with the new tape drive that you received
from Spectra Logic (see Adding or Replacing a Drive on page 419).
4. Stop all backup application activity to the tape drive. Refer to your
backup application documentation for instructions.
5. Ensure that the Global Spare tape drive does not contain a cartridge. If
necessary, use your backup software to eject the cartridge the tape drive
and return it to its slot. Refer to your backup application
documentation for instructions.
6. Take the failed tape drive offline. Refer to your backup application
documentation for instructions.
8. Select Global Spare > Undo Spare to display the Global Spare Usage
screen and make the spared drive available for use as a spare for
another drive.
Figure 57 The Global Spare Usage screen (Undo Spare).
Note: The BlueScale firmware disables the spare and reconfigures the
original tape drive back into the partition. The Global Spare is
then available to be used again, as needed.
9. Use your backup application to bring the newly installed tape drive
online. Refer to your backup application documentation for
instructions.
110
User Guide 91090000
Restoring the Library Configuration
RESTORING THE LIBRARY CONFIGURATION

If you have valid backups of the library’s configuration and MLM
database, you can use them to restore the library in the event of a disaster.
You can also uses these backups to restore the library if problems require
you to replace the LCM or the LCM’s compact flash card.
Restoring From an Auto Save Configuration File
Restoring the Library Configuration Using a Saved Configuration on
page 115
Restoring the MLM Database on page 117
Restoring From an Auto Save Configuration File

The advanced utility called Restore Library Configuration From Auto Save
lets you restore the library configuration and MLM database using the
auto-save configuration file that the library generates automatically (see
Use the Auto Save Configuration Feature on page 286).
Before restoring your system using the auto-save file, check the time stamp
Caution included in the file name to ensure that you have the most current file.
Important The library does not automatically save a backup when you make changes to any
of the library configuration settings other than those for partitions. Changes will be
saved during the next weekly automatic configuration save operation.
Restore the Library Configuration and MLM Database

Use the following steps to restore the library configuration and MLM
database using an auto-saved configuration file. If the auto-save
configuration file is not available on the LCM compact flash, use the auto-
save file you saved to a USB drive or sent as an email attachment.
1. If you plan to restore using the zip file containing the auto-save file that
was sent as an email attachment, use the following instructions to copy
it to a USB drive; otherwise, skip to Step 2.
a. Create a folder called \autocfgsave on a USB drive.
b. Copy the zip file you received in the email to the \autocfgsave
folder on the USB drive.
c. Connect the USB drive to the USB port on the LCM before
continuing.
111

displays.
utilities.
6. Scroll through the list of advanced utilities and select Restore Library
Configuration from Auto Save. The screen refreshes to show the details
for the utility.
Figure 58 The Restore Library Configuration from Auto Save

utility.
7. Use the Select a restore time stamp drop-down list to choose the auto-
save file you want to use. The auto-save files are named
<date-time>cfg.zip, where <date-time> is the time stamp for when
the file was created.
Unless you have replaced the LCM or its compact flash, the first file
listed (\hard disk\lc\autocfgsave) is the auto-save zip file stored
on the LCM compact flash.
Note: If available, the auto-save zip file stored on the LCM compact
flash always contains the most recently saved library
configuration information and MLM database.
After a brief delay, the Utility Results screen appears, showing that the
configuration was restored.
112
User Guide 91090000
Restore Other Configuration Changes

The library does not automatically save a backup when you make changes
to any of the library configuration settings other than those for partitions. If
you have a manual backup of the library configuration that is more current
than the auto-save configuration file you used, you can use it to restore the
updated configuration (see Restoring the Library Configuration Using a
Saved Configuration on page 115). If you do not have a manual backup
available, you will need to restore the following changes manually:
If you made configuration changes after the creation date of the auto-
save file you used, you will need to use the options in the Configuration
menu to repeat those changes after the restore is complete.
If you entered option keys after the creation date of the auto-save file
you used, you will need to use the Option Enablement pane of the
System Configuration screen to re-enter those keys (see Enable the
Option on page 271).
If you imported magazines into empty chambers in a partition’s storage
pool after the auto-save file you used was generated, the library does
not recognize the imported magazines as belonging to the partition
after you restore the configuration. Instead, the library notifies you that
there are unused magazines in the free pool.
Use the partition wizard to update the library inventory to reflect the
correct number of magazines assigned to the partition.
1. Log in as a user with superuser or administrator privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Partitions. The Shared
Library Services screen displays.
3. Select either Summary or Edit for the partition to which the unassigned
magazines should belong. Either option can be used when modifying a
partition.
Note: If you select Summary, select Edit on the Partition Setting screen
to modify the partition.
113
4. Select Next to advance through the partition configuration screens until

you reach the Chambers and Drives screen.
Figure 59 The Chambers and Drives screen.
5. Decrease the number of storage chambers assigned to the partition by

the number of missing magazines.
6. Select Next to advance through the remainder of the screens without
making any additional changes until you reach the Save Library
Configuration screen.
7. Select Save. The Share Library Services screen redisplays.
8. Repeat Step 2 through Step 6, this time increasing the number of
storage chambers assigned to the partition by the number of missing
magazines.
114
User Guide 91090000
9. Review the information on the screen and confirm that all settings are
correct for this partition’s configuration.
If the configuration information is correct, proceed to Step 10.
If the configuration information is not correct, either:
Select Cancel to configure the partition again from the beginning.
Select Previous to move backward through the configuration
screens until you reach the settings that need correction. Make
any necessary corrections, then select Next to move forward
through the screens and return to the Save Partition screen.
10. Select Save. The library requires several minutes to store the
configuration information, after which the Shared Library Services
screen redisplays.
Note: When you make a change to a partition, the library generates an
auto-configuration file and saves it to the LCM compact flash. If
you configured the auto-save email option, an email containing
the updated library configuration and the MLM data base will
be sent to the specified recipient (see Enabling Email for the
Automatic Configuration Save Feature on page 282).
Restoring the Library Configuration Using a Saved Configuration

If you previously saved the library configuration to a USB drive or
uploaded the configuration to a file on a computer (see Back Up the
Library Configuration Manually on page 286), use the following steps to
restore the configuration.
displays.
4. Select Next. The Utilities screen refreshes to show the Advanced
Utilities.
115
5. Scroll through the list of advanced utilities and select one of the
following, as applicable for your situation. The screen refreshes to show
the details for the selected restore utility.
Note: The Advanced Utilities screen lists the utilities in alphabetical
order. The following table lists the utilities in most-frequently-
used order.
Use this Restore
Option... To...
Restore Library Use this option to restore auto-save configuration file that you previously
Configuration from stored on a USB drive (see Restoring From an Auto Save Configuration File on
Auto Save page 111).
Note: The auto-save configuration file contains both the library configuration
and the MLM database.
Restore Library Use this option to restore a library configuration file previously stored on a
Configuration from USB drive.
USB Note: Before starting this procedure, insert the USB drive into the USB port on
the LCM.
Upload Backup Select the Upload Backup Configuration button at the top of the screen to upload
Configuration a b a configuration file that you previously saved to a location that is accessible to
the computer you are using to a temporary location in the library memory.
When the upload is complete, you must then run the Restore Library
Configuration from Backup Configuration File utility to restore the library
configuration.
The Upload Backup Configuration button is only available when you access the
library through the BlueScale web interface.
Restore Library Use this option to complete the restore process after using the Upload Backup
Configuration from Configuration button to upload a saved configuration file from a computer.
Uploaded File b Note: This option is used in conjunction with Upload Backup Configuration,
which must be run first.
a. This option may not be possible until you configure your library network settings.
b. This option is only available when you access the library using the BlueScale web interface.

After a brief delay, the Utility Results screen appears, showing that the
configuration file was uploaded and/or the configuration restored.
7. If you imported magazines into empty chambers in a partition’s storage
pool after you generated the backup configuration file, see Restore
Other Configuration Changes on page 113.
116
User Guide 91090000
Restoring the MLM Database

Use the following steps to restore the MLM database from a previously
saved backup that was created using the Save MLM Database utility (see
Backing Up the MLM Database on page 187).
1. If you plan to restore using the MLM database backup file that was sent
as an email attachment, use the following instructions to copy the file to
a USB drive; otherwise, skip to Step 2.
a. Create a folder called SavedMLMDB on a USB drive.
b. Copy the cminfo_<date-time>.dat file to the SavedMLMDB folder
on the USB drive.
2. If you plan to restore the MLM database using a backup file stored on a
USB drive, plug the USB drive into the USB port on the LCM before
continuing.
displays.
6. Select Next. The Utilities screen refreshes to show the advanced Utilities
screen.
7. Scroll down and select Restore MLM Database from USB. The screen
refreshes to show the details for the utility.
Figure 60 The Restore MLM Database from USB utility.
8. Use the drop-down list to select the file name of the backup you want to
use for the restore.
9. Select Run Utility. After a brief delay, the Utility Results screen displays,
showing that the database was restored.
117
Notes
118
User Guide 91090000
Chapter 6
Importing, Exporting, and Moving
Media
This chapter describes the following procedures for importing, exporting,
and moving the media used in your T200, T380, and T680.

Understanding the Media Inventory page 120
Viewing the Partition Inventory page 120
Preparing Media for Use page 123
Tape Media page 123
RXT Media page 126
Importing Media and Cleaning Cartridges page 127
Importing Media into the Entry/Exit Pool page 128
or a Cleaning Partition
Importing Media into a New Partition page 135
Exporting or Exchanging Media page 140
Exporting or Exchanging Media in a page 141
Data Partition
Exporting or Exchanging Cartridges in a page 144
Cleaning Partition
Importing Media To or Exporting Media page 147
From a Specific Location
Moving Media Within a Partition page 150
Locate the Desired Media page 150
Move the Media page 152
Updating the Media Inventory page 154
119
Chapter 6 — Importing, Exporting, and Moving Media
UNDERSTANDING THE MEDIA INVENTORY

The inventory is a record of all the media stored in the library and its
current location (for example, in a specific slot in a TeraPack magazine, in a
drive, or in the TAP). As media is imported into the library, the bar-code
reader on the transporter reads the bar-code labels on the individual
cartridges, the magazines, and RXT media packs (if used). The library uses
this bar-code information to update its physical inventory, which is stored
on the LCM compact flash card.
The Inventory screen, available from the General toolbar, lets you view the
library’s physical inventory information. You can determine whether a
specific piece of media is located in a data partition’s storage pool, its entry/
exit pool, a drive, or the TAP. You can also identify cleaning cartridges in
any cleaning partitions and determine whether they are expended. See
Chapter 2 – Architecture Overview, beginning on page 45 for information
about partitions and pools.
The Inventory screen also lets you find, select, and move media from one
location to another within a partition.
Note: Media can refer to either tape cartridges or RXT media packs.
VIEWING THE PARTITION INVENTORY

The Inventory screen, available from the General toolbar, lets you view the
library’s physical inventory information. You can determine whether a
specific piece of media is located in the storage pool, the entry/exit pool, a
drive, or the TAP.
Note: See Moving Media Within a Partition on page 150 for
information about using the Inventory screen to find, select, and
move media from one location to another within a partition.
120
User Guide 91090000
Viewing the Partition Inventory
Use the following steps to view a partition’s inventory.

1. From the toolbar menu, select General > Inventory. The Inventory
screen displays, showing the full inventory of the partition that was last
viewed.
Note: The Inventory screen only displays information for the currently
selected partition.
Current Partition
Figure 61 The Inventory screen.
2. If you want to view the inventory information for a partition other than
the one currently displayed, select the desired partition from the
Partition drop-down list.
3. Select Go to display inventory information for the selected partition.
121
4. From the Source drop-down list, select the type of location for which
you want to view the inventory, then select Go.
The Source pane refreshes to display a list of the media for the
requested location type. The list shows the slot number (if the location
contains a magazine) and the bar-code label information for the media
in that location. See Moving Media Within a Partition on page 150 for
information about the Source and Destination options.
Note: If an asterisk (*) appears next to the slot number in the source list
for a cleaning partition, the cleaning cartridge is expired.
List media
by source
Figure 62 Select the Source of the media you want to move.
View Source Slot —Type the number of the slot you want to view,
then select Go. The Source inventory list refreshes to show the
requested slot selected at the top of the Source list.
Find by Barcode —Type the barcode information for the cartridge
you want to locate, then select Find. The Source inventory list
refreshes to show the requested media selected at the top of the
Source list
Notes: Make sure that you type the bar-code label information
correctly to avoid selecting the wrong cartridge.
Only the slots beginning with the first one displayed in the
source list are searched. To ensure that all of the slots are
searched, scroll to the top of the source list before selecting
Find.
122
User Guide 91090000
Preparing Media for Use
PREPARING MEDIA FOR USE

Before loading media into the library, make sure that it is properly labeled
and that the write-protect switch is properly set. For normal backup
operations, the write protect switch is set to the write-enabled or unlocked
position. The write-protect switch is typically set to the write-protect or
locked position when the media is removed from the library for storage
and during restore operations.
Important Before loading media into the library, allow it to stabilize to the ambient
environment for 24 hours.
Tape Media
Cartridges (tape media) are stored in TeraPack magazines while they are
inside the library. For best performance, use Spectra Logic Certified Media,
which guarantees media compatibility and the media itself over the
media’s lifetime. To learn more about the tape media supported by the
library, see Tape Drive and Media Specifications on page 462.
When preparing tape media for use (both data cartridge and cleaning
cartridges), keep the following in mind:
To ensure that the library can properly maintain its media inventory,
make sure that all cartridges have unique bar-code labels.
For your convenience, MLM-enabled media, like all Spectra Logic
Certified Media, is available pre-labeled with sequential bar-code
labels. Optional custom bar-code sequences can be ordered, if desired.
Each magazine holds up to 10 LTO or 9 SDLT cartridges. Maintenance
TeraPack magazines pre-loaded with Spectra Logic Certified cleaning
cartridges are also available.
For LTO-3 or LTO-4 data and cleaning cartridges, Spectra Logic
recommends that you use only MLM-enabled Spectra Logic Certified
Media to take advantage of the library’s Media Lifecycle Management
(MLM) features. See Chapter 7 – Media Lifecycle Management for
detailed information about using MLM to monitor the health of data
and cleaning cartridges.
You can read data from unencrypted LTO-2 or LTO-3 cartridges using
an encryption-enabled LTO-4 drive. You cannot write data to these
cartridges using an encryption-enabled LTO-4 drive.
123
If you plan to use Auto Drive Clean, the cleaning cartridges in the
cleaning partition must be identified with “CLN” at the beginning of
the bar-code sequence on their labels. This requirement applies to both
standard and custom bar-code labels. The cleaning cartridges must be
stored in Spectra Maintenance TeraPack magazines, which are
identified by Spectra-unique labels.
The library automatically prevents importing cleaning cartridges and
magazines that are not properly identified into a cleaning partition by
reopening the TAP door without moving the magazine into the
cleaning partition.
Important The cleaning cartridges in the cleaning partition are inaccessible to the application
software running on the host. Make sure you disable any automated drive cleaning
done by the software to prevent repeated requests to import a cleaning cartridge.
If your backup software supports automated drive cleaning and you

have not associated a cleaning partition with the data partition, store a
TeraPack magazine containing one or more cleaning cartridges in the
data partition’s storage pool. The backup software can then access the
cleaning cartridges when needed.
Before importing cartridges into the library, prepare and load the
individual cartridges into a TeraPack magazine as follows:
1. If your cartridges are unlabeled, prepare and affix a bar-code label to
each cartridge. Position each label in the indented area on the cartridge,
as illustrated in Figure 63. See Bar-Code Label Specifications for Half-
Inch Media on page 468 for detailed information about bar-code labels.
Note: Depending on the type of cartridge, the position of the label area
may differ from that shown in Figure 63.
bar-code label
Figure 63 Attach bar-code labels to cartridges and check write-protect

switch setting (LTO cartridge shown).
124
User Guide 91090000
Preparing Media for Use
2. Depending on whether you plan to write data to a cartridge or restore

data from a cartridge, make sure the write-protect switch on the
cartridge is set for the desired operation.
Note: Cleaning cartridges do not have a write-protect switch.
If the switch... the cartridge is...

does not cover the opening write-enabled. Data can be written to or read
from the tape.
does cover the opening write-protected. Data can be read from the tape.
Data cannot be written to or erased from the tape.
3. Insert the prepared cartridges into the magazine. Make sure that the
cartridges are oriented with the hub side toward the front of the
magazine.
Important Do not put data cartridges in a Maintenance TeraPack magazine. The Maintenance
TeraPack magazine, with properly labeled cleaning cartridges, can only be used in
a cleaning partition.
Cartridge bar-code label
Cartridge hub
Front of TeraPack magazine

(note textured surface on each side)
Alignment guides
Figure 64 Insert prepared cartridges into the TeraPack magazine

(LTO cartridges shown).
125
RXT Media
Important RXT drives and RXT media packs are supported as legacy devices. They are no
Depending on whether you plan to write data to the RXT media or restore
data from a the RXT media, set the write-protect switch for the desired
operation before you import the RXT media pack into library.
Bar-code label
Figure 65 Setting the RXT media pack write-protect switch.
To set the switch, use a small flat-head screwdriver to move the switch to
either the unlocked or locked position, as desired.
Icon Meaning Use
Unlocked Position the switch next to the Unlocked icon. Data can be
written to the pack.
Locked Position the switch next to the Locked icon. Data cannot be
written to the pack (that is, the pack is write-protected).
126
User Guide 91090000
Importing Media and Cleaning Cartridges
IMPORTING MEDIA AND CLEANING CARTRIDGES

This section provides instructions for the following import/export
procedures:
Overview of Import and Export Operations this page
Importing Media into the Entry/Exit Pool or page 128
a Cleaning Partition
Importing Media into the Entry/Exit Pool page 129
Importing Cleaning Cartridges into the page 132
Cleaning Partition
Importing Media into a New Partition page 135
Importing Media into the Storage Pool page 136
for a Partition
Preparing the Entry/Exit Pool (for Tape page 139
Media Only)
Overview of Import and Export Operations

Moving media into the library (importing) and out of the library (exporting)
are the primary interactions you will have with the physical library. Import
and export operations must always be performed from the local user
interface, either using the library touch screen or using a monitor, keyboard,
and mouse connected directly to the LCM (see Figure 8 on page 35).
Media includes both the TeraPack magazines and the individual cartridges
in them. It may also include RXT media packs and cleaning cartridges that
are periodically used during tape drive maintenance. Cartridges are
always imported and exported using a TeraPack magazine, whether you
are moving an individual cartridge or a group of cartridges.
Notes: You can only import TeraPack magazines or RXT media packs.
When you want to import a single cartridge, you must first put
the cartridge in a magazine, then import the magazine.
You cannot import media into a partition if the library is actively
running a PreScan™ or PostScan operation. You must pause
or stop the operation before you can continue.
Select Stop Discovery on the Media Lifecycle Management
Tools screen (see Figure 88 on page 175) to stop the
PreScan operation.
Select Pause PostScan on the Media Lifecycle
Management Tools screen (see Figure 88 on page 175) to
pause the PostScan operation for one hour.
127
The library automatically updates its physical inventory whenever media

is imported into a partition. However, the inventory maintained by the
backup software is not automatically updated when the library’s physical
inventory changes. Refer to your software documentation for information
about updating the inventory maintained by the software.
Importing Media into the Entry/Exit Pool or a Cleaning Partition

During normal operations, media is typically imported to the entry/exit
pool and then moved to the storage pool using your backup software. This
process ensures that the media inventory maintained by the backup
software is accurate.
When using the Auto Drive Clean option, Maintenance TeraPack
magazines containing one or more cleaning cartridges are imported
directly into the cleaning partition (see Importing Cleaning Cartridges into
the Cleaning Partition on page 132).
Before You Begin...

When importing media into the library, keep the following in mind:
A partition must already be created before you can import media into
it. See Chapter 9 – Using Partitions for detailed information about
creating data and cleaning partitions.
If you are importing media into a newly created partition, it is easier to
import media directly into the partition’s storage pool, as described in
Importing Media into a New Partition on page 135.
If your backup application requires all media import operations to be
performed using the entry/exit pool, use the steps in this section
instead.
Make sure that you import only the type of media for which the
partition is configured. Label each tape cartridge, TeraPack magazine,
and RXT media pack with a unique bar code.
The bar-code labels on Spectra Logic certified media contain
information about the media type. If you try to import the wrong media
type into a partition, the library rejects the media pack by reopening the
TAP door without moving the media pack to the specified location.
128
User Guide 91090000
Importing Media into the Entry/Exit Pool

When you import media into a partition’s entry/exit pool, the storage pool
must contain empty locations to accommodate the imported media. The
General Status screen (Figure 29 on page 80) shows the number of empty
slots available in the storage pool for the selected partition.
If you are importing tape media, the empty locations are empty slots in
magazines already in the storage pool. An empty slot is required for
each cartridge you plan to import.
If you are importing RXT media packs, the empty locations are
chambers in the storage pool. Each slot corresponds to one chamber.
If there are no empty locations available in the storage pool, first do one of
the following:
If the partition has empty chambers in the storage pool, import empty
TeraPack magazines into the storage pool (see Importing Media into the
Storage Pool for a Partition on page 136).
Use your backup software to eject media from the storage pool to the
entry/exit pool, then export the media from the library (see Exporting
Media from the Entry/Exit or Storage Pool on page 141).
Exchange a full magazine in the storage pool for one containing empty
slots (see Exchanging Media on page 143).
When the storage pool contains sufficient locations for the media you plan
to import, use the following steps to import the media packs into the entry/
exit pool for a selected partition.
1. Before beginning, have on hand the media that you want to import into
the partition. If necessary, prepare the media as described in Preparing
Media for Use on page 123.
Note: All users can import media into or export media from the entry/
exit pool.
129
3. From the toolbar menu, select General > Import/Export. The Import/
Export TeraPack Cases screen displays.
Notes: The General > Import/Export option is only available when
accessing the user interface from the library’s operator panel.
It is not available when accessing the library’s user interface
through a remote connection to the BlueScale web interface.
The options to import, export or, exchange media in the
storage pool are only available if you are logged in with
administrator or superuser privileges.
Figure 66 Importing media using the Import/Export TeraPack

Cases screen.
4. From the Partition drop-down list, select the partition into which you
want to import the media, then select Go.
The Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen refreshes to show the current
status of the chambers assigned to the selected partition.
5. Select Import next to the Empty Chambers in the Entry/Exit section of
the screen.
The TAP opens and a Feedback Required screen displays instructing
you to place a TeraPack in the TAP and close the door.
130
User Guide 91090000
6. Insert a media pack into the open TAP, making sure that it is oriented
correctly, as shown in Figure 67.
The alignment guides on each side of the media pack (see Figure 64 on
page 125) slide easily into the grooves on either side of the TAP
opening. If the media pack does not slide into place easily, remove and
reinsert it.
Texture
Handle
The textured surface on each side of a TeraPack The handle on the front of the RXT media pack faces
magazine faces outward, away from the library. outward, away from the library.
Figure 67 Correct insertion of a TeraPack magazine (left) and RXT media pack (right).
7. Manually raise the TAP door until it latches closed, moving the media
pack into the TAP.
Note: Close the TAP door firmly, but do not use force to close it.
8. Choose one of these options:
Continue—Choose this option if you plan to import another
magazine after the one currently in the TAP. The transporter
retrieves the magazine from the TAP and moves it to a chamber in
the entry/exit pool.
If there are still empty chambers available, the TAP door opens
again, ready for the next import.
Note: On a T680 library, the TAP doors alternate as you continue to
import media.
The import process continues automatically as long as there are
empty chambers available in the entry/exit pool. Simply continue to
insert magazines into the TAP and select Continue for each one.
When there are no empty chambers remaining, the process stops
automatically and the Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen
displays.
Stop Importing—Choose this option if the magazine you placed in
the TAP is the last one you will be importing.
131
9. Repeat Steps 6 through 8 to import the remaining magazines. The

import process continues until you choose the Stop Importing option or
there are no empty chambers left in the entry/exit pool (or storage
pool).
10. When you finish importing media packs into the entry/exit pool, use
your backup software to move the media to empty locations in the
partition’s storage pool and update the inventory maintained by the
software.
Note: If you are using tape media, leave at least one empty Terapack
magazine in the entry/exit port pool for future export operations.
If you are using RXT media, leave at least one empty chamber in
the entry/exit pool.
11. If you need to import more media than the entry/exit pool can
accommodate:
a. If necessary, exchange the empty magazines in the entry/exit pool
for full ones to import the next set of media packs into the entry/exit
pool (see Exchanging Media on page 143).
b. Repeat Step 5 through Step 10 until you have imported all of the
media into the storage pool. If you are using tape cartridges, leave
the last set of empty Terapack magazines in the entry/exit port pool.
Importing Cleaning Cartridges into the Cleaning Partition

The cleaning partition is a special-purpose partition that is only used with
the Auto Drive Clean option. Cleaning cartridges stored in the cleaning
partition are not accessible to the application software running on the host.
See Configuring a Cleaning Partition on page 236 for information about
creating and using a cleaning partition.
When importing cleaning cartridges into a cleaning partition, keep the
following in mind:
The cleaning cartridges in a cleaning partition can only be used for
drives in a data partition that is configured to use that cleaning
partition. Associating a cleaning partition with the drives in a data
partition enables the Auto Drive Clean feature for that partition.
Cleaning cartridges used in a cleaning partition must be stored in
Spectra Maintenance TeraPack magazines, which are identified by
Spectra-unique labels. The library automatically prevents importing
cleaning cartridges and magazines that are not properly identified into
a cleaning partition.
Note: Maintenance TeraPack magazines filled with appropriately
labeled cleaning cartridges are available from Spectra Logic.
Make sure the Maintenance TeraPack magazine does not contain any
data cartridges. The library rejects any Maintenance TeraPack magazine
containing data cartridges by reopening the TAP door without moving
the magazine into the cleaning partition.
132
User Guide 91090000
Make sure the cleaning cartridges are identified with “CLN” at the
beginning of the bar-code sequence on their labels. This requirement
applies to both standard and custom bar-code labels. The cleaning
cartridges must be stored in Spectra Maintenance TeraPack magazines,
which are identified by Spectra-unique labels.
Make sure that you import only cleaning cartridges that are compatible
with the tape drives in the data partition associated with the cleaning
partition. If you try to import the wrong cleaning cartridge type into a
cleaning partition, the library rejects the magazine by reopening the
TAP door without moving the magazine to the cleaning partition.
Use the following steps to import one or more Maintenance TeraPack
magazines containing properly labeled cleaning cartridges into the
cleaning partition.
1. Before beginning, have on hand the cleaning cartridges and properly
labeled magazines that you want to import into the cleaning partition.
If necessary, prepare the media as described in Preparing Media for Use
on page 123.
Note: The General > Import/Export option is only available when
accessing the user interface from the library operator panel. It is
not available when accessing the library using the BlueScale web
interface.
133
4. From the Partition drop-down list, select the cleaning partition into
which you want to import the cleaning cartridges, then select Go.
status of the chambers assigned to the selected cleaning partition.
Note: The Import, Export/Exchange, and Export/Exchange Expired
buttons on the Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen display
only if those actions can be performed given the current
inventory for the partition. For example, if the cleaning partition
does not contain any known-expired cleaning cartridges, the
Export/Exchange Expired button is not displayed.
Figure 68 Importing cleaning cartridges using the Import/

Export TeraPack Cases screen.
5. Select Import.
6. Insert a Maintenance TeraPack magazine into the open TAP, making
sure that it is oriented correctly (Figure 67 on page 131).
The alignment guides on each side of the magazine (see Figure 64 on
opening. If the magazine does not slide into place easily, remove and
reinsert it.
7. Manually raise the TAP door until it latches closed, moving the
magazine into the TAP.
134
User Guide 91090000

the cleaning partition.
import media.
empty chambers available in the cleaning partition. Simply continue
to insert magazines into the TAP and select Continue for each one.
When there are no empty chambers remaining, the process stops
automatically and the Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen
displays.
9. Repeat Steps 6 through 8 to import the remaining Maintenance
TeraPack magazines. The import process continues until you choose the
Stop Importing option or there are no empty chambers left in the
cleaning partition.
Importing Media into a New Partition

Unless otherwise required by your backup software, the first time media is
loaded into a partition, it is easiest to import the filled TeraPack magazines
or RXT media packs directly to the storage pool for the data partition. This
process is often referred to as “bulk import.” For subsequent imports, the
media is typically imported to the entry/exit pool and then moved to the
storage pool for the data partition using your backup software.
After media is imported into a partition’s storage pool, it is available for
immediate use by the backup software. Any chambers in the storage pool
that do not contain media are inaccessible to the backup software.
Note: If your backup software requires you to use the software to
perform all media imports, use the steps in Importing Media
into the Entry/Exit Pool or a Cleaning Partition on page 128 to
import the media into the entry/exit pool. Use your backup
software to move the media from the entry/exit pool to the
storage pool.
135
Importing Media into the Storage Pool for a Partition

When importing media into the storage pool for a data partition, keep the
following in mind:
Only a superuser or administrator can import media directly into the
storage pool.
Make sure that you import only the type of media for which the
partition is configured. Label each tape cartridge, TeraPack magazine,
and RXT media pack with a unique bar code.
The bar-code labels on Spectra Logic certified media contains
information about the media type. If you try to import the wrong type
of media into a partition, the library rejects the media pack by
reopening the TAP door without moving the media pack to the
specified location.
During normal operation, the backup software maintains its own
media inventory when performing backup/restore operations and
media management. To avoid errors when the backup software
requests a specific piece of media, be sure to use your backup software
to update its media inventory whenever you import media directly into
the storage pool.
Use the following steps to load media packs (TeraPack magazines or RXT
media packs) directly into the storage pool for a selected data partition.
1. Before beginning, have on hand the media you plan to import. If
necessary, prepare the media as described in Preparing Media for Use
on page 123.
If you are loading media into a partition for the first time, the maximum
number of media packs required equals the number of chambers
assigned to the storage pool for the partition (see Configuring a New
Data Partition on page 209). You do not necessarily need to fill all
chambers, but any empty chambers will be inaccessible to the backup
software.
Note: If desired, any magazines you import can have empty slots in
them. These slots are then available to the backup software and
can be used for moving media from the entry/exit pool into the
storage pool.
136
User Guide 91090000
accessing the user interface from the library front panel. It is not
available when accessing the library using the BlueScale web
interface.
Figure 69 The Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen (no

media imported).
Note: The Import and Export/Exchange buttons on the Import/Export

TeraPack Cases screen display only if those actions can be
performed given the current inventory for the partition. For
example, if all chambers in a partition are empty, the Export/
Exchange button is not displayed.
want to import the media packs, then select Go.
5. Select Import next to the Empty Chambers in the Storage section of the
screen.
6. Insert a media pack into the open TAP, making sure that it is correctly
oriented, as shown in Figure 67 on page 131.
reinsert it.
137
the storage pool for the selected data partition.
import media.
empty chambers available in the storage pool. Simply continue to
insert media packs into the TAP and select Continue for each one.
When there are no empty chambers remaining in the partition, the
process stops automatically and the Import/Export TeraPack Cases
screen displays.
Note: Chambers in the partition’s storage pool that do not contain a
magazine are inaccessible to the backup software.
9. Repeat Steps 6 through 8 to import the remaining TeraPack magazines.
The import process continues until you choose the Stop Importing
option or there are no empty chambers left in the storage pool.
10. After you finish importing media packs, use your backup software to
update the media inventory it maintains (see Updating the Media
Inventory on page 154).
11. Proceed to Preparing the Entry/Exit Pool (for Tape Media Only) to load
one or more empty magazines into the entry/exit pool for the partition.
Note: Exporting one or more individual cartridges using your backup
software requires a TeraPack magazine with sufficient empty
slots to be present in the entry/exit pool.
138
User Guide 91090000
Preparing the Entry/Exit Pool (for Tape Media Only)

When backup software ejects media from a partition, the media is not
immediately exported from the library. Instead, the library moves the
ejected media into empty slots in a TeraPack magazine stored in the
partition’s entry/exit pool. The TeraPack magazines can then be physically
exported from the library whenever it is convenient.
After loading tape media into a partition for the first time, make sure that
the entry/exit pool contains at least one empty TeraPack magazine so that
cartridges ejected by the backup software can be stored there. Over the
course of time, normal operations will typically result in the entry/exit pool
containing at least one magazine.
If the entry/exit pool does not contain a magazine with an empty slot, the
backup software will halt its eject operation. Exchange the full magazines
in the entry/exit pool for empty ones, as described in Exchanging Media on
page 143, before retrying the eject operation.
Use the following steps to import one or more empty TeraPack magazines
into a partition’s entry/exit pool.
1. Before beginning, have on hand one or more empty TeraPack
magazines. The maximum number of empty magazines required
corresponds to the number of chambers in the entry/exit pool.
3. If it is not already displayed, access the Import/Export TeraPack Cases
screen from the General toolbar (see Step 3 of Importing Media into the
Storage Pool for a Partition on page 136).
want to import the empty magazines, then select Go.
5. Select Import (Entry/Exit).
The TAP opens and a Feedback Required screen displays on the user
interface.
6. Insert an empty magazine into the open TAP, making sure that it is
oriented correctly (see Figure 67 on page 131).
reinsert it.
139

retrieves the magazine from the TAP and moves it to the entry/exit
pool for the partition.
import media.
empty entry/exit pool chambers to fill. Simply continue to insert
magazines into the TAP and select Continue for each one. When there
are no empty chambers remaining, the process stops automatically
and the Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen displays.
9. Repeat Steps 6 through 8 to import the remaining magazines. The
import process continues until you choose the Stop Importing option or
there are no empty chambers left in the entry/exit pool.
EXPORTING OR EXCHANGING MEDIA

This section provides instructions for exporting or exchanging media. The
process for exporting or exchanging media depends on whether the media
is in a data partition or in a cleaning partition.

Exporting or Exchanging Media in a Data page 141
Partition
Exchanging Media page 143
Exporting or Exchanging Cartridges in a page 144
Cleaning Partition
Note: You cannot export media from a partition if the library is actively
running a PreScan or PostScan operation. You must pause or
stop the operation before you can continue.
Select Stop Discovery on the Media Lifecycle Management
Tools screen (see Figure 88 on page 175) to stop the PreScan
operation.
Select Pause PostScan on the Media Lifecycle Management
Tools screen (see Figure 88 on page 175) to pause the
PostScan operation for one hour.
140
User Guide 91090000
Exporting or Exchanging Media
Exporting or Exchanging Media in a Data Partition

The export functionality is used to export (remove) one or more magazines
or RXT media packs from the library (see Exporting Media from the Entry/
Exit or Storage Pool). You can also use the export functionality to exchange
one magazine or RXT media pack for another one (see Exchanging Media
on page 143).
Exporting Media from the Entry/Exit or Storage Pool

Exporting media from a data partition is a multi-stage process:
1. The backup software exports the cartridge(s) or RXT media from the
partition and removes it from its inventory. From the software
perspective, this step corresponds to opening the entry/exit port and
removing the media. The media is no longer available for use.
2. The library automatically moves the exported media to the partition’s
entry/exit pool. Cartridges are placed in empty slots of a TeraPack
magazine already stored in the entry/exit pool; RXT media packs
occupy an entire chamber in the entry/exit pool.
3. The media in the entry/exit pool can then be exported to the TAP using
controls on the Import/Export TeraPack screen of the user interface.
If you know where the media you want to export is located in the library,
you can export it directly from the storage pool to the TAP. See Locate the
Desired Media on page 150 for information about locating media in the
library.
Notes: Exporting media directly from the storage pool is not the
recommended procedure, unless you are exporting all of the
media from a partition. This process is often referred to as
“bulk export.”
Only a superuser or administrator can export or exchange
media directly from the storage pool.
If you do choose to export a portion of the media in a
partition directly from the storage pool, be sure to use your
backup software to update its media inventory after
completing the export (see Updating the Media Inventory on
page 154).
Use the following steps to export media from the library.
1. Eject the desired media from the partition’s storage pool using the
backup software. The library moves the ejected media from the storage
pool into the partition’s entry/exit pool. When the software reports that
the eject operation is complete, proceed to Step 2.
2. Log into the library as either a superuser or administrator.
141
3. Select General > Import/Export from the toolbar menu on the library’s
user interface. The Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen displays.
accessing the user interface from the library’s front panel. It is
interface.
Figure 70 Exporting/exchanging media using the Import/

4. From the Partition drop-down list, select the partition containing the
media you want to export, then select Go.
Note: The Import and Export/Exchange buttons on the Import/Export
TeraPack Cases screen display only if those actions can be
performed given the current inventory for the partition. For
example, if all chambers in a partition are empty, the Export/
Exchange button is not displayed.
5. Depending on where the media you want to remove from the library is
located, select the Export/Exchange for either the storage pool or the
entry/exit pool.
The transporter retrieves the media pack from the specified pool and
places it in the TAP. The TAP door opens and a Feedback Required
screen displays.
6. Remove the media pack from the TAP.
7. Manually raise the TAP door until it latches closed.
142
User Guide 91090000

Continue—Choose this option if you plan to export another
magazine after the one you just removed from the TAP. The TAP
doors alternate as you continue to export media.
export media.
The export process continues automatically as long as there are
magazines left in the entry/exit pool. Simply continue to remove
magazines from the TAP and select Continue for each one.
Note: The magazines are exported in bar code order from the lowest to
the highest.
When all of the magazines in the partition have been exported, the
process stops automatically and the user interface redisplays the
Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen.
Stop Exporting—Choose this option if the magazine you removed
from the TAP is the last one you will be exporting.
9. Repeat Steps 6 through 8 to export the remaining magazines. The
export process continues until you choose the Stop Exporting option or
there are no magazines left in the entry/exit pool (or storage pool).
10. If you exported media directly from the storage pool, use your backup
software to update the media inventory it maintains (see Updating the
Media Inventory on page 154).
Exchanging Media
The process for exchanging media is the same as for exporting media,
except that you replace the media pack you remove with a new one of the
same type before closing the TAP door.
You can also use the exchange option to move an individual cartridge
directly to or from the storage pool without using the entry/exit pool. This
is especially useful when you need to import a cleaning cartridge during
tape drive maintenance. When the TeraPack magazine containing the
desired cartridge is delivered to the TAP, do the following:
1. Follow Steps 1 through 4 in the previous section to select the magazine
containing the cartridge you want to exchange and move it to the TAP.
2. Remove the magazine from the TAP.
3. Exchange one or more cartridges in the magazine for others of the same
type (or for an appropriate cleaning cartridge).
143
4. Return the magazine to the open TAP, making sure that it is correctly
reinsert it.
5. Close the TAP door.
Continue—Choose this option if you plan to exchange another
magazine after the one you just removed from the TAP.
export media.
magazines left in the storage pool. Simply continue to remove
magazines from the TAP and select Continue for each one.
Note: The magazines are exported in bar code order from the lowest to
the highest.
When all of the magazines in the partition have been exported, the
process stops automatically and the user interface redisplays the
Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen.
from the TAP is the last one you will be exchanging.
export process continues until you choose the Stop Exporting option or
there are no magazines left in the entry/exit pool (or storage pool).
8. If you exchanged one cartridge for another, be sure to update your
backup software’s media inventory (see Updating the Media Inventory
on page 154).
Exporting or Exchanging Cartridges in a Cleaning Partition

The steps for exporting or exchanging cleaning cartridges in a cleaning
partition are the same as for a data partition, except that the Maintenance
TeraPack magazine containing the cleaning cartridges is moved directly to
the TAP.
Use the following steps to export or exchange cleaning cartridges in a
cleaning partition.
144
User Guide 91090000
2. Select General > Import/Export from the toolbar menu on the library’s
user interface. The Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen displays
(Figure 70 on page 142).
accessing the user interface from the library operator panel. It is
interface.
3. From the Partition drop-down list, select the cleaning partition
containing the cleaning cartridges you want to export or exchange, then
select Go.
status of the chambers assigned to the selected cleaning partition.
Note: The Import, Export/Exchange, and Export/Exchange Expired
buttons on the Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen display
only if those actions can be performed given the current
inventory for the partition. For example, if the cleaning partition
does not contain any known-expired cleaning cartridges, the
Export/Exchange Expired button is not displayed.
Figure 71 Exporting/exchanging cleaning using the Import/

4. Select the Export/Exchange or Export/Exchange Expired.

The transporter retrieves a magazine from the cleaning partition and
places it in the TAP. The TAP door opens and a Feedback Required
screen displays. If you selected Export/Exchange Expired, the feedback
screen tells you which cartridge to remove from the magazine.
5. Remove the magazine from the TAP.
If you are removing the entire Maintenance magazine of cleaning
cartridges from the cleaning partition and will not be replacing it,
skip to Step 8.
If you are replacing an expired cleaning cartridge, remove the
expired cleaning cartridge from the slot indicated in the feedback
screen and replace it with a new one of the same type.
145
6. Return the magazine to the open TAP, making sure that it is correctly
Continue—Choose this option if you removed the expired cleaning
cartridge and did not replace it with a new cartridge. Also choose
this option if you removed or exchanged the a magazine.
Note: If you exchanged an expended cleaning cartridge for a new one
and chose Continue, select Ok in response to a message stating
that the slot containing the exchanged cartridge should be
empty.
magazines left in the cleaning partition. Simply continue to remove
or exchange magazines and select Continue for each one.
When of the all magazines in the cleaning partition have been
exported or exchanged, the process stops automatically and the user
interface redisplays the Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen.
Override—Choose this option if you exchanged an expired cleaning
cartridge in the magazine for a new one.
from the TAP is the last one you will be exchanging.
export/exchange process continues until you choose the Stop Exporting
option or there are no magazines left in the cleaning partition.
146
User Guide 91090000
Importing Media To or Exporting Media From a Specific Location
IMPORTING MEDIA TO OR EXPORTING MEDIA FROM A SPECIFIC

LOCATION
Use the following steps to import a media pack (TeraPack magazine or RXT
media pack) into or export it from a specific chamber in the library using
the TAP. You can only import or export media packs. You cannot import or
export individual cartridges.
1. If necessary, place the prepared cartridge(s) you want to import in an
empty TeraPack magazine.
2. Log into the library as a superuser or administrator.
Export TeraPack Cases screen displays (Figure 69 on page 137).
accessing the user interface from the library’s operator panel. It is
not available when accessing the library’s user interface through
the BlueScale web interface.
4. From the Partition drop-down list, select the partition into which or
from which you want to import or export the media pack, then select
Go.
5. Select Advanced. The Advanced Import/Export screen displays.
Note: To return to the basic Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen,
select Basic.
Figure 72 The Advanced Import/Export screen.
6. From the Chamber drop-down list, select the chamber into which or
from which you want to move the media pack, then select Go.
The screen refreshes to display the status of the selected chamber. If the
chamber contains a magazine, the status shows the contents of each slot
in the magazine.
147
7. From the Direction drop-down list (shown in Figure 73), select the
direction you want to move the media pack, then select Go.
Direction of Move
Figure 73 Select the Advanced Import/Export direction.
The available destinations depend on the type of partition selected.
Partition Type Available Sources

Data TAP > Storage—Move the media pack from the TAP to the storage pool.
Storage > TAP—Move the media pack in the selected storage pool chamber
to the TAP.
TAP > EE—Move the media pack from the TAP to the entry/exit pool.
EE > TAP—Move the media pack in the selected entry/exit pool chamber to
the TAP.
Cleaning TAP > Storage—Move the TeraPack magazine from the TAP to the cleaning
partition.
Storage > TAP—Move the TeraPack magazine in the selected cleaning
partition chamber to the TAP.
148
User Guide 91090000
Importing Media To or Exporting Media From a Specific Location
8. Select Add Move. An entry listing the move you just defined appears in
the Move Queue.
Select Add Move to add the

defined move to the Move
Queue.
Figure 74 Add the move to the Move Queue.
9. Repeat Step 6 through Step 8 if you want to perform additional moves.

10. Select Start Moves to begin the moves in the order that they are listed in
the Move Queue.
Select Delete to delete a selected move from the Move Queue list.
Select Delete All to delete all of the defined moves from the Move
Queue list.
11. The TAP door opens. Insert a media pack into the TAP or remove a
media pack from the TAP.
A progress screen tracks the progress of each move operation. When
the move is complete, the library updates its media inventory and the
screen displays the status of the completed move.
13. If you imported media packs directly into or exported them from the
storage pool, be sure to use your backup software to update its media
inventory after completing the export (see Updating the Media
Inventory on page 154).
149
MOVING MEDIA WITHIN A PARTITION

During normal operations, you typically use your backup software to
move media (tape cartridges or RXT media packs) from one location to
another within the library. However, you may occasionally need to use the
library’s user interface to locate and move an individual cartridge (for
example, to move a cleaning cartridge to a tape drive if you are not using
the Auto Drive Clean option).
Note: If a cleaning partition is associated with the data partition, use
the Clean button on the Drives screen to move a cleaning
cartridge from the cleaning partition to a drive (see Manually
Cleaning a Tape Drive on page 411).
Locate the Desired Media

1. Identify the media you want to move (for example, by determining its
bar-code label) and the partition in which it resides.
3. From the library user interface, select General > Inventory. The
Inventory screen displays (Figure 61 on page 121).
4. If the media is in a partition other than the one currently displayed,
select the desired partition from the Partition drop-down list, then
select Go.
The Source pane refreshes to display a list of the media in the requested
location type. The list shows the name of the location (for example, the
slot number) and the bar-code label information for the media in that
location.
150
User Guide 91090000
Moving Media Within a Partition
5. Select the source of the media you want to move. You can select the
media either by selecting it from the Source list, by entering its bar
code, or by entering the slot number where it is located.
List media
by source
Figure 75 Select the Source of the media you want to move.
To select using the Source list:

a. Choose the source type from the Source drop-down list (see
Figure 75) and select Go to refresh the list of media in the selected
source type. The available sources depend on the type of partition
selected.

Data Storage—The media currently in the selected partition’s storage pool.
Entry/Exit—The media currently in the partition’s entry/exit pool.
Drives—The drives assigned to the partition that currently contain media.
From TAP—Moves the magazine containing the destination slot to the TAP,
prompts you to place a cartridge in that slot, and returns the magazine to its
original location.
Note: The From Tap option is only available when accessing the user interface
from the front panel.
All—All the media assigned to the partition, regardless of its location.
Cleaning Cleaning—The cleaning cartridges currently in the selected cleaning
partition.
From TAP—Moves the magazine containing the destination slot to the TAP,
prompts you to place a cartridge in that slot, and returns the magazine to its
original location.
Note: The From Tap option is only available when accessing the user interface
from the front panel.
All—All the media assigned to the partition, regardless of its location.
b. Scroll through the list and select the desired cartridge.
151
To select using a slot number:

a. Enter the slot number for the cartridge you want to move in the View
Source Slot field.
b. Select Go. The Source inventory list refreshes to show the requested
slot selected at the top of the Source list.
To select using the bar-code label information:
a. Enter the bar-code label information for the cartridge you want to
locate in the Find by Barcode field.
Notes: Make sure that you type the bar-code label information
correctly to avoid selecting the wrong cartridge.
Only the slots below the one that is currently highlighted in
the source list are searched. To ensure that all of the slots are
searched, scroll to the top of the source list and highlight the
first slot before selecting Find.
b. Select Find. The Source inventory list refreshes to show the
requested cartridge selected at the top of the Source list.
Move the Media

Use the following steps to move the media from one location to another
within the partition.
1. Select the media you want to move as described in Locate the Desired
Media.
2. From the Destination drop-down list, select the type of location to
which you want to move the media, then select Go.
Available destinations
Figure 76 Select the Destination for a media move.
152
User Guide 91090000
Moving Media Within a Partition
The available destinations depend on the type of partition selected.

Data Storage—Move the media to the selected location in the selected partition’s
storage pool.
Entry/Exit—Move the media to the selected location in the selected partition’s
entry/exit pool.
To TAP—Moves the magazine containing the source slot to the TAP, prompts
you to remove the cartridge from that slot, and returns the magazine to its
original location.
Note: The To Tap option is only available when accessing the user interface from
the front panel.
Drives—Move the media to the selected drive in the partition.
All—List all available destinations in the partition, regardless of the type.
Selecting a specific destination type instead of using All displays fewer items
through which you must scroll to locate the desired media.
Cleaning Cleaning—Move the selected cleaning cartridges currently in the selected
cleaning partition.
To TAP—Moves the magazine containing the source slot to the TAP, prompts
you to remove the cartridge from that slot, and returns the magazine to its
original location.
Note: The To Tap option is only available when accessing the user interface from
the front panel.
All—List all available destinations in the partition, regardless of the type.
Selecting a specific destination type instead of using All displays fewer items
through which you must scroll to locate the desired media.
3. The Destination list refreshes to show the locations of the selected type
that are empty and available.
4. Select the desired destination from the Destination list.
153
5. Select Add Move. An entry listing the move you just defined appears in
the Move Queue.
Select Add Move to add

the defined move to the
Move Queue.
Figure 77 Add the move to the Move Queue.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if you want to move additional media.

7. Select Start Moves to begin the media moves in the order that they are
listed in the Move Queue.
Select Delete to delete a selected move from the Move Queue list.
Select Delete All to delete all of the defined moves from the Move
Queue list.
A progress screen tracks the progress of the move operation. When the
move is complete, the screen displays the status of the completed move.
8. When the move is complete, use your backup software to update the
inventory it maintains, if necessary (see Updating the Media
Inventory).
UPDATING THE MEDIA INVENTORY

As the library imports or exports media, it reads the bar-code labels on the
individual cartridges and the TeraPack magazines and automatically
updates the physical inventory that it maintains in on the LCM compact
flash card. This process does not automatically update the media inventory
maintained and used by the backup software.
After you finish importing media into or exporting media from a
partition’s storage pool, or if you use the library’s user interface to move
media from one location to another, use your backup software to update
the inventory it maintains. Refer to your software documentation for more
information.
154
User Guide 91090000
Chapter 7
Media Lifecycle Management
This chapter describes how to use BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management
(MLM) to proactively monitor and report on the health of media in your
library.

BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management page 156
Overview
Media Lifecycle Management Best Practices page 161
Configuring Media Lifecycle Management page 164
Configure Global Settings page 164
Configuring Media Auto Discovery page 166
Displaying MLM Capacity as Broadcast page 168
Capacity
Configuring PostScan Blackout Periods page 169
Getting Started with Using Media Lifecycle page 171
Management
Media Requirements page 171
Initiating or Stopping Media Discovery page 173
Using Media Lifecycle Management page 175
Generating Media Lifecycle Management page 175
Reports
Saving an MLM Report page 179
Using MLM PreScan and PostScan page 181
Managing the MLM Database page 187
Backing Up the MLM Database page 187
Restoring the MLM Database page 190
Deleting Records From the MLM Database page 191
Downloading the MLM Database as a CSV page 192
File
155
Chapter 7 — Media Lifecycle Management
BLUESCALE MEDIA LIFECYCLE MANAGEMENT OVERVIEW

This section provides an overview of how BlueScale Media Lifecycle
Management (MLM) works in your library. The remainder of the chapter
provides detailed information about configuring and using MLM.
BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management (MLM) helps you manage your
tape media by giving you tools to pro-actively detect potential media
errors well before they happen—all consolidated within the same
application you use to manage your library. When used in combination
with Spectra Logic Certified Media with MLM support, MLM lets you
manage, track, and report all facets of tape usage from creation to
retirement.
Note: Media Lifecycle Management is only supported for LTO-4 tape
drives using Spectra Certified Media with MLM support (LTO-3
and higher data cartridges and LTO cleaning cartridges) shipped
on or after November 15, 2007.
MLM maintains a database of all the LTO cartridges in the library. The
information in the database is used to monitor the health of the cartridges
and generate a variety of reports. If desired, you can save the reports to a
USB drive or email them to a previously configured mail user.
In addition to tracking media health and generating reports, MLM displays
a Filled Capacity bar graph on the General Status screen. This graph shows
you the remaining uncompressed storage capacity for the MLM-enabled
media in the entire library or in a specific partition. Click on the Filled
Capacity bar graph to view the Media Lifecycle Management Report
screen (Figure 89 on page 177).
Note: Until an MLM-enabled cartridge is discovered, either by Media
Auto Discovery or by loading it into a tape drive the first time
and then unloading it, the cartridge capacity is not included on
the Filled Capacity bar graph.
Filled capacity
Figure 78 The General Status screen showing the media capacity for
the selected partition.
156
User Guide 91090000
BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management Overview
Spectra-Certified Media with MLM-Support

Media Lifecycle Management starts with packaged, bar-code labeled,
Spectra Certified Media with MLM support (LTO-3 and higher data
cartridges and LTO cleaning cartridges). Before shipment, Spectra Logic
writes baseline data to the MAM (Medium Auxiliary Memory) embedded
in each cartridge. Throughout its life, the cartridge continually collects data
on its MAM, enabling it to support MLM tracking and reporting.
Media Auto Discovery

The Media Auto Discovery feature is a background process that inserts
each newly imported LTO cartridge into an MLM-capable tape drive and
determines whether it is MLM-enabled. If the cartridge is MLM-enabled,
the library records the MLM information into both the MLM database and
the Media Auxiliary Memory (MAM) in the cartridge. When the drive
unloads the cartridge, the library returns it to its original location. The
discovery process is independent of any backup application.
Note: If the MLM PreScan™ feature is enabled in a partition, that
process runs instead of the Media Auto Discovery process. See
Using PreScan on page 181 for more information.
See the following sections for detailed information about configuring and
using Media Auto Discovery.
This section Provides...

Configuring Media Auto Discovery Detailed information about how Media Auto Discovery feature
on page 166 operates and instructions for enabling it.
Notes:
If Media Auto Discovery is not enabled, the discovery
process can be launched manually (see Using PreScan on
page 181).
If neither discovery process is used, the library discovers
each cartridge the first time the it is loaded into and
unloaded from an MLM-capable tape drive during normal
operation. The library then records all of the MLM
information to the cartridge MAM and the MLM database.
Initiating or Stopping Media Detailed instructions for manually starting and pausing the
Discovery on page 173 Media Auto Discovery process.
157
MLM Tracking and Reporting

MLM uses the information from the cartridge’s MAM to maintain a
database of information about each cartridge in the library. The
information in the MLM databases gives you vital statistical and diagnostic
information that helps you proactively manage your tape media
throughout its life. MLM media tracking and reporting lets you review
important health information about every MLM-enabled data cartridge
and cleaning cartridge in your library. You can generate comprehensive
health reports for the media in the whole library or in an individual
partition. You can also generate more detailed reports with information
about compression ratios, load counts, write errors, remaining capacity,
encryption status, and more.
MLM reports helps you identify tapes with high error rates or other
problems (for example, a dropped leader pin). These tapes can then be
removed before they cause data corruption. Use MLM to help identify
tapes that pose a risk to protecting your data and remove them before a
problem occurs. See Generating Media Lifecycle Management Reports on
page 175 for detailed information about the types of reports you can
generate.
Important Media and cleaning cartridges that are not MLM-enabled do not appear in MLM
reports unless the keyed Media Check option is enabled.
Data Cartridges
Each time a Spectra Certified MLM-enabled data cartridge is loaded into a
tape drive, MLM records over 30 data points about the cartridge. These
data points include health information, the cartridge age, how many times
it has been loaded and into which drives, and how many errors it has
accumulated. It also records when the cartridge is exported from the
library and by whom. MLM uses a unique identifier that allows each
cartridge to be tracked throughout its life, even if its bar-code label is
damaged or removed.
In addition to media health, the library uses information in the MLM
database to determine Remaining Capacity for the selected partition. If the
partition contains non-MLM-enabled media, the capacity shown for the
library only represents what is available on the MLM-enabled media.
158
User Guide 91090000
BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management Overview
Cleaning Cartridges
With Spectra Certified MLM-enabled LTO cleaning cartridges, the library
tracks and reports usage information, which includes the number of
Cleans Remaining and the cartridge health (good, near expiration or
expired). These reports alert you when a cleaning cartridge is nearing the
end of its useful life so that you can have another on hand to replace it. See
Configuring Media Lifecycle Management for information about setting
the threshold for generating the notification.
When you use MLM-enabled cleaning cartridges in a cleaning partition,
the usage information is retained in the MLM database even when the
cleaning cartridge is exported from the library. The MLM database does
not contain any information about cleaning cartridges that are not MLM-
enabled. However, the library marks an expired cleaning cartridge in its
inventory and no further usage is attempted. If an expired cleaning
cartridge that is not MLM-enable is exported from the partition and then
reimported or if the LCM is reset, the library must rediscover that the
cleaning cartridge is expired.
MLM PreScan and PostScan

MLM PreScan and PostScan™ are a keyed set of configurable background
processes that use an LTO-4 tape drive to provide two levels of verification
for LTO data cartridges. Contact your Spectra Logic sales representative if
you want to use of these features. See Enter the Activation or BlueScale
Software Support Key on page 271 for information about entering the key
to enable this option.
Both PreScan and PostScan generate system messages as possible error
conditions are detected (for example, a broken leader or a media error).
The messages indicate that the error condition was detected by the PreScan
or PostScan process and not during normal operation.
The two levels of verification are enabled and configured separately as part
of the data partition creation process. See the following sections for
detailed information about configuring and using the PreScan and
PostScan features:

Configuring PostScan Detailed instructions for configuring the PostScan blackout periods.
Blackout Periods on page 169 These blackout periods apply to all partitions that are configured to
use the PostScan feature.
Using PreScan on page 181 Detailed information about how the PreScan feature operates. This
section also provides instructions for manually starting and stopping
the PreScan process.
159

Using PostScan on page 182 Detailed information about how the PostScan feature operates. This
section also provides instructions for manually adding a tape to the
PostScan queue and pausing the currently running PostScan process.
Configure Global Spare Tape Information about configuring a Global Spare drive. A Global Spare
Drives on page 213 drive must be configured for the partition before PostScan can be used.
Configure MLM PreScan and Detailed information about enabling and configuring the settings for
PostScan on page 217 PreScan and PostScan in each partition.
Configuring a Cleaning Information about using a cleaning partition for use with the Global
Partition on page 236 Spare drive used to perform PostScan operations.
Additional MLM Features

In addition to the features described in the previous sections, MLM
provides the following features (listed in alphabetical order):
Broadcast Capacity The Broadcast Capacity option displays MLM capacity
using broadcast-centric hours of programming used and hours of
programing remaining instead of raw capacity (see Displaying MLM
Capacity as Broadcast Capacity on page 168).
Media Alert The Media Alert feature generates a system message when a
tape’s health is identified as poor (red) during five consecutive loads. This
message is only generated once per tape. A separate system message is
generated whenever a cartridge experiences a hard error.
MLM Database Management The maximum number of records in the
MLM database is restricted to 10 times the maximum number of cartridges
in the library (for example, the MLM database in a T680 library is 6800).
When this limit is reached, records are automatically deleted on a first-in,
first-out (FIFO) basis.
When a tape is retired or permanently exported from the library, its record
can be deleted from the MLM database. Records can be deleted
individually or as a group (see Deleting Records From the MLM Database
on page 191).
If desired, the information in the MLM database can be exported to a
comma-separated value (CSV) file, which can then be imported into
Microsoft® Excel® or other software applications that support this file type
(see Downloading the MLM Database as a CSV File on page 192).
Tracking Non-MLM-Enabled Media New libraries include a keyed Media
Check option to display the basic MLM health information for LTO-2,
LTO-3, and LTO-4 media that is not MLM-enabled. This basic health media
health information (Usable or Impaired) is based on tape log data obtained
by an LTO-2, LTO-3, or LTO-4 drive. The Media Check option is also
included for existing libraries that upgrade to BlueScale 11.
160
User Guide 91090000
Media Lifecycle Management Best Practices
The keyed Media Check option must be enabled before the media health
information appears in Media Lifecycle Management reports. See Enter the
Activation or BlueScale Software Support Key on page 271 for information
about entering the key to enable this option.
MEDIA LIFECYCLE MANAGEMENT BEST PRACTICES

To effectively use MLM and ensure data protection, plan a strategy based
on your data center needs and develop policies and procedures to support
that strategy. Having sound management policies and procedures for
media rotation and management is essential for consistent, effective
implementation.
Following the Best MLM Practices

Consider the following best practice guidelines as you prepare to
implement MLM in your environment.
Guideline Description
Identify the people responsible The people who perform data backup at your site are typically
for backing up data the ones who will be responsible for implementing and
following MLM procedures.
Identify the users who will have It may be wise to have more than a single user familiar with
responsibilities that involve policies, depending on the size of your organization, so that if
MLM one person is not available, another can take over.
Be consistent with partition Using consistent naming simplifies identifying a specific
names partition. Spectra’s suggested naming practice is to list the
location, followed by the library name, followed by the
backup software. For example, Dallas/T680/Netbackup.
On an organizational level, The level of media management depends on the requirements
determine the level of for your environment. For example, you may choose to use
management your media Spectra’s guidelines for retirement for all media, or you may
requires choose to retire tapes that hold financial or legal data sooner
than recommended. See the Error and Warning health scores
in Generating Media Lifecycle Management Reports on
page 175 for information on when cartridges should be
retired.
161
Establishing Good MLM Policies

Consider the following guidelines when establishing your Media Lifecycle
Management polices.
Choose a retirement guideline When implementing MLM, decide at the beginning on the criteria to
be used when determining when to retire a cartridge.
Spectra suggests using the Media Lifecycle Management health
icon, visible on the MLM Reports screen and on the Details screen
(Figure 90 on page 179) for each tape, to assess the overall health of
individual tapes. See Generating Media Lifecycle Management
Reports on page 175 for information about using the health icon to
assess media health.
Only use MLM-enabled media For the most accurate tracking, do not import your MLM-enabled
and cleaning cartridges in media into non-Spectra Logic libraries or drive generations lower
MLM-compatible libraries and than LTO-4. The cartridge MAM will not be updated with
tape drives information about usage in those locations. As a result, the
information about usage in those locations will not be recorded in
the MLM database when the cartridge is returned to your library.
Use only Spectra Certified The library uses information in the MLM database to monitor the
Media with MLM support (both health of the media in the library. Although the keyed Media Check
data and cleaning cartridges) in option provides a general indicator of media health, detailed health
the library information is not available for non-MLM-enabled media. In the
case of data cartridges, this means that you cannot use MLM
reporting to determine whether that media is past its useful
threshold or determine whether a particular cartridge is
experiencing high errors rates or retries. For cleaning cartridges, this
means that you will not be notified when a cartridge is approaching
the end of its useful life.
Always operate the library with If you disable and then re-enable Media Lifecycle Management, any
Media Lifecycle Management loads, reads, writes, errors, and any other tape related events that
enabled occur while MLM is disabled are not recorded in the MLM
database.
162
User Guide 91090000
Media Lifecycle Management Best Practices
Enable load count alerts Load count alerts, used in combination with the media health icon,
let you monitor the health of individual tapes. Tapes with low load
counts, but with a yellow or red health icon are vulnerable to high
errors rates or retries.
For higher levels of notification, configure a threshold for the
maximum number of times a data cartridge can be loaded before an
alert is generated (see Configuring Media Lifecycle Management on
page 164). When the number of loads exceeds this threshold, MLM
will generates a system message listing the barcode of the tape.
You can also enable an alert to notify you when the load count
recorded on the cartridge MAM differs from the load count stored
in the MLM database but none of the other data has changed. This
type of discrepancy can indicate that the tape has been loaded into a
non-Spectra Logic library. Use this alert as a security feature to let
you know when a tape was removed and loaded into a drive in a
different library.
Regularly back up your MLM Determine how frequently to export the MLM database for storage.
database You can save the MLM database to a USB drive or email it to a
previously configured mail recipient. The database can be loaded
back into the library in the event of an error. See Backing Up the
MLM Database on page 187 and Restoring the MLM Database on
page 190 for detailed information. See Configuring Mail Users on
page 280 for information about configuring mail recipients.
Backing up the MLM database produces a point-in-time snapshot of
the MLM database. Based on the number of tapes you routinely
import into and export from the library, determine how frequently
backups are needed to ensure that you can easily restore the MLM
database.
Enable non-MLM media alerts Alerts for non-MLM-enabled media notify you when a cartridge
that is not MLM-enabled is loaded into a tape drive.
Track exported cartridges When a cartridge is exported from the library, an asterisk (*) next to
the bar code indicates that it is currently out of the library. However,
all of the MLM data for the cartridge is still available. Define the
frequency with which you will export the complete MLM report
and make a note of all exported tapes.
Choose relevant information for When you save an MLM report (see Generating Media Lifecycle
saved reports Management Reports on page 175), you can choose between saving
all MLM data or just the data from the most recently viewed report.
The data is saved in a comma delimited format for export into any
spreadsheet software (see Saving an MLM Report on page 179).
163
CONFIGURING MEDIA LIFECYCLE MANAGEMENT

This section describes configuring the optional MLM features.
Note: MLM is enabled by default. If you do not want to use MLM, you
must disable it.
Configure Global Settings

Use the following steps to configure the global settings for MLM. These
settings affect all partitions in the library.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > More Options > Media
Lifecycle Management. The Media Lifecycle Management Settings
screen displays.
Figure 79 The Media Lifecycle Management Settings screen.
164
User Guide 91090000
Configuring Media Lifecycle Management
3. Select the MLM features you want to enable.
Option Description
Enable Media Enables the Media Lifecycle Management (MLM) features in the library. MLM
Lifecycle is enabled by default. Enabling Media Lifecycle Management also enables
Management Drive Lifecycle Management (DLM), which is described in Chapter 8 – Drive
Lifecycle Management.
Important: MLM must be enabled before you can take advantage of the health
monitoring and reporting features provided through MLM and DLM.
Enable Alerts for Generates an alert message when a cartridge that is not MLM-enabled is loaded
Non-Certified Media into a tape drive.
Note: Enabling this alert is only recommended if all of the media typically used
in the library is MLM-enabled.
Enable Alerts for Generates an alert message when the load count for the cartridge stored in the
Load Count MLM database differs from the load count stored on the cartridge’s MAM.
Discrepancies
Minimum Cleaning Sets the threshold for the minimum number cleaning passes remaining on a
Passes Before cleaning cartridge. The default value is zero (0).
Warning When a cleaning cartridge reaches threshold, a warning message is generated
showing that the cleaning cartridge is nearly expended. The warning message
is generated every time the cleaning tape is used while the number of cleans
remaining is at or below the threshold value.
Maximum Tape Sets the number of times a tape can be loaded into a tape drive before a load
Loads Before count warning message is generated. The default value is 10,000 loads.
Warning When the number of tape loads reaches the specified threshold, a warning
message is generated. Subsequent loads do not generate additional messages.
Notes:
If you began using MLM-enabled data and cleaning cartridges before MLM
became available in the library’s BlueScale user interface, some of your media
may have already exceeded the thresholds you set. See Getting Started with
Using Media Lifecycle Management on page 171 for more information.
Generate a Load Count Media Lifecycle Report to display the current usage
status of the media in your library (see Using Media Lifecycle Management
on page 175 for detailed information).
Enable Media Auto Enables the Media Auto Discovery feature. See Configuring Media Auto
Discovery Discovery on page 166 and Using Media Lifecycle Management on page 175 for
detailed information.
If PreScan is enabled for the partition, that process is used instead of the more
basic Media Auto Discovery. See MLM PreScan and PostScan on page 159 for
information about the PreScan feature.
165
Option Description
Convert to Changes the way MLM capacity is displayed to use a broadcast-centric method
Broadcast Hours based on hours of programming used and hours of programing remaining
instead of raw capacity. See Displaying MLM Capacity as Broadcast Capacity
on page 168 for detailed information.
PostScan Blackout Configures periods of time during which the automatic PostScan process does
Periods not operate. See Configuring PostScan Blackout Periods on page 169 for
detailed instructions.
4. Select Save to enable the selected MLM features.
Configuring Media Auto Discovery

Media Auto Discovery must be enabled before the library will
automatically discover MLM-enabled media and write the appropriate
information to the MLM database and cartridge MAM.
Notes: Media Auto Discovery requires bar-code labeled cartridges.
The Media Auto Discovery process also identifies and checks
media that is not MLM-enabled media. However, if the
keyed Media Check option is not enabled, the discovery and
tracking information for this media is lost when the library’s
inventory is refreshed. The following actions cause the
library to refresh its inventory:
Resetting or power cycling the LCM.
Exporting and then re-importing previously discovered
cartridges that are not MLM-enabled.
Creating or modifying a partition (including sparing and
unsparing Global Spare drives).
If you do not enable Media Auto Discovery, you can start the
discovery process for a specific partition manually. See
Initiating or Stopping Media Discovery on page 173 for
instructions.
—OR—
You can let the BlueScale firmware to discover MLM-enabled
tapes the first time they are loaded and unloaded from an
MLM-enabled drive during normal operations.
Use the following steps to enable Media Auto Discovery.
screen displays.
3. Make sure that Enable Lifecycle Management is selected.
166
User Guide 91090000
4. Select Enable Media Auto Discovery and enter the number of minutes
that you want the library to be idle following the last import of media
before initiating the Media Auto Discovery process.
Figure 80 Enabling Media Auto Discovery screen.
5. Select Save.
Note: If you enable PreScan for the partition, the Media Auto
Discovery process is replaced by the more in depth PreScan
process (see Configure MLM PreScan and PostScan on page 217)
for that partition.
167
Displaying MLM Capacity as Broadcast Capacity

If desired, you can configure the library to use a broadcast-centric method
for displaying capacity in terms hours of content used and total hours of
content available instead of raw capacity for all MLM-enabled media.
screen displays.
3. Select the method for converting to broadcast capacity from the Convert
to Broadcast Hours drop-down list.
Figure 81 The MLM Broadcast Hours screen.
4. The choice that you make in the Broadcast Hours field automatically
selects a default Override Broadcast Bit Rate. If necessary, change the
Override Broadcast Bit Rate as required for your environment. The
default value for the broadcast bit rate depends on the Broadcast Hours
conversion you selected.
Important If you select none in the Convert to Broadcast Hours field, leave the Override
Broadcast Bit Rate value set to 0.
168
User Guide 91090000
5. Select Save. The Filled Capacity bar graph on the General Status screen
changes to reflect hours of content based on the settings for Convert to
Broadcast Hours.
Figure 82 The General Status screen with capacity shown as

Hours of Content.
Configuring PostScan Blackout Periods

If desired, you can configure blackout periods during which the automatic
PostScan process does not operate. Configuring blackout periods ensures
that during your backup window, all of the tapes in the partition are
immediately available and ensures a Global Spare drive is available if
needed.
Important The blackout periods you configure affect all of the partitions in the library.
Note: If PostScan is actively verifying a tape at the time the blackout

period starts, it completes the current scan. No additional tapes
are scanned until the blackout period expires.
Use the following steps to configure the PostScan blackout periods.
screen displays.
169
3. In the PostScan Blackout Periods panel, use the Start and Stop drop-
down lists to set the start and end times for the blackout period for each
day of the week.
Notes: Times are based on a 24-hour clock, where 0:00 is midnight.
To disable the blackout period for a specific day, set both
Start and Stop to 0:00.
By default, the blackout periods are all set to 0 (disabled). The
PostScan process will run whenever there are tapes in the
PostScan queue and a Global Spare drive is available.
Figure 83 Enabling Media Auto Discovery screen.
4. Select Save.
5. Configure one or more partitions to use the PostScan triggers (see
Configure MLM PreScan and PostScan on page 217).
170
User Guide 91090000
Getting Started with Using Media Lifecycle Management
GETTING STARTED WITH USING MEDIA LIFECYCLE

MANAGEMENT
After you configure the types of events for which you want alerts (see
Configuring Media Lifecycle Management on page 164), you are ready to
begin using MLM. The process you use depends on when you started
using MLM-enabled media.
Note: If a cartridge is write-protected when it is inserted into a drive,
the library cannot update the MLM information on the
cartridge’s MAM.
Media Requirements
Spectra Certified Media with MLM support has been available from
Spectra Logic since November 15, 2007. The following table summarizes
the level of information reported through MLM for media purchased
before and after MLM became available. The sections following the table
provide additional information for different scenarios.
Spectra Certified LTO-3 or LTO-4 Media

Non-MLM-Enabled
Born-on date is before Born-on date is after Media
Drive Type November 15, 2007 November 15, 2007
LTO-4 Limited Reporting a Full Reporting Limited Reporting a
LTO-2 or LTO-3 No Reporting Limited Reporting a
LTO-1 Not Supported
a. Requires Media Check option key.
Recently Purchased Library and Spectra Certified

MLM-Enabled Media
If you purchased your library after BlueScale 10.4 was released in the fall of
2008 and you purchased Spectra Certified Media with MLM support at the
same time, simply load the media into the library. MLM collects the
available MLM media health information from each cartridge's MAM and
add it to the MLM database. Each subsequent load/unload will update the
MLM database, providing the ability for ongoing tracking and reporting.
171
Existing Library, Pre-BlueScale 10.4 Code with

MLM-Enabled or Mixed Spectra Certified Media
If you have an existing library that does not have BlueScale 10.4 or later
installed and:
you began using MLM-enabled Spectra Certified LTO media when it
became available but before BlueScale10.4 introduced the MLM
functionality in the fall of 2008,
—OR—
you began using a mixture of MLM-enabled and non-MLM-enabled
Spectra Certified LTO media before the MLM functionality was
introduced in BlueScale10.4,
do the following:
1. Update the library firmware update to BlueScale10.4 or later (see
Updating Library Firmware on page 388).
Note: Spectra Logic recommends always keeping your library updated
to the most current version of BlueScale.
2. Import a data cartridge into each partition to start the Media Auto
Discovery process or start the discovery process manually (see
Initiating or Stopping Media Discovery).
Alternatively, you can load each cartridge into an LTO-4 drive and then
unload it (see Moving Media Within a Partition on page 150).
For Spectra Certified Media purchased after MLM-enabled media
became available, MLM collects the available MLM information
from each cartridge’s MAM, including media health, encryption
status, born on date, and the partition name and adds it to the MLM
database during the discovery process. Each subsequent
load/unload updates the MLM database, providing the ability for
ongoing tracking and reporting.
The initial load/unload during discovery also establishes an initial
tape health score. This initial health score may not accurately reflect
the actual health of the media.The health score becomes more
accurate during subsequent load/unloads as current usage statistics
are updated and used in the tape’s health scoring.
Notes: If your previously-purchased MLM-enabled media does not
appear in the MLM database after the discovery process is
complete or if you receive an MLM alert that non-certified
media was loaded, contact SpectraGuard Support for
assistance (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5). The alert
about non-MLM-enabled media is disabled by default (see
Configuring Media Lifecycle Management on page 164)
MLM does not track or report Spectra Certified Media
purchased before MLM-enabled media became available
unless the Media Check option enabled.
172
User Guide 91090000
Getting Started with Using Media Lifecycle Management
MLM Enabled with MLM-Enabled Media Already in the

Library
If you have been using MLM-enabled media in the library without MLM
enabled and have now enabled MLM, the information for each
MLM-enabled cartridge will be added to the MLM database the first time
the cartridge is loaded into and then unloaded from an LTO-4 drive.
Notes: You can use Media Auto Discovery to add the cartridges to
the MLM database. However, you either have to import a
cartridge to initiate the automatic discovery process or start
the discovery process manually (see Initiating or Stopping
Media Discovery).
If the Media Check option is enabled, basic health
information for cartridges that are not MLM-enabled is also
available.
During the discovery process MLM collects the available MLM
information from each cartridge’s MAM, including media health,
encryption status, born on date, and the partition name and adds it to the
MLM database. The initial load/unload during discovery also establishes
an initial tape health score. This initial health score may not accurately
reflect the actual health of the media.The health score stabilizes and
becomes more accurate after the first four load/unloads as current usage
statistics are updated and used in the tape's health scoring.
Initiating or Stopping Media Discovery

If you enabled MLM when the library already contained MLM-enabled
media and do not want to wait until new media is imported to discover it,
you can start the discovery process manually. You can also use this manual
discovery process if you chose not to enable Media Auto Discovery (see
Configuring Media Auto Discovery on page 166).
Notes: If the PreScan feature is enabled for the partition where you
want to manually start the discovery, the PreScan process
runs instead of Media Auto Discovery process.
Spectra Logic highly recommends that you perform the
manual discovery process when your backup application is
not accessing the library and the library is idle.
Follow these steps to manually initiate the discovery process.
1. Enable Media Lifecycle Management via the configuration menu (see
Configuring Media Lifecycle Management on page 164). After MLM is
enabled, you are ready to initiate the discovery process.
173
2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > MLM. The Media
Lifecycle Management Tools screen displays.
Notes: If all of the media in the library has previously been
discovered, the Discover Media button is grayed out.
The Download MLM DB button is only available when you
access the library using the BlueScale web interface.
Figure 84 Discover Media on the MLM Tools screen.
3. Select Discover Media to start the manual discovery process.

4. Choose the partition containing the MLM media you want to discover
and select Next.
Figure 85 The Media Discovery Partition screen.
5. Select OK to begin the discovery process.
Figure 86 The Start Media Discovery screen.
174
User Guide 91090000
Using Media Lifecycle Management
6. Select OK to confirm that the process started and return to the MLM
Tools screen.
Figure 87 The Media Discovery Start Results screen.
7. Select Stop Discovery if you need to interrupt the process.
Figure 88 Stop Discovery on the MLM Tools screen.
USING MEDIA LIFECYCLE MANAGEMENT

After media in your library is included in the MLM database, you are
ready to make use of this powerful tool to manage, track, and report all
facets of tape usage from creation to retirement.
Generating Media Lifecycle Management Reports

To generate reports about the media in your library, follow these steps:
2. From the toolbar menu, select General > More Options > Media
Lifecycle Management. The Media Lifecycle Management Report screen
displays (Figure 89 on page 177).
Note: You can also click on Filled Capacity bar graph on the General
Status screen (Figure 78 on page 156).
3. Select either Total Library or a specific partition from the Partition drop-
down list, and then select Go.
By default, the Media Lifecycle Management Report screen shows a
Media Health report for all Spectra Certified Media with MLM support
in the library.
175
4. Select the type of report you want from the Report drop-down list.
Note: Information about MLM-enabled cleaning cartridges only
appears in the Exported Media, Cleans Remaining, and Born on
Date reports.
Option Description
Media Health For MLM-enabled cartridges, shows the bar code label information, the
overall health (media health), and the load count (the number of times the
MLM-enabled cartridge has been loaded into a tape drive) for each data
cartridge in the selected location.
For non-MLM-enabled cartridges, shows the bar code label information and
whether the cartridge appears to be usable or unusable.
Remaining Capacity Shows the remaining capacity and maximum capacity for each MLM-enabled
data cartridge. The remaining capacity reflects the native capacity of the
cartridge, not the compressed capacity.
Note: The remaining capacity and maximum capacity on a cartridge is
displayed as GB or TB.
Load Count Shows the load count for each MLM-enabled data cartridge in the selected
location and the born on date (the date on which Spectra Logic enabled the
cartridge to support MLM tracking and reporting).
Write Errors Shows the number of soft errors and the load count for each MLM-enabled data
cartridge.
Cleans Remaining Shows the number of cleanings remaining and the born on date for any MLM-
enabled cleaning cartridges.
Born on Date Shows the date that the MLM-enabled cartridge (both data and cleaning) was
created and certified by Spectra Logic and the load count for each cartridge.
Exported Media Lists the MLM-enabled media (both data and cleaning) that has been exported
from the library, sorted by the export time (oldest first). The report also shows
the user name of the person who exported the media.
Last Write Time Shows the time and date for the most recent write and read operations for each
Last Read TIme MLM-enabled data cartridge.
176
User Guide 91090000
5. Select Go. The Media Lifecycle Management Report screen refreshes to

display the selected report with a list of the bar-code labels for all media
in the selected location. A media health icon indicates the overall health
of each piece of media, as of the last time it was loaded into a tape drive.
Media health
icon
Figure 89 The Media Lifecycle Management Report screen.
The following table describes the meaning of each media health icon.
Select the bar code next to the icon to view detailed information about
that specific piece of media.
Icon Health score Meaning
100 – 80 The media health is Good.
Data cartridge: The media is in good condition and operating properly. The
cartridge can be used for writing new data and reading previously written
data.
Cleaning cartridge: More than ten cleaning cycles remain on the cartridge.
79 – 50 The media health is Average.
Data cartridge: When the Health graph on the Details screen for the cartridge
falls below a health score of 80, the media health icon changes from green to
yellow (generally due to normal aging). For maximum reliability, only use the
cartridge for restores.
Cleaning cartridge: The cleaning cartridge is near expiration. From one to ten
cleaning cycles remain.
177
Icon Health score Meaning

49 – 0 The media health is Poor.
Data cartridge: When the Health graph on the Details screen for the cartridge
falls below a health score of 50, the media health icon changes to red. The
combination of media errors, tape age, and usage indicate that the media has
reached the end of its useful life for reliable data backups and restores and
should be retired.
If you are experiencing an unexpected number of cartridges with poor media
health, you may want to investigate further:
Review the media health data for each cartridge to see if it has a high error
rate. A high error rate can indicate either that the media health is poor and
the cartridge should be retired or that the cartridge has been written to by a
tape drive that is having trouble.
If multiple cartridges with high error rates have been written to by the
same tape drive, the tape drive may be the source of the errors. Clean the
tape drive or, if necessary, replace it.
If the cartridge has a high error rate that cannot be attributed to a tape drive
or environmental factors, retire it.
Note: If the source of the high error rate is a tape drive, the media health icon for
the affected cartridges should return to either green or yellow after
approximately three load/read or write/unload cycles in a known good drive.
Cleaning cartridge: The cleaning cartridge is expired. No more cleaning
cycles remain. Replace the cleaning cartridge.
The media health is Unknown. The status of the media cannot be determined.
178
User Guide 91090000
6. To view detailed information about a specific cartridge, enter the bar-

code label information for the cartridge in the Find By Barcode field (see
Figure 89 on page 177) and select Enter. The Details screen for the
selected cartridge displays.
Note: Media health is based on the MLM-tracked history of the
cartridge. The heath indicated by the Health graph may
fluctuate until the cartridge has been loaded six times.
Health graph
Figure 90 The detailed report for the selected media.
7. Select Previous to return to the Media Lifecycle Management Report

Saving an MLM Report

You can choose to save a copy of the MLM report, which is a comma-
separated text file (*.rpt), to a USB drive, mail the saved report to
previously configured email recipient, or both. If desired, you can zip the
file before saving it.
1. Generate the desired report as described in Generating Media Lifecycle
Management Reports on page 175.
2. If you want to save the MLM report to a USB drive, connect the drive to
the LCM’s USB port before continuing.
Note: The option to save the report to USB is only available if you plug
a USB drive in to the LCM’s USB port before you select Save
Report on the Media Lifecycle Management Report screen.
179
3. Select Save Report to display the Save Media Lifecycle Management

Report screen.
Figure 91 The Save Media Lifecycle Management Report

screen.
4. Select the data to include in the saved report and how you want the
report saved.
Note: If you want to email the report, the intended recipient must be a
previously configured mail user (see Configuring Mail Users on
page 280).
Option Description
Report All Media Saves a report containing all of the available detailed MLM data for MLM-
Lifecycle Data enabled media in the selected location (a specific partition or total library).
Note: Depending on the number of cartridges in the selected location, this
report can be quite large.
Report Selected Saves only the fields displayed in the report that you selected on the Media
Data Lifecycle Management Report screen (Figure 89 on page 177).
Note: The headings in the saved report reflect the fields displayed in the report
you select in the Media Lifecycle Management Report screen.
Zip Report Saves the report as a zip file which is compatible with standard file
compression software (for example, WinZip®). Zipping the report is especially
useful when emailing the Report All Media Lifecycle Data report.
Mail Report to Sends the report to a previously configured mail user. Use the drop-down list to
select the recipient for the report file.
Note: Do not use the default autosupport@spectralogic.com email user. Spectra
Logic does not save emailed MLM report files unless they are specifically
requested for troubleshooting.
Save to USB Save the report to the USB drive.
Notes:
The USB option is only available if you plugged a USB drive in to the LCM’s
USB port before you selected Save Report on the Media Lifecycle
Management Report screen.
If you unzip the report using the standard format used by most file-zipping
applications, the application creates the following directory structure:
*\hard disk\lc\reports.
180
User Guide 91090000
Using MLM PreScan and PostScan
5. Select Save to send the report to the selected destination. Select Previous
to return to the Media Lifecycle Management Report screen without
sending the report.
USING MLM PRESCAN AND POSTSCAN

PreScan and PostScan are a keyed set of configurable background
processes that use an LTO-4 tape drive to provide two levels of verification
for LTO data cartridges.

Using PreScan page 181
Using PostScan page 182
Overview page 182
Manually Add a Tape to the PostScan page 184
Queue
Pause the PostScan Process page 186
Using PreScan
PreScan is a background process that automatically inserts each newly
imported LTO cartridge into an available LTO-4 tape drive assigned to the
data partition containing the cartridge. The drive loads the media into the
tape path, and checks it to determine whether it has any of the following
characteristics:
Non-MLM-enabled
Broken or dislodged leader
Red media health
Write protected
Encrypted tape with a moniker not currently stored in the library
When the PreScan operation is complete, the library stores the tape health
information into the MLM database. When the drive ejects the cartridge,
the library returns it to its original slot.
PreScan is enabled when you configure a partition (see Configure MLM
PreScan and PostScan on page 217). When it is enabled, it replaces the
more basic Media Auto Discovery process for newly imported media.
As with Media Auto Discovery, you can manually start the PreScan process
if you enabled MLM when the library already contained MLM-enabled
media and do not want to wait until new media is imported to discover it.
You can also pause the PreScan process. See Initiating or Stopping Media
Discovery on page 173 for instructions.
181
Using PostScan
PostScan is a background process that uses an available Global Spare
LTO-4 tape drive assigned to the partition to scan each LTO cartridge in the
partition. This scan verifies that there are no media errors on the tape by
reading the entire length of the tape up to the end of the recorded data
(EOD).
Note: Although PostScan reads the data on the tape, it does not process
this data into a usable form. It simply verifies that it can read the
data from the tape.
Overview
The PostScan process is performed by the library independent of the
backup application normally used to read and write data to the tape. While
PostScan is running, the Global Spare drive it is using is not available to the
partition to replace a malfunctioning drive. In addition, you cannot use the
TAP to import cartridges into or export cartridges from the library. You
also cannot change the library configuration; nor can you create or modify
partitions.
If necessary, you can pause the PostScan operation for one hour so that you
can use the Global Spare or perform other library operations (see Pause the
PostScan Process on page 186). After an hour has passed, the library
restarts the PostScan operation on the tape that was being verified at the
time of the interruption if a Global Spare drive is available.
Automatic Scanning
PostScan automatically checks each MLM-enabled LTO cartridge in a
partition. It is enabled by selecting one or more trigger criteria when you
configure a partition (see Configure MLM PreScan and PostScan on
page 217). When one of the configured PostScan criteria is triggered, the
tape is added to the PostScan queue. The queue is processed in a first-in-
Important When using automatic PostScan tape, configure your backup software to allow at
least 15 minutes for a requested move to complete. If a tape is in the process of
being scanned when it is requested for a backup or restore operation, it must be
unloaded from the Global spare and moved to another drive before the move
request is reported as complete.
During the PostScan process, the background task verifies that the system
has been idle for the period of time specified for the partition, that the
library is not currently in a PostScan blackout period (see Configuring
PostScan Blackout Periods on page 169), and that a Global Spare drive
assigned to the partition is available. If these conditions are met, the library
inserts the first cartridge in its queue into the Global Spare drive. The drive
loads the tape into the tape path and then checks the tape for media errors.
182
User Guide 91090000
When the operation is complete, the library writes the scan date and
pass/fail test result to the cartridge MAM and updates the MLM database
with the scan date, the pass/fail test result, and when (or if) the next scan
should occur. The drive then unloads the cartridge and the library returns
it to its original slot. The library posts a system message showing that the
cartridge has been scanned.
Note: The library checks to see if the Global Spare requires cleaning
after each cartridge is unloaded. If cleaning is required and a
cleaning partition is associated with the data partition, the drive
is cleaned before the next cartridge is processed. If a cleaning
partition is not present, clean the tape drive as described in the
table on page 410.
While the PostScan process is checking a cartridge, the cartridge does not
appear on the BlueScale inventory screens and cannot be moved manually
using the BlueScale user interface. However, if the cartridge is requested by
the backup software it is immediately ejected from the Global Spare drive
that is performing the verification and moved to the location requested by
the backup software. The interrupted PostScan operation is not reported.
The cartridge is returned to the top of the PostScan queue and will be the
first one processed after it is returned to its slot.
Because the backup software can potentially request a tape that is currently
undergoing verification, you can configure blackout periods during which
the PostScan operation is suspended. Configuring blackout periods ensure
that PostScan does not operate during your normal backup window. The
blackout periods apply to all of the data partitions in the library. See
Configuring PostScan Blackout Periods on page 169 for instructions.
Manual Scanning
The automatic PostScan verification process only checks MLM-enabled
LTO data cartridges (LTO-3 or LTO-4). However, cartridges can also be
added to the PostScan queue manually. This is especially useful if your
library contains LTO cartridges that are not MLM-enabled. You can also
use the manual PostScan process to verify a suspect MLM-enabled tape
even if it has previously been scanned. Cartridges that are manually added
to the PostScan queue are processed before cartridges that are added as a
result of the trigger criteria for the partition.
183
Manually Add a Tape to the PostScan Queue

Follow these steps to manually a cartridge to the PostScan queue.
1. Enable Media Lifecycle Management if it is not already enabled (see
Configuring Media Lifecycle Management on page 164).
Notes: If all of the media in the library has previously been
discovered, the Discover Media button is grayed out.
The Download MLM DB button is only available when you
access the library using the BlueScale web interface.
Figure 92 Manual PostScan on the MLM Tools screen.
3. Select Manual PostScan. The MLM Manual PostScan screen displays.
Figure 93 Choose media on the MLM PostScan screen.
184
User Guide 91090000
4. If the media is in a partition other than the one currently displayed,

select the desired partition from the Partition drop-down list, then
select Go.
Note: The PostScan feature cannot be used on a cleaning partition.
The Source pane refreshes to display a list of the media in the requested
location type. The list shows the name of the location (for example, the
slot number) and the bar-code label information for the cartridge in that
location.
5. Select the cartridge that you want to check for media errors. You can
select the cartridge either from the Source list, by entering its bar code,
or by entering the slot number where it is located.
To select a cartridge Follow these steps...
using the...
Source list Scroll through the list of available media and select the desired cartridge.
Slot number 1. Enter the slot number for the cartridge you want to verify in the View Source
Slot field.
2. Select Go. The Source inventory list refreshes to show the requested slot
selected at the top of the Source list.
Bar-code label 1. Enter the bar-code label information for the cartridge you want to locate in
information the Find by Barcode field.
Notes:
Make sure that you type the bar-code label information correctly to avoid
selecting the wrong cartridge.
Only the slots below the one that is currently highlighted in the source list are
searched. To ensure that all of the slots are searched, scroll to the top of the
source list and highlight the first slot before selecting Find.
2. Select Find. The Source inventory list refreshes to show the requested
cartridge selected at the top of the Source list.
6. Select Add to add the cartridge in the highlighted slot to the Tape List.
7. Repeat Step 4 though Step 6 to add additional tapes to the Tape List.
Note: To remove a cartridge from the Tape List, highlight the cartridge
and select Delete. To remove all of the cartridges from the Tape
List, select Delete All.
8. Select Submit to add the tapes in the Tape List to the PostScan queue.
185
Pause the PostScan Process

While the PostScan process is running, you cannot perform the following
operations:
Use the Global Spare drive to replace a malfunctioning drive
Use the TAP to import cartridges into or export cartridges from the
library
Change the library configuration
Create or modify partitions
If you need to perform any of these operations or if you need to reset the
library, you can pause the PostScan process. The library returns any
cartridges currently being scanned to their original locations.
Notes: The pause affects all partitions that are configured to use
PostScan.
The PostScan process automatically resumes one hour after
the pause.
Use the following steps to pause PostScan.
Note: The Pause PostScan button is only present if the PostScan
process is running.
Figure 94 Pause PostScan on the MLM Tools screen.
2. Select Pause PostScan to pause the PostScan operation for one hour so
that you can use the Global Spare or perform other library operations.
After an hour has passed, the library restarts the PostScan operation on
the tape that was being verified at the time of the interruption if a
Global Spare drive is available.
186
User Guide 91090000
Managing the MLM Database
MANAGING THE MLM DATABASE

The MLM database contains the usage history, health, the verification data
for all of MLM-enabled media in your library. It also contains the Drive
Lifecycle Management data for all of the drives in your library (see
Monitoring Drive Health Using DLM on page 197).
Backing Up the MLM Database

As a part of best disaster recovery planning and practices, Spectra Logic
strongly recommends backing up the MLM database to a USB drive or
emailing it to a preconfigured mail recipient after using MLM for some
period of time. In the event of a disaster, you can use the backup to restore
the MLM database information for the media in your library instead of
rebuilding it by loading each cartridge into a drive (see Restoring the MLM
Database on page 190).
Note: For extra security, the library automatically backs up its
configuration and the MLM database to the LCM compact flash
card once a week and whenever a partition is created or
modified. If email for the auto-save backup is configured, the
backups are emailed to the designated recipient (see Enabling
Email for the Automatic Configuration Save Feature on
page 282).
See Use the Auto Save Configuration Feature on page 286
for detailed information about the Auto Configuration
Save feature.
Important The automatic weekly auto-save file reflects the state of the MLM database at the
time the backup was created. If MLM-enabled media is imported into or exported
from the library during the period between the automatic weekly auto-save
operations, the backup of the MLM database may not accurately reflect the
library’s inventory.
If you plan to import or export a large number of MLM-enabled cartridges, backup
the MLM database using the procedure described in this section to ensure that you
have a backup that accurately reflects the information in the database.
Deciding when and how often you back up the MLM database depends on
many factors, including how often tapes are loaded into a tape drive.
If all of the tapes are loaded into drives frequently, the MLM database
can be rebuilt relatively quickly. The database can be backed up less
frequently.
If many of the tapes remain in the library without being loaded into a
drive for a long period of time, or if tapes are exported and stay outside
of the library for a long period of time, rebuilding the MLM database
can take a long time. Back up the MLM database more frequently.
187
Back Up the MLM Database

Based on your environment, determine how frequently backups are
needed, then use the following steps to create a backup. You can choose to
save the backup to a USB drive or send it as an email attachment to a
previously configured mail recipient.
displays.
screen.
5. Scroll down and select Save MLM Database. The screen refreshes to
show the details for the utility.
Figure 95 The Save MLM Database utility.
6. Use the Select the Destination drop-down list to choose the destination
for the saved file.
Note: To send the file to someone who is not already listed as a library
mail user, you must first configure that person as an email
recipient as described in Configuring Mail Users on page 280.
Select this option... To...
Save MLM Database Backup the MLM database to a USB drive.
to USB Note: Connect a USB drive to the USB port on the LCM before running the utility.
Mail MLM Database Send the MLM database file as an email attachment to the specified mail
to... recipient.
Note: Do not use the default autosupport@spectralogic.com email recipient.
Spectra Logic does not save emailed files unless they are specifically requested
188
User Guide 91090000
7. If you want to compress the file to make it smaller, select Compress files.
After a brief delay, the Utility Results screen displays, showing that the
database file was either saved or sent.
9. Proceed to Verify the MLM Database Backup.
Verify the MLM Database Backup

After performing the MLM database backup, confirm that the backup file
was generated. Make sure the file is more than 0 bytes in size.
If the backup was... Follow these steps...
Saved to a USB 1. Plug the USB drive into a PC that is not connected to the library.
Drive 2. Examine the list of files on the USB drive and locate the SavedMLMDB folder.
3. Open the folder to verify that:
It contains a file called
cminfo_<date-time>.zdt
—OR—
cminfo_<date-time>.dat
where date-time is the time stamp for when the backup was created.
—AND—
The file is more than 0 bytes in size.
4. If a file with the format is present and is more than 0 bytes in size, the
database backup was successful and the file is usable. Store the USB drive in
a safe location.
5. If the MLM database file is not present or if it is 0 bytes in size, repeat the
backup process (Backing Up the MLM Database on page 187) using a
different USB drive.
Sent as an Email 1. Open the email attachment and verify that:
Attachment The attachment contains a zip file called
cminfo_<date-time>.zdt
—AND—
The file is more than 0 bytes in size.
2. If the zip file is present, the backup was successful and is usable. Save the
email attachment to a safe location from which you can copy it to a USB
drive, if needed.
3. If the zip file is not present, repeat the backup process (Backing Up the MLM
Database on page 187) to generate the email again.
189
Restoring the MLM Database

Use the following steps to restore the MLM database from a previously
saved backup that was created using the Save MLM Database utility (see
Backing Up the MLM Database on page 187).
1. If you plan to restore using the MLM database backup file that was sent
as an email attachment, use the following instructions to copy the file to
a USB drive; otherwise, skip to Step 2.
a. Create a folder called SavedMLMDB on a USB drive.
b. Copy the cminfo_<date-time>.dat file to the SavedMLMDB folder
on the USB drive.
2. Plug the USB drive containing the MLM database backup file into the
USB port on the LCM before continuing.
displays.
screen.
7. Scroll down and select Restore MLM Database from USB. The screen
refreshes to show the details for the utility.
Figure 96 The Restore MLM Database from USB utility.
8. Use the drop-down list to select the file name of the MLM database
backup you want to use for the restore.
After a brief delay, the Utility Results screen displays, showing that the
database was restored.
190
User Guide 91090000
Deleting Records From the MLM Database

The maximum number of records in the MLM database is restricted to
10 times the maximum number of cartridges the library can hold (for
example, in the T680 library, the maximum number of records is 6800).
When this limit is reached, records are automatically deleted on a first-in,
When a cartridge is retired or permanently exported from the library, you
can delete its record from the MLM database. Records can be deleted
individually or as a group.
Figure 97 The Delete Records option on the MLM Tools

screen.
3. Select Delete Records. The Delete MLM Records screen displays.
Figure 98 The Delete MLM Records screen.
191
4. Select the cartridge records you want to delete from the MLM database.
Note: An asterisk (*) indicates that the cartridge has been exported
from the library.
5. Select Delete Selected to remove the selected records from the MLM
database.
Downloading the MLM Database as a CSV File

If desired, you can download the MLM database as a comma-separated-
value (CSV) file. You can then open the file in any software application that
supports this type of file (for example, spreadsheet software).
Note: The Download MLM DB button is only available when you access
the library using the BlueScale web interface.
Figure 99 The Download MLM DB option on the MLM Tools

screen.
3. Select Download MLM DB. The Open file dialog box displays.
Note: The appearance of this dialog box depends on the web browser
you are using.
Figure 100 The Open file dialog box.
192
User Guide 91090000
4. Choose how you want to handle the file.

Select Open with, choose the application you want to use to open the
file, and then select OK to download and open the file.
Select Save File > OK to save the database to a location that is
accessible to the computer you are using to access the BlueScale web
interface.
5. If you chose to save the file, a dialog box for specifying where you want
to save the file displays.
Figure 101 The Windows Save file dialog box.
a. Navigate to the location where you want to store the file. The
available locations depend on the network to which the computer
you use to access the BlueScale web interface is connected.
b. If desired, change the default file name to something more
meaningful in your environment.
c. Select Save.
193
6. To view the information stored in the MLM database, open the CSV file
using a software program that supports this file type.
Figure 102 An example of the downloaded MLM database

file (opened in Microsoft Excel®).
194
User Guide 91090000
Chapter 8
Drive Lifecycle Management
This chapter describes how to use BlueScale Drive Lifecycle Management
to proactively monitor the health of the LTO drives in your library.

BlueScale Drive Lifecycle Management this page
Overview
Enabling Drive Lifecycle Management page 196
Monitoring Drive Health Using DLM page 197
Use the Drive Health Icons page 197
View a Detailed Heath Report page 198
Using DLM to Test a Drive page 201
BLUESCALE DRIVE LIFECYCLE MANAGEMENT OVERVIEW

This section provides an overview of how BlueScale Drive Lifecycle
Management works in your library.
Important The BlueScale Drive Lifecycle Management feature is only supported for LTO drives
(LTO-2 and later).
BlueScale Drive Lifecycle Management (DLM) helps you identify drives

that experience a high number of errors or other problems during
operation. DLM is automatically enabled when Media Lifecycle
Management (MLM) is enabled and cannot be used without MLM. See
Chapter 7 – Media Lifecycle Management for detailed information about
enabling and using MLM.
195
Chapter 8 — Drive Lifecycle Management
Each time media is unloaded from a drive, the library collects the tape
health data from the drive. This data includes soft or hard read/write
errors, tape alerts, and flags generated during the time the most current
cartridge was loaded in the drive. It also includes the current value for the
drive’s single character display (SCD) and any errors detected at the time
the tape is unloaded. In addition, the DLM data for the 50 most recently
loaded tapes is stored in the MLM database. This data is used to generate
an overall drive health status for the library, as well as health reports for
each individual drive.
You can view the DLM health information for each individual drive and, if
necessary, use the built-in BlueScale drive test to clean the drive and then
run a read/write performance test using a scratch tape. This test, when
used in conjunction with other DLM data and Media Lifecycle
Management (MLM) data, can help you determine whether a tape drive or
the media is the source of the errors you are investigating.
In addition to the reporting and testing functions, DLM also lets you reset
the drive, which power cycles the drive, runs the internal drive diagnostics,
and reinitializes it in the library.
ENABLING DRIVE LIFECYCLE MANAGEMENT

Drive Lifecycle Management is automatically enabled when you enable
Media Lifecycle Management (MLM). When DLM is enabled, the Drives
icon under the Configuration toolbar changes to show that DLM is
enabled. See Configuring Media Lifecycle Management on page 164 for
information about enabling MLM.
Note: See Resetting a Drive on page 360 and Adding or Replacing a
Drive on page 419 for information about the other buttons on
this screen.
DLM Drive
icon
Figure 103 The DLM Drive icon in the Configuration toolbar.
196
User Guide 91090000
Monitoring Drive Health Using DLM
MONITORING DRIVE HEALTH USING DLM

The DLM health icons and detailed drive health reports help you monitor
each drive in a partition.
Use the Drive Health Icons

Health status icons provide at-a-glance health information for the drives in
the library.
On the General Status screen, the drive health icon indicates the overall
health for all of the drives in the selected partition (see Figure 22 on
page 72).
The drive health icons, visible on the Drives screen (Figure 103 on
page 196) and the Drive Detail screen (Figure 104) indicate the overall
health of individual drives.
The following table describes the drive health status icons.
Note: The drive health icon reflects data collected for the drive while
the most current tape was loaded in the drive. This data consists
of the code presented on the drive’s SCD, as well as tape alerts,
and errors detected at the time the tape is unloaded. See
Interpreting the Display Character on page 367 for detailed
information about the SCD codes for LTO tape drives.
Icon Meaning
The drive health is Good.
The drive is operating normally.
The drive requires Attention.
Use the SCD code information on the Drive Details screen to determine
the type of action required. See Interpreting the Display Character on
page 367 to determine what action is needed to address the condition.
The drive health is Poor.
The drive has experienced an unrecoverable error or problem. See
Interpreting the Display Character on page 367 to determine what action
is needed to address the condition. If necessary, replace the drive.
The drive health is Unknown. The status of the drive cannot be
determined.
Note: To refresh the drive health data, use the Update button on the
Drive Lifecycle Management report screen (see Figure 105 on page 199).
197
View a Detailed Heath Report

Use the following steps to view a detailed health report for an individual
drive.
Note: To save the Drive Lifecycle Management report, use the Save
MLM Database utility as described in Back Up the MLM
Database on page 188.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Drives to display the
Drives screen (Figure 103 on page 196).
3. Click the Details button next to the drive for which you want to view
more information. The Drive Details screen displays.
Figure 104 The Drive Details screen.
198
User Guide 91090000
Monitoring Drive Health Using DLM
4. Select DLM to view a detailed Drive Lifecycle Management report.

Note: The DLM button is not present if DLM is not enabled (see
Enabling Drive Lifecycle Management on page 196).
Current drive
health
Tape
summary
Tape history
Drive errors
Figure 105 The Drive Lifecycle Management report screen.
199
The Drive Lifecycle Management Report screen (see Figure 105 on

page 199) is divided into four panes, which are described in the
following table.
Important To ensure that you are viewing the most current data, select Update at the top of
the Drive Lifecycle Management Report screen to refresh displayed data.
This pane Shows...

Drive Health Status The drive identifier and any status information. The drive health icon indicates
the drive’s overall health at the time the screen was displayed.
Tape Summary The bar-code label information and media health information for the last
50 cartridges loaded into the drive. The media health icon indicates the
cartridge health at the time the cartridge was unloaded from the drive and the
current health from the MLM database. Refer to the table on page 177 of
Chapter 7 – Media Lifecycle Management for descriptions of the icons related to
media health.
Note: Depending on the usage history for the drive, this pane may not be
present.
Tape History Detailed information about each of the individual tapes listed in the Tape
Summary pane as well as any Tape Alert flags or SCD codes posted by the drive
while the tape was loaded in the drive.
present.
Drive Errors Note: Detailed information about any errors detected by the drive, beginning
with the most recent. This information includes the bar code of the tape loaded
in the drive at the time of the error and the sense key, ASC, and ASCQ data
reported by the drive for the error.
present.
5. Use the buttons at the tope of the screen as need.
Select... To...
Update Refresh the report with the most current status
Reset Health Reset the drive health to Good (Green). Use this button after you have corrected
the condition that changed the drive’s health to yellow or red. Select Continue to
complete the reset health process.
Note: If the condition was not truly corrected, the next tape load sets the drive
health back the previous indication.
Previous Return to the Drive Details screen (Figure 104 on page 198).
200
User Guide 91090000
Using DLM to Test a Drive
USING DLM TO TEST A DRIVE

If you suspect that a drive is experiencing problems or if the Drive
Lifecycle Management report indicates that a drive is experiencing
repeated errors, you can use the DLM Drive Health Verification wizard to
test the drive. During the test process, the wizard cleans the drive and then
performs a write/read test using a scratch tape.
Note: See Chapter 14 – Drive Troubleshooting for additional drive
troubleshooting information.
Requirements Before you can run the DLM Drive Health Verification
wizard, the following requirements must be met:
The drive must not contain a cartridge.
A scratch tape appropriate to the generation of drive being tested is
available in the partition’s entry/exit pool. The scratch tape health must
be Good (green) or Usable.
Make sure that the scratch tape does not contain data that you need to retain. The
Caution test process overwrites all data on the tape.
If a cleaning partition is associated with the partition containing the

drive, make sure the cleaning partition contains a cleaning cartridge
with Good (green) or Usable health. You can use MLM to determine the
health of the cleaning cartridges currently in the cleaning partition (see
Generating Media Lifecycle Management Reports on page 175).
If necessary, import a known good cleaning cartridge into the cleaning
partition (see Importing Media into the Entry/Exit Pool or a Cleaning
Partition on page 128).
If the partition does not use a cleaning partition, a cleaning cartridge
with Good or Usable health must be in the partition’s entry/exit pool.
The cleaning cartridge must be in a regular TeraPack magazine; it
cannot be in a Maintenance TeraPack magazine.
Notes: The test will abort (fail) if the scratch cartridge health is not
Good or Usable.
The test will abort (fail) if the cleaning cartridge health is not
Good or Usable.
If the entry/exit pool contains only one chamber, both the
cleaning cartridge and the scratch cartridge must be in the
same TeraPack magazine.
201
Use the following steps to launch the DLM Drive Health Verification
wizard.
Important If you are accessing the library remotely using the BlueScale web interface, you
will not be able to complete the test if the scratch cartridge and cleaning cartridge
are not already present in the required locations.
1. Log into the library from the operator panel.

2. If necessary, import a TeraPack magazine containing a scratch tape into
the partition’s entry/exit pool and a cleaning cartridge into the cleaning
partition, if present (see Importing Media into the Entry/Exit Pool or a
Cleaning Partition on page 128).
Note: If the partition does not use a cleaning partition, both the scratch
tape and the cleaning cartridge can be imported into the
entry/exit pool in the same magazine.
3. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Drives to display the
Drives screen.
Note: The Test button is not present of DLM is not enabled.
Figure 106 The Test button on the Drives screen.
202
User Guide 91090000
Using DLM to Test a Drive
4. Select the Test button to start the DLM drive test wizard.
The wizard determines whether all of the requirements for the test have
been met. If one or more requirement needs attention, a screen displays
to tell you what needs to be done.
Notes: If you are accessing the library remotely using the BlueScale
web interface and either the scratch cartridge or the cleaning
cartridge is not available, then Cancel is the only option
available.
If all of the requirements are met, the Move and
Import/Export buttons are not present on this screen. Skip to
Step 5.
Figure 107 The Drive Health Verification resources required

screen.
Use the following steps to address the unmet requirements.

a. Use the Move or Import/Export button, as required, to move a
cartridge out of the drive or to make a scratch cartridge and a
cleaning cartridge available.
b. After you complete the necessary actions, return to the Drives
screen (Step 4) and select Test to launch the wizard again.
If all of the requirements have been met, the Drive Health
Verification screen displays a warning about the upcoming test
process. Proceed to Step 5.
Figure 108 The Drive Health Verification requirements

screen.
203
5. Select Next to select the scratch cartridge you want to use for the test.
Note: Only data cartridges located in the partition’s entry/exit pool are
listed and available for selection.
Figure 109 The DLM Select Scratch Cartridge screen.
6. Select Next to begin the automatic test process. A series of status screens
let you know how the test is progressing. The test process requires
approximately 15 minutes to complete.
Note: The following conditions can result in the test aborting before it
completes. If this occurs, resolve the problem and repeat Step 2
through Step 6.
The cleaning cartridge is expired.
The scratch cartridge is encrypted and the encryption key is
not stored in the library.
When the test is complete, a results screen displays showing the
outcome of the test. If the drive passes the test, the drive health is set to
Good (green).
Figure 110 The DLM Test Results screen (test successful).
If it fails, the drive health is set to Poor (red). Contact Spectra Logic
about replacing the drive (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).
Figure 111 The DLM Test Results screen (test failed).
7. Select Continue to return to the Drives screen.
204
User Guide 91090000
Chapter 9
Using Partitions
This chapter describes procedure for working with partitions in the library,
including the following topics:

Before you Begin... page 206
Configuring a New Data Partition page 209
Enter the Initial Partition Settings page 211
Choose the Robotic Control Path page 212
Configure Global Spare Tape Drives page 213
Configure the Drives and Chambers for page 215
the Partition
Configure a Direct-Attach Fibre Channel page 217
Drive Partition
Configuring a Direct-Attach SCSI page 220
Partition
Configuring an F-QIP-Attached SCSI page 222
Drive Partition
Configuring an E-QIP-Attached SCSI page 227
Drive Partition
Configuring a Cleaning Partition page 236
Enter the Initial Partition Settings page 237
Configure the Chambers for the Partition page 238
Confirming and Saving the Partition page 239
Settings
Modifying an Existing Partition page 242
Deleting a Partition page 245
205
Chapter 9 — Using Partitions
BEFORE YOU BEGIN...

Before you start configuring the partitions in your library, read:
Partitions, beginning on page 45, to learn how the library uses data
partitions to create multiple virtual libraries.
MLM PreScan and PostScan on page 159 to learn how the MLM
PreScan and PostScan features interact with the data partitions.
Configuration Requirements
When configuring partitions, keep the requirements in the following
sections in mind.
Data Partitions
The library requires, at a minimum, one data partition.
A maximum of eight data partitions are allowed in the library.
Each partition must have a minimum of one chamber assigned to the
storage pool.
Each data partition must have at least one drive.
Although an entry/exit pool for a data partition is not required, using
one is highly recommended. Only users with superuser or
administrator privileges can import media directly into or export media
directly from the storage pool.
D
Important Drive firmware update tapes can only be imported into the entry/exit pool. If you
plan to update drive firmware using a code load tape, you must configure an entry/
exit pool for the partition.
If all of the enabled chambers and drives in your library are already
assigned to an existing partition, you must modify or delete one or
more partitions to provide chambers and drives for the new partition.
Cleaning Partitions
Cleaning partitions do not count against the eight partition maximum.
You can configure cleaning partitions either before or after you
configure data partitions (see Configuring a Cleaning Partition on
page 236). However, if you know that you want to use Auto Drive
Clean for one or more data partitions, it is best to configure the cleaning
partition before you configure the data partitions.
If you create the cleaning partition after you create the data partitions,
you will need to modify the data partitions to assign a cleaning
partition to them.
206
User Guide 91090000
Before you Begin...
Preparation
Important You cannot create, modify, or delete a partition if the library is actively running a
PreScan or PostScan operation. You must stop or pause the operation before you
can continue.
To stop PreScan, select Stop Discovery on the Media Lifecycle Management
Tools screen (see Figure 88 on page 175).
To pause the PostScan for one hour, select Pause PostScan on the Media
Lifecycle Management Tools screen (see Figure 94 on page 186).
The following table summarizes the information that you need.
Component Description
Media Type Determine the type of media to be used in the partition. You can only choose
from media types that are compatible with the drives already installed in the
library. The media type you select determines the type of drive that can be used
in the partition.
Note: Only one drive type can be used in each partition.
Cleaning Partition If you plan to use the Auto Drive Clean feature, determine the number of
chambers to be used for the cleaning partition. A cleaning partition can be
shared by multiple data partitions as long as the cleaning cartridges are
compatible with the tape drives in the data partitions (see Auto Drive Clean on
page 49 for information about the relationship between cleaning partitions).
Entry/Exit pool: Determine the number of chambers to be used for the partition’s entry/exit
Number of pool. Each chamber holds a single TeraPack magazine or RXT media pack.
Chambers Note: The chambers in the entry/exit pool are not accessible to the backup
software for writing or reading data.
Storage Pool: Determine the number of chambers to be used for the partition’s storage pool.
Number of Each chamber holds a single TeraPack magazine or RXT media pack.
Chambers
Drives Assigned Determine which drives to assign to the partition. Only drives that are already
to this Partition installed in the library and are compatible with the media type you select are
available. Each data partition must have at least one drive associated with it.
Global Spares Determine which tape drives to designate as Global Spares if you plan to use
this feature.
Important: In order for the Global Spare option to be available, all tape drives
in the partition must be the same generation.
PreScan and Decide whether or not you want the library to scan the tapes in the partition for
PostScan media errors. See MLM PreScan and PostScan on page 159 for detailed
information about the PreScan and PostScan features.
Important: PostScan requires the partition to have one or more Global Spare
drives configured.
207
Component Description
Robotic Control Decide how the SCSI motion commands will be relayed to the transporter.
Path If a partition uses direct-attach drives, decide which drive will handle the
robotic control commands from the host.
Note: Direct-attach SCSI drives require a bus extension module to connect to
the host’s SCSI bus. RXT drives cannot be used in a direct-attach partition.
If a partition uses QIPs, decide whether to assign one or both of the ports on
the exporting QIP as the control path to the library’s robotic transporter.
Note: If you plan to select both ports, make sure that the software used with the
partition supports using multiple control paths and that the ports are cabled
correctly. Selecting both ports provides failover, but requires software that
supports two control paths to the transporter.
Addressing If a partition uses F-QIPs, decide what addressing mode and loop ID each port
F-QIP Ports will use (see Configure the F-QIP Port Addressing on page 225). Each F-QIP
port is identified using a worldwide name (WWN) on a Fibre Channel network
or SAN. This WWN is based on the soft address assigned to the QIP when it
attaches to the network or its fixed Loop ID if soft addressing is not used.
Addressing If a partition uses E-QIPs, decide whether the network address for each port
E-QIP Ports will be static or assigned through a DHCP server on the network. For static
addressing, you must specify the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway used
by the E-QIP. Each E-QIP port is identified by its network address.
Note: Depending on your environment, you may need to configure digests,
CHAP authentication, and iSNS.
Direct-Attach Fibre If a partition uses direct-attach Fibre Channel drives, decide what addressing
Channel Drives mode and loop ID each drive will use (see Configure the Fibre Channel
Addressing for the Drives on page 219).
SCSI IDs If a partition uses direct-attach SCSI drives, each drive must be assigned a SCSI
ID. The SCSI ID must be unique for the SCSI bus to which the drive is
connected (see Configure the Drive SCSI ID on page 221). Valid SCSI IDs on a
wide SCSI bus are 0 – 15.
Drive Visibility If a partition uses SCSI drives, decide whether the drives connected to each QIP
are visible (accessible) to external hosts through one or both of the QIP’s
interface ports.
Note: If you select both, make sure that the backup software can handle server
contention over drive use resulting from multiple paths to a drive.
208
User Guide 91090000
Configuring a New Data Partition
CONFIGURING A NEW DATA PARTITION

The first time that the library starts up after installation or following a reset
to factory defaults, you have the option of letting the library configure a
single data partition using all of the library’s available resources or
manually creating one or more partitions to your own specifications.
Use the following steps to manually create a new data partition.
To change user types, select Security > Switch User from the toolbar
menu, then log in as a user with the required privileges.
2. If you need to modify encryption settings for the partition, log into the
library as a superuser, then select Security > Encryption. The
Encryption User Login screen displays. Type the encryption user
password, then select OK to display the Encryption configuration
screen. See Configuring Encryption on page 312 for detailed
information about enabling and configuring encryption for a partition.
Start Encryption
application
Figure 112 The Encryption User Login screen.
If one or more partitions have already been created, the existing
partitions are listed in alphabetical order.
Figure 113 The Shared Library Services screen.
209
If the library does not currently have any partitions configured, the
Shared Library Services screen presents you with two options for
creating a partition.
Figure 114 The Shared Library Services screen when no

partitions have been created.
Automatically create a partition If you want the library to

automatically configure the partition, choose this option and then
follow the prompts to create a single partition that uses all the
licensed capacity and all installed tape drives.
Notes: This option is only available if there are currently no
partitions created in the library.
This option is not available if the library contains multiple
QIP or drive types.
Do not use this option if you want to use one or more of the
installed drives as a Global Spare.
This option does not enable encryption. After the partition is
created, follow the instructions in Chapter 12 – Configuring
and Using Encryption to enable encryption.
Manually create a partition Use the steps in the following sections
to create the desired partition.
4. Proceed to Enter the Initial Partition Settings.
210
User Guide 91090000
Enter the Initial Partition Settings

1. From the Shared Library Services screen, select New. The Name and
Media Type screen displays.
Figure 115 The Name and Media Type screen, create a data
partition.
2. Enter a unique, descriptive name to identify the partition in the Name

field. Names can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters and can include
the @ - _ /. and the space characters.
The default name for a data partition is Partition n, where n is a
number.
3. Select the media type for this partition. You can only use one type of
media per partition.
Choose <media type> to create a data partition.
Choose <media type> Clean to create a cleaning partition (see
Configuring a Cleaning Partition on page 236).
Note: <media type> corresponds to the type of media that will be used
in the partition. Only the media types corresponding to drives
installed in the library are listed on this screen. If you have
multiple drive types installed in the library, the media type you
choose dictates the type of drives that can be used in the
partition.
4. Proceed to Choose the Robotic Control Path.
211
Choose the Robotic Control Path

One direct-attach drive or QIP in the partition is designated as the
controller for the partition. The controller receives and processes robotic
commands sent from the host to the partition. The QIP or drive you select
is referred to as the exporting QIP or drive.
Note: The decision to use a QIP or a direct-attach drive to provide the
robotic control path determines the type of partition you will
create (see Step 6 on page 217).
1. Select Next. The Robotic Control Path screen lists the controllers (QIPs
and direct-attach drives) currently installed in the library.
Note: Depending on the types of QIPs and drives you have installed in
the library, the controllers listed may be different from those
shown in Figure 116.
Figure 116 The Robotic Control Path screen.
2. Select the direct-attach drive or QIP that will provide the control path
for the robotics.
Important If the partition uses direct-attach drives, select one of the drives as the controller;
do not select a QIP as the controller even if one is listed.
Notes: Only drives corresponding to the media type you selected in

the Name and Media Type screen (Figure 115 on page 211)
are listed. For a partition using direct-attach drives, you can
use any drive you plan to include in the partition as the
controller.
The bus expansion module does not provide any controller
functionality and is not listed as a controller.
3. Proceed to Configure Global Spare Tape Drives.
212
User Guide 91090000
Configure Global Spare Tape Drives

The Global Spare option lets you replace a failed drive remotely using a
spare drive in the library. Having a spare drive in the library lets you
continue your backup operations and replace the failed drive the next time
you are physically present at the library.
Requirements The Global Spare option is only available for direct-attach
Fibre Channel tape drives. The spare must be the same technology
generation as the drive it replaces. For example, you cannot use a direct-
attach Fibre Channel LTO-3 drive as a spare for direct-attach Fibre Channel
LTO-4 drive. The library prevents you from selecting drives that cannot be
used as spares. The type of drive you select impacts the type of drives you
can assign to the partition.
Partitions The Global Spare option is available only if all of the Fibre
Channel tape drives in the partition are the same generation. Although a
Global Spare drive can be shared by multiple partitions, the drive can only
be used by one partition at a time. If you want to configure more than one
partition to use the same Global Spare drives, repeat the steps in this
section for each partition.
PostScan Requirements If you plan to use the MLM PostScan feature, you
must configure at least one Global Spare drive for the partition.
When the PostScan process starts it “owns” the Global Spare drive until it
has processed all of the cartridges in its queue (unless you pause the
PostScan operation as described in Pause the PostScan Process on
page 186). If the shared Global Spare drive is being used for PostScan it is
not available for use as a spare. Configuring one or more dedicated Global
Spare drives for each partition that uses PostScan is highly recommended.
Note: See Using PostScan on page 182 for information about the
PostScan feature.
Setup If the correct tape drives are already installed, you can configure a
drive as a Global Spare as part of the partition configuration process; or
you can configure Global Spares later.
Note: See Using a Global Spare Tape Drive on page 107 for instructions
on how to use the Global Spare for a failed tape drive.
213
Follow these steps to set up a Global Spare tape drive.

1. Select Next. The Spare Drives screen lists the drives that are available
for use as Global Spares.
If you do not want to configure spare drives, skip to Configure the
Drives and Chambers for the Partition.
2. Select one or more of the available tape drives to be designated as
spares. Drives that cannot be used as spares are grayed out.
Figure 117 The Global Spare selection screen.
3. Proceed to Configure the Drives and Chambers for the Partition.
214
User Guide 91090000
Configure the Drives and Chambers for the Partition

1. Select Next to display the Chambers and Drives screen.
Figure 118 The Chambers and Drives screen (direct-attach

Fibre Channel drives shown).
2. Complete the following information in the Chambers and Drives

screen.
For this field... Enter...

Storage Chambers The number of storage chambers assigned to the storage pool for this partition.
Notes:
Each chamber contains a TeraPack magazine. Each magazine has slots for
either 10 LTO cartridges or 9 SDLT cartridges.
The size of the partition’s storage pool is the total number of chambers you
want to assign to the partition MINUS the number of chambers you reserved
for the partition’s entry/exit pool.
If you are configuring only one partition in your library, use all remaining
licensed chambers. If you are creating multiple partitions, be sure to reserve
enough chambers to configure the other partitions.
If you licensed all of the chambers in the library and want to use a cleaning
partition, you must also subtract the number of chambers used for the
cleaning partition from the total number of chambers assigned to the storage
pool.
215

EE Chambers The number of chambers assigned to the entry/exit pool for this partition.
Although an entry/exit pool is not required, using one is highly recommended.
Important: If you will need to update drive firmware using a firmware update
tape, you must configure an entry/exit pool for the partition. Drive firmware
update tapes can only be imported into the entry/exit pool.
Note: The chambers in the entry/exit pool are not accessible to the backup
software for writing or reading data.
Drives Select the drives to be dedicated to this partition. The check boxes for any
installed drives that cannot be used in the partition are grayed out.
Notes:
If you selected a direct-attach Fibre Channel or SCSI drive to provide the
robotics control path, you can only choose drives with the same interface as
the exporting drive for the partition. Mixing Fibre Channel and SCSI drives in
a partition is not allowed.
If you enabled Global Spares by selecting one or more drives in the Spare
Drives screen, you can only choose direct-attach Fibre Channel drives for the
partition.
If you plan to use SCSI drives in the partition, they must be connected to the
network through either an F-QIP, an E-QIP, or a bus expansion module (SCSI
bus).
If you plan to mix multiple generations of the same media technology (for
example, LTO-3 and LTO-4) in the same partition, make sure that the drives
in the partition support all of the generations. The media used by different
generations may not be compatible (for example, see LTO Read/Write
Compatibility on page 467.
3. If you want to enable Auto Drive Clean in this data partition and have
previously created a cleaning partition (see Configuring a Cleaning
Partition on page 236), use the Cleaning Partition drop-down list to
select the cleaning partition. If you do not want to enable Auto Drive
Clean, select None.
Note: The option to select a cleaning partition is only available if you
previously configured a cleaning partition that uses the same
type of media as the data partition. If you create a cleaning
partition later, edit the data partition to associate the cleaning
partition with it.
4. If you are not logged into the encryption application or have not
configured encryption, skip to Step 6. You can configure the partition to
use encryption later, as described in Configuring Encryption on
page 312.
If you logged into the encryption application (see page 209) and have
already configured encryption, the Encryption screen displays. See
Assigning the Encryption Key to a Partition on page 317 for
information about this screen.
5. After you complete the Encryption screen, proceed to Step 6.
216
User Guide 91090000
6. The remaining configuration steps for the partition depend on the

controller you selected to provide the robotics control path. Proceed to
one of the following sections:
Configure a Direct-Attach Fibre Channel Drive Partition
Configuring a Direct-Attach SCSI Partition on page 220
Configuring an F-QIP-Attached SCSI Drive Partition on page 222
Configuring an E-QIP-Attached SCSI Drive Partition on page 227
Configure a Direct-Attach Fibre Channel Drive Partition

In this type of partition, one of the direct-attach Fibre Channel drives
(indicated by an “f” in the drive identifier) in the partition provides the
control path for SCSI motion commands issued by the host to control the
robotic transporter (see Choose the Robotic Control Path on page 212). The
Fibre Channel drives connect directly to the Fibre Channel network. See
Figure 18 on page 53 for an example of this type of configuration.
Configure MLM PreScan and PostScan

If MLM is enabled, you can configure the partition to use the MLM
PreScan and PostScan features. See Using MLM PreScan and PostScan on
page 181 for information about these features.
Notes: The options for triggering PostScan are only available if you
configured one or more Global Spares for the partition.
When you import tapes with MLM disabled, those tapes are
not checked.
217
Use the following steps to configure the PreScan and PostScan features for
the partition.
1. From the Chambers and Drives screen (or the Encryption screen), select
Next. The MLM Media Verification screen displays.
Note: If you do not want to use these features, skip to Configure the
Fibre Channel Addressing for the Drives.
Figure 119 The Media Verification screen.
2. Configure the PreScan and PostScan for the partition. Selecting any of
the PostScan triggers automatically enables PostScan for the partition.
Select this field... To...
Enable PreScan Enable the PreScan feature. When enabled, PreScan replaces the more basic
Media Auto Discovery process.
Verify After Time Add the tapes in the partition to the automatic PostScan queue after the
specified number of days have passed since the last scan. Enter the number of
days in the Days field.
Verify After Write Add each tape in the partition to the automatic PostScan queue after data is
Verify After Read written to it or read from it.
3. Proceed to Configure the Fibre Channel Addressing for the Drives.
218
User Guide 91090000
Configure the Fibre Channel Addressing for the Drives

The Fibre Channel Loop ID determines how each drive in the partition is
addressed when attached to a Fibre Channel arbitrated loop or fabric.
1. From the MLM Media Verification screen, select Next. The Fibre
Channel Loop ID’s screen displays.
Figure 120 The Fibre Channel Loop ID’s screen (direct-attach

Fibre Channel drive).
2. Select Soft Addressing or Hard Addressing for each of the drives listed.
If you select Hard Addressing, enter a value between 0 and 125 for the
Loop ID.
3. Proceed to Configure User Access.
Configure User Access

1. From the Fibre Channel Loop ID’s screen, select Next. The Partition
Users screen displays.
Figure 121 The Partition Users screen.
2. Select the users who are allowed access to this partition. Only users that
have previously been configured can be selected (see Configuring
Library Users on page 266).
3. Proceed to Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings on page 239.
219
Configuring a Direct-Attach SCSI Partition

In this type of partition, one of the direct-attach SCSI drives in the partition
provides the control path for SCSI motion commands issued by the host to
control the robotic transporter (see Choose the Robotic Control Path on
page 212). In this type of partition, each drive in the partition is connected
to bus expansion module. Each drive is on a separate SCSI bus (see
Important Spectra Logic does not support daisy-chaining multiple SCSI drives on a single
SCSI bus, nor does it support daisy-chaining other devices on the same SCSI bus
as a drive.
Important A direct-attached SCSI drive partition does not support Global Spares or the MLM
PostScan feature. If you want to use either of these features, see Configure a
Direct-Attach Fibre Channel Drive Partition on page 217.
Note: You must have a bus expansion module installed in the same
DBA as the drives in order to use direct-attach SCSI drives.
Configure MLM PreScan

PreScan feature instead of the more basic Media Auto Discovery process.
See Using PreScan on page 181 for information about these features.
Note: When you import tapes with MLM disabled, those tapes are not
checked.
Use the following steps to configure PreScan for the partition.
Note: If you do not want to use this feature, skip to Configure the Fibre
Channel Addressing for the Drives.
2. Select Enable PreScan to enable this feature.

3. Proceed to Configure the Drive SCSI ID.
220
User Guide 91090000
Configure the Drive SCSI ID

The SCSI ID for each drive determines how the drive is addressed on the
SCSI bus.
1. From the MLM Media Verification screen, select Next. The SCSI ID’s
screen displays.
Figure 123 The SCSI ID’s screen.
2. Enter a SCSI ID for each drive.

Each device on the SCSI bus must have a unique SCSI ID. SCSI IDs can
range from 0 to 15 on a wide SCSI bus.
Make sure that the SCSI IDs you specify are not assigned to other devices on the
Caution same SCSI bus. Assigning the same SCSI ID to multiple devices on the same SCSI
bus will cause communication problems on the bus.

1. From the SCSI ID’s screen, select Next. The Partition Users screen
displays.
Figure 124 The Partition Users screen (direct-attach SCSI).
have previously been configured (see Configuring Library Users on
page 266) can be selected.
3. Proceed to Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings.
221
Configuring an F-QIP-Attached SCSI Drive Partition

In this type of partition, an F-QIP provides the Fibre Channel interface to
the SCSI drives in the partition as well as the control path for SCSI motion
commands issued by the host to control the robotic transporter. See
Important An F-QIP-attached SCSI drive partition does not support Global Spares or the MLM
Important Connecting SCSI drives through an F-QIP is only supported as a legacy solution.
To create this type of partition, select an F-QIP to provide the control path
for the motion control commands to the transporter (see Choose the
Robotic Control Path on page 212) and select SCSI drives in the Chambers
and Drives screen (see Configure the Drives and Chambers for the
Partition on page 215). These drives can be connected to either the F-QIP
that provides the robotics control path or to another F-QIP in the library.
Note: You cannot use QIP-attached SCSI drives and direct-attach Fibre
Channel drives in the same partition.

checked.
Note: If you do not want to use this feature, skip to Configure User
Access.

222
User Guide 91090000

1. From the MLM Media Verification screen, select Next. The Partition
3. Proceed to Configure the Robotic Path Visibility.
Configure the Robotic Path Visibility

The robotic path visibility determines whether one or both of the interface
ports on the F-QIP provide the robotic control path.
1. From the Partition Users screen, select Next. The Robotic Path Visibility
screen displays.
Figure 127 The Robotic Path Visibility screen (F-QIP with SCSI
drives).
223
2. Select either one or both ports on the F-QIP to provide the robotic
control path to the transporter.
Notes: If you have previously configured an F-QIP in the partition
and do not need to make any configuration changes, select
Skip Ports to advance to the Configure Drive Visibility
screen.
Selecting both ports provides failover, but requires software
that supports two control paths to the transporter.
3. If the drives in the partition are connected to the F-QIP that provides
the robotics control path (the exporting F-QIP), proceed to Configure
Drive Visibility.
If some or all of the drives in the partition are not connected to the
exporting F-QIP, skip to Configure the F-QIP Port Addressing on
page 225. After you configure the port addressing for the exporting
F-QIP, you will configure the drive visibility as described in the
following section, Configure Drive Visibility.
Configure Drive Visibility

The QIP has an any-to-any relationship between the QIP’s drives and the
QIP’s two ports. See Partitions Using QIP-Attached SCSI Drives on page 57
to learn more about this relationship.
For each drive on the F-QIP, identify the port(s) through which the hosts
will communicate with the drive.
1. From the Robotic Path Visibility screen, select Next to display the Drive
Visibility screen.
Figure 128 The Drive Visibility screen (F-QIP with SCSI drives).
224
User Guide 91090000
2. For each drive, select either one or both ports to provide access
(visibility) to the drive.
Notes: Drives can be visible through both ports for failover or drive
sharing. If they are visible through both ports, make sure that
the software accessing this partition can handle any server
contention over drive use that can result from multiple paths
to a single drive.
If you previously configured the selected ports, select Skip
Ports and proceed to Confirming and Saving the Partition
Settings on page 239
3. Proceed to Configure the F-QIP Port Addressing.
Configure the F-QIP Port Addressing

If the partition uses multiple F-QIPs you will encounter two separate
screens for configuring the port addressing:
The Exporting F-QIP Settings screen configures the port addresses for
the F-QIP that provides the robotics control path (the exporting F-QIP).
These settings also apply to any drives connected to the exporting
F-QIP.
Note: An F-QIP can export multiple partitions. If the F-QIP is being
used to export more than one partition, a confirmation screen
displays to warn you that any changes you make will affect all
partitions associated with the F-QIP.
When one or more of the drives in the partition are connected to other
F-QIPs in the library, a separate F-QIP Settings screen configures the
port addresses for any drives in the partition that are connected to that
F-QIP. If multiple additional F-QIPs are used, the settings for each one
must be configured separately.
If you previously configured the F-QIP settings for both the exporting
F-QIP and any additional F-QIPs in the partition and do not want to
make any configuration changes, select Next on the F-QIP
Configuration screen to proceed to Confirming and Saving the Partition
Settings on page 239.
225
Use the following steps to configure the F-QIP port addressing for the
exporting F-QIP and any additional F-QIPs in the partition.
1. From the Drive Visibility screen, select Next. The Exporting F-QIP
Configuration screen (or F-QIP Configuration screen) displays.
Figure 129 The Exporting F-QIP Configuration Figure 130 The F-QIP Configuration screen for
screen. SCSI drives connected to another F-QIP.
2. For the Address and Fibre Mode settings, choose one of these
combinations:
Use Soft Address and Fabric.
Use Loop ID and Loop. The Loop ID must be between 0 and 125.
Use Soft Address and Auto-negotiate.
Use Loop ID and Auto-negotiate. The Loop ID must be between 0 and
125.
Note: If you choose Loop as the Fibre Mode, the Fibre Channel switch
to which the F-QIP is connected may override your settings.
3. Repeat the configuration steps in this section to configure any
additional F-QIP ports if:
All of the drives in the partition are connected to the exporting
F-QIP and you selected both F-QIP ports in the Robotic Path
Visibility screen or the Drive Visibility screen.
—OR—
F-QIP and you selected different F-QIP ports in the Robotic Path
Visibility and the Drive Visibility screens.
—OR—
All of the drives in the partition are not connected to the exporting
F-QIP. You must configure the ports on the F-QIP(s) where the
drives are connected.
4. If necessary, configure the drive visibility for the F-QIP ports (see
Configure Drive Visibility on page 224).
5. After you have configured all of the F-QIP ports being used, proceed to
Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings on page 239.
226
User Guide 91090000
Configuring an E-QIP-Attached SCSI Drive Partition
Important Ethernet QIPs (E-QIPs) a are only supported as legacy devices. They are no longer
Important Connecting SCSI drives through an E-QIP is only supported as a legacy solution.
Important An E-QIP-attached SCSI drive partition does not support Global Spares or the MLM
In this type of partition, the E-QIP provides the iSCSI network interface to
the SCSI drives in the partition as well as the control path for SCSI motion
commands issued by the host to control the robotic transporter. See
To create this type of partition, select an E-QIP as the controller (see Choose
the Robotic Control Path on page 212).
Configure the Ethernet Protocol

1. From the Spare Drives screen, select Next. The Ethernet Protocol screen
displays. The only choice is iSCSI.
Figure 131 The Ethernet Protocol screen (E-QIP with SCSI

drives).
2. Proceed to Configure the Drives and Chambers for the Partition on

page 215.
3. After you configure the drives and chambers for the partition, proceed
to Step 4, below.
4. If you are not logged into the encryption application or have not
configured encryption, proceed to Configure User Access. You can
configure the partition to use encryption later, as described in
Configuring Encryption on page 312.
If you are logged into the encryption application (see page 243) and
have already configured encryption, the Encryption screen displays.
See Enable Drive-Based Encryption on page 319 for information about
this screen. After you complete the Encryption screen, proceed to
Configure MLM PreScan.
227

checked.
Note: If you do not want to use this feature, skip to Configure User
Access.


1. From the MLM Media Verification screen, select Next. The Partition
3. Proceed to Configure the Robotic Path Visibility.
228
User Guide 91090000
Configure the Robotic Path Visibility

The robotic path visibility determines whether the one or both of the
interface ports on the E-QIP provide the robotic control path.
1. From the SmartMotion Options screen, select Next. The Robotic Path
Visibility screen displays.
Figure 134 The Robotic Path Visibility screen (E-QIP).
2. Select either one or both ports on the E-QIP to provide the robotic
control path to the transporter.
Notes: If you have previously configured an E-QIP in the partition
and do not need to make any configuration changes, select
Skip Ports to skip the Exporting E-QIP Configuration screen
and advance to the Configure Drive Visibility screen.
Selecting both ports provides failover, but requires software
that supports two control paths to the transporter.
3. If the drives in the partition are connected to the E-QIP that provides
the robotics control path (the exporting E-QIP), proceed to Configure
Drive Visibility.
If the drives in the partition are not connected to the exporting E-QIP,
skip to Configure the E-QIP Port Addressing on page 231. After you
configure the port addressing for the exporting E-QIP, you will
configure the drive visibility.
229
Configure Drive Visibility

The QIP has an any-to-any relationship between the QIP’s drives and the
QIP’s two ports. See Connectivity on page 52 to learn more about this
relationship.
For each drive on the E-QIP, identify the port(s) through which the outside
world will communicate with the drive.
1. From the Robotic Path Visibility screen, select Next. The Drive Visibility
screen displays.
Figure 135 The Drive Visibility screen (E-QIP).
2. For each drive, select either one or both ports to provide access
(visibility) to the drive.
Notes: Drives can be visible through both ports for failover or drive
sharing. If they are visible through both ports, make sure that
the software accessing this partition can handle any server
contention over drive use that can result from multiple paths
to a single drive.
If you previously configured the selected ports, select Skip
Ports and proceed to Confirming and Saving the Partition
Settings on page 239.
3. If the drives in the partition are connected to the E-QIP that provides
the robotics control path (the exporting E-QIP), proceed to Configure
the E-QIP Port Addressing.
If some or all of the drives in the partition are not connected to the
exporting E-QIP, a separate E-QIP configuration screen sets the port
addressing for the E-QIP connected to the drives. Proceed to Configure
the E-QIP Port Addressing.
230
User Guide 91090000
Configure the E-QIP Port Addressing

Notes: The Exporting E-QIP Settings screen configures the port
addresses for the E-QIP that provides the robotics control
path. These settings also apply to any drives connected to the
exporting E-QIP.
The E-QIP Settings screen configures the port addresses for
any drives in the partition that are connected to another
E-QIP. If multiple additional E-QIPs are used, the settings for
each one have to be configured separately.
An E-QIP can export multiple partitions. If the E-QIP is being
used to export more than one partition, a confirmation screen
displays to warn you that any changes you make will affect
all partitions associated with the QIP.
If you previously configured the E-QIP and do not want to
make any configuration changes, select Next to proceed to
Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings on page 239.
Use the following steps to configure the port addressing for each E-QIP.
1. From the Drive Visibility screen, select Next. The Exporting E-QIP
Settings screen (or the E-QIP Settings screen) displays.
Figure 136 The Exporting E-QIP Configuration Figure 137 The E-QIP Configuration screen for
screen. SCSI drives connected to another E-QIP.
2. Enter a Hostname of up to 64 alphanumeric characters. The name can

include hyphens.
231
3. Select either DHCP or Static Address. Using a static address is

recommended.
Select DHCP if the network to which you are connecting the E-QIP
uses a DHCP server to automatically assign IP addresses.
Important If you select DHCP, and your environment uses iSNS, be sure to read Configuration
Note: Using DHCP in iSNS Environments on page 232 for important information.
Select Static Address if your network does not use DHCP or if you
simply want to have a fixed IP address for the partition. Enter the
addressing information for the E-QIP. Hosts connected to the E-QIP
use this information when communicating with devices controlled
by the E-QIP.
The IP address and gateway must be valid Class A, B, or C
addresses in the form nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Enter 0.0.0.0 for the
Gateway if your network does not use a gateway.
The subnet mask must be a valid octet in the form
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn.
4. Proceed to Configure the E-QIP iSCSI Settings on page 233.
Configuration Note: Using DHCP in iSNS Environments

Using DHCP requires the QIP to be connected to an external network in
order for it to obtain an IP address.
Using DHCP only Using DHCP addressing requires the QIP to
communicate with an external DHCP server to obtain the Ethernet setup
information needed for communication over a network. If the DHCP
server is not present or cannot be reached when the library powers up, the
QIP will not be able to communicate with any host on the network.
When DHCP is enabled, the QIP begins searching for a DHCP server as
soon as the library is powered on. If a DHCP server does not respond
within three minutes, a warning message is sent to the user interface. The
QIP continues searching until it finds a DHCP server. You may need to
reset the QIP to restart the DHCP server scan.
When you first create a Gigabit Ethernet partition, you must enter a host
name for the ports on the E-QIP. Because this hostname is not yet
registered with the DHCP server, the only way to address the iSCSI port on
the QIP is by using its IP address. Thus, if you use DHCP, you must get the
DHCP-assigned IP address directly from the DHCP server and enter this
address in the Static Address field to establish the initial communication
with the QIP.
232
User Guide 91090000
Using iSNS An alternative to knowing the DHCP-assigned IP address of

the QIP is to enable and configure iSCSI Storage Name Service (iSNS) for
the DHCP port. When iSNS is enabled, the QIP registers its iSCSI name
and IP address with the iSNS server. The iSNS server maintains a list of the
DHCP IP addresses and iSCSI names of all iSCSI devices on the network,
including the QIP. Any iSNS-aware iSCSI initiator on the network can use
this information to establish a connection to an iSCSI device on the
network without knowing the host name or IP address of the iSCSI device.
Configure the E-QIP iSCSI Settings

1. From the Exporting E-QIP Settings screen, select Next. The Exporting
iSCSI Settings screen displays.
Note: If you are configuring the ports for an E-QIP other than the
exporting E-QIP, this screen is called iSCSI Settings. The
information on the screen is identical.
Figure 138 The Exporting iSCSI Settings screen.
2. If necessary for your network environment, change the Listen Port for
the E-QIP. The value must be an integer between 1 and 65535 (the
default setting is 3260).
233
3. If desired, select Enable Header Digests and/or Enable Data Digests.

Note: With digests disabled, any attempted connection that requires
digests fails.
When digests are enabled, the connection is considered a
preferred connection. With a preferred digest connection,
any initiator connection (with or without digests)
succeeds.
Currently, the only way to determine if any single iSCSI
connection has digests enabled or disabled is if the
initiator can report the connection type to the user.
4. If desired, select CHAP (Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol)
as the authentication method.
5. If desired, select Use iSNS.
If you select Use iSNS, enter the iSNS IP Address and the iSNS Port. The
iSNS IP address must be a valid Class A, B or C address and the iSNS
Port setting must be an integer between 1 and 65535. See Using iSNS on
page 233 for information about using iSNS.
6. If you did not select CHAP authentication, continue with Step 7.
If you selected CHAP authentication, proceed to Configure E-QIP
CHAP Authentication.
7. Repeat the configuration steps beginning at Configure the E-QIP Port
Addressing on page 231 to configure any additional E-QIP ports if:
E-QIP and you selected both E-QIP ports in the Robotic Path
—OR—
F-QIP and you selected different F-QIP ports in the Robotic Path
—OR—
F-QIP. You must configure the ports on the E-QIP(s) where the
8. After you have configured all of the E-QIP ports being used, proceed to
Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings.
234
User Guide 91090000
Configure E-QIP CHAP Authentication

1. From the Exporting iSCSI Settings screen, select Next. The Exporting
CHAP Settings screen displays.
Note: If you are configuring the ports for an E-QIP other than the
exporting E-QIP, this screen is called CHAP Settings. The
information on the screen is identical.
Figure 139 The Exporting CHAP Settings screen.
2. Enter the Remote Device Name and Remote Secret. The remote name
and secret (password) are used by the iSCSI initiator when it
authenticates the QIP port.
The name must be less than 256 alphanumeric (plus hyphen, period,
and colon) characters, and the secret must be less than 101 characters.
Note: Some iSCSI initiators have their own imposed limits on the
number of characters used for the Name and Secret.
3. If you want to use bi-directional (dual) CHAP, enter the Local Device
Name and Local Secret. The local name and secret (password) are used
by the QIP when it authenticates the iSCSI initiator.
The name must be less than 256 alphanumeric (plus hyphen, period,
and colon) characters, and the secret must be less than 101 characters.
Notes: Dual CHAP is only needed if the iSCSI initiator requires
bidirectional CHAP authentication. If the iSCSI initiator is
configured to use uni-directional CHAP, then uni-directional
CHAP is used, regardless of how the QIP is configured.
You must either enter values for both the Local Device Name
and Local Secret or leave both blank.
Some iSCSI initiators impose their own limits on the number
of characters used for the Local Device Name and Local Secret.
235
4. Select Save. The CHAP entry displays at the top of the screen.
Important Do not select Next before selecting Save, or you will lose all of the CHAP
configuration settings you just completed.
5. If required, repeat Step 2 through Step 4 to add as many CHAP entries

as necessary, selecting Save after each. If necessary, you may also edit
entries from the Exporting CHAP Settings screen.
6. After you finish configuring all of the required CHAP entries, proceed
to Step 7.
7. Repeat the configuration steps beginning at Configure the E-QIP Port
Addressing on page 231 to configure any additional E-QIP ports if:
E-QIP and you selected both E-QIP ports in the Robotic Path
—OR—
E-QIP and you selected different E-QIP ports in the Robotic Path
—OR—
E-QIP. You must configure the ports on the E-QIP(s) where the
8. After you have configured all of the E-QIP ports being used, proceed to
Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings.
CONFIGURING A CLEANING PARTITION

Cleaning partitions provide permanent storage for cleaning cartridges
inside the library when using the Auto Drive Clean option (see Auto Drive
Clean on page 49). A cleaning partition can be shared by multiple data
partitions as long as the cleaning cartridges are compatible with the tape
drives in the data partitions.
If you configured MLM PostScan for the data partition associated with the
cleaning partition, the Global Spare drive being used to verify the
cartridges is cleaned using a cleaning cartridge in the cleaning partition.
After each cartridge is moved from the Global Spare drive following its
verification, the library checks to see if the drive requires cleaning. If it
does and a cleaning partition is associated with the data partition, the drive
is cleaned before the next tape is processed.
236
User Guide 91090000
Configuring a Cleaning Partition
You can configure cleaning partitions either before or after you configure
data partitions. However, if you know that you want to use automated
drive cleaning with a data partition, it is easier to configure the cleaning
partition before you configure the data partitions. A cleaning partition can
be shared by multiple data partitions as long as the cleaning cartridges are
compatible with the tape drives in the data partitions.
When a cleaning partition is associated with a data partition (thereby
enabling Auto Drive Clean), the library automatically makes any chambers
that are not already configured for use in another partition available for
use in cleaning partitions. The library gives you the option of reserving one
unused chamber for a cleaning partition each time you create a data
partition.
If all of the physically available chambers in your library are already
licensed and assigned to existing partitions, you must modify or delete one
or more partitions to provide chambers for the new cleaning partition (see
Modifying an Existing Partition on page 242 and Deleting a Partition on
page 245).
Enter the Initial Partition Settings

2. From the Shared Library Services screen, select New. The Name and
Media Type screen displays.
Figure 140 The Name and Media Type screen, create a

cleaning partition.
3. Enter a unique, descriptive name to identify the partition in the Name

field. Names can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters and can include
the @ - _ /. and the space characters.
237
4. Select <media type> Clean to create a cleaning partition using the

selected cleaning cartridge type.
Note: <media type> corresponds to the type of cleaning cartridge that
will be stored in the cleaning partition. Only the cleaning media
types compatible with the drives installed in the library are
listed.
Configure the Chambers for the Partition

1. From the Name and Media Type screen, select Next. The Chambers and
Drives screen displays.
Figure 141 The Chambers and Drives screen (cleaning

partition).
2. Enter the number of chambers to assign to the this cleaning partition.

3. Proceed to Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings.
238
User Guide 91090000
Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings
CONFIRMING AND SAVING THE PARTITION SETTINGS

After you finish configuring the partition, confirm and save the partition
settings.
Note: If you want to save the configuration to a USB drive, connect the
drive to the USB port on the LCM (see Figure 8 on page 35)
before continuing.
1. After you complete the configuration screens for the partition as
described in the previous sections, select Next. The Save Library
Configuration screen displays.
Figure 142 The Save Library Configuration screen.
2. Select whether to save the current library configuration.

Don’t Save Library Configuration (not recommended)—A backup of
the changed library configuration will not be saved.
Save Library Configuration To—Saves a backup of the changed
library configuration to the selected destination. Using this option is
highly recommended to ensure that you can easily restore the
library if necessary.
Choose whether to save the library configuration file to USB or to
email it to an already-configured mail recipient (see Configuring
Mail Users on page 280).
Note: Do not use the default autosupport@spectralogic.com email
recipient. Spectra Logic does not save emailed configuration files
unless they are specifically requested for troubleshooting.
239
3. Select Next. The Save Partition screen displays.

Note: The Save Partition screen on your library may be different from
the ones shown in Figure 143 and Figure 144. The information
on this screen varies depending on the type of partition you have
configured.
Figure 143 The Save Partition screen for an F-QIP Figure 144 The Save Partition screen (cleaning
partition with a Global Spare and cleaning partition).
partition.
4. Review the information on the screen and confirm that all settings are
correct for this partition’s configuration.
If the configuration information is correct, proceed to Step 5.
If the configuration information is not correct, either:
Select Cancel to configure the partition again from the beginning.
Select Previous to move backward through the configuration
screens until you reach the settings that need correction. Make
any necessary corrections, then select Next to move forward
through the screens and return to the Save Partition screen.
Note: If the screen requiring the correction is toward the beginning of
the configuration process, it may be easiest to select Cancel and
repeat the entire configuration process.
As you move backward through the configuration screens, the
values are reset to their default values. After you reach the
desired screen and make the necessary changes, advance
through the screens and re-enter any necessary information.
240
User Guide 91090000
Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings
5. Select Save. The library requires several minutes to store the

configuration information, after which the Shared Library Services
screen redisplays with the partition you just created listed.
Notes: If you assigned a cleaning partition to the data partition, the

partition icon changes as shown in Figure 145.
When you save the partition, the library generates an auto-
configuration file and saves it to the LCM compact flash.
If you configured the auto-save email option, an email
containing the updated library configuration and the MLM
database is sent to the specified recipient (see Enabling Email
for the Automatic Configuration Save Feature on page 282).
6. To configure another data partition, repeat the entire configuration
process, beginning with Configuring a New Data Partition on page 209.
To configure another cleaning partition, repeat the entire configuration
process, beginning with Configuring a Cleaning Partition on page 236
241
MODIFYING AN EXISTING PARTITION

When reducing the number of chambers assigned to a partition, physically export
Caution any media in those chambers, as described in Exporting or Exchanging Media on
page 140, before you remove chambers from the partition.
By default, the library deletes empty chambers from a partition first. However, if all
of the chambers are full, the library is forced to delete populated chambers. When
this happens, the media packs in the deleted chambers are no longer accessible
through BlueScale or the backup application. You must add the chambers to either
a new or an existing partition before the media packs can be accessed again.
Notes: Spectra Logic strongly recommends saving the library

configuration, either to a USB drive or as an attachment to an
email sent to a previously configured mail recipient, before
you modify a partition.
When you make a change to a partition, the library generates
an auto-configuration file and saves it to the LCM compact
flash.
If you configured the auto-save email option, an email
containing the updated library configuration and the MLM
database will be sent to the specified recipient (see Enabling
Email for the Automatic Configuration Save Feature on
page 282).
Do not use the default autosupport@spectralogic.com email
recipient. Spectra Logic does not save emailed configuration
files unless they are specifically requested for
troubleshooting.
Use the following steps to edit an existing partition.
242
User Guide 91090000
Modifying an Existing Partition
2. If you need to modify encryption settings for the partition, log into the
library as a superuser, then select Security > Encryption. The
Encryption User Login screen displays. Type the encryption user
password, then select OK to display the Encryption configuration
screen. See Configuring Encryption on page 312 for detailed
information about enabling and configuring encryption for a partition.
Start Encryption
application
243
4. Select either Summary or Edit. Either option can be used when

modifying a partition.
If you select Summary, the Partition Settings screen displays,
showing summary information related to the selected partition.
If you do not want to make any changes to the partition, select
Cancel to return to the Shared Library Services screen.
Note: To view all of the configuration settings for the partition, select
the Edit option.
Figure 148 The Partition Settings screen (data partition).
Select Edit from either the Partition Settings screen or the Shared
Library Services screen to display the Name and Media Type screen.
Figure 149 The Name and Media screen (data Figure 150 The Name and Media Type screen
partition). (cleaning partition).
244
User Guide 91090000
Deleting a Partition
5. The Name and Media Type screen is the beginning of a series of

configuration screens. Depending of the type of partition you are
modifying, the sequence of steps and screens matches those for creating
either:
a new data partition, beginning with Enter the Initial Partition
Settings on page 211,
—OR—
a new cleaning partition, beginning with Configuring a Cleaning
Partition on page 236,
except that you cannot change the media (drive) type specified for
the partition.
DELETING A PARTITION
When you delete a partition, the drives and chambers previously assigned
to that partition can be reassigned to an existing partition or used to create
a new partition.
Before deleting a partition, either physically export the media stored in the
Caution chambers for that partition or have a plan to add the chambers to another
partition. After the partition is deleted, the media in the chambers assigned to the
partition will not be accessible until the chambers are assigned to another
partition.
To ensure that you do not inadvertently mix media from one partition with that
from another, use your backup software to eject all of the media in the partition.
The library moves the media to the partition’s entry/exit pool. Export the media
from the library as described in Exporting or Exchanging Media on page 140.
Note: Spectra Logic strongly recommends saving the library

configuration, either to a USB drive or as an attachment to an
email sent to a previously configured mail recipient, before you
delete a partition.
Use the following steps to delete an existing partition.
3. Select Delete for the partition you want to delete. A Feedback Required
screen displays.
245
4. Select whether to save the current library configuration.

If you select to save the configuration, choose whether to save it to USB
or to email it to an already-configured mail recipient (see Configuring
Note: If you want to save the configuration to a USB memory device,
connect the device to the USB port on the LCM (see Figure 8 on
page 35) before continuing.
5. Select Ok to confirm that you want to delete the partition or select
Cancel to return to the Shared Library Services screen.
The screen refreshes. The deleted partition is no longer listed on the
246
User Guide 91090000
Chapter 10
AutoSupport
This chapter describes how to configure and use AutoSupport with your
library. All AutoSupport functionality is included with your library
purchase.

AutoSupport Overview page 248
Configuring AutoSupport page 250
Before You Begin page 250
Configure Mail Recipients page 251
Configure AutoSupport Profiles page 251
Configure Alarms page 255
Configure Log Set Forwarding page 257
Using AutoSupport page 258
Creating New Support Tickets page 258
Updating Existing Support Tickets page 262
247
Chapter 10 — AutoSupport
AUTOSUPPORT OVERVIEW
AutoSupport configures the library to automatically contact library users
with messages or when specific events occur. It can also be used to open or
update a support ticket and send it to a specified recipient or to
SpectraGuard Support. AutoSupport can be used without email access by
saving the ASL sets generated by AutoSupport to a USB key and then
manually sending the stored information to SpectraGuard Support.
Send Log Sets

This feature lets you manually generate a standard AutoSupport Log
(ASL) set (file) and email it to a pre-configured recipient or save it to a USB
drive. You can use the Send Log Sets option to open or update a support
ticket and send it to a specified recipient or to SpectraGuard Support. The
ASL included in the support ticket includes the following types of
information:
Library Control Module (LCM) logs
LCM configuration (including the current physical configuration)
EC data from all components
Firmware information
Contact information for data center staff
Other library information specified in the AutoSupport user profile.
Log Forwarding
This feature configures the library to send monthly ASL files to
preconfigured recipients (see Configure Log Set Forwarding on page 257).
248
User Guide 91090000
AutoSupport Overview
Critical Alarms
When you enable critical alarms, the library automatically generates an
ASL file whenever any of the events in the following table occurs. If you
configured one of your AutoSupport profiles as the AutoSend Profile (see
Step 3 on page 253), the library automatically sends the ASL file to the mail
recipients in the AutoSend profile.
Note: If you select autosupport@spectralogic.com as a mail recipient in
the AutoSend profile, the library also sends the ASL file and a
ticket request to SpectraGuard Support.
For this event... An AutoSupport ticket request is generated...

Motion Restart Whenever motion restarts. Each motion restart is treated as a separate event
and results in generation and submission of an AutoSupport ticket request.
Front or Side Panel If the library side panel is opened or removed three times within thirty minutes.
Opened or Removed Only one AutoSupport ticket request is generated for each 30-minute time
period.
Power Supply When a power supply fails. Each power supply is evaluated separately. Only
Failure one AutoSupport ticket request per power supply is generated for each 24-hour
time period, even if the power supply fails and then resumes operation
repeatedly. If two power supplies fail during the same 24-hour time period, two
separate AutoSupport ticket requests are generated, one per failed power
supply.
QIP Failure Whenever the library detects that a QIP is no longer present. Only QIPs that are
configured as part of a partition will generate an AutoSupport ticket request.
The following QIP problems can generate a QIP failure event:
Failure of the QIP software or hardware,
Loss of communication between the library and the QIP
Removal of a QIP from the library without using the BlueScale Controller
Remove or Controller Replace operation.
AutoSupport ticket requests are not generated if the QIP is removed following a
Controller Remove or a Controller Replace operation.
Each QIP is evaluated separately. Only one AutoSupport ticket request per QIP
is generated for each 24-hour time period, even if the QIP fails and then
resumes operation repeatedly. If two QIPs fail during the same 24-hour time
period, two separate AutoSupport ticket requests are generated, one per failed
QIP.
249
For this event... An AutoSupport ticket request is generated...

Drive Failure When the library detects that a drive which is part of a configured partition is
no longer present and this drive failure results in the percentage of failed drives
in the partition meeting or exceeding a specified threshold (see Configure
Alarms on page 255).
The following drive problems can generate a drive failure event:
Failure of the drive software or hardware
Loss communication between the library and the drive
Removal of a drive from the library without using the BlueScale Drive
Remove or Drive Replace operation.
AutoSupport ticket requests are not generated if the drive is removed following
a Drive Remove or a Drive Replace operation.
Library Controller If the library controller (LC) fails to properly initialize.
Fails to Initialize
CONFIGURING AUTOSUPPORT
If you have any questions about configuring AutoSupport, contact
Note: To simplify entering the information required to configure and
use AutoSupport, use the BlueScale web interface or a keyboard
attached to the LCM.
Before You Begin

Before you configure AutoSupport, Spectra Logic recommends connecting
the library to an email gateway. You will need to do the following:
Connect a10BaseT/100BaseT Ethernet cable to the Ethernet connector
on the LCM (see Library Control Module (LCM) on page 35).
Obtain the library’s IP address, subnet, and gateway address (see
Configuring Network Settings on page 278).
Obtain the AutoSupport Customer/Contract Number for the library.
250
User Guide 91090000
Configuring AutoSupport
Configure Mail Recipients

If not already completed, configure the mail recipient who should receive
AutoSupport information (see Configuring Mail Users on page 280). At a
minimum, configure SpectraGuard Support (autosupport@spectralogic.com)
as a mail recipient if you want to send AutoSupport ticket requests to
SpectraGuard Support. If desired, you can configure additional recipients,
as well.
Notes: The default autosupport@spectralogic.commail recipient can
be used for any ASL or HHM files that are generated by the
library. This includes those generated manually, or
automatically in response to critical events or log forwarding.
You cannot configure the autosupport@spectralogic.com mail
recipient to receive messages that result from configuration
changes or system messages generated by the library.
AutoSupport can be used without email access by saving the
information generated by AutoSupport to a USB drive and
then manually sending the stored information to
Configure AutoSupport Profiles

Use the following steps to create or modify a profile for each person
assigned to work with SpectraGuard Support to troubleshoot problems
with the library or drives.
2. If not already completed, configure the mail recipients who should
receive AutoSupport information (see Configure Mail Recipients).
3. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > AutoSupport. The
AutoSupport screen displays.
Note: If you have not yet configured an AutoSupport profile, the Send
Log Set button will be grayed out. If you have not configured at
least one profile for AutoSend, the Configure Alarms button will
be grayed out.
Figure 151 The AutoSupport screen.
251
4. Select Manage Profiles. The AutoSupport Profiles screen displays.
Creating or Modifying a Profile

1. Select New Profile to create a new profile or select Edit Profile to modify
an existing profile. The Company Information screen displays.
Figure 153 AutoSupport Company Information screen.
Complete the information in this screen. The information marked

with an asterisk (*) is required.
Note: Make sure to fill in all of the required fields in each of the
following screens. You cannot advance to the next screen if
required information is missing.
The Customer/Contract Number for the library is an alpha-numeric
string of exactly six (6) characters.
Important Contact Spectra Logic Support at www.spectralogic.com/support if you need help

locating your contract number. Entering a number other than your exact contract
number will prevent us from finding your information in our system.
252
User Guide 91090000
2. Select Next. The Contact Information screen displays.
Figure 154 AutoSupport Contact Information screen.
Enter the information for your contact person in the fields provided.
This information determines how Spectra Logic contacts this person.
3. Select Next. The System and Mail Information screen displays.
Figure 155 AutoSupport System and Mail Information screen.
Enter information about your library’s operating environment and

backup software in the fields provided.
Select AutoSend Profile to use the current profile as the recipient for
critical alarm log sets automatically sent by the library.
Note: Only one profile can be configured as the AutoSend profile.
253
Select the mail recipient(s) from the Mail To choices presented. Only
mail recipients that have previously been configured are listed (see
Configuring Mail Users on page 280).
Note: You must select autosupport@spectralogic.com as one of the
recipients if you want to send an AutoSupport ticket request to
4. Select Next. The Save Profile screen displays. Verify that all of the
information shown is correct. If any information needs to be changed,
select Previous to display the screen in which the changes need to be
made.
Figure 156 The Save Profile screen.
5. When all of the information is correct, select Save.

6. The AutoSupport Profiles screen redisplays, listing the newly
completed profile.
Figure 157 The updated AutoSupport Profiles screen.
254
User Guide 91090000
7. Repeat Step 1 through Step 5 if you want to create additional profiles.

Note: When you create multiple profiles, they are listed in the order in
which they are created, not in alphanumeric order.
8. Select Previous to return to the main AutoSupport screen.
If one of the profiles is configured as an AutoSend recipient, the
Configure Alarms button is active (see Figure 151 on page 251).
Deleting AutoSupport Profiles

Use the following steps to delete an existing profile.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > AutoSupport. The
AutoSupport screen displays (see Figure 151 on page 251).
3. Select Manage Profiles. The AutoSupport Profiles screen displays (see
4. Select the Remove button next to the contact you want to delete. The
Remove Profiles screen displays, asking you to confirm the deletion.
5. Select Remove. The AutoSupport profiles screen redisplays with the
updated list of profiles.
Configure Alarms
Use the steps in this section if you want the library to automatically
generate an ASL file in the event that any of the critical event listed under
Critical Alarms on page 249 occurs.
1. If you have not already done so, configure one AutoSupport profile as
the AutoSend recipient (see Step 3 on page 253).
255
2. Select Configure Alarms from the AutoSupport screen. The AutoSupport

Critical Event Configuration screen displays.
Figure 158 The AutoSupport Critical Event Configuration

screen.
3. Select Enable Critical AutoSupport Events. When enabled, the library

generates an ASL file whenever one of the critical events listed under
Critical Alarms on page 249 occurs. Any ASL file that is generated as a
result of a critical event is automatically sent all of the recipients
selected in the AutoSend profile.
Note: The autosupport@spectralogic.com must selected as a mail
recipient in the AutoSend profile if you want the library to send
critical event ASL files to SpectraGuard Support.
4. If desired, select a value for the Partition Drive Failure Threshold from
the drop-down list. This is the only configurable critical event.
You can specify the threshold for the number of failed drives in a
partition that will cause an AutoSupport ticket request to be generated.
The threshold is a percentage of drives assigned to the partition. You
can choose 25% and 50%; the default is 50%. The threshold applies to all
partitions in the library.
5. Select Save or select Previous to return to the main AutoSupport screen
without saving your changes.
After your changes are saved, the Scheduled AutoSupport
Configuration screen redisplays with a confirmation message.
256
User Guide 91090000
Configure Log Set Forwarding

Log forwarding is enabled by default from the factory. This is a monthly
log set that is forwarded to Spectra Logic for data collection. No action is
taken by SpectraGuard support for a particular library when it is received,
but the data is parsed and stored in our database to better understand our
field population and how the library is used and how it can be improved.
Use the following steps to configure log set forwarding.
1. Select Log Forwarding from the main AutoSupport screen. The
Configure Log Forwarding screen displays.
Figure 159 The Configure Log Forwarding screen.
2. Select the forwarding options you want to use.

Allow BlueScale to automatically send log sets is selected by default.
Clear the check box if you do not want the library to automatically
generate and submit monthly Auto Support Log sets to one or more
preconfigured recipients.
The autosupport@spectralogic.com mail recipient is automatically
selected. All ASL files generated by the library are automatically
sent to SpectraGuard Support.
Select any additional mail recipient(s) from the Mail To choices
presented. Only mail recipients that have previously been
configured are listed (see Configuring Mail Users on page 280).
3. Select Save.
After your changes are saved, the Configure Log Forwarding screen
redisplays with a confirmation message.
257
USING AUTOSUPPORT
This section covers the following aspects of using AutoSupport:
Creating New Support Tickets
Updating Existing Support Tickets on page 262
Creating New Support Tickets

Follow these steps to open a new ticket with SpectraGuard Support.
Notes: SpectraGuard Support opens tickets during regular business
hours—from 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. local time, Monday
through Friday.
If your problem needs attention outside of those hours, and
you have an advanced service contract granting you 24-hour,
7 days a week telephone support, you can call SpectraGuard
Support after submitting the AutoSupport ticket (see
Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).
Go to Spectra Logic’s web site at: www.spectralogic.com/
warranty-service for information about the warranty and
service options for your library.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > AutoSupport. The main
AutoSupport screen displays.
Figure 160 The main AutoSupport screen.
3. If you want to save the AutoSupport ticket information to a USB drive,

insert the drive into the LCM’s USB port (see Figure 8 on page 35).
Note: The option to save the ticket to USB is only displayed if you plug
a USB key in to the LCM’s USB port before you select Send Log
Set.
258
User Guide 91090000
Using AutoSupport
4. Select Send Log Set. The AutoSupport Profiles screen displays.
5. Click the Select button next to the profile for the main contact person
for the issue. The Select Ticket Type screen displays.
Figure 162 The Select Ticket Type screen.
If you are sending additional information about an existing support

ticket, select Use existing support ticket and enter the ticket number
in the Number field. See Updating Existing Support Tickets on
page 262 for additional information.
If this is a new ticket, select Create new support ticket. This option is
selected by default.
Notes: The option to create a new Hardware Health Monitor ticket
option is not available when you sent a AutoSupport ticket
using the Send Log Set option. It is only used to send HHM
data in response to a maintenance notification (see
Responding to HHM Notifications on page 93).
Supplying a detailed problem description will help support
personnel to address the issue more quickly and efficiently.
259

information for this support ticket, proceed to Step 7.
If you need to temporarily change the contact person’s information
for this ticket, select Profile Data. The Profile Summary screen
displays.
Make any necessary changes in the Profile Summary screen, then
select Use Settings. The Select Ticket Type screen redisplays.
Figure 163 The Profile Summary screen.
Select Cancel to return to the Select Ticket Type screen without

making any changes to the contact person’s information.
7. In the Select Ticket Type screen (Figure 162 on page 259), type a
detailed description of the issue in the Problem Description field,
including what happened just before the failure occurred.
260
User Guide 91090000
Using AutoSupport
8. Select Next. The Confirm and Submit Ticket screen displays.
Figure 164 The Confirm and Submit Ticket screen.

If all of the information is correct, proceed to Step 11.
If something needs to be changed, select Previous.
If you need to change the problem description, do so in the Select
Ticket Type screen.
If you need to change the contact person’s information, select Profile
Data from the Select Ticket Type screen. Make any necessary
changes in the Profile Summary screen, then select Use Settings. The
Select Ticket Type screen reappears. Retype the problem
description, then select Next to return to the Confirm and Submit
Ticket screen.
261
10. To save the ticket information to a USB drive instead of emailing from
the library, check the box at the top of the screen (shown in Figure 164).
Note: The USB option is only available if you plugged a USB drive in
to the LCM’s USB port before you started the ticket-opening
process.
11. Select Submit.
screen displays.
When Spectra Logic receives the request, a ticket is opened and an
email response is sent to the user with a ticket number.
Updating Existing Support Tickets

Follow these steps to update a ticket that you have already opened with
SpectraGuard Support. Updating a ticket is particularly useful for mailing
new logs to Technical Support.
Note: You must have the reference number for the existing ticket—
which you receive when you open the ticket—and the
information you are sending must be related to that ticket.
If you have a new issue with your library, a new ticket is
opened to address that issue separately.
1. If you plan to save the ticket information to a USB key, insert the device
into the LCM’s USB port (see Figure 8 on page 35).
2. Follow the instructions in steps 1 through 5 in Creating New Support
Tickets on page 258 to reach the Select Ticket Type screen (see
information for this ticket, proceed to Step 5.
If you need to temporarily change any of the contact person’s
information, select Profile Data. The Profile Summary screen displays
(Figure 163 on page 260).
4. Make any necessary changes in the Profile Summary screen, then select
Use Settings. The Select Ticket Type screen redisplays.
5. Select Use existing support ticket.

6. Type the six-digit ticket number in the Number field. You received this
number when you originally opened the ticket.
7. Add any updated information in the Problem Description field.
8. Select Next. The Confirm and Submit Ticket screen displays (see
262
User Guide 91090000
Using AutoSupport

If all of the information correct, proceed to Step 11.
If something needs to be changed, select Previous and make the
necessary changes.
10. To save the ticket information to a USB key instead of emailing from the
library, check the box at the top of the screen (shown in Figure 164 on
page 261).
Note: The USB option is only available if you plugged a USB key in to
the LCM’s USB port before you started the ticket-opening
process.
11. Select Submit.
screen displays.
When Spectra Logic receives the request, a ticket is opened and an
email response is sent to the user with a ticket number.
263
Notes
264
User Guide 91090000
Chapter 11
Configuring the Library
When it was installed, your library was configured according to your
initial requirements. This chapter describes the procedures for modifying
the library configuration, including the following topics:

Configuring Library Users page 266
Adding a New User page 267
Modifying an Existing User page 268
Deleting an Existing User page 268
Accessing the System Setup Screen page 269
Enabling Options and Upgrades page 270
Determine the Library Hardware ID page 271
Enter the Activation or BlueScale page 271
Software Support Key
Modifying the Library Configuration page 273
Settings
Configuring System Settings page 274
Enabling and Disabling Performance page 276
Metrics
Enabling and Disabling Soft Power page 276
Enabling the Camera Icon (Optional) page 277
Configuring Network Settings page 278
Configuring Mail Users page 280
Enabling Email for the Automatic page 282
Configuration Save Feature
Configuring SNMP (Optional) page 283
265
Chapter 11 — Configuring the Library

Backing Up the Library Configuration page 285
Use the Auto Save Configuration Feature page 286
Back Up the Library Configuration page 286
Manually
Verify the Configuration Backup page 288
Setting the Camera IP Address page 290
Configuring Emulation (Optional) page 294
Configuring a Firmware Package Server page 298
(Optional)
Configuring and Using Observatory page 296
(Optional)
Enabling and Configuring Observatory page 296
Using Observatory page 297
Configuring Rotation Manager (Optional) page 300
Configuring the Library for Use with page 301
StorNext Software (Optional)
CONFIGURING LIBRARY USERS

Each library user is assigned to one of three user groups, each with its own
set of pre-defined library privileges (also known as permissions). Before
you begin, read User Security on page 71 to understand the three types of
user groups and what types of privileges each has.
266
User Guide 91090000
Configuring Library Users
Adding a New User

Use the following steps to add a new library user and assign that user to a
user group.
1. Log into the library with superuser privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Security > Edit Users. The Library Users
screen displays.
Figure 165 The Library Users screen.

User The user’s name.
Password A password for the user and then retype the password to confirm.
Retype Password Notes:
For security, the text in the Password and Retype Password fields is shown as
asterisks (*).
By default, passwords are not required for any of the three default users.
User Type Select the group to which the user belongs.
Note: See User Security on page 71 for descriptions of the user groups and
privileges associated with each.
3. Select Save. The new user name and group assignment is added to the
list of users.
4. Repeat Step through Step 3 for each library user.
267
Modifying an Existing User

Use the following steps to change settings for an existing user.
screen displays (see Figure 165 on page 267), showing a list of library
user names.
3. Find the user’s name, then select Edit next to the name.
4. Change the user’s name, password, group, or any combination of these
as required.
Notes: For security, the text in the Password and Retype Password
fields is shown as asterisks (*).
By default, passwords are not required for any of the three
default users.
5. Select Save to save your changes.
Deleting an Existing User

Use the following steps to delete an existing user.
Note: The library requires a minimum of one Superuser. You cannot
delete the last member of the Superuser group.
screen displays (see Figure 165 on page 267), showing a list of library
user names.
3. Locate the name of the user to delete, then select Delete next to that
user’s name.
When the screen refreshes, the user list no longer includes the user
name you just deleted.
268
User Guide 91090000
Accessing the System Setup Screen
ACCESSING THE SYSTEM SETUP SCREEN

All of the settings for the library’s general configuration options are
accessed through the System Setup screen. The System Setup screen has
two panes:
Option Enablement pane—for entering the option keys for any
purchased options, including BlueScale Software Support and licensed
capacity (chambers).
Other Settings pane—for configuring the operational parameters for
the library.
Use the following steps to access the System Setup screen when you want
to enable a new option or change a configuration setting.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > System. The System
Setup screen displays. The screen is divided into two panes. Use the
scroll bar to see the entire screen.
Note: The Other Settings pane can have up to three BlueScale Vision IP
Address fields if the library includes multiple cameras.
Figure 166 The System Setup screen (Enable Figure 167 The System Setup screen (Other
Options pane). Settings pane).
269
ENABLING OPTIONS AND UPGRADES

The library ships with activation keys to enable the options and upgrades
you purchased with the library. These options include the initial BlueScale
Software Support key, the licensed capacity, and additional features such
as BlueScale Encryption Pro.
The initial BlueScale Software Support key and the keys for any options
you purchased with the library are entered when the library is installed.
When you renew or extend your service contract or if you purchase
additional Capacity on Demand (CoD) or other upgrade options at a later
date, you will receive an activation key that must be entered into the
System Configuration screen to enable the new options. See Library
Option Upgrades on page 443 for information about the available upgrade
options.
Important A valid BlueScale Software Support key is required in order to update the library
firmware, which includes the BlueScale software. Your initial library purchase
includes a BlueScale Software Support key that is valid for the duration of the
warranty period, or for the duration of any uplifted or extended service contract
you purchased with the library, whichever is longer.
When you renew or extend your service contract, a new BlueScale Software
Support key is generated and must be entered into the library to allow continued
access to firmware upgrades.
Notes: If you purchase CoD capacity you must create or modify a

partition to make use of the added capacity. See Chapter 9 –
Using Partitions for instructions.
If you purchase CoD capacity that exceeds the number of
chambers that are physically present in the library, only the
physically present chambers can be used when configuring
partitions.
To make use of CoD capacity that exceeds the number of
unlicensed chambers available in the current library
configuration, you must also purchase a TBA to replace a
DBA. The hardware upgrade must be installed by a certified
Spectra Logic field technician.The library ships with
activation keys to enable the options you purchased when
you purchased the library.
This section describes how to determine the library hardware ID, which is
required for renewing or extending your service contract and for
purchasing upgrades, and how to enter the activation key to enable
purchased options.
270
User Guide 91090000
Enabling Options and Upgrades
Determine the Library Hardware ID

Use the following steps to locate your library’s Hardware ID.
1. Access the System Setup screen (see Accessing the System Setup Screen
on page 269).
2. Locate and record the hardware ID for the library. You can view the
hardware ID by selecting Configuration > System to display the
System Setup screen. The Hardware ID is circled in Figure 169.
Note: The Hardware ID is the same as the library serial number.
Hardware ID
Figure 168 Locating the library’s Hardware ID.
3. Contact your Spectra Logic sales representative to order the desired

options or to renew or extend your service contract (see Contacting
Enter the Activation or BlueScale Software Support Key

Use the following steps to enter the activation key for a new option or a
new BlueScale Software Support key into the library.
Note: Installing additional chambers to increase the capacity of the
library must be performed by a Spectra Logic certified field
engineer. In this case, the additional capacity you purchased will
be enabled during the installation process.
1. Have on hand the activation key that was provided with the
information you received when you completed your order.
Note: You may be instructed to generate the key using the Spectra Logic
key generation tool at www.support.spectralogic.com/keys.
271
on page 269).
The Option Enablement pane at the top of the screen lists the currently
enabled options.
Enter activation key
Figure 169 The System Setup screen (Option Enablement

pane).
3. Enter the activation key for the option you want to enable in the Key
field.
Note: The activation keys are not case-sensitive.
Important Beginning with BlueScale 11, the format for option keys has changed. When you
update to BlueScale 11.0.0 or later from an earlier version of BlueScale, all option
keys already stored in the library are automatically converted to the new format.
If you restore the library using a saved configuration that was created before the
library was updated to BlueScale 11.0.0. or later, the option keys in the saved
configuration are updated when they are imported.
Record the converted keys for future reference.
4. Select Save.
The System Setup screen refreshes with the new option key and its
description included in the list of keys. You can view this list at any
time to determine what options are currently enabled.
Note: Keep a separate record of all activation keys listed on the Option
Enablement pane of the System Setup screen. You will have to
re-enter them if the library is ever reset to factory defaults.
272
User Guide 91090000
Modifying the Library Configuration Settings
MODIFYING THE LIBRARY CONFIGURATION SETTINGS

This section describes how to modify the library’s general configuration
settings. To change the current value for any of these settings, access the
System Setup screen (see Accessing the System Setup Screen on page 269),
then scroll down to the Other Settings pane.
Figure 170 Other Settings pane of the System Configuration

screen
273
Configuring System Settings

The following table lists the system settings that are configured through
the System Setup screen, describes how to change each setting, and
provides the default value for each setting, if applicable.
This setting... Is used to.... Default

Library Name Set the name used to identify the library in messages it blank
sends to mail recipients.
1. Enter a name for the library. Use a name that will help
identify the library to a remote user.
2. Select Save.
Web Server Port Set the port number for the dedicated Ethernet port used to 80
access the library’s embedded web server.
1. Enter a port number 0 to 65,535.
The default port number 80 is appropriate for most
installations and is strongly recommended. If you use a
port number other than 80, the port number must be
explicitly entered into the web browser when accessing
the library remotely.
Caution: Do not set the web server port to 443. Using
this port number will cause the front panel display to
become unstable.
2. Select Save.
3. Reset the library to enable the new web port number
setting (see Resetting the Library on page 337).
Refresh Rate Set how frequently the information on the BlueScale user 60 seconds
interface screens is refreshed.
1. Use the Refresh drop-down list to select a scheduled
interval time.
2. Select Save.
Notes:
You can manually refresh the displayed information at
any time by selecting the refresh button located at the left
end of the status bar (see Status Bar on page 76).
If you want to use something other than the default
refresh rate, you must set the refresh rate every time you
log into the library.
If you want to disable automatic refreshing of the display,
set the refresh rate to zero.
Auto Logout Set how long the current connection to the BlueScale user 0 (zero) minutes
Timeout interface is idle before the current user is logged out.
Note: Setting the timeout value to zero disables auto logout.
1. Enter the number of minutes for the timeout.
2. Select Save.
274
User Guide 91090000
This setting... Is used to.... Default

Disable Online Disable or enable displaying links to the Spectra Logic web Unchecked
Access to Spectra site at the bottom of each BlueScale screen when the library (Enabled)
Logic has a connection to the internet.
Enable Drive Enable/disable drive performance and power consumption Unchecked
Performance monitoring. See Enabling and Disabling Performance (disabled)
Monitoring Metrics on page 276 for detailed information and
instructions.
Enable Power
Consumption
Monitoring
Enable Soft Power Enable/disable the soft power feature. See Enabling and Unchecked
Disabling Soft Power on page 276 for detailed information (disabled)
and instructions.
Enable SNMP Agent Enable the SNMP agent and configure SNMP settings. See Unchecked
Configuring SNMP (Optional) on page 283 for detailed (disabled)
SNMP Settings information and instructions.
Note: These settings are not present unless you purchased
the SNMP option for your library.
BlueScale Vision IP Enable the BlueScale Vision camera icon for the camera at 0.0.0.0
Address the specified IP address. See Enabling the Camera Icon
(Optional) on page 277 for detailed information and
instructions.
Network Settings Set the IP addressing for the LCM Ethernet port. See DHCP
Configuring Network Settings on page 278 for detailed
information and instructions.
Mail User Configure recipients for emails containing system autosupport@
messages, traces, and diagnostic results generated by the spectralogic.com
library. See Configuring Mail Users on page 280 for detailed
Auto Configuration Configure the auto configuration save feature to Enabled
Save automatically send an email containing a backup of the
library configuration whenever a partition is created or
modified. See Enabling Email for the Automatic
Configuration Save Feature on page 282 for detailed
Date And Time Set the date and time the library uses as the time stamp for N/A
library system messages.
1. Select Edit.
2. Use the Date and Time drop-down lists to select the
month, day (date), year, hour, and minute of the hour to
display.
3. Select Save.
275
Enabling and Disabling Performance Metrics

Before you can use the library’s metrics options for monitoring the
operation of your library and its drives, you must enable them. To learn
more about these monitoring functions, see Monitoring Your Library on
page 87.
on page 269).
2. To enable a feature, select the check box next to the feature, then select
Save.
Option Description
Drive Performance Enabling the Drive Performance Monitor lets you monitor the performance of
your drives.
Important: Make sure that the drives do not contain media before you enable
Drive Performance monitoring. If you enable this option when a drive contains
a cartridge, the drive is reported as empty.
Power Consumption Enabling Power Consumption Monitor (EnergyAudit) lets you monitor the
amount of power your library is using.
Note: When you disable and then re-enable power consumption monitoring, the
library does not begin capturing data again until you power cycle the library.
3. To disable a metric monitoring feature, clear the check box next to the
metric, then select Save.
Note: When you disable and then re-enable power consumption
monitoring, the library does not begin capturing data again until
you power cycle the library.
Enabling and Disabling Soft Power

The Soft Power feature disables the front panel power button to prevent
unauthorized personnel from powering down the library. Instead, the
library can only be powered off by a logged in superuser using the soft
power button on the General Status screen (see Figure 32 on page 86). The
soft power button only displays on the operator panel and requires a
confirmation before power to the library is turned off.
See Use the Soft Power Feature on page 85for instructions on how to use
the Soft Power feature.
Note: The Soft Power feature is only available when run from the local
user interface; it is not available through the BlueScale web
interface. The Soft Power feature can only be enabled or disabled
by a superuser.
276
User Guide 91090000
Use the following steps to enable the Soft Power feature.

on page 269).
2. Select the check box next to Enable Soft Power, then select Save.
3. To disable the Soft Power option, clear the check box next to Enable Soft
Power, then select Save.
Enabling the Camera Icon (Optional)

Before you can use the camera icon on the status bar to access BlueScale
Vision viewer from your network, you must enter the camera’s IP address
in the System Settings screen as described in this section.
Notes: If you have not yet set the IP address for the camera, see
Setting the Camera IP Address on page 290.
If your network uses DHCP or if you do not know the current
fixed IP address for the camera, use the Network Camera
Setup Wizard to determine what the current IP address is
and make any desired changes. See Using the Network
Camera Setup Wizard on page 342 for information about
using the wizard.
It is not necessary to enable the camera icon to connect to the
BlueScale Vision viewer for a camera. You can simply
connect an Ethernet cable to the camera’s Ethernet port on the
back of the library (see Figure 177 on page 290) and enter the
camera IP address in your web browser.
If an IP address for the camera has already been entered in
the library’s BlueScale user interface, a camera icon displays
in the Status bar (see Figure 50 on page 102).
Read the BlueScale Vision Camera User’s Guide, included on the
documentation CD that came with your library, for detailed
information about configuring and using the camera.
You can disable access to the camera by setting the IP address
to 0.0.0.0.
277
Use the following steps to enable the camera icon in the status bar.
on page 269)
2. Scroll down until you see the Other Settings pane (Figure 170 on
page 273).
3. Enable the camera icon by entering the camera’s current IP address in
the BlueScale Vision IP Address field.
4. Select Save. The camera icon in the status bar indicates that the IP
address has been configured.
5. Repeat these steps to enable up to two additional camera icons.
Configuring Network Settings

Spectra Logic highly recommends that you configure your library for
network access. Without network access, you will be unable to perform
any of the following operations:
Access the BlueScale web interface for remote management of the
library using a standard web browser
Open support incidents from the library front panel or manually send
ASLs (AutoSupport Logs) to SpectraGuard Support for troubleshooting
Automatically email system messages or reports to configured mail
users
Automatically send a notification to a specified recipient when certain
critical events occur
Download the latest firmware packages from the Spectra Logic web site
directly to the library
By default, the IP address for the Ethernet port on the LCM is set using
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). If your network does not
use DHCP, or if you simply want the library to have a fixed IP address, you
can configure a static (fixed) IP address as described in this section. Using a
static IP address ensures that you always know the IP address for the
library and is highly recommended.
278
User Guide 91090000
Use the following steps to modify the library’s IP address settings.

on page 269).
2. Select Edit next to Network Settings. The Network Settings screen
displays.
Note: If the library is connected to a routed IPv6 network, its IPv6
address is listed on the Network Settings screen. IPv6 increases
the address space from 32 to 128 bits, providing a virtually
unlimited number of networks and systems. You can use the
library’s IPv6 address to connect to the library from a web
browser without changing the library’s IP address configuration.
Figure 171 The Network Settings screen.
3. Select either DHCP or Static (highly recommended) as the addressing

method. If you select static addressing, enter the following information:

Address A valid Class A, B, or C IP address in the form nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn.
Subnet The subnet mask. The subnet mask must be a valid octet in the form
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn.
Gateway A valid Class A, B, or C network gateway address in the form
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn.network gateway. Enter 0.0.0.0 for the Gateway if your
network does not use a gateway.
4. Select Save to finish. To return to the System Setup screen without

saving your changes, select Previous.
Note: If desired, print the System Configuration Settings Checklist on
page 65 and use it to record the library’s network configuration
settings.
279
Configuring Mail Users

You can configure the library to send email messages with system
messages, traces, and diagnostic results to selected recipients. Recipients
can be configured to receive messages automatically as they are generated
by the library or on demand when traces are run, reports are generated, or
the library's configuration data is backed up. Recipients can also be
configured to receive AutoSupport messages.
Notes: You must configure the library’s IP address as described in
Configuring Network Settings on page 278 before you
configure mail recipients.
You must configure autosupport@spectralogic.com as mail
user if you want to have the library send AutoSupport ticket
requests or ASL and HHM files that are generated by the
library to SpectraGuard Support during troubleshooting (see
Configuring AutoSupport on page 250).
If desired, you can print out the System Configuration
Settings Checklist on page 65 and use it to record the mail
settings.
Use the following steps to add or modify mail recipients.
1. Select the Edit button next to Mail Users. The Mail Recipients screen
displays.
Figure 172 The Mail Recipients screen.
280
User Guide 91090000
2. To modify an existing recipient, select Edit next to the desired recipient

in the Recipients pane.
The Add/Update Recipient pane refreshes to show the current
information for the selected recipient.
3. Enter or update the information in the Add/Update Recipient pane.

To The email address of the recipient. Be sure to use the full address using the
standard email format, including the @ symbol. The address cannot contain
spaces or other non-alphanumeric characters (for example, an ampersand, &).
To include multiple addresses, leave a space between each address.
From An alphanumeric string to uniquely identify the library (for example, the name
or location of the library). The string cannot contain spaces or other non-
alphanumeric characters (for example, an ampersand, &).
SMTP IP Address The IP address of your SMTP server in the SMTP IP Address field. Use the
standard IP address format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn.
Receive If desired, select one or more of the listed message types. The library will
automatically email the selected messages to the recipient when they are
generated.
Notes:
Do not select any message types if you do not want the recipient to
automatically receive messages. However, messages can still be sent to the
recipient on an individual basis when traces or diagnostics are run.
Do not select message types for the autosupport@spectralogic.com mail
recipient. This mail recipient is only used to receive AutoSupport ticket
requests or ASL and HHM files that are generated by the library.
4. Select Save. The screen refreshes to show the new mail recipient in the
Recipients portion of the Mail Recipient screen (Figure 172 on
page 280).
5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 to configure or modify additional email
recipients.
6. Select Previous to return to the System Setup screen.
281
Enabling Email for the Automatic Configuration Save Feature

Having a current backup of the library‘s metadata (the library partition
configuration and MLM database) is an essential component of any
disaster recovery planning. For more information about protecting the
library metadata, see Backing Up the Spectra Library Metadata on
page 421.
The Auto Configuration Save feature creates a backup file containing the
library configuration and the MLM database once a week and every time
you create or modify a partition. You can configure the library to send the
auto-save configuration file as an email attachment to a previously defined
email recipient (highly recommended) as soon as the file is generated.
Notes: The timing for the weekly Auto Configuration Save backup
file is based on the first time the file was generated.
The Auto Configuration Save feature does not automatically
create a backup when you make other configuration changes
to the library.
To use the email option for the Auto Configuration Save
feature, you must first configure a mail recipient for the
person to whom you want the configuration file emailed (see
Configuring Library Users on page 266).
The library sends the email whenever it performs an automatic
configuration save operation. The auto-save file contains the library
configuration and MLM database. The email includes instructions for
using the attached file to restore the library configuration and MLM
database.
In the event that you need to restore the library configuration, you can use
either the auto-save configuration file from the LCM or the emailed copy
(see Restoring From an Auto Save Configuration File on page 111).
Use the following steps to enable automatically emailing the backup file
created by the Auto Configuration Save feature.
Setup screen displays.
3. Scroll down to the Other Settings pane (Figure 170 on page 273).
282
User Guide 91090000
4. Select the Edit button next to Auto Configuration Save. The Automatic
Configuration Save Setup screen displays.
Figure 173 The Automatic Configuration Save Setup screen.
5. Select the Email Configuration checkbox, and then use the drop-down
list to select the desired recipient from the list of previously configured
mail recipients.
Note: Do not use the default autosupport@spectralogic.com email
files.
Configuring SNMP (Optional)

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a widely used protocol
for monitoring the health and welfare of your library by using integrated
alerts. SNMP is an option you can purchase and enable to monitor the
status of your library. When SNMP is enabled, the Other Settings pane in
the System Configuration screen includes options for enabling the SNMP
agent and configuring SNMP settings.
Notes: The SNMP key appears as Observatory in the Option
Enablement pane of the System Settings screen.
If you purchase the Observatory software, the key to enable
SNMP is included (see Configuring and Using Observatory
If you are using a network-based library monitor/management application
other than the library’s BlueScale user interface, you may need to identify
the library’s SNMP settings to the application. These settings include the
read, write, and broadcast community strings.
Note: If desired, you can print out the System Configuration Settings
Checklist on page 65 and use it to record the library’s SNMP
settings.
Contact SpectraGuard Support if you have questions about configuring
SNMP (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).
283
Use the following steps to enable and configure SNMP.

Setup screen displays.
3. Scroll down to the Other Settings pane.
4. Select Enable SNMP Agent to enable SNMP in the library.
The agent returns information contained in the library’s Management
Information Base (MIB) to the workstation used to manage the
network. The MIB defines what information is available from the
library over the network. MIB files are available for download from
Spectra Logic at ftp://ftp.spectralogic.com/pub/t-series/.
5. Select SNMP Settings. The SNMP Settings screen displays.
Figure 174 The SNMP Settings screen.
Field Description
System Contact Maps to the value for system.4 (sysContact) object in the MIB.
System Location Maps to the value for system.6 (sysLocation) object in the MIB.
284
User Guide 91090000
Backing Up the Library Configuration
Field Description
Valid Query Lists all SNMP communities to which the library currently belongs. The library
Communities only responds to SNMP queries from members of these communities. The
default valid query community is public.
An SNMP community is the group that devices and management stations
running SNMP belong to. It helps define where information is sent. The
community name is used to identify the group. An SNMP device or agent may
belong to more than one SNMP community. It will not respond to requests
from management stations that do not belong to one of its communities.
Trap Destinations Lists all the currently configured trap destinations (IP addresses) to which the
library will send SNMP traps. There are no default trap destinations
configured.
6. If necessary, make changes to the SNMP settings.

Select Edit next to the setting you need to modify. The current
settings display in the corresponding Add/Update section of the
screen. Select Save in the corresponding Add/Update section of the
screen after you make your changes.
Important Community strings are case sensitive. If the library is configured to include
community FooBar, it will answer to queries from community FooBar but not from
community foobar.
Select Delete to remove a setting.

7. Select Previous to return to the System Configuration screen.
BACKING UP THE LIBRARY CONFIGURATION

Keeping valid backup copies of your library’s configuration and the MLM
database ensures that you can easily restore the library in the event of a
disaster. Having a backup of the library’s configuration is also extremely
useful if problems require you to replace the LCM or the LCM’s compact
flash card. After the replacement procedure is complete, you can use the
saved configuration to restore the library’s settings, including the
partitions, instead of having to manually re-enter all of the information.
The library provides two methods for backing up the configuration:
Use the Auto Save Configuration Feature on page 286
Back Up the Library Configuration Manually on page 286
If you have valid backups of the library’s configuration and MLM
database, you can use them to restore the library (see Restoring the Library
Configuration on page 111).
See Backing Up the Spectra Library Metadata on page 421 for additional
information about backing up the library’s configuration information and
MLM database (the library metadata).
285
Use the Auto Save Configuration Feature

The Auto Save Configuration feature, which operates automatically, saves
a backup of the library configuration and MLM database to a time-
stamped zip file on the LCM compact flash. The auto-save configuration
file contains the currently library configuration and Media Lifecycle
Management (MLM) database. The library generates the auto-save
configuration file once a week and whenever a partition is created or
modified.
Note: The Auto Save Configuration feature does not automatically
create a backup when you make other configuration changes to
the library.
As an extra security measure, you can configure the library to
automatically email the time-stamped zip file to a previously defined email
recipient each time the file is created. The zip file is named
<date-time>cfg.zip, where <date-time> indicates when the zip file
was created. Saving an external copy of the auto-save configuration file
ensures that you can recover your MLM database and library configuration
in the event of a disaster.
When the recipient receives the email, verify the backup as described in
Verify the Configuration Backup on page 288 and Verify the MLM
Database Backup on page 189.
For detailed information about configuring email for the auto-save
configuration file and using it to restore the library, see:
Enabling Email for the Automatic Configuration Save Feature on
page 282
Restoring From an Auto Save Configuration File on page 111
Back Up the Library Configuration Manually

Whenever you make a configuration change to the library that does not
result in an auto-save configuration file (for example, you entered option
keys after the creation date of the current auto-save file), you can manually
back up the library configuration as described in this section.
Note: The Save Library Configuration utility described in this section
does not back up the MLM database. To back up the MLM
database manually, use the Save MLM Database utility, as
described in Backing Up the MLM Database on page 187.
286
User Guide 91090000
Use the following steps to manually save the library’s configuration:

2. Select Maintenance > Tools > Utilities. The Utilities screen displays a
list of Basic Utilities.
Figure 175 The Basic Utilities screen.
3. Select Save Library Configuration. The screen refreshes to show the

details for the utility.
Figure 176 The Save Library Configuration utility.
287
4. Use the Select the destination drop-down list to choose where you want
to save the file.
Selecting this
destination... Saves the library configuration...
Mail results to As a zip file attached to an email sent to the specified mail recipient.
not already listed as a mail user, you must first configure that person as an
email recipient as described in Configuring Mail Users on page 280.
Spectra Logic does not save emailed files unless they are specifically requested
Save results to To the library’s compact flash card (in the LCM).
Compact Flash file
Save results to LCM To a folder on the USB drive called SavedConfigs\<date-time>, where
USB <date-time> is the time stamp for when the backup was created. The folder
contains multiple configuration files with the format cnnnnnn.cfg, where n is
a number between 0 and 9.
Note: If you select this option, connect a USB drive to the USB port on the LCM
before running the utility (see Connecting a USB Drive to the LCM on
page 105).

After a brief delay, the Utility Results screen redisplays, showing that
the configuration file was either saved or sent.
6. Confirm that the backup was successful, as described in Verify the
Configuration Backup.
Verify the Configuration Backup

After creating a backup of your library configuration, verify that the
backup was successful as soon as possible after you create it.
For a Manual Backup Saved to a USB Drive

1. Plug the USB drive into a PC that is not connected to the library.
2. Examine the list of files on the USB drive and locate the \SavedConfigs
folder.
3. Open the SavedConfigs folder and verify that a folder corresponding to
the date and time you created the backup is present.
4. Open the date-time folder and confirm that a number of files of the
format cnnnnnn.cfg, where n is a number between 0 and 9, are
present. Make sure the files are more than 0 bytes in size.
288
User Guide 91090000
5. If the configuration files are present and are more than 0 bytes in size,
the backup was successful. Store the USB drive in a safe location.
6. If the configuration files are not present, repeat the backup process
(Back Up the Library Configuration Manually on page 286) using a
For a Zip FIle Sent as an Email Attachment

1. Open the email and confirm that it contains a zip file attachment.
2. Open the zip file and confirm that it contains a number of configuration
files of the format cnnnnnn.cfg, where n is a number between 0 and 9,
are present. Make sure the files are more than 0 bytes in size.
3. If the configuration files are present and is more than 0 bytes in size, the
configuration backup was successful. Save the email attachment to a
safe location from which you can copy it to a USB drive, if needed.
Note: If necessary, rename the zip file to indicate the date of the
backup.
4. If the email attachment does not contain the configuration files or one
or more files are 0 bytes in size, repeat the backup process (Back Up the
Library Configuration Manually on page 286) to send the email again.
289
SETTING THE CAMERA IP ADDRESS

The BlueScale Vision camera installed in the library uses an IP address that
is separate from the IP address used by the library.
Use the following steps to set the camera’s IP address.
1. Connect an Ethernet cable from camera’s Ethernet port on the back of
the library to a network that is accessible to a Windows-based
computer. The camera Ethernet connector is located to the right of the
LCM on the back of the library.
Note: In order to comply with EMC requirements, use a shielded
Ethernet cable to connect the camera to your network.
BlueScale Vision
camera connector
Figure 177 Location of the camera Ethernet port.
2. Start a web browser session on the computer that is connected to the

camera.
290
User Guide 91090000
Setting the Camera IP Address
3. Enter the camera’s current IP address in the browser’s Address field.

The start page for the BlueScale Vision viewer opens in a new web
page.
Figure 178 The BlueScale Vision viewer start page.
Notes: The camera’s default IP address is 10.10.10.11. If the IP

address was changed as part of the library installation, enter
the current IP address.
If the default IP address was not changed and depending on
how the computer you are using is configured, you may need
to temporarily change the computer’s network settings so
that it can access the camera’s default 10.10.10.11 IP address.
If your network uses DHCP or if the default IP address has
been changed and you do not know the current fixed IP
address for the camera, use the Network Camera Setup
Wizard to determine what the current IP address is and make
any desired changes. See Using the Network Camera Setup
Wizard on page 342 for information about using the wizard.
291
4. Select Administration. The login screen for the application displays.
10.10.10.11
Figure 179 The Administration

login screen.
5. Log in using administrator (all lower case, case-sensitive) for the user
name; leave the password field blank, and select OK. The System
Settings screen displays.
Figure 180 The Administration screen.
292
User Guide 91090000
Setting the Camera IP Address
6. Select Network. The IP address configuration screen displays.
Figure 181 The Administration network screen.
7. Set the desired IP, subnet mask, and gateway addresses as required for
your network and select Save. The factory defaults are:
IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway
10.10.10.11 255.255.255.0 10.10.10.1
293
CONFIGURING EMULATION (OPTIONAL)

The library identifies itself with an Inquiry string of “SPECTRA
PYTHON.” If your backup software or operating system does not
specifically support one the Spectra Logic libraries that uses an Inquiry
string of “SPECTRA PYTHON,” you can configure one or more partitions
to emulate another type of library. Because most backup applications are
certified for one or more of these libraries, using the emulation mode may
allow these applications to support the library.
Using emulation is not the preferred method of operation and should only be used
Caution when recommended by SpectraGuard Support.
Important If you have been using the STK L700 emulation with an earlier version of the
BlueScale software, be aware that the format of the data reported for the element
addresses has changed (see Configuring the Library for Use with StorNext
Software (Optional) on page 301). Check the configuration of your software to
determine if you need to make changes to reflect the new element address format.
Notes: Configuring emulation changes how the identifies itself to

the operating system or backup application.
The following describes an advanced partition configuration
option used only in the context of creating or editing a
partition. The screens for configuring emulation are only
accessible after you complete the initial configuration steps
for the partition (see Enter the Initial Partition Settings on
page 211).
To define a library emulation, follow these steps:
3. Select Edit to modify an existing partition or New to create a new
partition.
4. Select Next to advance to the Name and Media Type screen (Figure 115
on page 211).
294
User Guide 91090000
Configuring Emulation (Optional)
5. Select Advanced. The Advanced Partition Settings screen displays.
Figure 182 Specifying the emulation type.
6. Select the type of library you want to emulate:

Select a preconfigured emulation from the Use preset drop-down
list
Create a custom emulation. Select User Define, then enter the
Vendor and Model in the appropriate fields.
Note: The default setting is SPECTRA PYTHON.
7. Select Next. The Robotic Control Path screen displays listing the QIPs
and/or direct-attach drives currently installed in the library.
This is the beginning of the series of configuration screens. The
sequence of steps and screens matches those described in Configuring a
New Data Partition on page 209.
295
CONFIGURING AND USING OBSERVATORY (OPTIONAL)

The BlueScale Observatory application lets you to monitor and manage
multiple Spectra Logic libraries from a single remote location. Observatory
arrives on a software CD for you to install on your computer system.
Observatory includes two keyed options to enable Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP) and Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)
functionality.
Enabling and Configuring Observatory

The instruction booklet included with the Observatory installation CD
provides basic installation and configuration instructions. Additional
information is available from the Observatory online help. After you install
Observatory, configure it with the IP address for each Spectra Logic library
you want to display in Observatory.
Enable SNMP and SSL

If you want to use the SNMP and SSL options, use the following steps to
enter the option keys on each library you want to monitor.
Important Enabling SSL configures the BlueScale web interface to uses a secure Internet
connection. You must prefix the IP address with https:// instead of just entering
the IP address when accessing the BlueScale web interface.
Note: It is not necessary to enter the Observatory option key if you do

not want to use the SNMP and SSL options.
1. Enter the Observatory option keys as described in Enter the Activation
or BlueScale Software Support Key on page 271).
2. Scroll down the System Configuration screen to the Other Settings pane
and set the Web Server Port.
Do not set the web server port to 443 when using SSL. Using this port number will
Caution cause the front panel display to become unstable.
3. Click Save.
4. Close all browsers accessing the library, then reset the LCM (see
Resetting the LCM on page 338).
Failure to reset the LCM will result in communication errors when you access the
Caution user interface
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 for each additional library you want to

monitor.
296
User Guide 91090000
Configuring and Using Observatory (Optional)
Add Libraries to Observatory

1. Install Observatory on a Windows-based computer that is connected to
the same network as the libraries you want to monitor using
Observatory.
2. When the software install is complete, Observatory opens in a web
browser.
3. Select Login (no password) on the Observatory log in page to access the
Overview page.
4. Select the Setup icon and follow the instructions in the instruction
booklet included with the Observatory installation CD to add the
libraries you want to monitor using Observatory.
Using Observatory
When you start Observatory, the Overview screen shows the status of all
libraries being monitored. The individual libraries are grouped by site, in
the center of the Overview screen.
Note: You can run no more than two simultaneous Observatory
sessions.
Figure 183 The Observatory Overview screen.
1. Select Login next to the library you want view to establish a remote
connection to the library and display the library’s login screen.
2. Enter the appropriate user name and password to log into the library.
297
CONFIGURING A FIRMWARE PACKAGE SERVER (OPTIONAL)

Under most circumstances, the most straight forward method for updating
the library firmware is to configure each library with internet access, which
provides to the firmware download page on Spectra Logic web site. You
can also download the firmware to a USB drive and use the downloaded
file to perform the update.
If you cannot use either of these methods, you can set up and use one or
more local servers to store library firmware packages downloaded from
Spectra Logic. Using a firmware package server is only useful in the
following situations:
Corporate polices do not permit you to connect the library to the
internet.
You are unable to connect to the Spectra Logic web site for firmware
downloads.
Note: For additional information about firmware packages and how to
use them, see Updating Library Firmware on page 388.
Use the following steps to configure, modify, or delete a local package
server.
1. Identify the server or servers you want to use for storing Spectra Logic
library firmware packages. Make sure that these servers can access the
Internet and that they are on the same network as the libraries you want
to update.
Note: Both Microsoft’s Internet Information Services (IIS) and the
Unix-based Apache server work as package servers.
3. Select Maintenance > Package Update. The Package Update screen
displays.
Figure 184 The Package Update screen.
298
User Guide 91090000
Configuring a Firmware Package Server (Optional)
4. Select Manage Package Servers. The Manage Package Servers screen

displays.
Server configuration
Server Name settings
Figure 185 The Manage Package Servers screen.
The Package Servers portion of the screen lists the following

information for each currently configured package server:
Server Name
Configuration settings: IP Address, Proxy, and Directory where
firmware packages are stored
5. The Add/Update Server portion of the Manage Package Servers screen
provides options for adding, modifying, or deleting a package server.
To add a package server, fill in the information required in the
Name, Address, Proxy, and Directory fields, then select Save. The
screen refreshes and lists the new server in the Package Servers
portion of the screen.
Note: Make sure you specify the directory, including the full path,
where the firmware packages will be stored.
To edit a server, select Edit next to that server’s name and details.
Change the server information as necessary, then select Save.
To delete a server, select Delete next to that server’s name and
details.
Important There is no confirmation when you delete a package server. After you select
Delete, the server is removed from the list of available package servers.
299
CONFIGURING ROTATION MANAGER (OPTIONAL)

If your site uses NetBackup’s Vault Manager or Symantec Netbackup, you
can purchase the Rotation Manager option to simplify identifying tapes
moved off site. With Rotation Manager installed, the library sends an email
containing the bar code information for every piece of media and its
off-site location to a specified email recipient.
Administrators can use this email to import identifying information for
every bar-code labeled cartridge going off site into the backup software.
Along with listing every bar-code labeled cartridge, the information also
lists the bar-code of the TeraPack magazine holding the cartridge, which
simplifies finding groups of cartridges using a single bar code. Refer to the
documentation that accompanied your software for instructions.
Note: Before you can use Rotation Manager, you must enter the option
key to enable it as described in Enter the Activation or BlueScale
Software Support Key on page 271.
After enabling the option as described in Enabling Options and Upgrades
on page 270, use the following steps to configure the Rotation Manager.
2. From the toolbar menu, select General > Import Export > Rotation
Manager. The Rotation Manager Configuration screen displays.
Figure 186 The Rotation Manager Configuration screen.
3. Symantec NetBackup is the only vendor supported by Rotation Manager

and is selected automatically.
4. Select the Mail To email address to use for sending notifications.
Only previously configured mail recipients are listed. To send the
notification to someone who is not already listed as a library user, you
must first configure that person as an email recipient (see Configuring
5. Select Save.
300
User Guide 91090000
Configuring the Library for Use with StorNext Software (Optional)
CONFIGURING THE LIBRARY FOR USE WITH STORNEXT

SOFTWARE (OPTIONAL)
StorNext® does not currently provide native support for Spectra T-Series
libraries. Before you can use the library with StorNext you must configure
one or more data partitions (virtual libraries) to emulate a Sun StorageTek
L700 library.
Notes: Only data partitions configured to use the STK L700
emulation mode are recognized by the StorNext software.
Support for using the STK L700 emulation mode with
StorNext software requires BlueScale 11 or later. The
BlueScale software version is displayed in the center of the
status bar at the bottom of each BlueScale screen.
BlueScale
software version
Figure 187 The BlueScale software version shown on the status bar.
Configuring a partition to emulate the L700 library results in the following

changes to the SCSI data it reports:
The INQUIRY command returns STK L700 as the product identification.
The READ ELEMENT STATUS command reports the element addresses
(the element addresses for the robotics, drives, and magazine slots)
using the format defined for the Sun StorageTek L700 library.
Important If you have been using the STK L700 emulation with an earlier version of the
BlueScale firmware, be aware that the format of the data reported for the element
addresses has changed. Check the configuration of your software to determine if
you need to make changes to reflect the new element address format.
301
Configure the Partition

Use the following steps to configure a partition for use with StorNext.
Important Make sure that the exporting QIP and the drives in the partition are connected and
configured on the same zone or storage area network (SAN) as the StorNext server.

2. Create or modify the partition to be used with StorNext. See
Chapter 9 – Using Partitions for detailed information about configuring
and using partitions.
Note: StorNext treats each data partition as an independent library.
a. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Partitions to display
the Shared Library Services screen.
b. Select New to create a new partition or Edit to modify an existing

partition. The Name and Media Type screen displays.
Figure 189 The Name and Media Type screen.
302
User Guide 91090000
Configuring the Library for Use with StorNext Software (Optional)
c. Enter a name for the partition and select the type of media that it
will use.
d. Select Advanced to display the Advanced Partition screen.
Figure 190 Specify the emulation mode.
e. Select STK L700 from the Use preset drop-down list.

f. Select Next. The Robotic Control Path screen displays listing the
QIPs and/or direct-attach drives currently installed in the library.
This is the beginning of the series of configuration screens. The
sequence of steps and screens matches those described in
Configuring a New Data Partition on page 209.
Configure StorNext
The online help for the StorNext software includes all of the software
documentation. This documentation provides detailed instructions for
configuring and using the software to operate the library when it is
emulating the Sun StorageTek L700 library.
303
Notes
304
User Guide 91090000
Chapter 12
Configuring and Using Encryption
This chapter describes configuring and using BlueScale Encryption Basic
Edition, which is included with your library purchase. For information
about using BlueScale Professional Edition, see the BlueScale Encryption
User Guide.
Topic Described on...

BlueScale Encryption Overview page 306
Site-Specific Decisions page 307
Site Security Example: Low Security Site page 311
Configuring Encryption page 312
Log Into the Encryption Application page 313
Configure the Encryption Initialization page 314
Mode and Password
Create an Encryption Key page 315
Assigning the Encryption Key to a Partition page 317
Enable Encryption Using an F-QIP page 318
Enable Drive-Based Encryption page 319
Exporting and Protecting Keys page 320
Export the Encryption Key page 320
Verify Backups of Encryption Keys page 323
Protect the Encryption Key page 324
Restoring Encrypted Data page 326
The Required Key is Stored in the Library page 326
The Required Key is Not Stored in the page 327
Library
Using the Endura Decryption Utility page 329
Deleting an Encryption Key page 330
Recycling Encrypted Media page 331
305
Chapter 12 — Configuring and Using Encryption
BLUESCALE ENCRYPTION OVERVIEW

BlueScale Encryption is tightly integrated into your Spectra library.
Encryption can be handled through the library’s encryption-enabled QIPs,
if any are in use, or through encryption-capable LTO-4 drives using LTO-4
media. BlueScale encryption key management is provided through the
library’s user interface.
Notes: LTO-2 or LTO-3 tape drives cannot be used in partition
configured to use drive-based encryption. However, you can
use QIP-based encryption with these drives.
Encryption-enabled LTO-4 drives in a partition configured to
use drive-based encryption can read, but not write to LTO-2
or LTO-3 media.
The encryption performed by encryption-capable LTO-4 tape
drives is not compatible with the encryption performed by an
encryption-enabled F-QIP. If an encryption-enabled F-QIP
and an encryption-capable LTO-4 drive are in the same
partition, you must choose one type of encryption or the
other. You cannot use both types in the same partition.
The BlueScale Encryption system has two major components:
The encryption chip in the F-QIP or LTO-4 drive. Using hardware
encryption makes encryption extremely fast and places no burden on
your network.
BlueScale Key Management software accessed through the library’s
user interface, either using the touch screen or a remote connection
through a web browser. Optionally, you can secure the web browser
using SSL, which is included with Observatory.
Together, these components let you easily implement the strongest
encryption available, as recognized by the federal government: AES
encryption using a 256-bit key. BlueScale Encryption incorporates multiple
layers of security, some of which are discussed in this chapter. Others are
technically implemented and invisible to the user.
306
User Guide 91090000
BlueScale Encryption Overview
Site-Specific Decisions
To determine a BlueScale Encryption strategy appropriate for your site and
your data, decide on the security level appropriate for your site, and the
amount and kinds of data to encrypt. Then you can make some choices
about how best to implement BlueScale Encryption. The following sections
describe considerations that affect how you configure encryption.
BlueScale Encryption: Standard Edition vs. Professional

Edition
All data encrypted using BlueScale Encryption and Key Management—
Standard and Professional Editions, and LTO-4 drive-based encryption—is
secured by the strongest available encryption method, AES-256. Through
BlueScale Encryption and Key Management, you have additional choices
in defining the level of security you can implement in your data center.
Whether to implement BlueScale Standard Edition or Professional Edition
is your first choice.
Feature Standard Edition Professional Edition

Keys Included as a standard feature in Multiple simultaneous encryption
the library. keys (maximum is 30 keys)
Single encryption key on a library at More secure, with a key for each of
a time multiple data sets
Easier to manage and track
Encryption Login Single encryption password Choice of either one encryption
Passwords Easier to manage and track password or three
More secure, with the option of
requiring multiple users to export
and import keys, etc.
Key Export and Import and export functions require Choice of single password or M-of-
Import a single password N shares with multiple passwords
Easier to manage to export/import keys
More secure
Compression a Drive-based compression only QIP- or drive-based compression
Compatibility Data encrypted using either version can be decrypted by a library running
between Versions the other version.
Data encrypted and compressed by a library using LTO-4 drives,
Professional Edition, or both, can be decrypted and decompressed by a
library running Standard Edition.
Summary Less secure, but more simple Fewer tapes through compression
management More secure, but more complex
management
a. If you are using drive-based encryption, compression is handled through the drive. Further references to compression in this manual
apply to library-based, not drive-based, encryption.
307
BlueScale Standard Edition For sites with a primary goal of securing data
while it is transported to a remote site and stored there, or only for data
that will be stored for a long period of time, BlueScale Standard Edition
works well. See Site Security Example: Low Security Site on page 311 for
an example of setting up encryption using BlueScale Standard Edition.
For information about configuring and using BlueScale Encryption
Standard Edition, see the remainder of this chapter.
BlueScale Professional Edition For sites that want to implement
compression along with greater flexibility and security, to protect data
wherever it’s stored and regardless of the retention period, BlueScale
Encryption Professional Edition works well.
The Professional Edition of BlueScale Encryption lets you choose whether
to support one encryption password, or three encryption passwords that
enforce another level of security. The Professional Edition also lets you use
QIP-based compression.
For information about installing, configuring, and using BlueScale
Encryption Professional Edition, see the BlueScale Encryption User Guide.
Security on Initialization
Security options determine whether encryption is enabled when the
library starts up:
Standard mode—Data encryption is enabled when the library starts
up. No further action required.
Secure initialization mode—Data encryption is not enabled when the
library starts up. Encryption is only available and backups only run
after a superuser has logged in and the encryption password is entered.
Data to Encrypt
When setting up encryption, first decide whether to encrypt all data or a
subset, then determine whether the encrypted data can be grouped
together or if it must be isolated into sets. For example, your site may store
financial data as one set, separate from consumer identity information.
If all data can be encrypted together, the library requires only a single,
encryption-enabled partition. Otherwise, create multiple encryption-
enabled partitions, one for each set of data, and one or more partitions for
data that is not to be encrypted.
Note: Implementing encryption after the library has been configured
to handle encryption simply requires creating backup jobs with
your backup software, which sends data to the proper partitions.
Data is automatically encrypted as it is backed up.
308
User Guide 91090000
Encryption Methods
Choose how to encrypt data. You can use encryption-enabled QIPs or
encryption-capable LTO-4 drives to encrypt data in a partition. With
encryption-enabled QIPs, data can be encrypted and written to tape using
drives that do not directly support encryption (for example, LTO-2). With
encryption-capable LTO-4 drives, the drive performs the encryption as it
writes the data to LTO-4 tapes.
Note: If a partition uses LTO-4 drive-based encryption, the library can
load LTO-3 media into that partition. However, attempts to write
encrypted data to LTO-3 media fail. Note that LTO-4 drives can
successfully read data from LTO-3 tapes.
The encryption performed by encryption-capable LTO-4 tape drives is not
compatible with the encryption performed by an encryption-enabled
F-QIP. You cannot use both types of encryption in the same partition. If an
encryption-enabled F-QIP and an encryption-capable LTO-4 drive share a
partition, you must choose one type of encryption or the other. You cannot
use both.
To decrypt data encrypted using a QIP, use a partition configured with
QIP-based encryption. To decrypt data encrypted using an LTO-4 drive,
use a partition configured with drive-based encryption.
Only one encryption key is allowed per LTO-4 tape. If you lose the
encryption key for the tape or if you want to use a different key, you must
recycle the tape before you can re-use it in an encryption-enabled LTO-4
drive. Similarly, if the data on a tape was encrypted using a QIP, you must
recycle the tape before you can re-use it with an encryption-capable LTO-4
drive. Recycling media is easily managed through BlueScale Encryption
Key Management (see Recycling Encrypted Media on page 331).
309
Passwords and Other Identifiers

BlueScale Encryption requires that you supply passwords and monikers
(key names). Your site may want to consider whether specific rules govern
these.
Superuser Login/Encryption Passwords Passwords are the standard
method of user security that restricts access. To use Spectra Logic BlueScale
Encryption, you must first log into the library with superuser privileges,
then enter an encryption password. The encryption password lets you
access the library’s encryption features. This password must be entered
after the superuser login. Select Security > Encryption to display the
encryption password screen.
The BlueScale encryption password is separate from the password used to log into
Caution the library. You must use this password to access the encryption settings for the
library. If you lose this password, you will not be able to configure encryption nor
will you be able to import/export encryption keys that have already been assigned
and used on encrypted tapes.
Password(s) for Key Import and Export Passwords are also used to encrypt
keys for export and when importing previously exported keys. This
feature is only available after you log into the library as a superuser and
enter the encryption password. Your site may want to consider whether to
create different rules for these passwords, such as requiring that these
passwords are longer than the encryption access password(s), and
therefore more secure.
Monikers Your site may want to create rules governing naming
conventions for key monikers, an alphanumeric identifier used to refer to
the never-revealed true key value, which is a 256-bit key.
Password and Naming Standards Examples Create password and naming
standards, in part again depending on your site’s security requirements.
For example, your site may require a high level of security for access to
encryption partitions, in which case you need to require some combination
of the following:
A long password
A combination that requires alphabetic and numeric characters
No password that corresponds to a dictionary entry
Passwords to be reset at predefined schedules
310
User Guide 91090000
Site Security Example: Low Security Site

The following table describes the security considerations and encryption
configuration for a small company with 75 employees.
Security
Considerations Goal
Security goals Protecting company from legal liability associated with unauthorized access to
data stored on tape, both onsite and offsite, including transport to the offsite
location.
Encryption IT administrator, company president, corporate legal counsel.
principals
Data to encrypt Financial and consumer identity data.
Level of security to BlueScale Standard Edition: single key per library is sufficient.
implement Standard initialization mode: encryption partitions are enabled at all times.
Data sets requiring None. A single partition for encrypted data is sufficient.
isolation
Key escrow Staff at company will escrow keys at a site remote from the data storage
method location.
Copies of each key Keep three copies of each key: one with the senior IT administrator, one with
to store and their the company president, one in a corporate safety deposit box.
locations
Key rotation plan Create a new key every six months.
Tracking key On a non-networked computer that supports encryption, create one or more
monikers and charts or lists with this data, including key moniker, dates used, encryption and
passwords superuser passwords, and password used to encrypt exported key. (Because
BlueScale prompts for the required encryption key moniker when restoring
encrypted data, this company chose not to track monikers and their
relationship to media.)
Multiple Deemed unnecessary given the users already identified as those responsible for
encryption teams encryption.
(optional)
Schedule and run Formalized approach deemed unnecessary. Instead, incorporate review of data
drills decryption into standard six-month check to make sure that backups and
restores are working properly. This now includes a test involving data
decryption.
Passwords Password to access encryption features: minimum of 12 characters,
including at least one number and one letter.
Password to export and import encryption keys: minimum of 30 characters,
including at least one number and one letter.
311
CONFIGURING ENCRYPTION
Encryption is handled either through the F-QIPs in the library or through
LTO-4 drives. Configuring encryption and managing encryption keys are
handled through the library’s user interface. Encryption configuration
entails selecting an encryption mode and creating an encryption password.
The encryption password enables you to access the encryption features.
BlueScale encryption requires a separate password to access the encryption

Caution settings for the library. If you lose this password, you will not be able to configure
encryption nor will you be able to import/export encryption keys that have already
been assigned and used on encrypted tapes.
Before You Begin

Before you begin, make sure that you have the appropriate library
hardware installed. Each partition that will use encryption requires the
following:
Encryption-capable LTO-4 tape drives. Use encryption-capable Fibre
Channel or SCSI LTO-4 drives. LTO-4 media must be loaded in the
partition.
—OR—
SCSI drives connected to an F-QIP. Use this configuration to encrypt
data with non-encryption capable drives. Load the media type
corresponding to the drives assigned to the partition.
312
User Guide 91090000
Configuring Encryption
Log Into the Encryption Application

1. Log in as a superuser, then select Security > Encryption. The
Encryption User Login screen displays.
Note: No login or password is required the first time you log into the
Encryption application.
2. Enter the Encryption password and then select OK. The Encryption
Configuration screen displays a list of the current encryption monikers.
Note: If you are configuring encryption for the first time, an encryption
key has not been created, so there is no encryption key moniker
to display.
Figure 192 The initial Encryption Configuration screen.
3. Proceed to Configure the Encryption Initialization Mode and Password.
313
Configure the Encryption Initialization Mode and Password

1. From the Encryption Configuration screen, select Configure. The
Encryption Settings screen displays.
Note: If the partition does not include either an encryption-enabled
F-QIP or encryption-enabled LTO drives, you will not see the
Encryption screen described in this section.
Figure 193 The Encryption Settings screen.
2. Select or clear the Enable Secure Initialization checkbox to determine the

initialization mode used when backing up data to a partition:
Mode When the library is powered on during startup...
Standard mode Data can be backed up to partitions that support encryption without entering
an encryption password. To use Standard Mode, make sure that Enable Secure
Initialization is not selected.
Secure Initialization Partitions dedicated to encryption are not available, so backups sent to them
mode cannot run. To initialize the encryption partitions, someone must log in as a
superuser, then enter the encryption password. To use Secure Initialization
Mode, select Enable Secure Initialization.
314
User Guide 91090000
Configuring Encryption
3. In the New Encryption User Password field, type in a password, using

any combination of the numbers 0–9, lower and upper case alphabetic
characters (a–z and A–Z), and the at sign (@), dash (–), underscore (_),
and colon (:) characters.
Make sure you keep a record of this password. If you lose this password, you will
Caution not be able to configure encryption nor will you be able to import/export
encryption keys that have already been assigned and used on encrypted tapes.
Note: Security is greatly enhanced when the user who knows the
encryption password is different from the one logging into the
system during normal operations.
4. Re-enter the password in the Retype Password field, then select OK. The
Encryption Configuration screen again displays.
5. Proceed to Create an Encryption Key.
Create an Encryption Key

1. From the Encryption Configuration screen, select Add Key. The New
Encryption Key screen displays.
Figure 194 The New Encryption Key screen.
2. Enter a name for the encryption key in the Moniker field. This moniker
is the name that you will use to reference the key.
When using LTO-4 drive-based encryption, make sure that the moniker you choose
Caution when creating the BlueScale encryption key contains no more than 32 characters.
If you lose an encryption key that has a moniker greater than 32 characters, data
cannot be recovered using Spectra Logic’s optional Endura Decryption Utility
(EDU).
315
Make sure to use a name that has not been used for any other
encryption key, and that uses any combination of the numbers 0–9,
lower and upper case alphabetic characters (a–z and A–Z), and the at
sign (@), dash (–), underscore (_), and colon (:) characters. To improve
readability, use an underscore to separate words. Do not use any space
characters.
Each moniker must be a unique string of characters, independent of
case.
Make a habit of using a single case (all upper or all lower) for
monikers. After export, case is ignored, so that keys associated with
the monikers Moniker1, moniker1, and MONIKER1 are interpreted
as a single key. If you have two monikers that are identical except
for case, then you may not be able to retrieve some of your data after
importing such a key.
Note: The actual value of an encryption key is never displayed. The
moniker helps to protect data encrypted using the key by
eliminating the need to display or type the actual key value.
3. Select OK. The Encryption Configuration screen displays with a
confirmation showing the moniker for the newly created encryption
key and a message reminding you to create a copy of the key for
safekeeping.
Figure 195 The Encryption Configuration screen with new

encryption key moniker.
If the key is not yet assigned to a partition, None displays in the

Primary Key For column.
The BlueScale Encryption Standard Edition only supports using one
encryption key. The Import Key and Add Key selections no longer
display after you create a key. If you delete the existing key, they
display again. BlueScale Encryption Professional Edition is required
if you want to store multiple encryption keys in the library.
316
User Guide 91090000
Assigning the Encryption Key to a Partition
4. Export the newly created encryption key and save it to a secure location
(see Export the Encryption Key on page 320).
If you lose the encryption key, data encrypted using the key cannot be recovered.
Caution For this reason, promptly copying the key and storing it safely (that is, away from
the data encrypted using the key) is extremely important to data decryption and
recovery. See Exporting and Protecting Keys on page 320 for additional
information.
5. If desired, proceed to Assigning the Encryption Key to a Partition.
ASSIGNING THE ENCRYPTION KEY TO A PARTITION

After creating an encryption key, you can assign it to one or more library
partitions. If a partition can support encryption, the encryption choices that
display and are available depend on the hardware assigned to the
partition. Possible choices are:
No encryption
LTO-4 drive-based encryption
QIP-based encryption
Use the following steps to assign a key to a partition and encrypt all data
sent to the partition:
2. Enter the encryption password, then select OK.
3. Select Configuration > Partitions. The Shared Library Services screen
displays.
4. Select New to add a partition, or select Edit to modify the settings for an
existing partition.
5. Navigate through the partition configuration screens by selecting Next
until the Encryption screen displays.
The Encryption screen lets you enable encryption features for the
partition. It only displays if you are logged into the encryption
application and have already created an encryption key as described in
Create an Encryption Key on page 315.
Depending on whether you want to use an encryption-enabled F-QIP
or a encryption-capable tape drive to perform the data encryption,
select the desired encryption settings as described in the following
sections.
Enable Encryption Using an F-QIP on page 318
Enable Drive-Based Encryption on page 319
317
Enable Encryption Using an F-QIP

The current version (Revision 2) of Spectra Logic’s Endura Decryption Utility (EDU)
Caution does not support recovering data that is encrypted using an F-QIP. If you need to
recover data that was encrypted using an F-QIP contact SpectraGuard Support for
assistance (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).
Use the following steps to configure F-QIP-based encryption for a

partition.
1. From the Chambers and Drives screen in the partition configuration
sequence (see Configuring an F-QIP-Attached SCSI Drive Partition on
page 222), select Next. The Encryption screen displays.
Notes: If the partition can support encryption, the available
encryption choices depend on the hardware assigned to the
partition.
The encryption performed by encryption-enabled LTO-4 tape
drives is not compatible with the encryption performed by an
encryption-enabled F-QIP.
If an encryption-enabled F-QIP and an encryption-capable
LTO-4 drive are in the same partition, you must choose one
type of encryption or the other. You cannot use both types in
the same partition.
Figure 196 The Encryption screen for QIP-based encryption.
2. Select QIP-based Encryption.
318
User Guide 91090000
Assigning the Encryption Key to a Partition
3. To reserve a portion of the media at the beginning tape for unencrypted

data, select Enable Clear File at BOT.
If you choose this option, the tape headers are unencrypted so that any
compatible drive can read the header information on an encrypted
tape. Using unencrypted headers is a useful option for sites with a large
number of tapes to manage.
4. Navigate through the remaining partition configuration screens by
selecting Next.
5. When you reach the Save Partition screen, select Save and proceed as
described in Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings on page 239.
Enable Drive-Based Encryption

Use the following steps to configure drive-based encryption for a partition.
Note: Drive-based encryption is only available for partitions that
contain encryption-capable LTO-4 drives.
1. From the Chambers and Drives screen in the partition configuration
sequence, select Next. The Encryption screen displays.
Note: If the partition can support encryption, the encryption choices
that display and are available depend on the hardware for the
partition.
Figure 197 The Encryption screen for drive-based encryption.
2. Select Drive-based Encryption.

Note: With drive-based encryption, only one key is allowed per LTO-4
tape. To use a new encryption key on a tape previously
encrypted with a different encryption key, you must first recycle
the tape through BlueScale Encryption, as described in Recycling
Encrypted Media on page 331.
319
3. Navigate through the remaining partition configuration screens by

selecting Next.
4. When you reach the Save Partition screen, select Save and proceed as
described in Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings on page 239.
EXPORTING AND PROTECTING KEYS

Data cannot be recovered without the encryption key used to encrypt the
data, so protecting encryption keys is extremely important to data
decryption and recovery. To decrypt and restore encrypted data, you need
the data, the encryption key, and the encryption password used to protect
the exported key and data.
Keeping valid backup copies of your encryption keys is extremely
important. To ensure that the keys are protected, use the Export Key option
described in this section to export encryption keys to a USB drive as soon
as possible after you create them.
Data cannot be recovered without the encryption key used to encrypt the data, so
Caution protecting encryption keys is extremely important to data decryption and recovery.
To decrypt and restore encrypted data, you need the data, the encryption key, and
the encryption key password used to protect the exported key and data.
Spectra Logic recommends that you export each key to at least two
different USB drives. Remember, lost encryption keys cannot be recreated;
you should keep them as secure (and as backed up) as your data.
Export the Encryption Key

Note: These instructions are for BlueScale Encryption Standard
Edition. If you have BlueScale Professional Edition, refer to the
BlueScale Encryption User Guide for additional information.
For safe-keeping and security, export the encryption key and store it in a
safe, secure location so that you can import it back into the library if
needed. To export the current encryption key:
320
User Guide 91090000
Exporting and Protecting Keys
2. Enter the encryption password, and then select OK. The Encryption
Figure 198 The Encryption Configuration screen.
3. Select Export Key. The Export Type screen displays.
Figure 199 Exporting an Encryption Key.
321
4. Select either Export Single File to USB or Email Exported Key.

If you select Export Single File to USB, plug a USB drive into the USB
port on the LCM before continuing.
If you select Email Exported Key, use the “Mail single key file to:”
drop-down list to select the recipient. The exported key file is sent as
an email attachment to the specified mail recipient.
As a matter of best practice, Spectra Logic recommends exporting encryption keys

Caution to a USB drive instead of using email.
Although emailing encryption keys is supported by the library, using email
presents security issues, including the following:
Copies of encryption keys may be left on the email servers used for sending
and receiving email and are thus subject to compromise.
The difficulty in verifying where all the copies of emailed encryption keys may
be located can make security audits more challenging.
Note: Do not use the default autosupport@spectralogic.com

email recipient. Spectra Logic does not save emailed files
unless they are specifically requested for troubleshooting.
To send the key to a recipient who is not already listed as mail
recipient, you must first configure the user as a mail recipient (see
Configuring Mail Users on page 280).
5. After you either insert the USB drive or select an email recipient, select
Next.
6. Enter a password, which is used to encrypt the key itself.
7. Make a record of the encryption key password, which you will need to
import the key back into the library. Without the password, you cannot
import the key, and the data encrypted using the key will be
inaccessible.
Do not lose the encryption key password. Without it, you cannot reimport an
Caution encryption key after it is deleted from the library, and the data encrypted using the
key will be inaccessible.
322
User Guide 91090000
8. Select Next.
If you exported the encryption key to a USB drive—Immediately
confirm that the encrypted key copied correctly by selecting Check
Key Files. Use the steps in Verify Backups of Encryption Keys to
provide a second confirmation.
Figure 200 Use Check Key Files to confirm successful export.
If the confirmation indicates the key did not copy correctly, delete
all data from the USB drive so that no trace of the failed key
attachment remains, then export the key again using a different USB
drive, beginning with Step 2 on page 321.
If you exported the key using email—Confirm the receipt of the
attachment by contacting the user to whom you sent the encrypted
key file. Have them confirm that the email attachment contains a
key file as described in Verify Backups of Encryption Keys.
Verify Backups of Encryption Keys

After creating the backups of your encryption keys, verify that the backup
was successful as soon as possible after you create it.
When Saved to a USB Drive

1. Plug the USB drive into a PC that is not connected to the library.
2. Examine the list of files on the USB drive to verify that it contains a list
of files.
3. If a file called name.bsk or name.bss, where name is the moniker you
assigned to the key when it was created, is present and is more than
0 bytes in size, the encryption key was successfully exported and is
usable. Store the USB in a safe location.
4. If the exported key file is not present or if is 0 bytes in size, repeat the
export process (Export the Encryption Key on page 320) using a
323
When Sent as an Email Attachment

1. Open the email attachment and verify that it contains at least one file.
2. If a file called name.bsk or name.bss, where name is the moniker you
assigned to the key when it was created, is present and is more than
0 bytes in size, the encryption key was successfully exported and is
usable. Save the email attachment to a safe location from which you can
copy it to a USB drive, if needed.
3. If the email attachment does not contain the exported key file or if is
0 bytes in size, repeat the export process (Export the Encryption Key on
page 320) to send the email again.
Protect the Encryption Key

Make sure you track, in conformance with your security plan, where you
store the key and who received an email message with the key. Also keep
track of the password used when you exported the key.
Make sure you keep a record of the password created when exporting the key. You
Caution need this password and the encrypted file containing the key to import the
encryption key. Without the key password, you will not be able to import the
encryption key.
The following guidelines outline the essential tasks required to protect

encryption keys:
Save one or more copies of every key using the Key Export option on
the Encryption Configuration screen (see Export the Encryption Key on
page 320. Two methods are available for key export: copying the
encrypted key to a USB drive or emailing an encrypted version of the
key as an attachment to a user who has been configured as a mail user
through the library (see Configuring Mail Users on page 280).

Although emailing encryption keys is supported by the library, doing so presents
security issues, including the following:
324
User Guide 91090000
If you choose to store only a single copy of a key, and then something
happens to the device storing the key, you’ve lost both your key and all
data encrypted using the key.
Important To emphasize: If you lose the key, your data is unrecoverable. You need to balance
the number of copies of the key to store to guarantee access to the encrypted data
against the security risk associated with storing multiple keys. Make sure that the
key has been successfully stored prior to removing a key from the library.
Store keys offsite in a location other than the site used for media
storage. Confirm that the key is stored correctly on the USB drive or has
been received by the intended recipient before deleting the key from
your system. If you delete the key, you must import the key to decrypt
the data that used the key during encryption. Importing keys is
described in The Required Key is Not Stored in the Library on page 327.
You may want to make two copies of a key, storing each in a secure
location. Note the location of these keys, so that you can easily find the
key when you need to restore or delete data.
Maintain a list of every password associated with each key and securely
store the list. Never keep this list as cleartext on a networked computer,
or send it through email as cleartext. For added security, encrypt the file
containing the list of passwords.
Track every copy of each key. This is critical to meet requirements that
may govern data retention and data destruction. Destroying all keys
associated with encrypted data is sufficient to satisfy data destruction
requirements, since encrypted data cannot be accessed without the key
used to encrypt it.
Spectra Logic recommends tracking the information listed in the
following table for every key that you create. For added security,
encrypt the file containing the tracking information.
Key Moniker:
Number of key copies
Location of each copy:
Password(s) associated with exported copy of
the moniker:
Location of data stored on mobile media,
which has been encrypted using this moniker:
Moniker creation date:
Proposed expiration date:
325
RESTORING ENCRYPTED DATA

Restoring encrypted data from tape follows the standard data restore
processes that you use with your backup software. The only difference is
that the key used to encrypt the data being restored needs to be on the
library and assigned to the partition in which the encrypted media is
loaded. If the key is available, the data is automatically decrypted as it is
read from tape; standard restore procedures simply work.
If the encryption key required for a specific set of encrypted data has been
exported from the library and then deleted, the library prompts you with
the moniker of the key that is required to decrypt the data. You can use the
key moniker to identify the key, then import the key into the library as
described in this section.
Important You need the passwords for both the exported key file and the encrypted file
containing the key to import the encryption key. Without the key password, you
will not be able to import the encryption key.
Endura Decryption Utility (EDU) is an optional command-line encryption

utility which provides a method that lets you restore drive-encrypted data
without loading the media into the library. See Using the Endura
Decryption Utility on page 329 for detailed information about using this
utility.
The Required Key is Stored in the Library

If the key used to encrypt the data is currently stored in the library, use the
following steps to decrypt and restore the data.
1. Load the tape to be decrypted into the library.
2. Assign the key to the partition containing the tape if it is not already
assigned to it.
3. Use your backup software to automatically decrypt and restore data.
If the required key is not available, the library prompts you with the
moniker of the key that is required to decrypt the data. You must
import the key as described in the following section before the data can
be restored.
326
User Guide 91090000
Restoring Encrypted Data
The Required Key is Not Stored in the Library

If the encryption key required for a specific set of encrypted data has been
exported from the library and then deleted, you must import the key
before you can access the encrypted data. After you assign the imported
key to the partition with the encrypted media, it is available for decrypting
data.
Note: If you are using BlueScale Encryption Basic Edition and there is
already an encryption key stored in the library, you must first
delete that key as described in Deleting an Encryption Key on
page 330. You can then import another key.
As described in the following sections, you can import the encryption key
from a USB drive or from a remote computer through a web browser
connection to the library’s user interface.
Import the Key from a USB Drive, below
Import the Key Using the BlueScale Web Interface Connection to the
Library on page 328
Import the Key from a USB Drive

Use the following steps to import a key stored on a USB drive:
2. Enter the encryption password, then select OK. The Encryption
3. Insert the USB drive into the LCM’s USB port.
4. Select Import Key. The Import Key Selection screen displays.
5. Choose the key to import from the Key List field, then select Next. The
Import Password screen displays.
6. Enter the password that was used to encrypt the key when it was
exported, then select Next.
The Encryption Configuration Import Password screen displays,
showing the moniker of the newly imported key.
7. Assign the imported key to the partition with the encrypted media (see
Assigning the Encryption Key to a Partition on page 317).
8. Use your backup software to restore the data.
327
Import the Key Using the BlueScale Web Interface

Connection to the Library
Use the following steps to import a key from a remote computer using the
library’s BlueScale web interface (the RLC).
Note: The key must be accessible to the computer you are using to
access the BlueScale web interface.
3. Select Import Key. The Encryption Key Files Source screen displays.
Note: The Import key from RLC option is only available if you are
accessing the library using the BlueScale web interface.
Figure 201 The Encryption Key Files Source screen.
4. Select Import key from RLC, then select Next. The RLC Encryption Key
Upload screen displays.
Figure 202 The RLC Encryption Key Upload screen
328
User Guide 91090000
Restoring Encrypted Data
5. To identify the key file to import:

Type in the full path and file name in the Encryption Key File field.
—OR—
Select Browse. In the File Upload screen, browse to the location
where the key is stored, select the key file, then select Open. The
path for the key displays in the Encryption Key File field.
6. Select Next. The Import Password screen displays.
7. Enter the password that was used to encrypt the key when it was being
exported, then select Next.
The Encryption Configuration Import Password screen displays,
showing the moniker of the newly imported key.
8. Assign the imported key to the partition with the encrypted media (see
Assigning the Encryption Key to a Partition on page 317).
9. Use your backup software to restore the data.
Using the Endura Decryption Utility

Spectra Logic’s Endura Decryption Utility (EDU) lets you restore drive-
encrypted data without loading the media into the library, which may be
important in recovering data following a crisis or disaster. Use this
command-line utility on a host that is running Red Hat® Linux kernel
version 2.4 or 2.6 and has one or more tape drives connected and online.
Note: Other versions of Red Hat and Fedora have not been tested but
may work.
The EDU utility decrypts the data stored on tape and writes it to the same
or a different tape. You can then restore the data with the backup software
used to back up the data.
The current version (Revision 2) of Spectra Logic’s Endura Decryption Utility (EDU)
Caution does not support recovering data that is encrypted using an F-QIP. If you need to
recover data that was encrypted using an F-QIP contact SpectraGuard Support for
assistance (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).
Refer to the BlueScale Encryption User Guide for detailed information about
using EDU.
329
DELETING AN ENCRYPTION KEY

BlueScale Encryption Basic Edition only supports storing a single
encryption key in the library. You must first delete the key currently stored
in the library before you can create the new key and assign it to one or
more partitions (see Assigning the Encryption Key to a Partition on
page 317).
Make sure that you export a copy of the existing key before you delete it. You will
Caution need a copy of the exported key and its password to import the key back into the
library and restore data that was encrypted with the key.
Note: If you need to store multiple encryption keys in the library, you
must purchase BlueScale Encryption Professional Edition.
Use these steps to delete a key:
Configuration screen displays (see Figure 195 on page 316).
3. Export at least one copy of the key and store it in a safe location (see
Export the Encryption Key on page 320).
4. Select Delete Key and respond to the confirmation screens to delete the
key.
5. The Encryption Configuration screen redisplays, without the moniker
for the key you deleted listed.
330
User Guide 91090000
Recycling Encrypted Media
RECYCLING ENCRYPTED MEDIA

LTO-4 drives require that all data encrypted and written to an individual
tape use the same encryption key—that is, a single key is associated with
all the encrypted data on an individual tape. After encrypted data is
written to a tape, the drive will not overwrite the data using a different
encryption key until you recycle the tape through BlueScale Encryption. If
you lose the encryption key for a tape, you must recycle the tape before you
can re-use it.
Notes: If you plan to use the same key that was used to encrypt the
data already on the tape, you do not need to recycle the tape
using the process described in this section.
Make sure that the backup software cannot access the drive
you plan to use for recycling the media during the recycling
operation.
The recycle media operation can only be performed using the
touch screen (or using a keyboard and mouse connected to
the LCM). You cannot access the Import/Export TeraPack
Cases screen when using the library’s BlueScale web
interface.
Use the following steps to recycle one or more encrypted LTO cartridges so
that they can be reused with a new encryption key.
1. Stop all backup operations before beginning the recycling process.
Export TeraPacks screen displays.
Figure 203 The Import/Export TeraPacks screen.
3. Select the partition containing the tapes that you want to recycle from
the Partition drop-down list, then select Go.
331
4. Select Recycle Encryption Media. The Select Media to Recycle screen

displays.
Figure 204 The Select Media to Recycle screen.
5. Select the media to recycle from the Available Media list, then select
Add Media. The selected items appear in the Media to Recycle list.
To narrow down the media choices in the Available Media list, enter a
partial or entire bar code in the Find by Barcode field and select Find.
The list displays media with bar codes that match the values that you
entered.
6. Select Next. The Select Drive to Recycle Media screen displays.
Figure 205 The Select Drive to Recycle Media screen.
7. Select the drive that you want to use to recycle the tape from the Drive
list, then select Recycle Encryption Media.
332
User Guide 91090000
Chapter 13
Library Troubleshooting
This chapter describes troubleshooting tools you can use, as appropriate, to
help resolve problems you might encounter while operating the library. If
you are unable to resolve the problem, you can open a support ticket using
AutoSupport or contact SpectraGuard Support directly (see
Appendix C Service and Support for information).

Capturing Traces page 334
Recovering a Media Pack after a Power Failure page 336
Resetting the Library page 337
Resetting Components page 338
Resetting the LCM page 338
Resetting a QIP page 339
Resetting the BlueScale Vision Camera IP page 340
Address
Troubleshooting Blockages page 345
Accessing the Interior of the Library page 347
Notes: The first step in troubleshooting the library is to review the

library system messages, which provide important
information about library problems (see Checking Messages
on page 88).
For additional suggestions or for troubleshooting problems
that are not covered in this guide, search Spectra Logic’s
online Technical Support Knowledge Base located at
www.spectralogic.com/knowledgebase.
If an error code is referenced in a system message, look up its
definition using Spectra Logic’s interactive Sense Code
Lookup at www.spectralogic.com/support/sensecodelookup.
333
Chapter 13 — Library Troubleshooting
CAPTURING TRACES
Spectra Logic uses traces to help diagnose problems with the library. You
only need to capture traces when instructed to do so by SpectraGuard
Support.
Emailing Trace Results If you plan to email trace results directly from the
library, make sure that you have already set up those recipients as mail
users (see Configuring Mail Users on page 280).
Saving Trace Results to USB If you plan to save trace results to USB, you
must plug the USB drive into the LCM before running the trace (see
Figure 8 on page 35). If a USB drive is not plugged in, the USB option is not
available. You can, however, still save trace results to the LCM compact
flash card. You can also just view the results without saving them.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Tools to display the
Maintenance Tools screen.
Figure 206 The Maintenance Tools screen.
3. If you want to save the traces to a USB drive, insert the USB drive into
the LCM’s USB port; otherwise, skip to the next step.
Note: The option to save the traces to USB is only displayed if you plug
a USB drive in to the library’s USB port before you select Traces.
334
User Guide 91090000
Capturing Traces
4. Select Traces. The System Traces screen displays.
Figure 207 The System Traces screen.
5. Choose the type of trace you want to capture:

LCM Trace—Use to capture a trace on a single aspect of the LCM.
Component Trace—Use to select a trace on a single component.
6. Use the check boxes to choose any combination of the following options
for saving the generated trace:
Option Description
Mail results to Sends the report to a previously configured mail recipient. Use the drop-down
list to select the recipient for the report file.
email recipient (see Configure Mail Recipients on page 251).
Spectra Logic does not save emailed HHM report files unless they are
specifically requested for troubleshooting.
Save results to Saves the report to the compact flash card in the LCM. The results can then be
Compact Flash file reviewed from the LCM using the touch screen user interface.
Note: Select this option only if specifically instructed to do so by SpectraGuard
Support.
Save to USB Saves the report to the USB drive. The results can then be viewed from any
device that can read from USB.
page 334.
335
7. Select Go next to the trace type you want. The library captures the
requested trace, which may take several minutes for the trace to run.
When complete, the trace results display in the results window.
If you are connected to the library using a web browser, you can copy
and paste the results into a text file and email it to SpectraGuard
Support if they request it.
RECOVERING A MEDIA PACK AFTER A POWER FAILURE

If the library loses power while a TeraPack magazine or RXT media pack is
in a TAP, the library only identifies the presence of the TeraPack magazine
in the TAP the next time media is imported or exported.
RECOVERING A CARTRIDGE FROM A GLOBAL SPARE DRIVE

If the library loses power or if you reset the library while the PostScan
process is running, the cartridge being scanned remains in the drive. The
library generates a message to notify you that the Global Spare contains a
the cartridge after it complete its initialization process. Use the following
steps to return the cartridge to its storage location:
1. Examine the partition inventories to determine where the cartridge
belongs (see Viewing the Partition Inventory on page 120).
2. Substitute the Global Spare containing the cartridge for another drive in
the partition (see Using the Global Spare Tape Drive on page 108).
3. Move the cartridge out of the drive and return it to its storage location
(see Moving Media Within a Partition on page 150).
4. Reclaim the Global Spare (see Reclaiming the Global Spare Tape Drive
on page 110).
336
User Guide 91090000
Resetting the Library
RESETTING THE LIBRARY

Performing some types of troubleshooting operations or recovering from
some error conditions requires you to reset (reboot) the library. If
SpectraGuard Support instructions you to do so, use the following steps to
reset the entire library.
Do not reset the library unless you are specifically instructed to do so. Trace data
Caution generated by the library may be lost when you reset the library or a component,
making diagnosing problems difficult.
1. If possible, use your backup software to move any cartridges that are
currently in tape drives back their storage location.
If you cannot use your backup software, then attempt to move the
cartridges as described in Moving Media Within a Partition on
page 150.
2. If possible, pause PostScan if it is running (see Pause the PostScan
Process on page 186). Any tapes currently being scanned are returned
to their storage locations.
3. Discontinue all I/O to the library.
4. Power off the library (see Power Off the Library on page 84).
5. Wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Power on the library (see Power On the Library on page 84) and wait
while the library performs its initialization process.
7. If a cartridge is left in a Global Spare drive after the reset is complete,
see Recovering a Cartridge From a Global Spare Drive to return the
cartridge to its storage location.
8. If you used the BlueScale user interface to move media, update the
inventory maintained by your backup application (see Updating the
337
RESETTING COMPONENTS
If instructed by SpectraGuard Support or by error messages, you can reset
certain library components as described in this section. See Resetting the
Library on page 337 if you need to reset the entire library.
Do not reset a component unless you are specifically instructed to do so. Trace
Caution data generated by the library or the component may be lost when you perform a
reset, making diagnosing problems difficult.
Resetting the LCM

To reset the LCM, insert the tip of a toothpick or other similar non-
conductive object into the hole on the back of the LCM to press the reset
button.
Do not use a metallic object to reset the LCM. You may inadvertently cause an
Caution electrical short inside the module.
Important Resetting the LCM resets the motion control for the transporter. Any move requests
to the transporter will fail until the LCM completes its initialization.
LMC reset
Figure 208 Location of the LCM reset button.
338
User Guide 91090000
Resetting Components
Resetting a QIP
Hardware Reset
To reset a QIP, insert the tip of a toothpick or other similar object into the
hole in the QIP back panel to press the reset button.
Do not use a metallic object to reset a QIP. You may inadvertently cause an
Caution electrical short inside the module.
Note: QIPs are mounted vertically along the right side of each DBA.
The QIP in Figure 209 is shown in a horizontal position for
reference only.
QIP Reset
Figure 209 Resetting a QIP (F-QIP shown).
BlueScale Reset
If you are unable to communicate with a QIP-attached drive after resetting
it, you may also need to perform a BlueScale reset of the QIP. Use the
following instructions to reset the QIP through the BlueScale user
interfaceP.
1. Determine the BlueScale identifier for the QIP you need to reset.
Note: QIPs are identified according to their physical location in the
library. For example: DBA2/QIP1 refers to the QIP in DBA2.
Refer to “QIP Identifiers on page 52 for information about
identifiers.
displays.
utilities.
339
6. Scroll through the list of advanced utilities and select Reset Controller.
Figure 210 The Reset Contr0ller utility for resetting a QIP.
7. Use the drop-down list to select the QIP that you need to reset.
8. Select Run Utility to reset the selected QIP.
When the QIP becomes ready, the Utility Results screen displays,
showing that the QIP was reset.
Note: When the QIP resets, the library posts system messages that the
QIP disappeared and reappeared.
9. The QIP is ready for use.
Resetting the BlueScale Vision Camera IP Address

If the camera was configured with a fixed IP address and you do not know
what that address is, you can reset the camera to use DHCP addressing
and then use the Network Camera Setup Wizard to find the camera on the
network. You can then use the wizard to change the camera’s IP address as
required for your network environment.
Important Resetting the camera requires physically accessing the upper portion of the library
interior. If you cannot access the library’s side panels, contact SpectraGuard
Support for assistance (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).
If the camera is already configured to use DHCP, you can use the Network
Setup Wizard to determine the current IP address so that you can enter the
IP address in the BlueScale System Settings screen (see Using the Network
Camera Setup Wizard on page 342).
340
User Guide 91090000
Power Off the Library
Important If you only need to determine the current DHCP-assigned IP address, skip to Using
the Network Camera Setup Wizard on page 342.
Risk of electrical shock. Hazardous moving parts. Turn off the power to the library
Warning and disconnect the power cords before accessing the camera.
German: Gefahr eines elektrischen Schlages. Gefährliche bewegliche Teile.
Schalten Sie das Gerät aus, um die Library und trennen Sie das Netzkabel vor dem
Zugriff auf die Camera.
1. Use your backup software to move any cartridges that are currently in
tape drives back their storage location.
If you cannot use your backup software, then move the cartridges as
described in Moving Media Within a Partition on page 150.
2. Pause PostScan if it is running (see Pause the PostScan Process on
page 186). Any tapes currently being scanned are returned to their
storage locations.
The power-down sequence takes approximately one minute, while the
library allows applications to shut down gracefully.
Reset the Camera

Note: The camera’s reset button is toward the left when viewed from
the front of the library. If possible, access the interior of the
library by removing the left side panel.
Use the following steps to access the camera and reset it to DHCP
addressing:
1. Remove the left side panel as described in Access the Interior from the
Side on page 357.
341
2. Locate the recessed Reset on the camera.
Reset button
Figure 211 The BlueScale Vision camera Reset button (viewed from left side of
library).
3. Insert the tip of a toothpick or other similar non-conductive object into

the hole to press the reset button. Hold the reset button for 10 seconds
to reset the camera's settings to the factory defaults, which include
using DHCP to obtain an IP address.
4. Replace the library’s side panel as described in Install the Side Access
Panel on page 358.
5. Power on the library (see Power On the Library on page 84).
6. If a cartridge is left in a Global Spare drive when you powered off the
library, see Recovering a Cartridge From a Global Spare Drive to return
the cartridge to its storage location.
Using the Network Camera Setup Wizard

Run the Network Camera Setup Wizard to determine the current DHCP-
assigned IP address for the camera and set a fixed IP address, if desired.
Note: Read the BlueScale Vision Camera User’s Guide, included on the
Product Documentation and Software CD that came with your
library, for detailed information about using the wizard to
configure the camera.
1. Insert the library’s Product Documentation and Software CD into the CD/
DVD drive of a Windows-based computer located on the same network
as the camera. Adobe® Reader® launches automatically and opens the
welcome.pdf file.
Note: You can close the welcome.pdf file if you do not want to read the
documentation provided on the CD.
342
User Guide 91090000
2. Using Windows Explorer, run NetworkCamera.exe, which is located in

the Network Camera folder on the CD.
3. When the wizard starts, select Setup Camera. The wizard searches the
network and locates any compatible network cameras.
Note: The Network Camera Setup Wizard uses the UDP broadcast to
discover the camera on the network. You may need to disable
your network’s firewall if it blocks using UDP.
Figure 212 The Network Camera Setup Wizard start page.
343
4. Select the camera that the wizard identified.

Note: The default device name for the camera is SLnnnnnn, where
nnnnnn are the last 6 digits of the camera’s 12 digit hexadecimal
MAC address.
Figure 213 The camera IP address.
5. Select the arrow to continue.

6. Enter the Administrator Name and Administrator Password.
The default Administrator Name is administrator (all lower case, case-
sensitive); leave the Administrator Password blank.
7. If desired, change the device name to something more meaningful in
your environment. You can also configure the time settings.
8. Select the arrow to continue.
9. Use the wizard to configure the camera to use IP address settings to
values that are supported by your network.
Important Dynamic Host Control Protocol (DHCP) is an option for acquiring the camera’s IP
address. If you choose to use DHCP, and no DHCP server is available, the camera
defaults to IP address 192.168.0.99. If your network does not support using this IP
address, you must set the camera to a supported fixed IP address before you will
be able to enable and access the camera's BlueScale Vision viewer.
You must enter the camera’s IP address into the BlueScale Vision IP Address field
of the library’s BlueScale System Setup screen. If you choose to use DHCP
addressing, use the Network Configuration Wizard to find the IP address for the
camera. Be aware that if the DHCP-assigned IP address changes, you will lose
access to the camera's BlueScale Vision viewer until you use the wizard to find the
new IP address and then enter the new address in the System Setup screen.
10. Continue through the wizard to save your changes.
344
User Guide 91090000
Troubleshooting Blockages
11. If desired, re-enable the camera icon in the BlueScale user interface
status bar.
a. From the library’s user interface, select Configuration > System. The
System Setup screen displays (Figure 167 on page 269).
b. Scroll down until you see the Other Settings pane.
c. Enter the camera’s updated IP address in the BlueScale Vision IP
Address field.
d. Select Save.The camera icon in the status bar indicates that the IP
address has been configured.
TROUBLESHOOTING BLOCKAGES
If the library halts and a system message indicates that the robotics are
blocked, use the follow steps to troubleshoot the problem.
page 150.
The power-down sequence takes approximately one minute, while the
library allows applications to shut down gracefully.
Do not power-down the library or remove the front panel before capturing all
Caution available traces (see Capturing Traces on page 334). Trace data generated by the
library or the component may be lost when you perform a reset, making diagnosing
problems difficult.
5. After the library has powered down, turn off both main AC power
breakers (see Figure 5 on page 31) on the back of the library and unplug
the power cords.
Note: With cord locks installed on the power cords, it may be easier to
disconnect the cords from the AC outlets at the wall. If you have
redundant power supplies installed, be sure to disconnect both
power cords.
6. Access the interior of the library as described in Accessing the Interior
of the Library on page 347.
345
7. Check for and remove any blockages.

8. Reinstall the front panel or side access panels as described in Accessing
the Interior of the Library on page 347.
10. If you removed any cartridges, reimport them as described in
Importing Media and Cleaning Cartridges on page 127.
Important If the library is configured with multiple partitions, make sure you import the
cartridges into the correct partition.
11. If a cartridge is left in a Global Spare drive when you powered off the
library, see Recovering a Cartridge From a Global Spare Drive to return
the cartridge to its storage location.
12. Use your backup software to reinventory the library (see Updating the
13. Re-issue the move that failed. If the move fails again, contact
SpectraGuard Support for advice (see Contacting Spectra Logic on
page 5).
346
User Guide 91090000
Accessing the Interior of the Library
ACCESSING THE INTERIOR OF THE LIBRARY

Do not access the interior of the library unless you are specifically
instructed to do so by SpectraGuard Support.
Risk of electrical shock. Hazardous moving parts. Use caution when removing the
Warning library’s front or side panels. Spectra Logic recommends turning off the power to
the library before removing the front or side panels.
German: Gefahr eines elektrischen Schlages. Gefährliche bewegliche Teile. Seien
Sie vorsichtig, wenn Sie die Bibliothek der Vorder-oder Seitenwänden. Spectra
Logic empfiehlt Drehen Sie das Gerät in die Bibliothek, bevor Sie den Front-oder
seitlichen Platten.
Accessing the interior of the library depends on how the library is

installed.
If the library is installed in a rack that does not allow access to the
library’s side panels, you must access the interior through the front of
the library. After preparing the library for access, see Access the Interior
from the Front on page 348 for instructions. Do not remove the library
from the rack.
If the library is installed in a rack that does allow access to the library’s
side panels, you can perform the replacement procedure by removing
the side access panels, as described in Access the Interior from the Side,
beginning on page 357.
Note: The T680 rack provides access to the library side panels.
Prepare the Library

Before accessing the interior of the library, use the following steps to
prepare the library.
page 150.
4. Capture all available traces (see Capturing Traces on page 334). Trace
data generated by the library or other components may be lost when
you perform a reset, making diagnosing problems difficult.
347
Access the Interior from the Front

If you cannot access the sides of the library while it is installed the rack, use
the steps in the following sections to remove the front panel, fan assembly,
and chamber shelves.
Note: Do not remove the library from the rack.
Remove the Front Panel

1. From the front of the library, pull firmly outward on the top edge of the
filter cover panel to release the magnetic latches and tip the cover out
from the front pane.
Pull outward
Tab
Lift upward
Figure 214 Removing the filter

cover panel.
2. Lift the cover upward to disengage the tabs on each side of the cover
from the slots in the front of the library.
3. Remove the cover and set it aside.
348
User Guide 91090000
4. Using your fingers or a #2 Phillips screwdriver, loosen, but do not

remove, the two knurled screws securing the bottom of the library front
panel to the chassis.
Knurled
screws
Figure 215 Removing the front panel screws.
5. Lift the front panel outward and away from the chassis to disengage the
two nuts on the back of the front panel from the holes on either side of
the chassis. Set the cover aside.
Chassis
Alignment nut on
front panel
Figure 216 Removing the front panel.
349
Remove the Chamber Shelves

To access the transporter and drives inside the library, you must remove
any magazines that are stored in the chambers at the front of the library,
then remove the chamber shelves.
1. Using your fingers or a #2 Phillips screwdriver, loosen, but do not
remove, the knurled screw securing the fan assembly to the chassis.
Knurled screw
Figure 217 Removing the fan assembly.
2. Rotate the fan assembly toward the right and outward to remove it
from the chassis.
3. Remove any magazines that are stored in the chambers on all of the
exposed shelves.
Place covers on the magazines to protect the cartridges during the
replacement procedure.
Note: Do not remove or reposition cartridges in the TeraPack
magazines.
350
User Guide 91090000
4. Remove some or all of the chamber shelves in the front of the library to
provide clear access to the interior.
a. Use a #2 Phillips screwdriver to loosen, but not remove, the two
screws securing the shelf retaining bar to the chassis (shown in
Figure 218).
Notes: The screw on the right side of the retaining bar is accessed
through the circular cutout in the chassis.
The shelves behind the fan assembly do not have retaining
bars.
Retaining bar
Screw
Mounting tab
Figure 218 Removing the shelf retaining bar.
b. Lift retaining bar up off the screws and set it aside.

c. Grasp the front edge of the shelf with both hands and pull it toward
you to disengage the shelf from the slots in the front of the chassis
and the rear mounting tabs. Angle the left side of the shelf slightly
upward and slide the shelf out of the chassis. Set the shelf aside.
d. Repeat Step a through Step c to remove the remaining shelves so
that you can reach into the library.
Transporter
Figure 219 The interior of the library with chamber shelves

removed (front view).
351
5. Perform any necessary maintenance procedures.

6. Proceed to Reinstall the Chamber Shelves, Fan Assembly, and Front
Panel to begin reinstalling the components you removed.
Reinstall the Chamber Shelves, Fan Assembly, and Front

Panel
1. Reinstall each shelf that you removed.
a. (Optional) Remove the outer guide from each side of the shelf.
Back of shelf
Remove Remove
guide guide
Cutout
Front tab Front tab
Figure 220 Removing/replacing the outer guides from the shelf.
352
User Guide 91090000
b. Orient the back of the shelf toward the inside of the library and the
left edge angled slightly upward so that the right front tab clears the
front edge of the chassis. Slide the shelf into the chassis so that the
top edges fit into the slots in the rear mounting tabs and the front
tabs fit into the slots in the front of the chassis.
Make sure that the rear top edge of the shelf fits into the slots in both of the
Caution mounting tabs (Figure 221). Incorrectly installing a shelf may cause the transporter
to malfunction.
Guide (note) Correct position

orientation)
Mounting tab
Incorrect position
Front slot
Figure 221 Installing a chamber shelf and correctly positioning it in the rear mounting tabs.
c. If you removed the guides on each side of the shelf, reinstall them.
Tabs on the bottom edge of each guide fit into cutouts in the shelf.
Make sure that the guides are oriented correctly (Figure 220 on
page 352).
353
2. Reinstall the shelf retaining bars and tighten the screws.

Notes: The shelves located behind the fan assembly do not use
retaining bars.
Do not replace any magazines you removed from the shelves.
Instead, reimport the magazines after you power-on the
library.
Retaining bar
Screw
Figure 222 Reinstalling the chamber shelf retaining bar.
3. Reinstall the fan assembly.

a. Orient the fan assembly with the gasket material toward the outside
and the knurled nut to the left.
b. Angle the right edge of the assembly behind the front right edge of
the chassis so that the notches in the edge of the assembly fit over
the PEM nuts on the chassis.
Front edge of chassis
PEM nuts
Gasket material
Figure 223 Position the fan assembly on the chassis.
c. Finger-tighten the knurled nut (see Figure 217 on page 350) on the
left side of the fan assembly to secure the assembly to the chassis.
354
User Guide 91090000
Install the Front Panel

1. Grasp the left and right edges of the front panel and lift it into position
on the front of the chassis.
a. Align the cutouts for the touch screen and the TAP with the front of
the library.
b. Insert the alignment pin on the bottom edge of the front panel into
the corresponding hole in the bottom edge of the chassis.
c. Fit alignment pin on the top edge of the panel and the two nuts
extending from the back of the front panel into the corresponding
holes on the edges of the chassis (see Figure 216 on page 349).
Note: Make sure that the power button fits into the cutout in the front
panel and that the front panel is flush against the front of the
chassis.
2. Using your fingers or a #2 Phillips screwdriver, tighten the two knurled

screws on the bottom of the library front cover to secure it to the chassis.
Slot for Slot for

filter cover filter cover
Knurled
screws
Figure 224 Install the front panel screws.
3. Position the tabs on the back of the filter cover over the slots in the front
cover.
355
4. Engage the tabs with the slots in the front of the library, then slide the
cover downward. Push the upper edge of the cover toward the front
panel until the magnets secure it to the front panel.
Push inward
Tab
Slide downward
Figure 225 Install the filter cover.
Resume Operation
4. Restart any backup operations.
356
User Guide 91090000
Access the Interior from the Side

To access the interior of the library from the side, use the following steps in
the following sections.
Remove the Side Access Panel

Note: The drives and chambers are most easily accessed from the right
side of the chassis (as viewed from the front).
1. While holding the panel against the chassis, use a #2 Phillips
screwdriver to remove the screws securing the lower access panel to the
right side of the library.
Lift the bottom access panel off the chassis and set it aside.
Figure 226 Removing the right side access panels.
2. Using a #2 Phillips screwdriver, remove the two screws securing the

upper access panel to the right side of the library (see Figure 226 on
page 357).
Rotate the bottom of the access panel outward to disengage the tabs
from the top of chassis, then lift the access panel off the chassis and set
it aside.
3. Perform any necessary maintenance procedures.
4. Proceed to Install the Side Access Panel on page 358.
357
Install the Side Access Panel

Use the following steps to reinstall the access panels.
1. Slide the top edge of the upper access panel into the slots on either side
the chassis so that the locking tabs on each side of the panel engage top
edge of the chassis.
2. Align the screw holes on the top edge of the upper access panel (circled
in Figure 226 on page 357) with the screw holes in the chassis. Use a #2
Phillips screwdriver to install the screws securing the cover to the
chassis.
Note: The upper access panel can be identified by the lip on its lower
edge. This lip fits under the top edge of the lower access panel.
3. Position the lower access panel with the notched edge down, aligning
the holes on the top edge of the panel (circled in Figure 226 on
page 357) with the corresponding holes in the chassis. Use a #2 Phillips
screwdriver to install the screws securing the cover to the chassis.
Resume Operation
4. Restart any backup operations.
358
User Guide 91090000
Chapter 14
Drive Troubleshooting
This chapter describes procedures for dealing with most common
problems encountered with the library’s drives. Try these troubleshooting
procedures before you open a support ticket with SpectraGuard Support.

Resetting a Drive page 360
Retrieving a Drive Dump File page 362
Troubleshooting All Drive Types page 364
Troubleshooting LTO Tape Drives page 365
Troubleshooting SDLT Tape Drives page 379
Troubleshooting RXT Drives page 381
Notes: Using the drives in the library requires installing the

appropriate device drivers used by the application software
accessing the drives.
For additional suggestions or for troubleshooting problems
that are not covered in this guide, search the Spectra Logic’s
online Technical Support Knowledge Base located at
www.spectralogic.com/knowledgebase.
If an error code displays on the library’s touch screen, look up
its definition using Spectra Logic’s interactive Sense Code
Lookup at www.spectralogic.com/sensecodelookup.
359
Chapter 14 — Drive Troubleshooting
RESETTING A DRIVE
You may occasionally need to reset a drive as part of a firmware upgrade
or for troubleshooting.
Important Resetting the direct-attach tape drive that provides the robotic control path to the
partition will cause both the library (the SCSI media changer) and tape drive to
disappear and reappear from the host's perspective. As a result, your backup
software may stop communicating with the entire library. Consult your backup
software documentation for instructions on how to restore communications to the
library after you finish resetting the drive.
QIP
Important When you reset a QIP-attached drive, you may also need to perform a BlueScale
reset of the QIP. See Resetting a QIP on page 339 for instructions.
Using the Drives Screen

Note: Using the Reset button on the Drives screen is the easiest method
of resetting a drive. This button automatically runs the utility
described in Using the Reset Controller Utility on page 361.
1. Determine the BlueScale identifier for the drive you want to reset.
Note: Drives are identified according to their physical location in the
library. For example, DBA2/DRV4 refers to the upper right drive
in DBA2. Refer to “Drive Identifiers on page 52 for information
about identifiers.
3. Select Configuration > Drives to display the Drives screen.
4. Select Reset. The library power cycles the drive.

When the drive completes its POST and becomes ready, a Status screen
displays, showing that the drive was reset.
Note: When the drive resets, the library posts system messages that the
drive disappeared and reappeared.
5. The drive is ready for use.
360
User Guide 91090000
Resetting a Drive
Using the Reset Controller Utility

Use the following steps to reset a drive that is assigned to a partition.
1. Determine the BlueScale identifier for the drive you want to reset.
library. For example, DBA2/DRV4 refers to the upper right drive
about identifiers.
displays.
utilities.
6. Scroll through the list of advanced utilities and select Reset Controller.
Figure 228 The Reset Contr0ller utility.
7. Use the drop-down list to select the drive that you want to reset.
8. Select Run Utility to reset the selected drive.
When the drive completes its POST and becomes ready, the Utility
Results screen displays, showing that the drive was reset.
Note: When the drive resets, the library posts system messages that the
drive disappeared and reappeared.
9. The drive is ready for use.
361
Using the Power Drive On/Off Utility

The library’s advanced utilities include an option for power cycling a drive
that is not part of a partition. Use this utility with caution.
Important Do not use the advanced Power Drive on/off utility to reset a drive that is assigned
to a partition. The Power Drive on/off utility is only for power cycling a drive that is
not assigned to a partition.
Important This utility powers the selected drive on or off. This utility should ONLY be run on a
drive that is not assigned to a partition. Running this utility on a drive assigned to a
partition will disable the host interface.
RETRIEVING A DRIVE DUMP FILE

Spectra Logic uses drive dumps to help diagnose problems with a tape
drive. You only need to retrieve a drive dump when instructed to do so by
Notes: For LTO drives, use the IBM Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT)
instead of the utility described in this section. You can
download ITDT directly from www.ibm.com. Once you are
on IBM’s web site, search for Tape Diagnostic Tool to locate
and download the software and the user guide. Contact
SpectraGuard Support if you need assistance (see Contacting
Make sure you install ITDT on a server that can access the
library’s tape drives
Emailing Trace Results If you plan to email the results directly from the
library, make sure that you have already set up the email recipients as mail
users (see Configuring Mail Users on page 280).
Saving Trace Results to USB If you plan to save the dump results to USB,
you must plug the USB drive into the library’s USB ports before running
the accessing the Utilities screen (see Connecting a USB Drive to the LCM
on page 105). If a USB drive is not plugged in, the USB option is not
available. You can, however, still save trace results to the LCM compact
flash card. You can also just view the results without saving them.
Use the following steps to retrieve the drive dump file using the BlueScale
user interface.
1. Determine the BlueScale identifier for the drive from which you want to
retrieve the dump.
library. For example: DBA2/DRV4 refers to the upper right drive
about identifiers.
362
User Guide 91090000
Retrieving a Drive Dump File

3. Select Maintenance > Tools > Utilities to display the Utilities screen.
displays.
utilities.
6. Scroll through the list of advanced utilities and select Retrieve Drive
Dump. The screen refreshes to show the details for the utility.
Figure 229 The Retrieve Drive Dump utility.
7. Select any combination of the check boxes to chose the options for
saving the generated trace:
Option Description
Mail results to Sends the dump to a previously configured mail recipient. Use the drop-down
list to select the recipient for the report file.
Only previously configured mail recipients are listed. To send the email with
the attached dump file to someone who is not listed, exit the utility, configure
that person as an email recipient (see Configure Mail Recipients on page 251),
and then run the utility again.
Spectra Logic does not save emailed HHM report files unless they are
specifically requested for troubleshooting.
Save results to Saves the report to the compact flash card in the LCM.
Support.
Save to USB Saves the report to the USB drive. The results can then be viewed from any
device that can read from USB.
Note: This option is only available if you connected a USB drive to one of the
library’s USB ports before accessing the Utilities screen.
363
8. Use the drop-down list to select the drive from which you want to
retrieve the dump.
9. Select Run Utility to retrieve the dump file from the selected drive.
Important Do not use the drive from which you are retrieving the dump file for any other
purpose while the utility runs.
When the dump is complete, the Utility Results screen displays,

showing that the utility ran successfully.
TROUBLESHOOTING ALL DRIVE TYPES

Refer to the drive’s documentation for detailed troubleshooting
information. See Additional Publications on page 17 for information about
obtaining drive documentation.
If you have been successfully operating the backup software and library in
the past, but are now experiencing problems reading and writing data,
check the following:
Write-protect switch. If you are writing data to a cartridge, make sure
that the cartridge is write-enabled (see Preparing Media for Use on
page 123) before importing it into the library.
Cartridge age. If a tape cartridge has been in use for a long time or if it
has been used frequently, try using a new cartridge.
Cleaning. If the drive indicates that a cleaning is required, see Cleaning
a Tape Drive on page 408.
SCSI bus termination. If you experience sporadic errors, make sure
that a SCSI terminator is installed on each SCSI drive in the library. The
SCSI drives used with the library are shipped with the appropriate
terminators installed.
If the SCSI bus is not properly terminated you may experience one or
more of the following failure symptoms:
Read/Write failure
Bus hangs
Connectivity issues—drive is not seen on bus or drops off bus.
Command failures—commands to a drive may fail while
commands to other devices on the bus may work properly
364
User Guide 91090000
Troubleshooting LTO Tape Drives
TROUBLESHOOTING LTO TAPE DRIVES

LTO drives have an LED and a single-character display (SCD) which
provide information about the drive’s operational status. These LEDs are
not visible when the drive is operating inside the library. Instead, the LED
state and SCD code information for each LTO drive in a partition can be
viewed using the Drive Details screen (Figure 47 on page 99).
Note: You can also use Drive Lifecycle Management to view detailed
information about a drive and perform a basic write/read test.
See Chapter 8 – Drive Lifecycle Management for detailed
instructions.
If you think that a drive may be faulty, follow these steps:
1. Display the Drive Details screen for the drive you suspect is having
problems (see Viewing Drive Status Information on page 98).
2. Refer to the following table to interpret the information on the Drive
Details screen.
Detail Field Description

POST Status Indicates whether the drive successfully completed its power-on self-tests
(POST).
When an LTO drive power-cycled or reset, it automatically runs self-diagnostic
tests (POST), checking memory and sensors, performing motor and servo tests,
and testing data channels to ensure that the drive is functioning within normal
parameters.
Cleaning Status Indicates whether the drive requires cleaning (see Cleaning a Tape Drive on
page 408).
LED Status Corresponds to the status LED on the drive.
See Interpreting the LTO Status LED on page 366 for detailed information.
Display Character Corresponds to the single-character display (SCD) on the drive.
The meaning of the character displayed depends on whether the drive is LTO-4,
LTO-3, or LTO-2. See Interpreting the Display Character, beginning on page 367
for detailed information.
Cartridge Status Indicates whether a cartridge is currently loaded in the drive, tape motion, and
other information related to reading and writing data.
3. If the drive is in an error state, contact SpectraGuard Support (see

365
Interpreting the LTO Status LED

The following table describes the states for the status LED and the meaning
of each state. The LED states are the same for all three generation of LTO
drive.
Notes: When LTO-4 Fibre Channel drives running firmware version
8940 or later are installed in the library, the LED status
information shown on the Drive Details screen always
indicates that the LED is off.
If you need to determine the state of the LED, use the IBM
Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT). You can download ITDT
directly from www.ibm.com. Once you are on IBM’s web site,
search for Tape Diagnostic Tool to locate and download the
software and the user guide. Contact SpectraGuard Support
if you need assistance (see Contacting Spectra Logic on
page 5).
Make sure you install ITDT on a server that can access the
library’s tape drives.
LED Color
LED State
Green Amber
Off The drive is powered off or is not assigned to a partition.
Solid The drive is powered on and assigned The drive is powering on or is in maintenance
to a partition. mode.
If a solid C appears in the single-
character display in conjunction with
the solid green LED, then the drive
needs cleaning.
Flashing The drive is reading from the tape, One of the following applies:
writing to the tape, rewinding the tape, If the light flashes once per second, an error
locating data on the tape, loading the occurred and the tape drive or media may
tape, or unloading the tape. require service.
The status light also flashes green if the Note the single-character code displayed on
drive contains a cartridge during the the SCD, then read the drive-specific
power-on cycle. In this case, the drive information about the SCD in the following
completes writing the current data and sections to determine the action required.
slowly rewinds the tape (the process If the light flashes twice per second, the tape
may take up to 13 minutes). The light drive is updating firmware.
stops blinking when the drive If the light flashes four times per second, the
completes the recovery and is ready tape drive detected an error and is
for a read or write operation. performing a firmware recovery. It resets
automatically.
366
User Guide 91090000
Interpreting the Display Character

The following sections describe the meaning of the codes displayed for the
Display Character in the Drive Details screen. The Display Character
corresponds to the single-character display (SCD) on the tape drive. The
codes are different for each type of LTO drive.
Drive Cleaning Notification
WORM Media Errors
LTO-3 and LTO-4 SCD Codes
LTO-2 SCD Codes
Note: The SCD is blank during normal drive operation. In the event of a
drive problem, the single character code indicates the type of error.
If multiple errors occur, the code with highest priority
(lowest number) displays first. Once that error is
corrected, the code with the next highest priority
displays, until none remain.
Drive Cleaning Notification

Whenever a tape is loaded or unloaded, the read/write heads are
physically cleaned by a brush located within the drive. Occasionally, the
drive may require additional cleaning. If a cleaning is required, the drive
sends a Tape Alert message to the host and displays a C on the SCD. The
notification is also posted to the library’s Drive Details screen (Figure 47 on
page 99).
If needed, clean the drive as described in Cleaning a Tape Drive on
page 408. Use only a certified LTO cleaning cartridge. To order a cleaning
cartridge, see Media and Accessories on page 442.
Note: Spectra Logic recommends cleaning all of the tape drives in the
library whenever you replace the air filter, whether or not the
drive indicates that cleaning is required.
WORM Media Errors

LTO-3 and LTO-4 drives support using WORM media. To learn more
about WORM media, see LTO WORM Media on page 467.
The following conditions cause WORM media errors to occur:
Information in the servo manufacturer’s word (SMW) on the tape must
match information from the cartridge memory (CM) module in the
cartridge. If it does not match, the drive’s SCD displays error code 7.
Inserting a WORM tape cartridge into a drive that is not compatible
with WORM causes the cartridge to be treated as an unsupported
medium. The drive’s SCD displays error code 7.
367
LTO-3 and LTO-4 SCD Codes

The SCD is blank during normal operation. If multiple errors occur, the
code with highest priority (lowest number) displays first. Once corrected,
the code with the next highest priority displays, until none remain.
If the drive detects a permanent error and displays an error code other than
0, it automatically performs a drive dump. If you force a drive dump, the
existing dump will be overwritten and data will be lost. After you force a
drive dump, do not turn off the power to the drive or you may lose the
dump data. See Retrieving a Drive Dump File on page 362 for information
about retrieving the dump data from the drive.
The following table shows the SCD codes and, where appropriate, the
associated DLM Drive Health icon for LTO-3 and LTO-4 tape drives. See
the table on page 197 for a description of what the Drive Health icons
indicate.
Notes: Some of the solutions listed in the following table include
testing the drive. See Using DLM to Test a Drive on page 201
for instructions.
In some cases, additional tests using ITDT are required. You
can download ITDT directly from www.ibm.com. Once you
are on IBM’s web site, search for Tape Diagnostic Tool to
locate and download the software and the user guide.
Contact Spectra Guard Support if you need assistance (see
DLM
Health
Code Icon Cause and Solution
0 No error occurred. No action is required.
The power was cycled or diagnostics have finished with no errors.
1 Cooling problem.
The recommended operating temperature was exceeded. Perform one or more
of the following:
Make sure that the cooling fan is rotating and is quiet.
Remove any blockage that prevents air from flowing freely through the tape
drive.
Make sure that the operating temperature and airflow is within the specified
range.
If the operating temperature is within the specified range and the problem
persists, contact SpectraGuard Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on
page 5).
Note: The error code clears when you reset or power cycle the tape drive or
when you place it in maintenance mode.
368
User Guide 91090000
DLM
Health
2 Power problem.
The externally supplied power is approaching the specified voltage limits (the
tape drive is still operating) or is outside the specified voltage limits (the tape
drive is not operating).
Make sure that the library’s power connector is properly seated.
If the problem persists, contact SpectraGuard Support (see Contacting
3 Firmware problem.
Important: Do not force a dump; one already exists.
The tape drive determined that a firmware error occurred. Perform the
following:
1. Use the BlueScale user interface to collect a drive dump (see Retrieving a
Drive Dump File on page 362).
Note: You can also use ITDT to collect a drive dump
2. Reset the drive (see Resetting a Drive on page 360), then retry the operation
that produced the error.
3. If the problem persists, send the drive dump to SpectraGuard Support (see
4 Firmware or drive problem.
A firmware or drive hardware failure occurred. Perform the following:

3. If the problem persists, contact SpectraGuard Support (see Contacting
Spectra Logic on page 5) and send the drive dump to them.
369
DLM
Health
5 Tape drive hardware problem.
The tape drive determined that a tape path or read/write error occurred. To
prevent damage to the drive or tape cartridge, the drive does not allow you to
insert a cartridge if the current cartridge was successfully ejected. If the problem
page 5).
Perform the following:
Note: The error code clears when you reset or power cycle the tape drive.
6 N/A Tape drive or media error.
Note: See Chapter 7 – Media Lifecycle Management for information about using
MLM to determine the health of the cartridge. See Chapter 8 – Drive Lifecycle
Management for information about using DLM to determine the health of the
drive.
The tape drive determined that an error occurred, but it cannot isolate the
cause. Ensure the tape cartridge is the correct media type:
LTO-1 tape cartridges are not supported in LTO-4 tape drives.
Drive will not accept an expired cleaning cartridge.
Drive will not accept a WORM cartridge when running diagnostic tests in
Maintenance Mode.
Drive will not write over existing data sets on a WORM cartridge. Ensure you
are appending data sets on WORM media rather than attempting to write
over existing data sets.
370
User Guide 91090000
DLM
Health
6 (cont.) N/A If the tape cartridge is the correct media type, perform the following action:
Problems Writing Data on Cartridge with Known Volume Serial Number
Retry the operation with a different cartridge.
If the operation succeeds, the original cartridge was defective. Copy data
from the defective cartridge and discard it.
If the operation fails and another tape drive is available, insert the cartridge
into the other drive and retry the operation.
If the operation fails, discard the defective cartridge.
If the operation succeeds, use the Drive Health Verification wizard to test
the drive (see Using DLM to Test a Drive on page 201).
If the diagnostics fail, contact SpectraGuard Support (see Contacting
If the diagnostics succeed, the error was temporary.
If the operation fails and another tape drive is not available, use the Drive
Health Verification wizard to test the drive (see Using DLM to Test a Drive on
page 201).
If the diagnostics fail, contact SpectraGuard Support.
If the diagnostics succeed, discard the cartridge.
Problems Reading Data on Cartridge with Known Volume Serial Number
Perform one of the following procedures:
If another tape drive is available, insert the cartridge into the other drive and
retry the operation.
If the operation succeeds, use the Drive Health Verification wizard to test
the drive (see Using DLM to Test a Drive on page 201).
If the diagnostics fail, contact SpectraGuard Support (see Contacting
If the diagnostics succeed, the error was temporary.
If another tape drive is not available, use the Drive Health Verification wizard
to test the drive (see Using DLM to Test a Drive on page 201).
If the diagnostics fail, contact SpectraGuard Support.
If the diagnostics succeed, discard the cartridge.
371
DLM
Health
6 (cont.) N/A Problems with Multiple Cartridges or One Cartridge with Unknown Volume Serial
Number
If the problem occurs with multiple tape cartridges or if you do not know the
tape cartridge’s volume serial number, use the Drive Health Verification wizard
to test the drive (see Using DLM to Test a Drive on page 201).
If the Drive Health Verification fails, contact SpectraGuard Support (see
If the diagnostics succeed, use the ITDT tape drive diagnostics to run the Test
Head diagnostic:
If the Test Head diagnostic fails, contact SpectraGuard Support.
If the Test Head diagnostic succeeds, replace the cartridges that caused the
problem.
7 High probability of media error.
An error occurred because of a faulty tape cartridge.
Ensure the tape cartridge is the correct media type:
LTO-1 tape cartridges are not supported in LTO-4 tape drives.
Drive will not accept an expired cleaning cartridge.
Drive will not accept a WORM cartridge when running diagnostic tests in
Maintenance Mode.
Drive will not write over existing data sets on a WORM cartridge. Ensure
you are appending data sets on WORM media rather than attempting to
write over existing data sets.
If the tape cartridge is the correct media type, try another tape cartridge in the
drive.
If the problem occurs with multiple tape cartridges, run the tape cartridge in
a different tape drive.
If the operation in the other drive fails and the SCD displays 6 or 7, replace
the media.
If the operation succeeds, use ITDT to run the Test Cartridge & Media
diagnostic.
CAUTION! When you use ITDT to run the Test Cartridge & Media diagnostic,
data on the suspect tape is overwritten.
If the Test Cartridge & Media diagnostic fails, replace the media.
If it runs successfully, use the Drive Health Verification wizard to test the
drive (see Using DLM to Test a Drive on page 201).
If the tape drive diagnostics fail, replace the tape drive.
If the Drive Health Verification wizard runs successfully, try again to
perform the operation that produced the initial media error.
Note: The error code clears when you remove the tape cartridge or when you
place the tape drive in maintenance mode.
372
User Guide 91090000
DLM
Health
8 SCSI interface or Fibre Channel failure.
A failure occurred in the tape drive hardware or in the SCSI bus. The error code
clears after 10 seconds if the error does not recur. If the error persists, contact
9 RS-422 error.
The drive determined that a drive interface or library interface failure occurred.
The error code clears after 10 seconds if the error does not recur. If the error
page 5).
A Degraded operation.
The tape drive determined that a problem occurred that degraded the operation
of the tape drive, but it did not restrict continued use.
The drive is usable, though the single-character display (SCD) continues to
indicate an error and the status light flashes amber. The error code may clear
when you cycle power to the tape drive.
1. Reset the drive (see Resetting a Drive on page 360) to clear the error code.
2. Confirm that the drive is using the current firmware version (see Checking
the Drive Firmware Version on page 415) and update the firmware if
necessary.
3. Use the Drive Health Verification wizard to test the drive (see Using DLM to
Test a Drive on page 201).
B N/A No error or message assigned. See Error Code 8 in this table.
C Cleaning indicator.
The tape drive needs to be cleaned, or is in the process of loading the cleaning
cartridge or being cleaned. The error code clears when you clean the drive and
unload the cleaning cartridge. See Cleaning a Tape Drive on page 408 for
instructions.
D N/A No error or message assigned. See Error Code 0 (zero) in this table.
d Fibre Channel AL_PA conflict. Two tape drives on a Fibre Channel loop have
the same AL_PA.
E The Fibre Channel port connection is off-line.
e The drive detected a configuration error during an encryption operation.

1. Make sure that you are using LTO-4 data cartridges. Encryption is only
supported for LTO-4 cartridges.
2. Retry the encryption operation with the suspect cartridge in another
encryption enabled drive.
3. Replace the cartridge if you see the same problem in multiple drives.
373
DLM
Health
F Drive Fiber Channel error.
The drive’s dip switch 3 is set to ON and the drive does not detect light or a
related diagnostic failed on not detecting light through the fiber optic
connection to the drive.
Verify the fiber cables and connections between the tape drive and the host
are the correct type and are working properly. Verify all equipment and
devices are powered ON.
Verify the configuration settings for the drive are set correctly and are
compatible with the topology of the network.
Verify that the host fiber adapter and port are working properly and are
Verify that the fiber channel switch ports are working properly and are
Verify that the fiber cable is connected to Port A (0) of the tape drive.
Verify that Port A (0) on the Fibre Channel drive is working properly by
running “Function Code 6: Run Host Interface Wrap Test.”
P The cartridge in the drive is write-protected. A backup application cannot
write data to a write-protected cartridge. The library cannot update the
cartridge MAM when the cartridge is write-protected.
b, c, H, N/A Reserved or not actively in use, or no error or message assigned.
h, J, n, o, There may be a problem with the SCD. Reset the drive and determine whether
u all segments on the SCD are lit.
If they are all lit, confirm that the drive is using the current firmware version
(see Checking the Drive Firmware Version on page 415) and update the
firmware if necessary.
… N/A The message display has lost communication with the tape drive. This message
appears on Line 2 of the message display. The three dots may occasionally
display during normal processing.
374
User Guide 91090000
LTO-2 SCD Codes

If multiple errors occur, the code with highest priority (lowest number)
displays first. Once corrected, the code with the next highest priority
displays, until none remain.
Note: The SCD is blank during normal operation.
Code DLM Cause and Solution

Health
Icon
0 No error occurred. No action is required.
The power was cycled or diagnostics have finished with no errors.
1 Cooling problem.
The recommended operating temperature was exceeded. Perform one or more
of the following:
Ensure that the cooling fan is rotating and is quiet.
Remove any blockage that prevents air from flowing freely through the tape
drive.
Ensure that the operating temperature and airflow is within the specified
range.
If the operating temperature is within the specified range and the problem
persists, replace the drive.
2 Power problem.
The externally supplied power is approaching the specified voltage limits (the
tape drive is still operating) or is outside the specified voltage limits (the tape
drive is not operating).
Make sure that the library’s power connector is properly seated.
375

Health
Icon
3 Firmware problem.
The tape drive determined that a firmware error occurred. Perform the
following:
1. Collect a drive dump (see Retrieving a Drive Dump File on page 362).
Note: You can also use the server’s SCSI interface. Use a device driver utility or
system tool (for instructions about reading a drive dump from tape, visit
http://ssddom02.storage.ibm.com/tape/lto/).
necessary.
4. Retry the operation that produced the error.
5. If the problem persists, send the drive dump collected in Step 1 to
4 Firmware or drive problem.
A firmware or drive hardware failure occurred. Perform the following:

1. Collect a drive dump (see Retrieving a Drive Dump File on page 362).
Note: You can also use the server’s SCSI interface. Use a device driver utility or
system tool (for instructions about reading a drive dump from tape, visit
http://ssddom02.storage.ibm.com/tape/lto/).
3. Retry the operation that produced the error.
4. If the problem persists, confirm that the drive is using the current firmware
version (see Checking the Drive Firmware Version on page 407) and update
the firmware if necessary.
5 Tape drive hardware problem.
The tape drive determined that a tape path or read/write error occurred. To
prevent damage to the drive or tape cartridge, the drive does not allow you to
insert a cartridge if the current cartridge was successfully ejected. If the
problem persists, replace the drive.
Note: The error code clears when you reset or power cycle the drive or when
you place it in maintenance mode.
376
User Guide 91090000

Health
Icon
6 N/A Tape drive or media error.
Note: See Chapter 7 – Media Lifecycle Management for information about
using MLM to determine the health of the cartridge. See Chapter 8 – Drive
Lifecycle Management for information about using DLM to determine the
health of the drive.
The tape drive determined that an error occurred, but it cannot isolate the error
to faulty hardware or to the tape cartridge. Perform the following actions:
For Problems with Writing Data:
If the problem occurred while the tape drive was writing data to the tape, and if
you know the volume serial number (located on the cartridge label) of the tape
cartridge that was loaded in the drive when the problem occurred, retry the
operation with a different cartridge:
If the operation succeeds, the original cartridge was defective. Copy data
from the defective cartridge and discard it.
If the operation fails and another tape drive is available, insert the cartridge
into the other unit and retry the operation.
The error code clears when you remove the tape cartridge or place the tape
drive in maintenance mode.
For Problems with Reading Data:
If the problem occurred while the tape drive was reading data from the tape,
and if you know the volume serial number of the tape cartridge, perform one of
the following procedures:
If another tape drive is available, insert the cartridge into the other unit and
retry the operation:
7 High probability of media error.
An error occurred because of a faulty tape cartridge.
Try another tape cartridge. If the problem occurs with multiple tape cartridges,
run the tape cartridge in a different tape drive. If the operation in the other unit
fails and 6 or 7 displays, replace the media.
8 Primary port interface error.
A failure occurred in the tape drive hardware or in the primary port interface.
The error code clears 10 seconds after the drive detected the error or when you
place the drive in maintenance mode.
9 Tape drive, library interface, or RS-422 error.
A failure occurred in the drive hardware, the library interface, or the RS-422
connection. Replace the drive. The error code clears 10 seconds after the drive
detected the error or when you place the drive in maintenance mode.
377

Health
Icon
A Degraded operation.
The drive is usable, though the single-character display (SCD) continues to
indicate an error and the status light flashes amber. The error code may clear
when you reset the tape drive.
necessary.
3. Use the Drive Health Verification wizard to test the drive (see Using DLM to
Test a Drive on page 201).
Note: The error code may clear when you reset or power cycle the tape drive or
B N/A No error or message is assigned. See Error Code 8 in this table.
C Cleaning indicator.
The tape drive needs to be cleaned. The error code clears when you clean the
drive or place it in maintenance mode.
D N/A No error or message assigned. See Error Code 0 in this table.
d Fibre Channel AL_PA conflict. Two tape drives on a Fibre Channel loop have
the same AL_PA.
E The Fibre Channel port is offline.
F Drive Fiber Channel error.

The drive’s dip switch 3 is set to ON and the drive does not detect light or a
related diagnostic failed on not detecting light through the fiber optic
connection to the drive.
Verify the fiber cables and connections between the tape drive and the host
are the correct type and are working properly. Verify all equipment and
devices are powered ON.
Verify the configuration settings for the drive are set correctly and are
Verify that the host fiber adapter and port are working properly and are
Verify that the fiber channel switch ports are working properly and are
Verify that the fiber cable is connected to Port A (0) of the tape drive.
Verify that Port A (0) on the Fibre Channel drive is working properly by
running “Function Code 6: Run Host Interface Wrap Test.”
378
User Guide 91090000
Troubleshooting SDLT Tape Drives

Health
Icon
c, b, h, n, N/A No error or message assigned. There may be a problem with the SCD. Reset the
or u drive and determine whether all segments on the SCD are lit.
If they are all lit, confirm that the drive is using the current firmware version
(see Checking the Drive Firmware Version on page 407) and update the
firmware if necessary.
… N/A The message display has lost communication with the tape drive. This message
appears on Line 2 of the message display. The three dots may occasionally
display during normal processing.
TROUBLESHOOTING SDLT TAPE DRIVES

SDLT drives have three front panel LEDs that you can use as
troubleshooting tools. These LEDs are not visible when a drive is installed
in the library. Instead, the LED state information for each SDLT drive in a
partition can be viewed using the Drive Details screen (Figure 47 on
page 99).
2. Refer to the table in Interpreting the SDLT LEDs to understand the
information on the Drive Details screen. All of the LEDs flash rapidly
and simultaneously when the drive malfunctions.
Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).Select Configuration > Drives.
379
Interpreting the SDLT LEDs

The following table describes the states for the SDLT LEDs and their
meaning.
LED Color Indication Explanation

Drive Orange On See The Drive Density LED on page 380.
Density or Green
Off
Drive Status Green Flashing The tape drive is in use, which includes functions such as:
The tape is moving.
The drive is calibrating, reading, writing, or rewinding the
tape.
The drive is loading, unloading, or rewinding.
On The drive is idle. There may or may not be a cartridge in the
tape drive.
Off The tape drive has not been turned on or is not plugged into a
power source.
Cleaning Yellow On Cleaning is required.
Required
Off Cleaning is not required.
The Drive Density LED On the SDLT 600 drive, the left-most LED on the
front of the drive is a dual color LED, able to appear green or orange. This
is the Drive Density LED, which indicates the type of tape cartridge loaded
in the drive, as well as its status. These combinations are summarized in
the Density Indicator table below.
Drive Density LED

Possible Tape Cartridge Scenario LED Color
No Cartridge Inserted Black (Off)
Any SDLT II (SDLT 600) Cartridge Inserted Green
Any SDLT I (SDLT 320 or 220) Cartridge Inserted Orange
Any VS160 Cartridge Inserted Orange
DLTtape IV Cartridge Inserted Black (Off)
380
User Guide 91090000
Troubleshooting RXT Drives
SDLT Tape Drive Cleaning

The frequency of cleaning is dictated mostly by the amount of ambient
pollution and particulates in the environment. SDLT drives monitor their
cleaning status. When the drive’s yellow Cleaning Required LED turns on
or if your backup software notifies you that a cleaning is required, follow
the instructions in Cleaning a Tape Drive on page 408 to clean the drive.
Note: Spectra Logic recommends cleaning all of the tape drives in the
library whenever you replace the air filter, whether or not the
drive indicates that cleaning is required.
If cleaning is required, use only a certified SDLT cleaning cartridge. To
order a cleaning cartridge, see Media and Accessories on page 442.
Never use a DLT cleaning tape in an SDLT drive; DLT cleaning tapes are
Caution incompatible with the SDLT heads.
Each SDLT cleaning tape is good for 20 uses. Keep track of the number
of times you use each cleaning cartridge.
TROUBLESHOOTING RXT DRIVES

Important RXT drives are supported as legacy devices only. They are no longer available for
purchase.
RXT drives have a digital display that consists of a 14-segment single-

character display (SCD) and a status indicator. The SCD is not visible when
the drive is operating inside the library. Instead, the SCD code information
for each RXT drive in a partition can be viewed using the Drive Details
2. Note the information in the Display Character field on the Drive Details
screen, then refer to Interpreting RXT Drive SCD Codes to interpret the
information.
381
Interpreting RXT Drive SCD Codes

The following table describes the single-character codes that appear on the
RXT drive’s SCD and display in the Display Character field on the Drive
Details screen. Unless there is an error, the SCD will be blank except for a
flashing blue status indicator. If you need assistance, contact SpectraGuard
Support.
Code Meaning Resolution

Powering On Status message that the drive is powering on; no action is required.
Booting Status message that the drive is booting up; no action is required.
Waiting Status message that the drive is processing; no action is required.
1 Cooling Problem If regarding a RXT media pack, remove the pack and try reloading.
If regarding the RXT drive, cycle the power on the RXT drive.
2 Firmware Error Gather traces and debug files using diagnostics.
Spectra Logic recommends using the Web interface for these
3 RXT Drive Hardware
procedures, but you may also access them through the serial
Error
interface.
4 RXT Media Hardware
Error
5 RXT Drive or RXT
Media Hardware Error
6 RXT Drive Hardware Obtain the warning message and forward it to SpectraGuard
Warning Support.
Gather traces and debug files using the Web or serial interface.
7 RXT Media Hardware Send the message to SpectraGuard Support with trace and debug
Warning files.
8 RXT Drive or RXT Send the message to SpectraGuard Support with trace and debug
Media Hardware files.
Warning
9 RXT Media Degraded Determine which drive is impaired and send trace and debug files
Mode to SpectraGuard Support.
A RXT Drive Send the message to SpectraGuard Support with trace and debug
Configuration Warning files.
B RXT Media Firmware Upgrade the RXT drive firmware to current level.
later than RXT drive
Firmware
C RXT Media Contact SpectraGuard Support to determine if there is a hardware
Reformatting Necessary or firmware problem; the RXT media pack may need reformatting.
D RXT Media
Reconstructing
382
User Guide 91090000
Troubleshooting RXT Drives
Code Meaning Resolution

E RXT Drive Firmware Upgrade the RXT drive firmware to current level if desired.
Upgrade Necessary
F RXT Drive Firmware Wait until the firmware file has upgraded.
Upgrade In Progress
G RXT Drive Firmware Attempt to upgrade again. If this fails, email SpectraGuard
Upgrade Failed Support with trace and debug files.
H Communication Debug logs about the application failure are located on the RXT
Application Failed media. You may want to save the logs for sending to SpectraGuard
Support, but you can continue using the drive.
383
Notes
384
User Guide 91090000
Chapter 15
Maintaining the Library & Drives
This chapter describes the common maintenance tasks for the Spectra
T200, T380, and T680 and its drives.

Maintaining the Library page 386
Replacing the Air Filter page 386
Updating Library Firmware page 388
Installing Cord Locks and Chassis page 403
Grounding
Calibrating the Touch Screen page 407
Maintaining Drives page 408
Cleaning a Tape Drive page 408
Updating Drive Firmware page 414
Adding or Replacing a Drive page 419
385
Chapter 15 — Maintaining the Library & Drives
MAINTAINING THE LIBRARY

This section provides instructions for routine library maintenance
procedures.

Replacing the Air Filter this page
Updating Library Firmware page 388
Installing Cord Locks and Chassis Grounding page 403
Calibrating the Touch Screen page 407
Replacing the Air Filter

A set of fans mounted in the lower front of the library pull cool air into the
library and circulate it to maintain the temperature within an acceptable
range. The air filter ensures that the air pulled into the library is free of
contaminants. A clogged air filter can cause operational problems due to
excessive temperatures inside the library.
You should inspect the filter at least once every three months as part of
your preventive maintenance procedures. If a filter appears to be clogged,
continue with the steps in this section.
Some environments may require more frequent filter inspection and replacement.
Caution If an air filter gets clogged quickly, consider moving the library to a more dust-free
location or improve the environment where it is located.
Spectra Logic recommends keeping one or more new air filters on site to
use for replacement as often as is necessary. To purchase replacement air
filters, contact your sales representative.
Before You Begin...

Confirm that the filter needs to be replaced—Because dust primarily collects
at the bottom of the air filter, it can be rotated 180°, top to bottom, one time
before it needs to be replaced.
Gather the following tools and supplies—Gather these supplies before
beginning the procedure.
A new filter from Spectra Logic
A flat blade screwdriver
Continue Library Operations While Replacing the Filter—It is safe to continue
normal library operations, such as backups, while replacing the air filter.
386
User Guide 91090000
Maintaining the Library
Replace the Filter

1. From the front of the library, pull outward on the top right edge of the
filter cover panel to rotate the cover out from the front panel.
Note: You do not need to remove the filter cover panel.
Pull outward
Tab
Figure 230 Remove the fan cover

panel.
2. Reach in and remove the old air filter from the inside of the filter cover.
Discard the filter.
Air filter
Figure 231 Replace the air filter.
3. Use a dry cloth to wipe any accumulated dust off the inside of the filter
cover.
4. Place the new air filter against the inside of the fan cover so that it fits
between the tabs (shown in Figure 230 on page 387).
387
5. Push the top edge of the cover toward the front panel until the magnets
secure it to the front panel.
Push inward
Figure 232 Install the filter cover.
Updating Library Firmware

This section covers the following information:

Firmware Package Support page 389
Check the Current Firmware Versions page 389
Determine Whether an Update is Available page 392
Standard Firmware Update Procedure page 394
Advanced Firmware Update Procedure page 400
Managing Firmware Packages page 402
388
User Guide 91090000
Firmware Package Support

Firmware packages are groupings of program code that are used to update
the BlueScale software and firmware for the library and its components.
Spectra Logic provides complete support for the two most recently
shipped releases of firmware packages.Customers using previously
released firmware packages are urged to upgrade to the current release. If
the firmware you are running is more than two releases behind, you may
be required to upgrade firmware to resolve an issue or to verify that the
problem still exists in current firmware.
into the System Configuration screen. See Enabling Options and Upgrades on
Check the Current Firmware Versions

The following sections provide instructions for determining the version of
BlueScale software and firmware currently running on the library.
Check the Library Firmware Version

The status bar at the bottom of each BlueScale screen shows the version of
the BlueScale firmware being run by the library.
BlueScale
version
Figure 233 The BlueScale version shown on the status bar.

2. Compare the current BlueScale version to the latest firmware package
available for the library on the Spectra Logic Web site (see Determine
Whether an Update is Available on page 392).
389
Check Component Firmware Versions (Optional)

Note: This procedure is not necessary or helpful unless recommended
by SpectraGuard Support.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Tools. The Maintenance
Tools screen displays.
Figure 234 The Maintenance Tools screen.
3. If you want to save the information about the firmware versions to a

USB drive, connect a USB drive to the LCM’s USB port; otherwise, skip
to the next step.
Note: The option to save the information to USB is only displayed if
you plug a USB drive in to the USB port on the LCM before you
select Utilities (see Connecting a USB Drive to the LCM on
page 105).
4. Select Utilities. The Utilities screen displays.
5. Select Display Firmware Versions. The Utilities screen refreshes to show
a description of the Display Firmware Versions tool.
Figure 235 The Utilities screen.
390
User Guide 91090000
6. If you want to save the results from the utility, use the check boxes at
the top of the screen to select the location; otherwise skip to Step 7.
Selecting this Saves the report...

location...
Mail results to As an attachment to an email sent to the specified mail recipient. Use the drop-
down list to select the recipient for the report file.
email recipient (see Configuring Mail Users on page 280).
Note: Do not use the default autosupport@spectralogic.com email recipient
unless SpectraGuard Support specifically instructs you to do so. Spectra Logic
does not save emailed results files unless they are specifically requested for
troubleshooting.
Save results to To the library’s compact flash card in the LCM.
Support.
Save to USB To a USB drive connected to the USB port on the LCM.
page 390.
7. Select Run Utility. The Utility Results screen displays, showing a list of
the firmware levels for all installed components.
Figure 236 The Firmware Levels Utility Results screen.
8. If requested to do so, send this information to SpectraGuard Support

(see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5) for advanced troubleshooting.
391
Determine Whether an Update is Available

The most current version of the BlueScale firmware package for the library
is available from the Spectra T200/T380/T680 Firmware page on the Spectra
Logic web site (www.spectralogic.com > Support > Firmware & Drivers >
Product Firmware > Spectra T200/T380/T680 Firmware).
If there is a more current version of the firmware available, download the
firmware as described in Download the Updated Firmware on page 393
and then perform the update as described in Standard Firmware Update
Procedure on page 394.
Notes: The most helpful information on updated firmware packages
can be found in the T-Series Mid-Range Libraries: T200, T380,
and T680 Release Notes and Documentation Updates, which are
available on the firmware download page. This document is
also available on Spectra Logic's web site at
When the firmware update is completed, the library
automatically sends an email to SpectraGuard Support if it is
configured as a mail recipient (see Configuring Mail Users on
page 280).
392
User Guide 91090000
Download the Updated Firmware

If a more current version of the BlueScale firmware is available, use one of
the following methods to download it.
Note: Under most circumstances, the preferred method for updating
the library firmware is to configure each library with internet
access so that it can download and install the firmware directly
from the firmware download page on Spectra Logic web site (see
Configuring Network Settings on page 278).
If... Then...
The library has internet access and you plan to The firmware is downloaded when you start the
download and install the firmware directly from firmware update process. There is no need to
the Spectra Logic firmware download page, download it beforehand. Proceed to Standard
Firmware Update Procedure on page 394.
Note: Downloading and installing the updated
firmware directly from the Spectra Logic web site
is the preferred method.
The library cannot access an outside web site 1. Download the current firmware package from
because of security or firewall requirements the Spectra T200/T380/T680 Firmware page of
the Spectra Logic web site and save it to one of
the following locations:
The root directory of a USB drive (see Using
a USB Drive on page 104)
—OR—
A previously configured package server (see

Configuring a Firmware Package Server
2. Proceed to Standard Firmware Update
Procedure on page 394.
393
Standard Firmware Update Procedure

The standard firmware update procedure is the normal method for
performing all library firmware updates.
If you have any questions or concerns about upgrading, contact
Make Sure Your BlueScale Software Support Key Is Current

Updating the library firmware and BlueScale software requires a current
service contract with SpectraGuard Support. If your BlueScale Software
Support key has expired, you will see the following screen when you
attempt to update the library firmware. .
Figure 237 The BlueScale Software Support Key Expired

screen.
into the System Configuration screen. See Enabling Options and Upgrades on
If you see this screen, you must complete the following steps before you
can update the BlueScale firmware.
1. Renew your service contract (see Service Contract Extension on
page 443).
2. Enter the new BlueScale Software Support key in the System Settings
screen (see Enabling Options and Upgrades on page 270).
394
User Guide 91090000
Prepare For the Update

Back up your MLM database (see Backing Up the MLM Database on
page 187).
Back up the library configuration (see Back Up the Library
Configuration Manually on page 286).
Back up all of your encryption keys (see Exporting and Protecting Keys
on page 320).
Download and read the T-Series Mid-Range Libraries: T200, T380, and
T680 Release Notes and Documentation Updates for the most current
information about updated firmware packages. The release notes are
available on the Spectra T200/T380/T680 Firmware page on the Spectra
Logic web site. They are also available at www.spectralogic.com/
documents. The release notes also contain updates to the T-Series Mid-
Range Libraries: T200, T380, and T680 User Guide and other
documentation.
Note: If the release notes provide special requirements or procedures
for updating the firmware, make sure that you follow them.
Important Confirm that all of the following conditions are met before beginning the firmware
upgrade process:
All backup processes have completed
All backup software daemons are stopped
All drives are empty
Update the Firmware
Important If you receive an error message stating that your disk is too full when the library
attempts to unzip a firmware package, see Managing Firmware Packages on
page 402 for information about deleting old firmware packages.
Use the following steps to update the library firmware.

2. If you downloaded the firmware update to a USB drive, plug the USB
drive into LCM’s USB port before continuing (see Connecting a USB
Drive to the LCM on page 105).
395
3. Select Maintenance > Package Update. The Package Update screen

displays.
Note: If the library notifies you that your BlueScale Software Support
key has expired, see Make Sure Your BlueScale Software Support
Key Is Current on page 394.
Figure 238 The Package Update screen.
4. Select Begin Package Update.

5. Read the license agreement, then select Accept or Decline. When you
select Accept, the Select Package Source screen displays.
Note: The USB Key option is only available if you previously
connected a USB drive containing the firmware update file to the
USB port on the LCM in Step 2 on page 395.
Figure 239 The Select Package Source screen.
396
User Guide 91090000
6. Select the source for the firmware update package you want to use:
Source Description
Local Select the desired firmware package from packages already stored on the
library’s LCM compact flash card.
USB Key Select the desired firmware package from packages stored on a USB drive.
There is a brief delay while the library detects the USB device when you select
this option.
Notes:
The USB Key option is only available if you previously connected a USB
drive containing the firmware update file to the USB port on the LCM in
Step 2 on page 395.
The firmware file must be stored in the root directory of the USB drive.
Spectra Logic Select and download the desired firmware package from Spectra Logic’s server
to the LCM compact flash card and then install it.
Note: The library must have a connection to the internet before you can use this
option (see Configuring Network Settings on page 278).
Firmware Package Select the desired firmware package stored on previously configured firmware
Server package server, if you have one available.
Note: The firmware package server is only available if you previously configure
one. See Configuring a Firmware Package Server (Optional) on page 298 for
information about configuring a firmware package server.
7. Select Next. The Select Package Type screen displays.
Figure 240 The Select Package Type screen.
8. Select Library to update the library firmware.

Note: The DCM firmware is a component of the BlueScale firmware. It
is separate from the firmware used in the drive itself.
397
9. Select Next. The Save Library Configuration screen displays.
Figure 241 The Save Library Configuration screen.
10. Choose whether and where you want to save the library configuration
before performing the update.
Don’t Save Library Configuration (not recommended)—A backup of
the changed library configuration will not be saved.
Save Library Configuration To—Saves a backup of the changed
library configuration to the selected destination. Using this option is
highly recommended to ensure that you can easily restore the
library.
Choose whether to save the configuration file to USB or to email it
to an already-configured mail recipient (see Configuring Mail Users
on page 284).
Notes: Saving the library configuration is highly recommended to
ensure that you can easily restore the library if necessary.
Do not use the default autosupport@spectralogic.com email
files unless they are specifically requested for
troubleshooting.
Send Email Notification (recommended)—Sends an email to Spectra
Logic to update the library’s support records.
398
User Guide 91090000
11. Select Next. The Select Package screen displays.

The Select Package screen lists the file names of the firmware package
available on the selected source. The file names begin with the firmware
version, followed with the date of release in YYYYMMDD format and
either an F for Full Release or an I for Incremental Release.
Figure 242 The Select Package screen.
Note: The firmware packages listed on the Select Package screen

change depending on the packages currently available at the
source you selected in Step 6 on page 397.
12. Select the firmware package you want to use for the update. You can
only select one firmware package at a time.
If you want to view information about the various firmware
components affected by a specific firmware update, select Details to
display a Package Details screen similar to the one shown in Figure 243.
If you do not want to view this information, skip to Step 13.
Figure 243 The Package Details screen.
399
13. Select Update. A progress screen appears for the duration of the update,
which may take several minutes. When completed, the Package Results
screen displays, showing that the update completed successfully.
Notes: Once the firmware update process starts, it cannot be
canceled.
Do not cut power to the library or any component being
updated during the firmware update process.
14. Select Finish to complete the firmware update and reboot the LCM.
Firmware updates do not take effect until the library completes the
update process and automatically reboots the LCM and any other
components that were updated.
Always select Finish to complete the firmware update process and reboot the LCM.
Caution Do not manually reboot the LCM, power-cycle the library, or perform any other
operations on the library when you see the Package Results screen. Doing so will
cause the update process to fail.
Note: If you are using the BlueScale web interface to update firmware,
the connection to the library is lost when the LCM reboots.
Allow sufficient time for the LCM to complete its initialization,
then enter the library’s IP address in your web browser to
reconnect.
Advanced Firmware Update Procedure
Important Use the advanced firmware update procedure only when directed to do so by
SpectraGuard Support. If a BlueScale firmware update requires using the
advanced firmware update procedure, the current version of the Spectra T200,
T380, and T680 Libraries Release Notes and Documentation Updates will
specifically instruct you to do so.
Use the following steps to update a selected component (for example, the
LC server component) of the library firmware.
2. Follow the Standard Firmware Update Procedure, beginning with
page 394, until you reach the Select Package screen (Step 11 on
page 399).
400
User Guide 91090000
3. Select Advanced. The Advanced Package Update screen displays.

Any items that need to be upgraded or downgraded to match the
firmware package you chose are automatically selected.
Figure 244 The Advanced Package Update screen.
4. Clear the checkbox next to any firmware component you do not want to
update. For example, clear every thing except LC Server to update just
the LC Server component.
Note: Occasionally, a firmware component must be updated even if it
is already at the same level as the component in the selected
firmware package.
5. Select Update. A progress screen displays for the duration of the update
process, which may take several minutes.
canceled.
When completed, the Package Results screen displays, showing that the
update completed successfully.
401
6. Select Finish to complete the update process and reboot the LCM.
The firmware updates do not take effect until the library completes the
update process and automatically reboots the LCM and any other
components that were updated.
Always select Finish to complete the firmware update process. Do not manually
Caution reboot the LCM, power-cycle the library, or perform any other operations on the
library when you see the Package Results screen. Doing so will cause the update
process to fail.
Note: If you are accessing the library through the BlueScale web
interface, the connection to the library is lost when the library
reboots. Allow sufficient time for the library to complete its
initialization, then enter the library’s IP address in your web
browser to reconnect.
Managing Firmware Packages

The firmware packages downloaded to the library reside on the LCM
compact flash card. Over time, firmware packages (one per update)
accumulate on the card. Under certain rare circumstances, the library may
post an error message and prompt you to delete packages, or you may
choose to delete downlevel packages at some point.
You can delete downlevel firmware packages using either the front panel
or over a remote connection to the LCM through the BlueScale web
interface. Deleting a firmware package files does not delete firmware
already applied to library components; it simply removes the firmware
package files from local storage on the LCM.
There is no confirmation before the selected firmware package is deleted. Make

Caution sure that you no longer need access to a firmware package file before you delete it.
Use the following steps to delete firmware package files from the library’s
memory.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Package Update. The
Package Update screen displays (see Figure 238 on page 396).
402
User Guide 91090000
3. Select Manage Packages. The Package Files screen displays with a list of
all the package files currently stored on the LCM compact flash card.
Figure 245 The Package Files screen.
4. Select the file(s) that you want to delete, then select Delete Selected. The
file delete process begins.
Make sure that only the packages you want to delete are selected. There is no
Caution confirmation before the selected packages are deleted.
Installing Cord Locks and Chassis Grounding

To ensure proper grounding, the library must either have cord locks
installed on both ends of each AC power cord or a permanent grounding
cable attached to the AC switch plates on the back of the library.
and earth ground.
Masse.
403
Install Cord Locks

Install cord locks to keep the AC power cords from being accidentally
disconnected from the library. The cord locks, provided with the library,
are typically installed when the library is installed. Do not remove the cord
locks unless you need to disconnect the AC power cords from the library.
Use the following steps to install the cord lock on a AC power cord where
it connects to the library.
1. Using a #2 Phillips screw driver, loosen, but do not remove, the two
screws securing the cord lock assembly to the AC switch plate.
AC switch
plate
Screws
Figure 246 Remove the AC power plate

screws.
2. Using a 5/32-inch open-end wrench, remove the kep nuts and screws
that secure the clamp to the mounting bracket and remove the clamp.
Mounting bracket
Screw and KEPS nut
Clamp
Figure 247 The cord lock assembly

(removed from AC switch plate for
clarity).
3. Plug the AC power cord into the AC connector.
404
User Guide 91090000
4. Slide the clamp over the AC power cord and reinstall the screws and
kep nuts to secure the clamp to the cord.
Figure 248 Assembled cord

lock with power cord (removed
from AC switch plate for clarity).
5. Tighten the screws to secure the mounting bracket to the chassis and
lock the power cord in place.
Screws
Figure 249 Secure the cord lock assembly to the chassis.
6. If you are using redundant power supply modules, repeat Steps 1

through 5 to install a cord lock on the second AC power cord.
7. Plug the supply end of each power cord into a separate AC branch
circuit.
Note: If the AC supply outlet does not have a locking connector, make
sure you connect a permanent grounding wire to the power
supply bay (see Install the Grounding Wire).
405
Install the Grounding Wire

If the supply end of the power cord cannot be locked to prevent an
accidental disconnect, install a permanent grounding wire to connect the
library chassis to earth ground. A 10 foot (3 meter), 14 gauge coated
grounding wire, 10-32 screw, and star washer are supplied with the library.
1. Using the star washer and the 10-32 grounding screw, connect the
grounding wire to the PEM nut below one of the AC power cord
connectors.
Grounding wire
connection
Figure 250 Connect the grounding wire.
2. Connect the free end of the wire to earth ground.
406
User Guide 91090000
Calibrating the Touch Screen

If the touch points on the library’s touch screen do not properly align with
the user interface graphics, perform the following procedure to recalibrate
the position of the touch points.
Notes: This procedure is not necessary or helpful unless
recommended by SpectraGuard Support.
You must perform this procedure while standing in front of
the touch screen. The utility is not available when accessing
the library through the BlueScale web interface.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Tools to display the
Maintenance Tools screen (Figure 234 on page 390).
3. Select Utilities. The Utilities screen displays.
4. Select Calibrate Touch Screen.
5. Select Run Utility. The touch screen displays a series of calibration target
points.
6. Touch each point as it displays with either your finger or a stylus to
recalibrate the touch points on the screen.
Note: Touch each point at a straight-on angle as close to the center of
the target as possible.
7. When the calibration routine is complete, the Utilities screen
redisplays.
407
MAINTAINING DRIVES
This section provides instruction for routine drive maintenance
procedures.

Cleaning a Tape Drive this page
Updating Drive Firmware page 414
Adding or Replacing a Drive page 419
Cleaning a Tape Drive

Under normal operating conditions, the tape drives in the library do not
require regular cleaning. The tape drives contain an automatic cleaning
mechanism that allows them to clean themselves as necessary. However, a
tape drive may occasionally require additional cleaning with a cleaning
cartridge. If you have Auto Drive Clean enabled and the tape drive is in a
partition with an associated cleaning partition, these cleanings are
performed automatically. See Configuring a Cleaning Partition on page 236
for information about configuring a cleaning partition.
If you are experiencing read/write errors with one of the tape drives in the
library and you suspect that it may require cleaning, check the Cleaning
Status on the Drive Details screen (see Figure 252 on page 409). Your
backup software may also notify you that cleaning is required.
Determine Whether Cleaning is Required

Clean the library’s tape drives when any of the following occurs:
The drive indicates that it needs cleaning (see Chapter 14 – Drive
Troubleshooting) by sending a message to the backup software.
The SCD information on the Drive Details screen for an LTO drive
displays a C.
The Cleaning Status on the Drive Details screen indicates that the drive
requires cleaning (see Figure 252 on page 409).
Note: In order for the library to monitor drive status, the drive must be
configured in a partition.
408
User Guide 91090000
Maintaining Drives
Use the following steps to use the Drives screen to determine whether a
drive requires cleaning.
2. Select Configuration > Drives. The Drives screen displays.
3. Select Detail next to the drive you want to check. The Drive Details
screen displays.
If the Cleaning Status displays Drive Cleaning Required, clean the tape
drive as described in the following sections.
Figure 252 The Drive Details screen, cleaning required.
409
How to Proceed
The method you use to clean the drive depends on the following factors:
If... Then...
Auto Drive Clean is enabled and a cleaning The library automatically cleans the drives,
partition is associated with the data partition, including any Global Spares, as needed. See
Chapter 9 – Using Partitions for information
about configuring a cleaning partition and
associating it with one or more data partitions.
You can also clean the drive manually using a
cleaning cartridge in the cleaning partition (see
Cleaning Partition Present on page 413).
A cleaning partition is not associated with the Spectra Logic recommends using your backup
data partition, software to perform all drive cleaning operations.
Refer to your backup software user manual or
vendor for instructions on how to set up
scheduled automatic cleanings.
You may choose to leave the cleaning cartridge in
the library, particularly if you can configure your
backup software to perform regular automated
cleanings.
CAUTION! Make sure that the cleaning
cartridge has a bar-code label. Your software
must be able to identify the cleaning cartridge
and use it only for cleaning tape drives. Any
attempts to use a cleaning cartridge for data
storage will cause software failures.
A cleaning partition is not associated with the Import a cleaning cartridge into the partition and
data partition and your software package does clean the drive manually as described No
not have features that allow for scheduled drive Cleaning Partition Present on page 411.
cleanings, You may choose to leave the cleaning cartridge in
the library so that it is available whenever you
need it.
CAUTION! Make sure that the cleaning
cartridge has a bar-code label. Your software
must be able to identify the cleaning cartridge
and use it only for cleaning tape drives. Any
attempts to use a cleaning cartridge for data
storage will cause software failures.
410
User Guide 91090000
Maintaining Drives
Required Tools and Materials

You must have a certified cleaning cartridge for the type of drive(s) to be
cleaned. Cleaning cartridges can be purchased from Spectra Logic. If the
cartridge has a bar-code label, be sure to note the code, including any
leading zeros. This information will help you locate the cleaning cartridge
after it is loaded into the library.
Use only Spectra Certified cleaning cartridges to clean your tape drives. For
Caution information on ordering these cartridges, see Media and Accessories on page 442.
Carefully follow all instructions and recommendations provided with the cleaning
cartridge. Do not rewind and reuse the material in a cleaning cartridge. Reusing the
material may redistribute contaminants previously removed from the tape path. If
all of the cleaning material has been used, discard the cartridge and use a new
cleaning cartridge.
Continuing Backups
A drive is unavailable for backups while it is being cleaned. It is safe to
continue backups on the library’s other drives while cleaning a drive.
However, if you are running many backups with frequent loads and
unloads, Spectra Logic recommends waiting until backups are completed
before cleaning a drive to avoid delays in move requests coming from
software.
Manually Cleaning a Tape Drive

The process for loading a cleaning cartridge into the tape drive depends on
whether or not a cleaning partition is associated with the data partition
containing the drive you need to clean.
No Cleaning Partition Present

Before you can begin the cleaning process, a cleaning cartridge must be
available in the partition containing the drive to be cleaned. If you do not
permanently store a cleaning cartridge in the storage pool for each
partition, you must import one when drive cleaning is required. You need
a TeraPack magazine containing a cleaning cartridge and either of the
following:
A TeraPack magazine with one or more empty slots in the storage pool
of the partition with the drive that needs cleaning.
An empty chamber in either the entry/exit pool or the storage pool of
the partition with the drive that needs cleaning.
411
Use the following steps to clean the tape drive.

Notes: If you did not configure an entry/exit pool for the partition,
you must import the magazine into the storage pool.
You must be logged in as a superuser in order to import a
magazine into the storage pool.
2. If you keep a cleaning cartridge stored in the storage pool for the
partition, use its bar-code label information to determine its location, as
described in Locate the Desired Media on page 150.
3. If necessary, import the TeraPack magazine with the cleaning cartridge
into either the entry/exit pool or the storage pool for the partition
containing the drive that needs cleaning, as described in Importing
Media into the Entry/Exit Pool or a Cleaning Partition on page 128.
When the TAP door opens, insert the magazine containing the cleaning
cartridge, making sure that it is correctly oriented (see Figure 67 on
page 131).
Note: If an empty chamber is not available in either the entry/exit pool
or the storage pool, exchange the magazine containing the
cleaning cartridge for a magazine in one of those pools (see
Exchanging Media on page 143). When the cleaning is complete,
you can exchange the magazines again.
4. Move the cleaning cartridge from the magazine to the drive needing
cleaning, as described in Move the Media on page 152.
The tape drive automatically performs the cleaning, which takes
approximately one minute, and ejects the cartridge when finished.
5. Move the cleaning cartridge from the tape drive back to the magazine
from which it came.
6. Check the Drive Information screen to confirm that the cleaning was
successful.
If the cleaning cartridge was expended before the cleaning started, the
tape drive automatically ejects the cartridge and does not perform the
cleaning. The Drive Details screen will still indicate that the drive needs
cleaning. If a drive still needs cleaning, perform the following steps:
a. Export the expended cleaning cartridge.
b. Import a new cleaning cartridge.
c. Repeat Step 3 through Step 6 to clean the tape drive.
7. If you have additional drives to clean, repeat Step 3 through Step 6 for
each drive.
8. If you do not store the cleaning cartridge in the library, export the
magazine containing it, as described in Exporting or Exchanging Media
on page 140.
412
User Guide 91090000
Maintaining Drives
9. Make sure you track the number of times the cleaning cartridge has
been used (see Tracking Cleaning Cartridge Use on page 414.
Note: If you used an MLM-enabled LTO cleaning cartridge, the
cartridge usage is tracked in the MLM database.
Cleaning Partition Present

Before you can use the Auto Drive Clean to manually clean a drive, a
cleaning partition must be associated with the data partition containing the
drive and a cleaning cartridge must be available in the cleaning partition.
See Configuring a Cleaning Partition on page 236 for information about
configuring a cleaning partition.
2. If necessary, import a magazine containing one or more cleaning
cartridges into the cleaning partition (see Importing Media into the
Entry/Exit Pool or a Cleaning Partition on page 128).
3. Select Configuration > Drives. The Drives screen displays.
4. Select Clean next to the drive that needs cleaning. The library retrieves a
cleaning cartridge from the cleaning partition and inserts it into the
drive. The Drive Cleaning Progress screen displays while the cleaning
is in progress.
5. When the cleaning is complete, the library returns the cleaning
cartridge to the cleaning partition and displays a status message.
6. If the cleaning cartridge is MLM-enabled, the cartridge health and
Cleans Remaining are updated in the MLM database.
413
Tracking Cleaning Cartridge Use

Cleaning cartridges have a limited number of uses. Spectra Logic
recommends marking the cleaning cartridge label after each use so that
you know when it has reached the end of its life cycle.
If you enabled Media Lifecycle Management (MLM) and use MLM-enabled
cleaning cartridges, the library tracks the number of cleaning remaining on
the cartridge and notifies you when a cleaning cartridge is nearing the end
of its useful life. See Chapter 7 – Media Lifecycle Management for detailed
information about using MLM-enabled cleaning cartridges.
To purchase MLM-enabled Spectra Certified cleaning cartridges, contact
your sales representative or visit the Spectra Logic web site at
www.spectralogic.com/shop.
Updating Drive Firmware

Whenever you update your library firmware, confirm that your drives are
using the correct firmware version. Firmware updates are also occasionally
required to resolve tape drive issues. You should schedule a drive
firmware upgrade at your earliest convenience.

Checking the Drive Firmware Version page 415
Update the Drive Firmware page 416
Note: If you cannot use either of the methods in this section, contact
SpectraGuard Support for assistance (see Contacting Spectra
Logic on page 5).
Important Always ensure that you have the most current firmware for your tape drives. Check
the Tape Drive Firmware & Drivers page on the Spectra Logic web site for the latest
supported firmware, as well as important notifications.
The latest LTO-4 drive firmware is required for the BlueScale MLM, DLM, and
encryption capabilities to work in the library.
Important Always download updated tape drive firmware from the Spectra Logic web site to
ensure that the latest firmware posted by drive manufacturer has been qualified by
Spectra Logic. Go to the Tape Drive Firmware & Drivers page on the Spectra Logic
web site for information.
Important After the drive firmware update is complete, you may need to reset the servers
accessing the drives.
Important Some operating environments require you to install device drivers before the
application software can correctly communicate with the drives. When you update
the drive firmware, you may also need to update the device driver for the drive.
414
User Guide 91090000
Maintaining Drives
Before You Begin

The easiest way to upgrade your LTO tape drive firmware is with the IBM
Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT), so you will want to use this method
whenever possible.
If you plan to use the IBM Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) to update LTO
tape drive firmware, download and install ITDT on a computer that is
on the same network as the tape drives you need to update. After ITDT
is installed, launch the program so that it creates the Input and Output
folder it uses.
ITDT and its related documentation can be downloaded directly from
IBM’s web site at www.ibm.com. Once you are on IBM’s web site,
search for Tape Diagnostic Tool to locate and download the software
and the user guide.
Using the BlueScale interface, select Configuration > Drives to view the
Drives screen. This screen shows the current firmware version for each
drive in the library.
Check the Tape Drive Firmware and Drivers page on Spectra Logic web
site for the currently recommended firmware version.
If drive firmware update is necessary, request the latest firmware
version from Spectra Logic.
If you cannot use ITDT to update the drive firmware, request a
firmware tape from Spectra Logic.
Checking the Drive Firmware Version

The Drive Details screen provides information about the current status of
each drive in the library, including the firmware version the drive is using.
415
2. Select Configuration > Drives > Details. The Drive Details screen
displays.
Update the Drive Firmware

Attempting to update the firmware while the library is busy or with tapes in the
Caution tape drives may result in permanent damage to the drive.
Important Confirm that all of the following conditions are met before beginning the firmware
upgrade process:
All backup processes have completed
All backup software daemons are stopped
All drives are empty
Important Attempting to update the firmware while the library is busy or with tapes in the
tape drives may result in the upgrade failing and/or failed backup jobs. If you
previously attempted to upgrade drive’s firmware with media loaded, unload the
tapes, and retry the operation.
Using ITDT for LTO Drives

1. Copy the firmware file from Spectra Logic to the ITDT Input folder on
the computer where ITDT is installed.
2. Use ITDT to update the drive firmware.
Read the ITDT Readme file for help and assistance in using and setting
up the program.
3. Reset the updated drives as described in Resetting a Drive on page 360
to restore their configuration settings.
416
User Guide 91090000
Maintaining Drives
Using a Firmware Tape
Important If you did not configure an entry/exit pool for the partition containing the drive you
want to update, you will not be able to use a firmware tape. The firmware tape
must be imported into the entry/exit pool. See Configure the Drives and Chambers
for the Partition on page 215 for information about configuring and entry/exit pool.

2. Insert the firmware update tape into a magazine. Pay attention to which
slot you use (slots are numbered from front to back, as viewed from the
TAP).
3. Import the magazine containing the firmware update tape into the
library’s Entry/Exit pool.
4. Select Maintenance > Tools > Utilities > Show Advanced. The
Advanced Utilities Confirmation screen displays.
utilities.
6. Scroll through the list of advanced utilities and select Update Drive
Firmware. The screen refreshes to show the details for the utility.
Figure 255 The Update Drive Firmware utility.
7. Use the Select drive or partition to upgrade drop-down list to select the
drive(s) that you want to upgrade.
Upgrade all of the drives in a partition.
Upgrade a single drive based on its BlueScale identifier.
library. For example: DBA2/DRV4 refers to the upper right drive
in DBA2. Refer Drive Identifiers on page 52 for information
about identifiers.
417
8. Use the Select EE slot of the firmware tape drop-down list to select the
slot in the magazine where the firmware update tape is located.
9. Select Run Utility to start the update process.
The library retrieves the firmware tape and inserts it in the tape drive.
When the drive completes the update, it ejects the tape. The library then
either returns the tape to the Entry/Exit pool or inserts it in the next
drive to be updated.
A progress screen appears for the duration of the update, which may
take several minutes. When completed, a Utility Results screen
displays, showing that the update completed successfully.
canceled.
10. Export the firmware update tape from the library and store it for future
use. You can use the tape to up-level a replacement drive, if it is at a
lower firmware level.
Important If you have a tape drive with a more current firmware version than what is on the
firmware tape DO NOT use the tape to down-level the firmware on the tape drive
unless specifically instructed to do so by SpectraGuard Support.
418
User Guide 91090000
Maintaining Drives
Adding or Replacing a Drive
Important Only use drives obtained from Spectra Logic in the library. When replacing a drive,
the new drive must be the same technology and generation as the one you replace.
If the drive to be replaced is the only drive in the partition, the existing partition
will be deleted.
Adding Drives to the Library

If your library has unused drive bays, you can purchase additional drives
and add them to the library.
Figure 256 The Drives screen (Add a drive).
To add the new drive, follow the instructions that accompany the drive to
install it in the library. If the drive has a Fibre Channel interface, connect it
to arbitrated loop or fabric where the hosts reside.
Note: The instructions for installing a drive are also available on the
Spectra Logic web site at www.spectralogic.com/documents.
After you add the drive to the library, you must create or modify a
partition to assign it to the partition or configure it as a Global Spare drive
before you can use it. See Chapter 9 – Using Partitions for information
about creating and modifying partitions.
419
Replacing a Drive
To replace a drive that has failed, follow the instructions that accompany
the drive to install it in the library. If the drive has a Fibre Channel
interface, connect it to arbitrated loop or fabric where the hosts reside.
Figure 257 The Drives screen (Replace a drive).
Important Do not select Remove. This option permanently removes the drive from the
partition. When the replacement drive is installed, it will not be assigned to the
partition from which the malfunctioning drive was removed.
If you select Remove and the selected drive is the only drive in the partition, the
partition will be deleted.
After you replace the drive, do the following to resume operation:

If you used the Global Spare option to temporarily replace the
malfunctioning drive, you can now reclaim the Global Spare drive so
that it is again available for use (see Reclaiming the Global Spare Tape
Drive on page 110). The library automatically switches all incoming
communications to the new drive.
If you did not use the Global Spare option, use your backup software to
restart any backup processes that had been running to the replaced
drive. This restart ensures that the software recognizes the drive as
working and available.
420
User Guide 91090000
Appendix A
Best Practices
This chapter reviews best practices for operating the library and working
with media.

Backing Up the Spectra Library Metadata this page
Working with Tape Media page 425
Working with RXT Media page 433
Operating in Gigabit Ethernet Environments page 439
BACKING UP THE SPECTRA LIBRARY METADATA

To ensure the availability of your library and encrypted data, protect
library metadata by following the procedures described in this section.
Library metadata includes library configuration data, the MLM database,
and all encryption-key related data.
Having reliable backups of the library metadata is very important in the
case of disaster recovery and other situations where you need to restore the
library.
Losing metadata can have catastrophic effects—as can losing keys in any
Caution encryption key management system, especially when related to encrypted data. If
you lose all copies of all metadata:
Your encrypted data is lost—you will be unable to decrypt encrypted data
without the encryption keys.
You will need to completely reconfigure your library.
You will lose stored data about your media that will be time-consuming to
recover.
421
Appendix A — Best Practices
Back Up the Library Metadata

Use the following methods to create backup copies of all your library’s
metadata.
Automatically Email the Auto Save Library Configuration File The Auto Save
Configuration feature automatically saves the library configuration and
MLM database to a time-stamped zip file on the LCM compact flash. See
Use the Auto Save Configuration Feature on page 286 for information
about using this method to back up the library configuration and MLM
database.
Note: The Auto Save Configuration feature does not automatically
create a backup when you make other configuration changes to
the library.
Configure the Auto Save Configuration feature so that the library
automatically sends an email with the current auto-save configuration file
to a pre-configured mail recipient once a week and whenever you create or
modify a library partition. See Enabling Email for the Automatic
Configuration Save Feature on page 282 for instructions.
Back Up the MLM Database Regularly Use the Save MLM Database
advanced utility to export the MLM database to a USB drive. You can also
email the exported database to a pre-configured mail recipient. See
Backing Up the MLM Database on page 187 for instructions.
Note: The Auto Configuration Save operation performed by the library
also backs up the MLM database.
Back Up the Library Configuration Regularly If you make a configuration
change to the library, you can use the Save Library Configuration utility to
back up the updated library configuration. This is especially important
when you make configuration changes that do not result in an auto-save
configuration file. You can save the updated library configuration data to a
USB drive or email the updated library configuration data to a
preconfigured mail recipient. See Back Up the Library Configuration
Manually on page 286 for instructions.
The partition wizard prompts you to save the library configuration
whenever you create or modify a partition. You can choose to save the
updated library configuration data to a USB drive or email it to a pre-
configured mail recipient. See Chapter 9 – Using Partitions beginning on
page 205 for detailed information about creating and modifying partitions.
422
User Guide 91090000
Backing Up the Spectra Library Metadata
Back Up All BlueScale Encryption Keys Use the BlueScale Export Key option
to export encryption keys to a USB drive as soon as you create them. The
exported keys are encrypted and password protected. See Exporting and
Protecting Keys on page 320 for instructions.

Although emailing encryption keys is supported by the library, doing so presents
security issues, including the following:
The following table shows the file names and locations of the data saved
during each type of backup operation.
This backup file... Contains...
Auto-save The library configuration and MLM database in a time-stamped zip file stored
configuration on the LCM compact flash and sent as an email attachment. The zip file is
named <date-time>cfg.zip, where <date-time> is the time stamp for
when the zip file was created.
MLM database The current MLM database in a file named cminfo_<date-time>.zdt or
cminfo_<date-time>.dat, where <date-time> is the time stamp for
when the backup file was created. The file has a .zdt extension if you zipped
the file when you created it or a .dat extension if you did not choose to zip the
file.
If the backup file was saved to a USB drive, it is located in a folder called
\SavedMLMDB.
Library Multiple configuration files with the format cnnnnnn.cfg, where n is a
configuration number between 0 and 9. If the backup files were saved to a USB drive, they are
located in a folder called SavedConfigs\<date-time>, where
<date-time> is the time stamp for when the backup was created. If the library
configuration was sent as an email attachment, the files will be in a file named
<date-time>cfg.zip, where <date-time> is the time stamp for when the
zip file was created.
Exported A key file named name.bsk or name.bss, where name is the moniker you
encryption keys assigned to the key when you created it. The file is stored on the USB drive or
attached to an email.
423
Verify and Protect the Metadata Backup

To ensure that your metadata is protected and available when you need it:
1. As soon as you create and export the backup files, check the exported
data to make sure the correct files are present and accessible.
Plug the USB drive into a computer or laptop.
If you emailed the metadata (the data is sent as an attachment), save
the data to a USB drive, and then check the data in the email
attachment and the data on the USB drive.
Examples
The following figures show examples of the files you will see when you
check your USB drive or the email attachment.
Encryption key data—T380_SF2.bsk
Note: The screen shown in Figure 258 also includes the SavedMLMDB
and SavedConfigs folders.
Figure 258 Encryption key data file.
Saved MLM data in the folder \SavedMLMDB. In this example the file
has a .zdt extension. The file will have a .dat extension if you did
not choose to zip the file when you created it.
Figure 259 Zipped MLM database file.
424
User Guide 91090000
Working with Tape Media
Saved configuration data with the CFG extension located in the

\SavedConfigs\<date-time> folder, where <date-time> in this
example is 2008-08-20 11_24_06.
Figure 260 Saved configuration data files.
2. Store at least one USB drive containing the backup files off-site. After
you have several weeks of backups stored off-site, rotate back through
them.
3. When you run-through disaster recovery exercises, restore the library
using the backup files from both your USB drives and your saved email
attachments. See Restoring the Library Configuration on page 111 for
instructions.
WORKING WITH TAPE MEDIA

Note: Refer to Media Lifecycle Management Best Practices on page 161
for additional guidance when using Spectra Certified Media
with MLM support.
The following sections describe best practices for using tape media and for
managing your media inventory. All library user groups have privileges
that allow them to use the library’s user interface to perform the media
handling and management operations described in this chapter. Because
handling media requires you to physically interact with the library, much
of the information in this chapter is not applicable when you are accessing
the library using a web browser.
Important Do not attempt to install tape drives purchased from other vendors in the library.
The tape drives used in the library are specifically configured for use in the library
and should only be purchased from Spectra Logic.
425
Use Only Spectra Certified Media

To ensure the best possible performance, use Spectra Certified Media.
Check the Spectra Logic web site for the most up-to-date media
availability. Do not use any media that has not been approved by Spectra
Logic for use in the library.
Labeling Tape Media

If you are not using Spectra Certified media, be sure to label the media
with the appropriate bar-code labels. Follow the guidelines in the
following table.
Note: Although the information in this table refers to LTO tape media
similar guidelines apply to the other tape media types supported
by the library.
Use this label... For this cartridge...

LTO-4 bar-code label LTO-4 (Ultrium 4) Data Cartridge
LTO Cleaning bar-code labela LTO Cleaning Cartridge
a. This label must begin with CLN.
Handling Tape Media

Note: Although the information in this section refers to LTO tape
media, many of the guidelines are also applicable to the other
tape media types supported by the library.
Incorrect handling or an incorrect environment can damage the LTO tape
cartridge or its magnetic tape. To avoid damage to your tape cartridges and
to ensure the continued high reliability of your drive, use the following
guidelines:
Do not drop the cartridge. If the cartridge drops, slide the cartridge
door back and ensure that the leader pin is properly seated in the pin-
retaining spring clips. Inspect the rear of the cartridge (the part that you
load first into the tape load compartment) and ensure that there are no
gaps in the seam of the cartridge case.
Open only the cartridge door. Do not open any other part of the
cartridge case. The upper and lower parts of the case are held together
with screws; separating them destroys the usefulness of the cartridge.
426
User Guide 91090000
Do not handle tape that is outside the cartridge. Handling the tape can
damage the tape’s surface or edges, which may interfere with read or
write reliability. Pulling on tape that is outside the cartridge can
damage the tape and the brake mechanism in the cartridge.
Before you use a cartridge, let it acclimate for at least 24 hours to the
normal operating environment.
Ensure that all surfaces of a cartridge are dry before inserting it into a
magazine.
Do not stack more than six cartridges.
Do not expose the tape cartridge to moisture or direct sunlight.
Do not degauss a tape cartridge that you intend to reuse. Degaussing
makes the tape unusable.
Do not expose recorded or blank tape cartridges to stray magnetic
fields (such as terminals, motors, video equipment, X-ray equipment,
or high-current cables or power supplies). Such exposure can cause the
loss of recorded data or make the blank cartridge unusable.
Maintain the environmental conditions specified in Tape Media
Specifications on page 466.
Storing Tape Media

While in use, cartridges are stored in magazines inside the library. When
the cartridges are outside the library, Spectra Logic recommends storing
them in TeraPacks.
Figure 261 TeraPack with bar-code labeled cartridges and plastic dust cover.
Storing and handling cartridges in TeraPacks helps to eliminate errors

resulting from mishandling individual cartridges, which is the leading
cause of cartridge damage. A clear plastic dust cover snaps onto the
TeraPack to protect the cartridges.
427
Whenever you remove cartridges from your library, be sure to store them
properly to maximize archival life and ensure data integrity. Follow these
guidelines for proper cartridge storage:
Store cartridges in a suitable environment (see Tape Media
Specifications on page 466).
Keep the storage location as free of airborne particulates as possible. To
eliminate obvious sources of particulates, do not permit anyone to
smoke, eat, or drink near the storage area, and do not store cartridges
near a copier or printer that may emit toner and paper dust.
Store cartridges with the write-protect switch in the protected position.
Figure 262 LTO cartridge write-protect switch.
Store cartridges as soon as possible after you remove them from the
library. Immediate storage helps avoid many of the conditions that can
damage tapes, such as temperature and humidity fluctuations,
particulate contamination, and excessive handling.
If you plan to ship a TeraPack magazine, make sure that you have a
proper shipping container and that you use adequate packing material.
The TeraPack carrying cases available from Spectra Logic are designed
for safely transporting TeraPack magazines off site and are compatible
with Iron Mountain.
428
User Guide 91090000
Using Tape Media in the Library

This section describes the best practices for using tape media in the library.
Use only approved media in the library. For a list of approved media,
see Media and Media Accessories on page 441.
Make sure that the entry/exit pool contains one or more empty
TeraPack magazines. This is particularly important when your backup
software ejects tape cartridges from a partition.
If the entry/exit pool does not have any empty slots available for the
ejected media, then the backup software must wait until empty slots
become available. The simplest way to avoid this delay is to import one
or more empty TeraPack magazines after you export media from the
library.
Alternatively, always make sure that you import full TeraPack
magazines into the library, then use your backup software to move
(import) all of the new media into the storage pool for the partition.
After all of the media is moved to the storage pool, you will end up
with one or more empty magazines in the entry/exit pool.
Make the entry/exit pool large enough to accommodate all media
typically imported or exported during a single operation. For example,
if you run a nightly backup that uses 48 tapes which are then exported
each morning, create an entry/exit pool of 50 slots (five chambers).
After your library has been in use for a period of time, and at least one
set of media has completed a round trip (exported from the library,
stored off site, then re-imported), the following rule of thumb applies: if
you remove a TeraPack magazine from the entry/exit pool, replace it
with either an empty magazine to accommodate future eject operations
or a full magazine whose cartridges are then imported into the storage
pool using your backup software.
During an import or export operation, do not leave the library
unattended for more than a few minutes. If you do, the import or
export operation times out so that the library can continue automated
backup tasks. To continue, restart the operation when you are ready.
Enable Auto Drive Clean and configure a cleaning partition to clean
drives whenever required to help ensure optimal performance. If you
do not use the Auto Drive Clean feature, periodically check the Drives
screen to determine whether the drives require cleaning (see Cleaning a
Tape Drive on page 408).
Confirm the quality of your media and verify data integrity by
occasionally running restores on alternate drives.
Confirm the quality of both media and drives by running periodic
disaster recovery drills. These drills test the overall ability to recover all
of your data using your backups.
429
Tape Media Rotation

During normal backup operations, tapes are rotated into and out of the
library. This section provides a simple example of the library’s media life
cycle functionality to manage tape rotation. Using the backup plan similar
to the one described in the following example for a period of time
establishes a media rotation schedule for the library. The example assumes
the following:
The library has a total of 17 licensed chambers.
2 chambers are assigned to the entry/exit pool (20 slots, or
2 TeraPack magazines).
15 chambers are assigned to the storage pool (150 slots, or 15
TeraPack magazines).
The library contains 15 full TeraPack magazines and two empty
TeraPack magazines.
Two magazines containing 20 cartridges worth of backup data are sent
off site every Friday.
After the data has aged two weeks, the media is returned to the library
and re-used.
The site adheres to the following best practices:
Whenever a TeraPack magazine is exported, another magazine
(either full or empty) is imported.
The library has enough empty TeraPack magazines to fill the entry/
exit pool.
This example shows that, by Week 3, the backup plan results in a full
media rotation in which the operator has done the following:
1. Removed and stored two full TeraPack magazines of media. Full
magazines were exported from the entry/exit pool and removed
through the TAP, resulting in an empty entry/exit pool.
2. Imported two full TeraPack magazines into the entry/exit pool through
the TAP and then used the backup software to move the media in the
entry/exit pool into the storage pool.
Moving the media to the storage pool leaves two empty magazines in
the entry/exit pools, ready to accept media as the backup software
identifies media as ready to be ejected from the library.
The following sections describe and illustrate the rotation process in more
detail.
430
User Guide 91090000
Initial Installation of Media

The library is configured with a single partition and has a total of
17 licensed chambers assigned to either the entry/exit pool or storage pool.
When the library is initially installed, chambers are filled with TeraPack
magazines as described in the following illustration.
Library: Data center:

Entry/exit pool: 2 chambers 4 empty TeraPack
contain empty TeraPack magazines available.
magazines.
Storage pool: 15 chambers
contain full TeraPack
magazines.
End of Week 1
The backup software ejects cartridges from the storage pool. The library
moves the cartridges to empty magazine slots in the entry/exit pool,
making them ready to be removed from the library and stored off site.
Operator tasks: Results of operator tasks:

Export 2 full Off-site storage:
TeraPack magazines 2 full TeraPack magazines.
from the entry/exit
pool. Entry/Exit pool:
Import 2 empty 2 chambers, each containing an
TeraPack magazines empty TeraPack magazine.
into the entry/exit
pool. Storage pool:
13 chambers
contain full
TeraPack
magazines.
2 chambers contain empty TeraPack
magazines.
Data Center:
2 empty TeraPack magazines.
431
End of Week 2
making them ready to be removed from the library and stored off site.

Export the 2 full Off-site storage:
TeraPack magazines
4 full TeraPack
from the entry/exit pool.
magazines
Import 2 empty
TeraPack magazines
Entry/Exit pool:
into the entry/exit pool.
2 chambers, each containing an
empty TeraPack magazine.
Storage pool:
11 chambers
contain full
magazines
4 chambers
contain empty
TeraPack magazines.
Data Center: No reserved media or
magazines.
432
User Guide 91090000
Working with RXT Media
End of Week 3
making them ready to be removed from the library and stored off site. The
two full magazines stored off site in Week 1 are ready for re-use. After
importing the full magazines into the entry/exit pool, the backup software
is used to move the cartridges to the storage pool, leaving two empty
magazines in the entry/exit pool.

Export the 2 full Off-site storage:
TeraPack magazines 4 full TeraPack
from the entry/exit magazines
pool.
Import 2 full Entry/Exit pool:
TeraPack magazines 2 chambers, each containing an
into the entry/exit empty TeraPack magazine.
pool.
Use backup software Storage pool:
to move cartridges to 11 chambers
the storage pool. contain full
magazines
4 chambers
contain empty
magazines
Data Center: No reserved media or
magazines.
WORKING WITH RXT MEDIA

Important RXT drives and RXT media are supported as legacy devices only. They are no longer
This section describes best practices for using RXT media and managing
your media inventory. Before beginning, read:
RAID Overview, below
Optimizing Performance on page 435
Handling RXT Media on page 437
Using RXT Media in the Library on page 436
433
RAID Overview
RAID (Redundant Array of Independent Disks) is a method of combining
several hard disk drives into one logical virtual disk (two or more disks
grouped together to appear as a single device to the host system) for the
purpose of sharing or replicating data.
RAID technology was developed to address the fault-tolerance and
performance limitations of conventional disk storage. Depending on how
data is written to the disk array (typically referred to as the RAID level),
RAID increases data integrity, fault-tolerance, throughput, or capacity, as
compared with single drives. RAID is not a replacement for a good backup
system and policy. Instead, it should be seen as added insurance against
data loss and business disruption.
In the case of RXT media packs, the RAID disks appear as a single, large
capacity LTO cartridge to the backup software running on the host system.
RXT media packs arrive preconfigured to the RAID level specified when
they were ordered.
RXT media is available in four RAID configurations, each one providing
different levels of performance and protection. Choose a RAID level based
on your risk tolerance as well as your capacity and performance needs.
RAID Level Description

RAID 0 (zero) Data is split evenly across two or more disks with no parity information for
(Disk Striping) redundancy. RAID 0 maximizes read/write performance and takes full
advantage of available capacity, but provides no redundancy.
Because RAID 0 does not provide increased data integrity or fault-tolerance it is
best suited for non-critical data. RAID 0 level is not recommended for high
data-availability needs. If a disk fails, your data is unrecoverable.
RAID 1 Duplicate copies of data are written to multiple disks to ensure continuous
(Disk Mirroring) availability. RAID 1 provides moderate performance and full redundancy.
Duplicate copies of data are simultaneously written to two separate disks. A
single drive failure causes degraded performance, but the data remains
accessible through the mirrored drive.When the failed disk is replaced, data
can be restored from the surviving disk. When two or more drives fail, a single
uncorrectable media error occurring on the mirrored drive could result in data
loss.
Because all data is duplicated, RAID 1 requires at least twice the storage
capacity for a given amount of data. For example, 1 TB of raw disk capacity
provides 500 GB of usable capacity in a RAID 1 configuration.
434
User Guide 91090000
RAID Level Description

RAID 1+0 A combination of RAID 1 and RAID 0, RAID 10 provides increased
(RAID 10) performance over RAID 1. Data is mirrored on two separate sets of striped
disks. Although RAID 10 offers the same protection as RAID 5, it requires
significantly more disk space for the same amount of data storage.
With either RAID 1 or RAID 10, a single drive failure causes degraded
performance, but the data remains accessible through the mirrored drive.
When two or more drives fail, a single uncorrectable media error occurring on
the mirrored drive could result in data loss.
RAID 5 Data and error correction information—parity—is evenly distributed (striped)
(Disk Striping with across multiple drives. If one drive fails, the parity information from the
Distributed Parity) remaining disks can be used to rebuild the data. RAID 5 provides good
performance with a reasonable amount of data protection. The parity data used
for redundancy consumes approximately 20% of the total disk capacity.
Optimizing Performance
The following sections describe factors that affect the performance from
RXT media and drives.
RAID and Transfer Rates

RXT media is designed to achieve native transfer rates of up to 110MB/sec
when configured as RAID 0 in an optimal environment (that is, with an
optimal data source and optimal performance from the server connected to
the RXT drive). Tests have shown that speeds of 75 MB/sec are realistic in
many environments.
Due to different read and write processes that must occur for RAID 1,
RAID 5, and RAID 1+0, the transfer rates for these configurations vary. A
reasonable expectation for these RAID levels is 50 MB/sec; make sure that
you are achieving at least this level of throughput no matter what RAID
type you are using.
Block Sizes
RXT drives cannot be directly configured to alter performance. All
performance tuning must be done through your operating system and
backup software. To maximize performance with RXT, Spectra Logic
recommends using a 256KB block size (or larger) in your backup
application. Block sizes smaller than this may result in decreased
performance.
Notes: Block sizes larger than 256KB are not supported in Windows
operating systems with IBM drivers.
Always use block sizes that are divisible by four (4).
435
Consult the documentation for your backup software and operating

system for instructions on how to configure the block size setting and for
other performance tuning options.
Enable SCSI Disconnects

In most backup environments, SCSI disconnects are already enabled,
which optimizes backup performance. Make sure that SCSI disconnects are
enabled for the RXT drive, since an RXT drive has substantially slower
SCSI throughput if SCSI disconnects are disabled. Consult your HBA’s user
documentation for instructions on how to modify this option.
Using RXT Media in the Library
Write Protection
You can write-protect RXT media just as you would tape media. Write
protection prevents accidental overwriting of crucial data. Store the RXT
media with the write-protect switch set to the locked position (see
RXT Media Pack Management

If you have multiple RXT media packs, use the label on the top of the
media for simple pack management. You can track RAID level, type of
backup, and other information.
Automatic Ejects
Turn off the automatic eject feature of your backup software if you plan on
using the same RXT media pack for multiple backup operations.
Firmware Upgrades
Keep the firmware in the RXT drives updated with the latest firmware
version. You can download firmware packages from the Spectra Logic web
site. Refer to the Spectra RXT-150 User Guide for detailed information about
updating the drive firmware. A PDF of the user guide is available on the
Spectra Logic web site at www.spectralogic.com/documents.
436
User Guide 91090000
Handling RXT Media

This section describes the best practices for handling RXT media.
Do not touch the pogo pin interface (the green and gold board) on the
back of the RXT media packs.
Pogo pin interface
Figure 263 Location of the RXT media pack pogo pin interface.
Keep the RXT media and RXT drives as clean as possible. Use and store
them in a dry and clean environment. See RXT Drive and Media Pack
Specifications on page 471 for more detail.
Handle the RXT media packs carefully when transporting and storing
them. Do not drop the media packs or subject them to significant
vibration.
If you plan to ship an RXT media pack, make sure that you have a
proper shipping container and that you use adequate packing material.
The RXT Media Pack carrying cases available from Spectra Logic are
designed for safely transporting RXT media off site and are compatible
with Iron Mountain. For information about purchasing carrying cases,
see Media and Accessories on page 442.
Storing RXT Media

Spectra Logic recommends storing RXT media packs in the same type
of environment in which it is used (see Environmental Specifications on
page 474). This way, the RXT media packs are always ready for
immediate access.
For short-term storage, store RXT media packs lying flat in a clean, dry
place.
437
Store RXT media packs with the write-protect switch in the protected
position.
Bar-code label
Figure 264 Setting the RXT media pack write-protect switch.
To set the switch, use a small flat-head screwdriver to move the switch to
either the unlocked or locked position, as desired.
Icon Meaning Use

Unlocked Position the switch next to the Unlocked icon. Data can be
written to the pack.
Locked Position the switch next to the Locked icon. Data cannot be
written to the pack (that is, the pack is write-protected).
For short-term storage, install the pogo pad cover to protect the pogo
pin interface.
Pogo pad cover
Figure 265 The cover for the RXT media pack pogo pin interface.
For long-term storage, make sure that the RXT media pack is properly
packed in its original shipping materials before sending off site.
If RXT media packs have been kept in long-term storage outside of the
recommended environmental operating specifications, ensure that the
pack temperature comes within the suggested range before trying to
access your data. You should allow at least 24 hours for this to occur.
If you plan to store the RXT media packs for long periods of time, make
a plan to access the RXT media packs and their data at least once per
year to ensure continued data integrity. RXT media should be mounted
in an RXT drive and accessed at lease once every 12 months.
438
User Guide 91090000
Operating in Gigabit Ethernet Environments
OPERATING IN GIGABIT ETHERNET ENVIRONMENTS

iSCSI networks use Gigabit Ethernet protocols for managing the transfer of
data across the network. This section provides information about
configuring your network to provide optimal library performance.
Best Practices for IP SANs

IP SANs should be based on Gigabit Ethernet 1000BaseT network
topography. Since backups and storage networks create a good deal of
traffic, a dedicated subnet should be utilized. IP SANs should not be
sharing bandwidth with regular user LAN traffic.
Best Practices for iSCSI

The best performance with iSCSI is achieved by setting the iSCSI
parameters to the following state:
R2T = No
Immediate Data = Yes or No
Best performance is achieved by setting the following parameters to the
maximum values listed below:
First Burst Length = 128K
Maximum Burst Length = 256K
Maximum Receive Buffer Length = 64K
Sun Solaris iSCSI only: Maximum Receive Data Segment length = 64K
(or the block size used by the backup software, whichever is greater.)
Note: The Sun Solaris parameter for Maximum Receive Data Segment
length is not compatible with tape drives.
Supported Optical SFPs

Spectra Logic recommends using quad-rate SFPs with all E-QIPs.
Supported Copper SFPs

Copper RJ-45 SFPs are supported on the G3 E-QIP. Copper SFPs are
designed for use with Gigabit Ethernet connections only and are not for use
with Fibre Channel connections.
The minimum cable requirements when using the copper SFPs is CAT5e.
CAT6 cable is highly recommended for distances greater than 10 feet.
439
Notes
440
User Guide 91090000
Appendix B
Media & Upgrades
This appendix describes items that can be purchased for use with the
Spectra T200, T380, and T680 libraries. To purchase any of the items
described, visit Spectra Logic’s web site at: www.spectralogic.com/shop.
MEDIA AND MEDIA ACCESSORIES

Spectra Logic offers a variety of media and media accessories for the
library.
Spectra Certified Media

Spectra Logic certifies only the highest quality data cartridges received
directly from the manufacturer and provides a lifetime guarantee on all
Spectra Certified Media. Each order includes 10 LTO cartridges or 9 SDLT
cartridges, a TeraPack magazine to hold the media inside and outside the
library, and a fitted dust cover for use outside the library.
For your convenience, all Spectra Logic Certified Media is available
pre-labeled with sequential bar-code labels. Optional custom bar-code
sequences can be ordered, if desired. Using pre-labeled media ensures that
you will never have to deal with the problem of duplicate bar codes.
Spectra Logic’s bar-code labels carry the same lifetime guarantee that
protects each Spectra Certified Media cartridge.
Check the Spectra Logic web site at www.spectralogic.com for the most
up-to-date media availability.
441
Appendix B — Media & Upgrades
Media and Accessories

Spectra Logic offers the following media and accessories:
Certified Media pack—Each pack contains 1 TeraPack magazine with
dust cover and Spectra Certified Media (10 LTO cartridges or 9 SDLT
cartridges) with standard bar-code labels.
Certified Media pack with custom bar-code labels—Each pack
consists of 1 TeraPack magazine with a dust cover and Spectra Certified
Media (10 LTO cartridges or 9 SDLT cartridges) with custom bar-code
labels. You must order a minimum of four custom-labeled packs at a
time.
Cleaning cartridges—Spectra Certified cleaning cartridges for the tape
drives supported by the library are available in TeraPacks containing
either five or ten cartridges. The cleaning cartridges have “CLN” at the
beginning of the bar-code sequence on their labels.
Bar-code labels (in series of 300)—Spectra Logic offers high-contrast,
high-resolution labels for reliable operation. Labels are available either
with a standard bar-code numbering sequence or with a custom bar
code numbering sequence. Bar-code labels for cleaning cartridges are
also available. The bar-code labels for cleaning cartridges have “CLN”
at the beginning of the bar-code sequence.
TeraPack magazines—Empty 10-slot TeraPack magazines for LTO
tapes or empty 9-slot TeraPack magazines for SDLT tapes are available.
Each magazine includes a dust cover.
TeraPack and RXT Media Pack Carrying Cases – Carrying cases are
designed for safely carrying TeraPack magazines and RXT media packs
off site. Cases are compatible with Iron Mountain.
How To Order
To purchase Spectra Certified Media and media accessories, contact your
sales representative (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5) or use the
Spectra Logic online store at www.spectralogic.com/shop.
442
User Guide 91090000
Library Upgrades
LIBRARY UPGRADES
The library ships with the options and service contract you purchased
when you purchased the library. You can renew your service contract or
purchase more capacity or other options described in this section at a later
date.
Service Contract Extension

Every library purchase includes a BlueScale Software Support key that is
valid for the duration of the warranty period, or for the duration of any
uplifted or extended service contract you purchased with the library,
whichever is longer. A valid service contract is required to obtain support.
When the original warranty or service contract expires, a renewal contract
can be purchased to continue service. Go to Spectra Logic’s web site at:
www.spectralogic.com/warranty-service for information about the
warranty and service options for your library.
Firmware Upgrades
Firmware package upgrades are free of cost to Spectra T200, T380, and
T680 users who have a current service contract with SpectraGuard
Support. When a service contract is renewed, a new BlueScale Software
Support key is provided and must be entered into the library to allow
continued access to firmware upgrades. See Enabling Purchased Options
and Upgrades on page 270 for information.
into the System Configuration screen. See Enabling Purchased Options and
Upgrades on page 270 for additional information.
See Updating Library Firmware on page 388 for firmware upgrade

instructions.
Library Option Upgrades

Upgrades available for purchase include library system upgrades, called
options, as well as library hardware upgrades. You can purchase options
and upgrades from your sales representative (see Contacting Spectra Logic
on page 5). Selected options are also available for purchase from the
Spectra Logic online store at www.spectralogic.com/shop.
443
The following table describes the options that are available for the library.
See Enabling Purchased Options and Upgrades on page 270 for
information about enabling these options.
Library Option Description

Capacity-On- The Capacity-On-Demand (CoD) feature of the Spectra T200, T380, and T680
Demand (CoD) lets you purchase a library that meets your current storage needs and then
purchase additional capacity later as required from the Spectra Logic Web site.
CoD reduces up-front costs, because users only pay for what they currently
need. As more capacity is required, it can be added in increments by
purchasing activation codes to enable additional chambers in the library and
additional TeraPack magazines or RXT media packs to fill the added chambers.
Note: If you purchase CoD capacity that exceeds the number of unlicensed
chambers available in the current library configuration, you must add another
DBA. The DBA and its installation by a certified Spectra Logic field technician
are priced separately from the CoD capacity upgrade.
Auto Drive Clean Auto Drive Clean lets you configure a dedicated partition to be used for
cleaning cartridges. The cleaning partition can be shared by multiple data
partitions and is used by the library to automatically clean drives whenever
necessary.
Notes:
Cleaning partitions do not count against the eight partition maximum for the
library.
Using the Auto Drive Clean feature requires a cleaning partition containing
one or more Maintenance TeraPacks.
BlueScale BlueScale Encryption Standard Edition, included free on the Spectra TranScale
Encryption Library, provides a strong, easy to use method of encrypting data using a single
Professional Edition key on the library, letting you add encryption without adding complexity.
BlueScale Encryption Professional Edition supports multiple keys on a library
at a single time and additional security features so that you can implement
more customized data encryption regimens.
See BlueScale Encryption Overview on page 306 for more information about
BlueScale Encryption.
SNMP Support Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a widely used protocol for
monitoring the health and welfare of your library by using integrated alerts. See
Configuring SNMP (Optional) on page 283 for additional information about
SNMP.
Rotation Manager Rotation Manager is an option to simplify identifying tapes that have been
moved off site. With Rotation Manager installed, the library sends an email
containing the bar code information for every piece of media and its off-site
location to a specified address. See Configuring Rotation Manager (Optional)
on page 300 for additional information about Rotation Manager.
444
User Guide 91090000
Library Upgrades
Library Option Description

Observatory The Observatory suite of management tools gives you the ability to manage
multiple Spectra Logic libraries from one screen with customized viewing of
alerts or failures. Built on the BlueScale environment, the Observatory tools
provide full management access to configuration and operation of one or more
Spectra Logic libraries from anywhere using a web browser. See Configuring
and Using Observatory (Optional) on page 296 for additional information
about Observatory.
Note: Observatory includes keys SNMP and SSL support.
Hardware Expansion and Upgrades

The Spectra T200, T380, and T680 is designed to expand to meet a data
center’s changing storage requirements, as well as to achieve storage
consolidation goals. These expansion and upgrade options can be
purchased through a sales representative (see Contacting Spectra Logic on
page 5). Selected options are also available for purchase from the Spectra
Logic online store at www.spectralogic.com/shop.
The following table describes the types of hardware expansion and
upgrades that are available.
Hardware Description
Drives Each library Drive Bay Assembly (DBAs) holds up to four drives. If a DBA is
not full, additional drives can be installed to increase data throughput. Drives
are sled-mounted and install in under two minutes.
Drive Bay Assembly If all of the currently installed DBAs in the library are fully populated with
(DBA) drives and your library includes one or more TeraPack Bay Assemblies (TBAs),
you can replace a TBA with a DBA.
Note: Replacing a TBA reduces the storage capacity of your library.
Quad Interface If a QIP is not already installed in every DBA, additional QIPs can be easily
Processors (QIPs) installed to provide connectivity to additional SCSI drives. QIPs are sled-
mounted and install in under two minutes.
Important: Ethernet QIPs (E-QIPs) are only supported as legacy devices. They
are no longer available for purchase.
Power Supplies The standard configuration uses one power supply module per DBA. A second
power supply per DBA, in combination with the dual AC power inputs,
provides 2N redundancy and failover protection. The power supply modules
needed for the 2N power redundancy configuration are an option you can
purchase separately or when you order the library
USB Drive You can use USB drive for saving backups of the library configuration and
MLM database, when upgrading the library’s firmware package, or as a
troubleshooting tool for use as instructed by SpectraGuard Support. USB drives
are available for purchase from Spectra Logic for a nominal charge.
445
How to Order
To purchase library upgrades, including a renewed or extended service
contract, determine your library Hardware ID (see Determine the Library
Hardware ID and Purchase the Option on page 271) and then contact your
sales representative (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).
REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS
Some library components are extremely easy to remove and install. They
are classified as customer-replaceable units (CRUs) and they are available
for purchase based on your service contract with SpectraGuard Support
(see Appendix C Service and Support). CRUs include:
Drives
QIPs
Library Control Module (LCM)
Power supply modules
Depending on your service contract, you may also be able to replace
certain additional components that are classified as field-replaceable units
(FRUs).
446
User Guide 91090000
Appendix C
Service and Support
SpectraGuard Support provides a worldwide service and maintenance
structure, refined over many years to provide timely, professional service.
Go to Spectra Logic’s web site at: www.spectralogic.com/warranty-service
for information about the warranty and service options for your library.
For information about the Spectra Certified Media warranty, see
www.spectralogic.com/mediaguarantee.
PROBLEM RESOLUTION
If you have a problem with your library, use the information in this section
to obtain help with resolving the problem.
System Messages If you are encountering problems, review any System
Messages that have been posted by the library (see Checking Messages on
page 88) and take any action described in the message(s).
Product Support For additional troubleshooting information, check the
Spectra Logic Product Support page at www.spectralogic.com/support and
the Knowledge Base and FAQ page at www.spectralogic.com/
knowledgebase.
Contact Information If the problem persists, contact SpectraGuard Support
(see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).
447
Appendix C — Service and Support
How to Open a Support Ticket

You can use AutoSupport to open a ticket, if you have AutoSupport
configured. Refer to Chapter 10 – AutoSupport beginning on page 247 for
detailed information about configuring and using AutoSupport.
Use the following steps if you need to open a ticket using telephone, email,
or the Spectra Logic web site.
1. Note the problem, including what happened just before the failure
occurred.
2. Gather the following information:
Your Spectra Logic customer number
Company name, contact name, phone number, and email address
Library model and serial number
Type of host system being used
Type and version of operating system being used
Type and version of backup software being used
3. Contact SpectraGuard Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on
page 5).
Returns
Your Technical Support representative may ask you to return a problem
component to Spectra Logic for servicing. After you complete a
replacement procedure, return the defective part using ALL the packaging
that the replacement part arrived in (including any anti-static bags or foam
inserts).
Severe damage can occur if the component is not packaged correctly. You may be
Caution invoiced if it is damaged due to improper or insufficient packaging.
Use the return label and instructions that were included with the
replacement part when preparing to ship the component you are
returning. If you cannot locate these, contact Spectra Logic for another
copy (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5). The return label and RMA
printed on it are used to associate the returned component with your
account. To avoid being invoiced for failure to return the component, do not
ship the component back to Spectra Logic without the RMA return label.
448
User Guide 91090000
Appendix D
Specifications
This appendix provides specifications for the Spectra T200, T380, and T680
libraries, as well as the drives and media used in the library:

Library Specifications this page
Interface Specifications page 460
Tape Drive and Media Specifications page 462
RXT Drive and Media Pack Specifications page 471
Note: The specifications in this chapter are subject to change without

notice.
LIBRARY SPECIFICATIONS
This section includes the following library specifications:

Data Storage Capacity page 450
Size and Weight page 451
Service Access Requirements page 451
Power Specifications page 453
Environmental Specifications page 457
Shock and Vibration page 459
Interoperability and Software Compatibility page 459
449
Appendix D — Specifications
Data Storage Capacity

The T200, T380, and T680 libraries provide flexible storage capacity that
expands from a minimum of one media pack up to the maximum storage
capacity of the library, as shown in the following table. The information in
the table assumes that only one type of drive and media is installed in the
library. When using mixed drives and media the library’s capacity depends
on the number of drives and slots installed and the type of drives and
media used.
Media Type Maximum Slots a Capacity (TB) b

T200 T380 T680 T200 T380 T680
LTO-2 190 370 660 76 148 264
LTO-3 190 370 660 152 296 528
LTO-4 190 370 660 304 592 1056
SDLT-600 171 333 594 114 222 440
Gold RXT Media (1.2 TB/pack) c 19 37 66 23 44 d 66 d
Silver RXT Media (1.0 TB/pack) c 19 37 66 19 37 d 132 d
a. Assumes one partition with a single chamber reserved for the entry/exit pool. A minimum of one chamber in each partition
must be reserved for the entry/exit pool. A chamber contains a TeraPack magazine with either nine or ten slots. The media
in entry/exit cannot be used for data storage until it is moved to the storage pool.
b. Assuming a 2:1 compression ratio. Actual compressed capacity is affected by the type of data being stored.
c. Each RXT media pack occupies one chamber.
d. Native, uncompressed capacity.
The actual amount of media that can be installed depends on the number
of drives installed, as shown in the following table.
Number of Maximum Media Storage Capacity a

Drives Installed
Spectra T200 Spectra T380 Spectra T680
1 to 4 drives 200 LTO cartridges 380 LTO cartridges 660 LTO cartridges
180 SDLT cartridges 342 SDLT cartridges 594 SDLT cartridges
20 RXT media packs 38 RXT media packs 66 RXT media packs
5 to 8 drives 140 LTO cartridges 320 LTO cartridges 600 LTO cartridges
126 SDLT cartridges 288 SDLT cartridges 540 SDLT cartridges
14 RXT media packs 32 RXT media packs 60 RXT media packs
9 to 12 drives Not applicable 260 LTO cartridges 540 LTO cartridges
234 SDLT cartridges 486 SDLT cartridges
26 RXT media packs 54 RXT media packs
a. Includes media packs stored in the entry/exit pool. The media stored in the entry/exit pool are not available for use by the
application software for writing or reading data until it is moved to the storage pool. See Media Pools on page 48 for information
about how the library uses media pools.
450
User Guide 91090000
Library Specifications
Size and Weight

The following table shows the size and weight specifications for the library
and other components.
Parameter Specification
T200 T380 T680 a
Height 35 in. (89 cm) 49 in. (125 cm) 80.5 in. (204.5 cm)
Width
Chassis 17.5 in. (44.4 cm) 17.5 in. (44.4 cm) 24 in. (61 cm)
Front panel 19.0 in. (48.3 cm) 19.0 in. (48.3 cm)
Depth 41 in. (104 cm) 41 in. (104 cm) 48 in. (122 cm)
(with drive cover)
Weight
Base chassis b 230 lb. (104 kg) 305 lb. (138 kg) 765 lb. (347 kg)
Maximum c 428 lb. (194 kg) 627 lb. (567 kg) 1211 lb. (549 kg)
Drivesd
LTO drive 11 lb. (5 kg)
SDLT drive 13 lb. (6 kg)
RXT drive 9 lb. (4 kg)
a. The T680 is shipped and installed in a rack; the sizes shown are for the library rack.
b. The base chassis contains no drives, media, QIPs or power supplies. To calculate the approximate weight of a loaded library, add the
weight for each drive installed, 5 lb. (1.8 kg) for each TeraPack magazine full of media, 6 lb. (2.7 kg) for each RXT media pack
installed, 5 lb. (1.8 kg) for each QIP installed, and 4 lb. (1.5 kg) for each power supply installed.
c. The maximum weight assumes the maximum number of drives and media installed. The maximum weight does not include the
weigh of the rackmounting hardware for the T200 and T380 libraries.
d. Each drive. Weights are approximate.
Service Access Requirements
Important A minimum of 24 inches (61 cm) of clearance is required on the LEFT end of the
library to provide service access. Providing 36 inches (91 cm) of clearance on all
sides of the library is highly recommended.
In addition to the service access space on either side of the library, leave a
minimum of 24 inches (61 cm) at the front and back of the library for
service and operator access. Refer to the T-Series Mid-Range Libraries: T200,
T380, and T680 Site Preparation Guide for detailed information about space
requirements.
451
Shipping and Storage Size and Weight

The following table provides the approximate dimensions and weights of
the pallet and boxes used to ship the library.
Parameter Specification a
Library Box Height
T200 and T380 65 in. (165 cm)
T680 93 in. (236 cm)
Width
T200 and T380 48 in. (122 cm)
T680 29 in. (74 cm)
Depth
T200 and T380
46 in. (117 cm)
T680
57 in. (145 cm)
Weight Library (base chassis) b
T200 230 lb. (104 kg)
T380 305 lb. (138 kg)
T680 765 lb. (347 kg)
Box and pallet c, d
T200 and T380 Approx. 165 lb. (75 kg)
T680 e Approx. 875 lb. (397 kg)
Components Box f The weight of the components box depends on how many TeraPack cases,
power supplies, controllers, and media you ordered with the library.
a. Specifications are subject to change at any time without notice.
b. The base chassis does not contain drives, media, QIPs, or power supply modules.
c. Includes the weight of the accessory box (approximately 50 lb. (23 kg).
d. Accessory box contains the rackmounting kit, the protective back cover, a tool kit, and product documentation.
e. Includes the weight of the accessory box (approximately 10 lb. (4.5 kg).
f. The size and weight depend on the number and type of components in the box. To calculate the approximate weight of all the
components, add 15 lbs (7 kg) for each drive, 5 lb. (1.8 kg) for each TeraPack magazine full of media, 6 lb. (2.7 kg) for each RXT media
pack, 5 lbs. (1.8 kg) for each QIP, and 4 lbs. (1.5 kg) for each power supply.
452
User Guide 91090000
Power Specifications
This section describes the power specifications for the library.
Input Power Requirements

The input power requirements for the library depend on the type and
number of drives installed in the library, as described in the following
table. Each input must be protected a circuit breaker rated for 15 amps.
Note: The T200 library supports a maximum of eight drives; both the
T380 library and the T680 library support a maximum of twelve
drives each.
Number and Type of Drives Electrical Rating Current Rating

(Maximum) a
1 – 12 tape drives 100–130 VAC, 50/60 Hz b 12 amps per cord
(LTO, SDLT, SAIT) 200–240 VAC, 50/60 Hz c 8 amps per cord
1 – 8 RXT150 drives 100–130 VAC, 50/60 Hz c 12 amps per cord
1 – 12 RXT150 drives d 200–240 VAC, 50/60 Hz d 8 amps per cord
a. Each branch circuit must be protected by a 15 amp circuit breaker.
b. If the male connector does not have a twist lock. An additional grounding wire from the chassis to earth
ground is required.
c. Requires a 220–240 VAC AC power cord with a twist-lock male connector. See Power Cord
Specifications on page 453 for detailed information about power cord requirements.
d. When more than eight RXT drives are installed in the library, the library must be connected to a 200–
240 VAC power source.
Note: When using a 2N redundant power configuration, connect each

AC power cord to a separate branch circuit protected by a circuit
breaker rated for 15 amps.
Power Cord Specifications

The power cords included with the library are considered part of the
library and cannot be used with any other equipment. See Supply-end
Connector Types on page 455 for the different types of cords available from
Spectra Logic.
and earth ground.
Masse.
453
Refer to the table in Input Power Requirements on page 453 to determine the
Caution maximum number of drives that can be installed when operating the library at
100–130 VAC.
Notes: Install the included cord locks to prevent the power cords
from being inadvertently disconnected from the AC input
connectors. If the male connector does not have a twist lock,
an additional grounding wire from the chassis to earth
ground is required. For instructions on installing cord locks
and the grounding wire, see Installing Cord Locks and
Chassis Grounding on page 403.
The supply-end connector is considered the disconnect for
the unit. Make sure that the socket-outlet for the AC
connections is in an accessible location near the library.
To use the library outside of North America, the power cord
must meet the specifications for that country, as described in
the following sections. If the male connector does not have a
twist lock, an additional grounding wire from the chassis to
earth ground is required.
100–130 VAC Power Cord for Use in North America The criteria for a 100-volt
to 130-volt AC power cord in North America are as follows:
Power cordage Three-conductor, 14 AWG
Power input connectors NEMA 5-15P, male
IEC 60320-C19, female
454
User Guide 91090000
200–240 VAC Power Cord for Use in North America and Korea The criteria
for a 200-volt to 240-volt AC power cord in North America and Korea are
as follows:
Power cordage SJT type, three-conductor, 14 AWG minimum a
Power input connectors NEMA L6-20P, male
a. Power cord must comply with local electrical code.
200–240 VAC Power Cord for International Use The criteria for an
international 200-volt to 240-volt AC power cord are as follows:
Power cordage Flexible, HAR (harmonized) type H05VV-F, three
conductor, cord with minimum conductor size of
0.03 square inches (1.0 square millimeter).
Power input connectors Male connector must be of the proper type,
rating, and safety approval for the intended
country (see Supply-end Connector Types for
available power cord connectors).
Supply-end Connector Types

The type of connector on the input end of the cord depends on the country.
The following table shows the Spectra Logic part numbers for power cords
with the connector types used in each country on the supply-end.
Part Country of Use Plug Style Appearance

Number
8147 a North America NEMA 5-15P
8297 North America IEC-60320 C14
5500 North America, NEMA L6-20P

Korea
7029 North America, NEMA L6-30P
Korea
455
Part Country of Use Plug Style Appearance

Number
6805 a United Kingdom BS 1363A
6807 Japan NEMA L6-20P
6808 a Continental Europe CEE(7)VII
8665 United Kingdom, IEC 60309

Continental Europe
a. For non-locking supply-end plugs, an additional grounding wire from the chassis to earth ground is
required.
Power Consumption and Cooling Requirements

The power and cooling requirements for the library depend on the number
and type of drives installed. The following table provides the nominal and
maximum power consumption specifications for the base library with no
QIPs or drives installed.
Power Nominal: 125 watts
Consumption
Maximum: 175 watts
Heat Load Nominal: 427 BTU/hour
Maximum: 598 BTU/hour
456
User Guide 91090000
Use the following table, which shows the power and cooling requirements
for the library using Fibre Channel LTO-4 tape drives, as a guideline for
determining the requirements for your library. Refer to the information in
Tape Drive and Media Specifications on page 462 and RXT Drive and
Media Pack Specifications on page 471 for additional detailed drive
specifications.
Number of Drives Installed

Drive Type
4 8 12
LTO Drives (QIP-attached Fibre Channel LTO-4)
Standby Mode (Minimum)
Power Consumption (Watts) 240 305 370
Heat Dissipation (BTU/hour) 820 1042 1264
Read/Write/Seek Mode (Maximum)
Environmental Specifications
This section describes environmental specifications for the library. Do not
place the library on a carpeted floor or anywhere else that poses risk for
static discharge that could damage the library and its drives.
The library must be installed in a standard 19-inch (48 cm) rack to prevent tipping.
Warning The rack must be located on a level, hard-surfaced floor such as cement or tile.
German: Die Library muss installiert sein, in einem Standard-Rack 48 cm
Ablagerung zu verhindern. Das Rack muss sich auf eine ebene, harte Oberfläche
Stock wie Zement oder Fliese.
The library is equipped with internal fans as well as temperature sensors

that operate the fans as much or as little as is necessary in your data center
environment. These features keep the library’s internal temperature within
specifications as long as the data center environment is within
specifications.
When the library is moved from a cold environment to a warm environment, it

Caution should not be powered on for at least 24 hours. This adjustment period prevents
condensation damage.
457
The following tables list the general environmental specifications for the
library.
Operating Environmental Specification

Humidity 20% to 80% (non-condensing)
Humidity gradient Less than 10% per hour
Ambient temperature a 50° F to 90° F (10° C to 32° C)
Maximum temperature change rate b 51.8° F (28.5° C) per hour
Maximum wet bulb temperature 77° F (25° C)
Altitude Sea level to 10,000 feet (3,048 meters)
a. The maximum ambient temperature must not exceed 86º F (30º C) when G2 F-QIPs (P.N. 90949008) are
b. The temperature and humidity must be allowed to stabilize in the specified ambient environment for
24 hours.
Storinga and Shipping (Non-Operating) Environment Specification

Temperature –40° F to 149° F (–4° C to 65° C)
a. The library is in its original packaging. The packaging is designed to protect the library from
condensation caused by extreme temperature variations of 59˚ F (15˚ C) or more. When the library is
moved from a cold storage environment to a warm operating environment, it must be acclimated in its
packaging for at least 24 hours before opening to prevent serious condensation damage from
occurring.
458
User Guide 91090000
Interoperability and Software Compatibility
Shock and Vibration

The library will operate normally after experiencing shock loads as
specified in the following table. The operating shock levels indicate how
much shock the library can withstand while the enclosed drives are
reading and writing data. The non-operating and storage shock levels
indicate how much shock the library can withstand when it is not
operating. After experiencing this amount of shock, the library will operate
normally.
Specification Operating Storing and Shipping

(Non-Operating Environment) a
Shock 2 g pk ½ sine wave for 10 msec 2 g pk ½ sine wave for 10 msec
(3 axes, 2 shocks per axis, minimum) (3 axes, 2 shocks/axis, minimum)
Vibration 5 Hz – 500 Hz – 5 Hz 5 Hz – 500 Hz – 5 Hz
(Swept Sine) 5 – 22 Hz 0.01-inch DA displacement 5 – 31 Hz, 0.02-inch DA displacement
22 – 500 Hz 0.25G pk @ 1/2 octave 31 – 500 Hz 1G pk @ 1/2 octave
(minimum three axes) (minimum three axes)
Vibration 0.5 Grms, 0 – 3000 Hz (single axis) 1 – 200Hz @ 1.156 Grms.
(Random) Bottom face only for 60 minutes.
a. Library is in its original packaging.
INTEROPERABILITY AND SOFTWARE COMPATIBILITY

You can find complete interoperability listings, as well as a list of the types
of software that have been tested and proven compatible with the library
on the Spectra Logic Web site at www.spectralogic.com/compatibility.
459
INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS
This section provides information about the interfaces used to connect the
library and tape drives to the host systems. It also provides information
about the Ethernet interface used to access the library’s BlueScale web
interface.
The library QIPs support either Fibre Channel (F-QIP) or Gigabit Ethernet
(E-QIP) host interfaces. Direct-attach tape drives have either a native Fibre
Channel interface or a Ultra 320 LVD SCSI bus interface (through a SCSI
bus expansion module).
When direct-attach drives are used without a QIP, robot control commands
from the host are routed to the transporter through LUN 1 of one of the
tape drives in the partition. The tape drive reports the transporter as
“SPECTRA PYTHON” on LUN 1. LUN 0 is the tape drive itself.
For information about how LTO Ultrium tape drive’s support SCSI
communications, refer to the tape drive documentation, available from
IBM at www.storage.ibm.com/tape/lto/oem/index.html.
Component Interface Connectors

Component Physical Interface
Drive, direct-attach Fibre Two dual port multimode optical LC
Channel connectors a
Drive, SCSI b Ultra-3 SCSI “LVD” 68-pin Micro D female
connector. One wide Ultra320 SCSI Active
SCSI terminator is provided with each SCSI
tape drive.
Bus expansion module Four Ultra-3 SCSI “LVD” 68-pin Micro D
female connector
QIP, Fibre Channel (F-QIP) Two dual port optical SFPs with LC
connectors c, d
QIP, Gigabit Ethernet (E-QIP) Two GigE SFPs with a copper RJ-45 socket c, d
a. Only one port at a time can be used to connect the tape drive to a Fibre Channel network. If desired, the
two ports can be used to create a failover configuration (see Failover Using Direct-Attached LTO-4 Fibre
Channel Drives on page 59).
b. Requires a QIP to provide Fibre Channel or Gigabit Ethernet network connectivity. Direct-attach SCSI
drives require a bus expansion module to provide connectivity to a SCSI bus.
c. The two ports on a QIP each provide access to all or any of the four tape drives associated with the QIP
(see Connectivity on page 52 for additional information).
d. The QIPs are shipped with SFPs installed.
460
User Guide 91090000
Interface Specifications
Network Interface Cable Requirements

The type of cables required to connect the library and its drives to the
network depend on the type of interface being used.
Interface Type Cable Requirements

Fibre Channel The Fibre Channel interface in the F-QIPs and direct-attach tape drives support
(F-QIPs and Direct- the Fibre Channel Protocol (FCP). Connecting F-QIPs and direct-attach Fibre
Attach Drives) Channel tape drives to the host network requires multimode optical cables with
dual LC connectors.
Gigabit Ethernet The Gigabit Ethernet interface in the E-QIPs support the iSCSI protocol.
(iSCSI) (E-QIPs) Connecting each port on an E-QIP to the host network requires a shielded
Category 5 (10/100BaseT connection) data-grade cable or a similar Category 5
cable with an RJ-45 connector.
SCSI Bus The direct-attach SCSI drives and the bus expansion module support the SCSI
protocol. Connecting each drive to a host SCSI bus requires an LVD SCSI cable
with an Ultra-3 SCSI “LVD” Fast & Wide, 68-pin Micro D male connector.
Ethernet Cable Requirements

The Ethernet port on the LCM provides the connection to a 10/100BaseT
Ethernet network for accessing the library using a standard web browser
on a remote computer. An additional Ethernet port near the LCM provides
the Ethernet connection for the BlueScale Vision camera.
Each Ethernet port is a pin-through-hole RJ-45 shielded connector. To
comply with EMC requirements, use shielded Category 5 (10/100BaseT
connection) data-grade cables or a similar Category 5 cable for all Ethernet
connections.
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Support

The USB port on the LCM and the RCM support the following:
USB Mass Storage Devices (for example, Flash drives)
FAT file formats (FAT, FAT12, FAT 16, and FAT 32)
Long file names
The USB ports do not support:
Keyboards
Pointer devices (for example, a computer mouse)
Cameras
Multimedia devices (for example, MP3 players)
461
TAPE DRIVE AND MEDIA SPECIFICATIONS

This section provides the basic specifications for the tape drives and media
supported by the T200, T380, and T680.
Note: The specifications in this section are subject to change without
notice.

LTO Tape Drive Specifications page 462
SDLT Tape Drive Specifications page 465
Tape Media Specifications page 466
Bar-Code Label Specifications for Half-Inch page 468
Media
LTO Tape Drive Specifications

This section provides specifications for the LTO drives supported by the
library. See Tape Media Specifications on page 466 for information about
the media used in the library.
Notes: The specifications in this section are provided for
convenience only. Refer to the tape drive documentation for
the most current specifications (see LTO Ultrium Tape Drives
on page 18).
LTO drives and media are also referred to as Ultrium or LTO
Ultrium drives and media.
462
User Guide 91090000
Tape Drive and Media Specifications
LTO-4 Drive
When connecting to a Fibre Channel network, LTO-4 Fibre Channel drives
will attempt to connect at 4 Gb/sec., but will auto-negotiate down to
2 Gb/sec. or 1 Gb/sec., depending on the interface used.
Sustained transfer rate a, b SCSI: 70 MB/sec native (140 MB/sec
compressed); 504 GB/hour
Fibre Channel: 120 MB/sec native (240 MB/sec
compressed); 864 GB/hour
Average file access time 65 seconds
Encryption capability AES 256-bit
WORM capability Yes
MTBF 250,000 hours at 100% duty cycle
Uncorrected error rate 1 x 10 –17 bits
Power consumption SCSI: 26.5 watts typical read/write
Idle: 9.5 watts
Fibre Channel: 29.5 watts typical read/write
Idle: 12.5 watts
a. Compression throughput depends on the type of data.
b. This is a per-drive value. Total sustained transfer rate for the library depends on the number of drives
LTO-4 Drives and Encryption The LTO-4 drive can read and write to LTO-3
media, and read LTO-2 media. The LTO-4 tape drive supports data
encryption, with minimal latency to permit encryption set-up. However,
the rate at which data is transferred from the host is not affected, since the
encryption and decryption capability resides in the drive.
The BlueScale Encryption and key management interface support for
drive-based encryption is documented in the BlueScale Encryption User
Guide. If you choose not to use BlueScale key management with drive-
based encryption, you must use a key management application (if any are
available that support LTO encryption) that runs on a separate host.
463
Drive-based encryption highlights:

AES-256 data encryption with a secret 256-bit encryption key is used to
encrypt and decrypt data. The key is not retrievable from the
encryption core and is automatically erased during the unload process;
software is required to extract the key, keep it secure, and provide
management tools to track, store, use, and delete keys as appropriate.
Note: The encryption performed by encryption-enabled LTO-4 drives
is not compatible with the encryption performed by an
encryption-enabled F-QIP. If a single library has encryption-
ready QIPs and LTO-4 drives installed, both can be used for
encryption. However, you must set up a separate encryption-
enabled partition for each.
Data from the host is encrypted after it is compressed. Data is
encrypted at full line speed in hardware in the drive, so it has no effect
on drive performance.
To confirm that data is encrypted properly during write operations, the
drive automatically decrypts after encrypting to provide on-the-fly
checking that data is, in fact, encrypted correctly.
If you choose not to use drive-based encryption, you can take
advantage of the drive’s backward read/write capabilities: an LTO-4
drive that is not configured for encryption can read LTO-2 and LTO-3
tapes, and can write to LTO-3 tapes.
LTO-3 Drives
Sustained transfer rate a,b 80 MB/sec native (160 MB/sec compressed)
Encryption capability No
WORM capability Yes
Power consumption 28 watts typical (49 watts maximum)
464
User Guide 91090000
LTO-2 Drives
Sustained transfer rate a, b 35 MB/sec native (70 MB/sec compressed)
Encryption capability No
WORM capability No
Power consumption 29 watts typical (50 watts maximum)
SDLT Tape Drive Specifications

Note: The specifications in this section are provided for convenience
only. Refer to the tape drive documentation for the most current
specifications (see SDLT Tape Drives on page 18).
The library supports Quantum’s SDLT 600 tape drives. The SDLT 600 tape
drive is backward compatible with the following DLT media:
Super DLTtape II: read/write
Super DLTtape I written on SDLT 320 and SDLT 220 drives: read only
DLTtape VS1 written on DLT VS160: read only
Tape capacity a 300 GB native
Sustained transfer rate b, c 36 MB/sec native (72 MB/sec compressed)
Uncorrected error rate 1 x 10 17 bits read
Power consumption 32 watts typical, streaming/writing
a. Using Super DLTtape II. Actual capacity depends on the type of data.
b. Compression throughput depends on the type of data.
c. This is a per-drive value. Total sustained transfer rate for the library depends on the number of drives
465
Tape Media Specifications

This section provides specifications for the tape media supported by the
library. See Media and Accessories on page 442 for information about
ordering media for your library.
Environmental Requirements
The following table lists the specifications for storage temperature and
other environmental requirements for tape media. Do not allow the
temperature and humidity in the storage environment to fluctuate.
Specification a Operating b Operational Storage Archival Storage Shipping

Temperature +50° F to +113° F +61° F to +90° F +61° F to +77° F –9° F to +120° F
(+10° C to +45° C) (+16°C to +32°C) (+16°C to +25°C) (–23° C to +49° C)
Relative humidity 10% to 80% 20% to 80% 20% to 50% 5% to 80%
Wet bulb +79° F (+26° C) +79° F (+26° C) +79° F (+26° C) +79° F (+26° C)
temperature
a. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
b. The upper limit applies to the drive, not the library. Be sure there is adequate air flow around library at all times.
LTO Tape Media Specifications

The following table describes the different generations of LTO Ultrium
data cartridges.
LTO Media Cartridge Color Native Capacity

Generation (Compressed Capacity) a
LTO-4 Green 800 GB (1.6 TB)
LTO-4 WORM Two-tone, green/black
LTO-3 Slate blue 400 GB (800 GB)
LTO-3 WORM Two-tone, slate blue/black
LTO-2 Purple 200 GB (400 GB)
LTO-1b Black 100 GB (200 GB)
LTO Cleaning White or cream Not applicable
a. Assuming a 2:1 compression ratio. The compressed capacity depends on the type of data.
b. LTO-1 is not supported by the library.
466
User Guide 91090000
LTO Read/Write Compatibility

The following table shows the media read/write compatibility for each
LTO drive generation supported by the library.
LTO Drive Generation a LTO-4 Media LTO-3 Media LTO-2 media

LTO-4 Read/write Read/write Read only
LTO-3 Read/write Read/write
LTO-2 Read/write
a. LTO-1 is not supported by the library.
LTO WORM Media

Certain records retention and data security applications require a Write
Once, Read Many (WORM) method for storing data on tape. The LTO-4
and LTO-3 drives enable WORM support when a WORM tape cartridge is
loaded into the drive.
WORM Media Because standard read/write media are incompatible with
the WORM feature, a specially formatted WORM tape cartridge is
required. Each WORM cartridge has a unique, worldwide cartridge
identifier (WWCID), which comprises the unique CM chip serial number
and the unique tape media serial number.
Data Security on WORM Media Certain built-in security measures help
ensure that the data written on a WORM cartridge does not become
compromised, for example:
The format of an LTO-4 800 GB or LTO-3 400 GB WORM tape cartridge
is unlike that of standard read/write media. This unique format
prevents a drive that lacks WORM-capable firmware from writing on a
WORM tape cartridge.
When the drive senses a WORM cartridge, the firmware prohibits the
changing or altering of user data already written on the tape. The
firmware keeps track of the last appendable point on the tape.
LTO Cleaning Cartridges

The LTO cleaning cartridges are valid for 50 uses. Do not rewind and reuse
the material in a cleaning cartridge. Reusing the material may redistribute
contaminants previously removed from the tape path. If all of the cleaning
material has been used, discard the cartridge and use a new cleaning
cartridge.
467
Bar-Code Label Specifications for Half-Inch Media

The bar-code labeling scheme used on Spectra Logic certified media uses
the bar-code symbology of USS-39. You can obtain a complete description
and definition of this symbology from the Automatic Identification
Manufacturers (AIM) specification, the Uniform Symbol Specification
(USS-39), and the ANSI MH10.8M-1993 ANSI Barcode specification.
The bar-code label must be applied to the cartridge so that it fits within the
label recess on the edge of the cartridge without curling up on the sides or
ends. The label must be oriented so that bar-code characters are along the
edge closest to the hub side of the cartridge. The label can have human-
readable alphanumeric characters printed along the top edge of the label,
above the bar code. See Detailed Specifications on page 469 for specific
information about label, the characters used on the label, and spacing.
Figure 1 shows the dimensional specifications for labels with the
alphanumeric characters above the bar code.
Important The bar-code label must only have one bar code on it. If multiple bar codes are
present, the library’s bard-code scanner cannot determine which one to process
when scanning the cartridge.
Alphanumeric
Bar code start character characters Bar code stop character
17 mm
+0/–0.8 11.1 mm,
minimum
74.088 mm, nominal
Quiet Zone 79 mm +0/–.8 Quiet Zone

4.32 mm, 4.32 mm,
minimum minimum
Figure 1 Bar code specifications for half-inch media; alphanumeric characters on top.
Note: When using bar-code labels with alphanumeric characters along

the bottom edge, the label must be positioned so that bar code is
at least 13.72 mm below the top edge of the cartridge to ensure
that the bar-code reader can read the label.
468
User Guide 91090000
Detailed Specifications
For the full bar-code label specification, see www-01.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=ssg1S7000429&aid=1. Unless otherwise specified,
tolerances are X.XXX ± 0.127 mm, X.XXX ± 0.762 mm.
Bar Code Element Specifications

Minimum symbol height is 11.1 mm, measured to the inside of the
label’s edge.
The wide-to-narrow ratio is 2.75.
The narrow element width is 0.432 mm +0.03 mm or –0.076 mm.
The nominal width of the wide spaces and bars is 1.188 mm.
The inter-character gap is 0.432mm +0.03/–0.076 mm.
The minimum quiet zone at the beginning and end of a printed bar-
code string is 4.32 mm (10 times the narrow element width).
The total nominal bar-code string length (including quiet zones) is
74.088 mm.
The edge of the bar code is the edge of the printed area associated with
the bar. The edge roughness is the transition encountered as a
horizontal line is moved vertically from all black to all white. The edge
roughness maximum is 0.038 mm.
Variation between all bars, white and black, must be less than
±0.0381 mm.
Physical Label Specifications

Label stock must fit within the label recess on the face of the cartridge
without curling up on the sides or ends (79 mm X 17 mm +0/–0.8).
Minimum length sufficient for the quiet zones, start-stop, and data
characters (nominal 74.088 mm).
Minimum width no less than 1.5 mm narrower than the cartridge label
recess width. Corners are cut with a 1.5 mm radius.
Maximum label thickness, including the RFID tag if present, together
with any associated layers and adhesives cannot exceed 0.40 mm.
The label and adhesive must have an environmental performance to
match or exceed the environmental specifications of the cartridge to
which it is applied.
469
Bar-Code Data
The bar-code data string consists of a start character, eight alphanumeric
characters, and the stop character. Quiet zones precede and follow the start
and stop characters.
The first six (6) characters following the start character can be any
combination of upper case A-Z or 0-9 (for example, ABC123) to identify
the cartridge Volume Serial Number.
The last two (2) characters are the media identifier and indicate the LTO
cartridge Media Type (for example, “L” for LTO and “4” for an LTO-4
cartridge). The bar-code string can be printed in either direction on the
label and must begin and end with a valid start/stop character ( * ).
The label must be printed so that bar-code data is positioned along the
edge of the label that will be closest to the hub side of the cartridge.
The AIM Uniform Symbol USS-39 specification provides detailed
information about the format of the start character, the series of characters
that make up the bar-code data, and the stop character.
Human Readable Text

Human readable text is allowed, provided there is no conflict or
interference with the automation code. This text must include the bar-code
data, but can also include additional text. The format, colors, and location
of the human readable characters is up to the customer and label vendor.
Volume Identifier Formats

The volume identifier field consists of six (6) left justified alphanumeric
characters as described in the SCSI-3 Medium Changer Commands (SMC)
ANSI NCITS 314-199X specification. The volume identifier only uses
ASCII characters A-Z and 0-9. The use of “CLN” and “DG{space}” at
the beginning of the volume identifier is reserved.
The volume identifier “CLNvnn” is reserved for cleaning cartridges.
When a drive requires cleaning, it requests a specific type of cleaning
cartridge.
The “v” field is an alphanumeric field to identify cleaning cartridge
applications, "U" for Universal Cleaning Cartridges or a drive
unique identifier.
The “nn” alphanumeric field is used to track individual cleaning
cartridge activity (that is, usage and life).
The volume identifier “DG{space}vnn” is reserved for diagnostic and
service cartridges.
470
User Guide 91090000
RXT Drive and Media Pack Specifications
The two character media identifier “Lg” immediately follows the

volume identifier.
The “L” identifies the cartridge as LTO
The “g” represents and alphanumeric character that indicates the
generation and capacity of the LTO cartridge.
In IBM LTO tape drives, the value of the media identifier on
cleaning cartridges is ignored, although a valid value must be
present.
RXT DRIVE AND MEDIA PACK SPECIFICATIONS

Note: The specifications in this section are subject to change without

notice.
This section provides the basic specifications for Spectra Logic RXT150
drive and media packs supported by the library. RXT drives and media
packs bring RAID-protected disk storage to the traditional tape library
environment without adding complexity to the backup environment.

RXT Drives page 471
RXT Media Packs page 473
RXT Drives
RXT150 drives are the same size as a standard full-height tape drive. They
mount into a drive sled similar to the ones used for the tape drives. The
RXT drives use an internal RAID controller to write data to RXT media
packs.
Transfer Rates
The drives in an RXT media pack achieve native transfer rates of up to
110MB/sec when configured as RAID 0 in an optimal environment (that is,
with an optimal data source and optimal performance from the server
connected to the RXT drive). The RAID level configured on the RXT media
pack, its network configuration, and the use of data compression will affect
the transfer rate. Optimizing Performance on page 435 for information
about obtaining the best possible performance.
471
Physical Specifications
Reliability 100,000 media insertion and removal cycles
Power consumption 20 watts, typical
55 watts, maximum
Environment Specifications
The following table lists the specifications for storage temperature and
other environmental requirements for RXT drives. Do not allow the
temperature and humidity in the storage environment to fluctuate.
Operating Environmental Specification

Ambient temperature 32° F to 104° F (0° C to 40° C)
Altitude Sea level to 10,000 feet (0 to 3,048 meters)
Storinga and Shipping (Non-Operating) Environment Specification

Temperature –40° F to 140° F (–4° C to 60° C)
a. The drive is in its original packaging. The packaging is designed to protect the drive from condensation
caused by extreme temperature variations of 59˚ F (15˚ C) or more. When the drive is moved from a cold
storage environment to a warm operating environment, it must be acclimated in its packaging for at
least 24 hours before opening to prevent serious condensation damage from occurring.
472
User Guide 91090000
RXT Drive and Media Pack Specifications
RXT Media Packs

RXT media packs can be removed and stored as appropriate for your
backup strategy, while still providing the reliability of disk and the
redundancy of RAID (Redundant Array of Independent Disks). For a brief
overview of RAID, see RAID Overview on page 434.
Capacity and Performance Specifications

RXT Media Specification
Gold RXT Media
Capacity options a 6 TB (12 x 500 GB per drive)
1.2 TB (12 x 100 GB per drive)
RAID options RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5
Mounting speed 40 seconds
Drive RPM 5400
MCBF 25,000 cycles
Uncorrectable error rates 1 in 1014
Power 27 watts typical, 32 watts peak
Silver RXT Media
Capacity options a 2 TB (2 x 1 TB per drive)
RAID options RAID 0, RAID 1
Mounting speed 35 seconds
Drive RPM 7200
MCBF 25,000 cycles
Uncorrectable error rates 1 in 1014
Power 10 watts typical, 17 watts peak
a. Native, uncompressed capacity.
Physical Specifications
Dimensions HxWxD
2.4in x 4.6in x 10.1in
6.1cm x 21.1cm x 25.4cm
Reliability 10,000 media insertion and removal cycles
473
Environmental Specifications
The following table lists the environmental specifications for RXT media
packs.
Specificationsa Operating Environment Storing (Non-Operating)

Environment
Humidityb 10% to 80% 20% to 50%
Humidity gradient Less than 10% per hour
Temperature 50° F to 90° F –60° F to 77° F
(10° C to 32° C) (–16° C to 25° C)
Maximum temperature gradient 59° F (15° C) per hour
Maximum wet bulb temperature 84° F (29° C) 84° F (29° C)
Altitude –984 feet to 9,842 feet –984 to 39,370 feet
(–300 to 3,000 meters) (–300m to 12,000 m)
a. Specifications are subject to change at any time without notice.
b. Non-condensing.
474
User Guide 91090000
Appendix E
Regulatory & Safety Standards
The Spectra T200, T380, and T680 libraries comply with the safety and
regulatory agency standards listed below when installed by a Spectra
Logic Certified engineer or third-party provider.
EU DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
We:
Spectra Logic Corporation
1700 North 55th Street
Boulder, CO 80301 USA
declare under sole responsibility that the
Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries
to which this declaration relates, meets the essential health and safety
requirements and is in conformity with the EU Directives listed below
using the relevant section of the EU standards and other normative
documents listed in the following table.
Directive Specification
EN 55022: 1994 Information technology equipment. Radio disturbance characteristics. Limits
and methods of measurement
ANSI 63.4: 2003 Methods of Measurement of Radio-Noise Emissions from Low-Voltage
Electrical and Electronic Equipment in the Range of 9 kHz to 40 GHz
CFR 47, FCC Part 15 See FCC Notice on page 477
CISPR 11: 1997 Industrial scientific and medical (ISM) radio-frequency equipment —
Electromagnetic disturbance characteristics — Limits and methods of
measurements
CISPR 16-1: 2002 Specification for radio disturbance and immunity measuring apparatus and
methods. Radio disturbance and immunity measuring apparatus.
CISPER 22: 1993 Limits and methods of measurements of radio interference characteristics of
information technology equipment
475
Appendix E — Regulatory & Safety Standards
Directive Specification
EN 55024: 1998 Information Technology Equipment – Immunity Characteristics Limits and
Methods of Measurement
EN 61000-4-2 1995 + A1:1998 + A2:2001: Electrostatic Discharge
EN 61000-4-3 1995 + A1:1998 + A2:2001, ENV 50204: 1995: Radiated RF
Immunity
EN 61000-4-4 1995 + A1:2001:Electrical Fast Transient/Burst
EN 61000-4-5 1995 + A1:2001 + A2:2001: Surge Immunity
EN 61000-4-6 1996 + A1:2001 + A2:2001: Conducted RF Immunity
EN 61000-4-8 1994 + A1:2001: Power Frequency H-field Immunity
EN 61000-4-11 1994 + A1:2001: Voltage Dips and Interrupts
EN 60601-1-2: 2001 Medical electrical equipment – Part 1-2: General requirements for basic safety
and essential performance – Collateral standard: Electromagnetic compatibility
– Requirements and tests
EN 61000-3-2: 2000 Power Line Harmonics, Class A
(includes A14: 2001)
EN 61000-3-3: 1995 Power Line Flicker
+ A1: 2001
EN61000-6-3: 2001 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Generic standards. Emission standard
for residential, commercial and light-industrial environments
EN 61000-6-4: 2001 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Generic standards. Emission standard
for industrial environments
EN61326: 2002 Electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use. EMC
requirements
EU Directive 2002/ RoHS. Restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and
95/EC electronic equipment.
KOREAN REGULATORY COMPLIANCE

The T680 library has been tested and approved for the KCC mark by the
Korean government.
476
User Guide 91090000
FCC Notice
FCC NOTICE
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to CFR 47, Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy, and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely
to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to
correct the interference at the user’s own expense.
The CE marking has been affixed on this device according to Article 10 of
the EU Directive 90/336/EEC.
Note: To meet CE certification requirements, you must be running
your library on an uninterruptable power supply.
SAFETY STANDARDS AND COMPLIANCE

The Spectra T200, T380, and T680 complies with the following domestic
and international product safety standards.
IEC 60950:91+A1:92, A2:92, A3:95, and A4:96
UL 60950 Third Edition (“Safety of Information Technology
Equipment” based on IEC 60950)
CSA C22.2 No. 950 (Canada: cUL Mark)
EN 60950:92+A1, A2, A3, A4, and A11 (European Union [EU])
Electrical Equipment Law (Germany: GS Mark)
Low Voltage Directive (EU: CE Mark).
The Spectra T200, T380, and T680 complies with all safety-relevant
provisions referring to:
Protection against electrical hazards
Protection against hazards such as:
Mechanical hazards
Fire hazards
Noise
Vibration
477
UL Accreditation
The safety issues of this information technology equipment type have been
evaluated by a government-accredited European third-party organization,
such as UL Demko International.
The CE marking has been affixed on this device according to Article 10 of
the EU Directive 90/336/EEC.
Note: To meet CE certification requirements, you must be running
your library on an uninterruptable power supply.
This Mass Storage Device has been evaluated and determined to comply
with the Safety Requirements of the International Standard for Information
Technology Equipment, IEC 60950-1, First Edition. The evaluation was
conducted by a Underwriters Laboratories (UL). UL participates in the CB
Scheme as a National Certification Body certified by the IECEE.
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
The Spectra T200, T380, and T680 complies with the following domestic
and international hazardous materials directives.
Waste of Electronic and Electrical Equipment (WEEE) Directive

Note: For information on recycling your Spectra library, please check
the Spectra Logic web site. European Union users should contact
their local waste administration for WEEE collection instructions
for this product.
The WEEE symbol on the back of this product indicates that
this product meets the European Directive 2000/96/EC on
Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment, known as the
WEEE directive. This directive, only applicable in European
Union countries, indicates that this product should not be
disposed of with normal unsorted municipal waste.
Within participating European Union countries, special collection,
recycling, and disposal arrangement have been established for this
product. At the end of life, the product user should dispose of this product
using special WEEE collection systems. These special systems mitigate the
potential affects on the environment and human health that can result
from hazardous substances that may be contained in this product.
478
User Guide 91090000
Hazardous Materials
Restriction of Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic

Equipment (RoHS)
The RoHS marking indicates that this product is in compliance
with European Council Directive 2002/95/EC, on the restriction of
the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic
equipment.
Measures for the Administration of the Control of

Pollution by Electronic Information Products (China)
T200, T380, T680 㦘㹡✛㦘⹂䓸德♙⏒侯

杔㻭柘 ⏼ↆ杻 ⮩䅃勣啾 ⮩䅃勣啾搩
(Pb) (Hg) (Cd) (Cr(VI)) (PBB) (PBDE)
䭐サㄢ X1 O X2 O O O
䭐サ洀┷⣷ X1,4 O O O O O
IBM LTO-3
䭐サ洀┷⣷ X1,8 O O O O O
IBM LTO-4
㛓⍞㧉 X O O O O O
&DPHUD
1. 䟄恾㨎䎙㠨⚺㦘杔ᇭ㦜┰⣷᧨ⷧ⌷⣷✛ⷧ⌷棄⒦侊兮᧨䞷ℝ懻㘴ᇬ≰⚆✛↯戢䤓几八⪉䫏幍㡌
幍⮖᧨ⅴ♙䟄≰几八丰䚕幍⮖䤓䎙㠨掌⚺㦘杔ᇭ
2. 䟄㺣屵䍈✛柘柏⻑᧨ₜ▔㕻 76/769/ECC 㖖ⅳ䤓≽帱㖖ⅳ 91/338/EE 㓏䰐㷱䤓ㄣ䞷᧨㷳䷘㖖ⅳ

⺈㩟K☀棸䓸德䤓嚴枏✛∎䞷⒦㦘啴㄁棟Ⓟ㧰㷍ᇭ
3. 㩣㊶䟄冕⚺㦘◐䅃勣啾搩᧤Deca-PBDE᧥ᇭ啴㄁勩⚗䓸ㄣ䞷䤓 Deca-PBDE 䞷摞怔扖㦏⮶㿢ㄵ

棟⸩⋋᧤MCV᧥ᇭ
4. 杔⚺摞♾厌浧才 3.2 ⏚ᇭ
5. 朱㧟₼䤓杔⚺摞⃉ 0.35%᧨杬⚗摠₼⃉ 0.4%᧨槡杫䷘杫⚗摠₼⃉ 4.0%ᇭ
6. 䟄⷟椅䞆榅ↅ᧤√Ⱁ☚䟄㆞孔函᧥♾厌⚺㦘杔ᇭ
7. 䟄⷟捷ↅ♾厌⚺㦘杔䙊䜒ᇭ
8. 杔⚺摞♾厌浧才 5.0 ⏚ᇭ
479
Notes
480
User Guide 91090000
Glossary of Terms
A
administrator A type of library user who is allowed control of the library, but cannot
control who else is allowed access to the library.
AES-256 Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) algorithm that uses a 256-bit key.
AES is the NIST-approved encryption algorithm that is used by the federal
government and that is being broadly adopted.
AL_PA Arbitrated Loop Physical Address. A unique one-byte value used to

identify a port in a Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop topology. AL_PAs are
dynamically assigned each time the loop is initialized.
ASM Assisted Self-Maintenance. An advanced Technical Support option

wherein certain library components can be stocked on site for faster library
repair.
AutoSupport AutoSupport is a technical support option. Level 1 AutoSupport (the

current release) is included with your library purchase. AutoSupport must
be enabled by entering an activation key code and must be configured with
your data center information and the profiles of data center staff who
attend to the library. Then, if an issue needs attention, data center staff can
use AutoSupport to quickly and easily contact SpectraGuard.
B
BlueScale Software used by Spectra Logic libraries that provides the library
intelligence along with the Spectra Logic encryption solution and key
management.
bus A bus is a collection of wires through which data is transmitted from one
part of a computer to another (or from one device to another).
C
CAN Controller Area Network. The internal bus system over which the library is
controlled.
chambers Semi-enclosed locations where TeraPack magazines are stored inside the
library.
Cleartext Text that is not encrypted.
481
Glossary of Terms — D
CoD The Capacity-on-Demand feature of Spectra Logic libraries. Purchasing

and entering a key code in the library enables additional slots—chambers
in the library—allowing for additional storage capacity.
Controller Controller is another name for QIP; it is assigned to control each partition.
Also see QIP.
D
DAS Direct Attached Storage.
DBA Drive Bay Assembly. Each DBA can contain up to four drive sleds; it can
also contain one QIP for controlling the drives in that DBA. Each DBA
requires its own power supply (an N2 option is available). Each library can
hold up to three DBAs.
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. A protocol for assigning dynamic

IP addresses to devices on a network. With dynamic addressing, a device
can have a different IP address every time it connects to the network. In
some systems, the device’s IP address can even change while it is still
connected. DHCP also supports a mix of static and dynamic IP addresses.
E
EDU Endura Decryption Utility. A command-line data decryption utility that
can be installed on any computer running the Linux operating system, to
be used if no Spectra library is available at time of data decryption and
restoration. To use EDU, attach the recommended two tape drives to the
Linux host running the utility, then use EDU to decrypt data from the
encrypted tape and write the decrypted data back to tape. If you have only
one tape drive, make sure that the Linux host has enough available disk
space to store the data as it’s decrypted from the tape. Once the data is
decrypted and written to tape, it can then be restored using backup
software.
EE pool Entry/exit pool. A configurable number of slots (as chambers) used by

backup software for importing and exporting media.
EE port See TAP.
482
User Guide 91010000
Glossary of Terms — F
F
F-QIP Fibre Channel QIP. An intelligent device that controls the library’s interface
with drives over a Fibre Channel connection. It also provides the control
path for motion commands from the host to the transporter.
failover The automatic substitution of a functionally equivalent system component

for a failed one. Failover provides fault tolerance in a system by protecting
against single failures.
FH Used in the drive identifier to indicate that the drive is a full-height drive.
Fibre Channel The ANSI standard that defines an ultra high-speed, content independent,
multi-level data transmission interface that can support multiple protocols
simultaneously and provide connectivity to millions of devices over
copper and/or fiber optic physical media. Fibre Channel provides the best
characteristics of both networks and channels using SCSI and other Upper
Level Protocols (ULP). Fibre Channel operates at speeds of 200 MB per
second over distances of up to 100 meters using copper media or up to 10
kilometers over optical fiber.
firmware Software embedded within library hardware. Firmware can be updated

through the LC.
H
hard address The AL_PA (Arbitrated Loop Physical Address) that the Fibre Channel
port on a device attempts to acquire during Loop Initialization. The hard
address is set when configuring a F-QIP or direct-attach Fibre Channel
drive in a partition. See also loop ID.
hardware ID A unique number for the library that is required to purchase options or
upgrades. The hardware ID is located in the Option Enablement portion of
the System Setup screen.
HBA Host Bus Adapter. It is a device that connects one or more peripheral units
to a computer. It is typically an expansion card that plugs into the bus.
host The computer system to which your library is connected.
HTML HyperText Markup Language. The document format used on the web.
Web pages are built with HTML tags (codes) embedded in the text. HTML
defines the page layout, fonts, and graphic elements as well as the
hypertext links to other documents on the web.
483
Glossary of Terms — I
HTTP HyperText Transfer Protocol. The communications protocol used to

connect to servers on the web. Its primary function is to establish a
connection with a web server and transmit HTML pages to the client
browser or any other files required by an HTTP application.
I
IP Internet Protocol.
IP address An IP designation that the library uses when accessed remotely over the
internet or an intranet.
I/O Input/output.
L
LAN Local Area Network. A communications network that serves a confined
geographical area. It attaches clients (users’ workstations) and servers that
hold programs and data shared by the clients.
LC Library Controller. The graphical user interface for the library, which can
be accessed from the library’s touch screen or through a keyboard and
monitor connected to the LCM.
LCM Library Control Module. The LCM provides the operating system and
circuitry for the Library Controller (LC), which provides the BlueScale user
interface on the library’s touch screen. The LCM also maintains the MLM
database, system logs, and other information related to the current system
status. An embedded web server provides remote access to the user
interface through the Remote Library Controller (RLC) using a standard
web browser. Also see RCM.
LED Light-Emitting Diode. It lights up when electricity passes through it.
logical library See partition.
loop ID The address of a Fibre Channel port on a Fibre Channel network using an
arbitrated loop topology. The loop ID can be any value from zero to 126.
The Loop ID is used to represent a port’s AL_PA on a loop. During the loop
initialization process (LIP) on an arbitrated loop, a Fibre Channel device
obtains a Loop ID for each of its Fibre Channel ports. If possible, the Loop
ID is the same as the hard address. Also see AL_PA, hard address.
LTO Linear Tape Open. A multi-generational half-inch tape technology

developed in a cooperative effort by HP, IBM, and Seagate (now Certance).
LUN Logical Unit Number. A unique identifier used by a SCSI device that
enables it to address up to eight separate devices (each of which is a logical
unit).
484
User Guide 91010000
Glossary of Terms — M
In the case of a RAID-protected disk array, a LUN represents the logical

disk created from the disk drives in a RAID set. A logical disk can be
created from either all of the space in the RAID set or just a slice of the
space (a disk partition).
M
Mb/sec Megabits per second, a measure of data transfer speed.
MB/sec Megabytes per second, a measure of data transfer speed.
media An individual tape cartridge.
media pack A TeraPack magazine loaded with media.
moniker The nickname an administrator assigns to an encryption key. This moniker

hides the true value of the key, while still giving administrators a method
of managing and referring to the key.
N
NAS Network Attached Storage. A network environment that uses a dedicated
file sharing device. The server processes the data, and the NAS device
delivers the data to the user. A NAS device can exist outside the server in a
LAN.
NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology.
NDMP Network Data Management Protocol. Defines a common architecture for

the way heterogeneous file servers on a network are backed up.
O
operator A type of library user allowed limited access to the library. The operator
can move, import, and export media, but is denied access to more sensitive
library operations such as library configuration, user management, and
diagnostics.
P
package A collection of firmware files that are bundled together to simplify the
installation of firmware upgrades.
485
Glossary of Terms — Q
partition An independently operating subset of the physical library. The subset

behaves as though it were its own physical library, using only drives and
slots assigned to that partition on its creation. Partitions are configured
through the LC. A partition can also be referred to as a logical library or a
virtual library.
physical The entire library, regardless of how it is viewed or used across the
library network (that is, it may be configured to be viewed as one or more
partitions). Compare to partition.
pools Logical sections within a partition—a storage pool used for backups and
restores, and an entry/exit pool for importing and exporting media.
Q
QIP Quad-Interface Processor. The QIP converts Fibre Channel or Gigabit
Ethernet transfer protocols to the current drive communication protocol.
Each QIP controls up to four drives in the library.
R
RCM Robotics Control Module. The RCM maintains all of the information
relating to the logical library, including information about the location and
status of each element in the library and the raw media inventory. The
RCM also contains the circuitry and logic to control the library robotics.
Also see LCM.
RLC Remote Library Controller. Provides the BlueScale web interface for
remote management for the library. Using a specific IP address, the library
can be managed using a standard web browser.
RMA Return Materials Authorization. Required by Spectra Logic for the repair
or exchange of any library components.
robot See transporter.
S
SAN Storage Area Network. A SAN is a network environment involving a high
speed subnetwork allowing storage devices to be shared.
SCSI Small Computer System Interface. SCSI is an interface connection used to

connect peripheral devices to computer systems.
SLS Shared Library Services. A feature of Spectra Logic libraries that allows
users to allocate the library’s resources across various platforms by creating
distinct partitions. Also see partition.
486
User Guide 91010000
Glossary of Terms — S
SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. The standard Internet email protocol. It is a
TCP/IP protocol that defines the message format and the message transfer
agent (MTA), which stores and forwards the mail.
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol. A widely used network

monitoring and control protocol. Data is passed from SNMP agents, which
are hardware and/or software processes reporting activity in each network
device (hub, router, bridge, etc.) to the workstation used to oversee the
network. The agents return information contained in a Management
Information Base (MIB), a data structure that defines what is obtainable
from the device and what can be controlled.
SpectraGuard Spectra Logic’s technical support organization.
SSL Secure Sockets Layer. A security protocol created by Netscape that has
become an international Internet standard for handling sensitive
information. SSL encodes the information sent across the Ethernet
connection to the user accessing the RLC. This is especially important
when the user is accessing user passwords and other sensitive information.
SSL technology is embedded in all popular browsers and engages
automatically when the user connects to a Web server that is SSL-enabled.
Web sites using SSL indicate SSL security with an address that begins with
HTTPS. The S indicates a secure connection.
When a browser connects to an SSL server, it automatically asks the server
for a digital Certificate of Authority (CA). This digital certificate
authenticates the server’s identity, making sure that the domain name
matches the name on the CA, and that the CA has been generated by a
trusted authority and bears a valid digital signature.
Note: Spectra Logic’s CA is self-signed. You may receive a warning
stating this fact when you initially connect a browser to the
library.
static address An unchanging IP identifier permitting remote access to a device through

the Internet or an intranet.
storage pool The logical section in a partition that contains the set of cartridges used for
backups and restores.
su Superuser. A category of library user with full library privileges, including

the ability to configure others’ access to the library.
subnet A division of a network into an interconnected but independent segment

or domain in order to improve performance and security.
superuser A category of library user with full library privileges, including the ability
to configure others’ access to the library.
487
Glossary of Terms — T
support ticket SpectraGuard opens support tickets to record problems experienced with
your library. When a new support ticket is created, it is assigned a number;
the support technician handling the problem uses that ticket to track the
actions taken to resolve the problem.
T
TAP TeraPack Access Port. The TAP provides the means through which
TeraPack magazines are loaded into and unloaded from the library.
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. Provides transport

functions to ensure that the total amount of bytes sent is received correctly
at the other end. TCP/IP is a routable protocol; IP provides this capability.
In a routable protocol, all messages contain not only the address of the
destination station, but the address of a destination network. This allows
messages to be sent to multiple networks around the world or subnets
within an organization, hence its use in Internet communications.
TeraPack The library’s tape handling element. The TeraPack magazine holds
magazine cartridges that the library uses to group and move media.
ticket See support ticket.
transporter The robotic mechanism within the library that moves media packs to
designated locations, moves individual cartridges into and out of tape
drives and TeraPack magazines and moves media packs to and from the
TAP.
U
USB Universal Serial Bus. A hardware interface with a hot-swap capability that
allows it to be plugged in and unplugged without turning off the system.
488
User Guide 91010000
Glossary of Terms — V
V
virtual library See partition.
W
WWN World Wide Name. A unique 48-bit or 64-bit number that identifies a
device or port to the Fibre Channel network. Each Fibre Channel device is
assigned one or more unique identifiers or world-wide names at the time it
is built. These names stay with the device for its lifetime.
X
XML eXtensible Markup Language. A universal format for structured
documents and data on the World Wide Web.
489
Glossary of Terms — X
Notes
490
User Guide 91010000
Index
agency declarations (continued) auto-negotiate, F-QIP fibre
A regulatory 475 to 476 mode 226
RoHS 479 auto-save configuration file
AC power RoHS, China 479 description 282, 286
connecting to library 32 safety 477 enable email 282 to 283
cord and connector types 453 WEEE 478 using to restore
cord locks 404 to 405 air filter library 111 to 115
grounding location 27 AutoSend profile
requirement 403 to 406 configuring 253
replacing 386 to 388
grounding wire 406 including SpectraGuard
alarms, configuring in
specifications 453 AutoSupport 255 to 256 Support 254
switch and connector architecture AutoSupport Log (ASL)
description 32 description 248
Auto Drive Clean 49 to 51
warning 4 sending automatically 257
bus expansion
accessing module 55 to 56 sending manually 258 to 262
air filter 387 cleaning partition 47 See also Log Forwarding
interior connectivity 52 to 58 AutoSupport, configuring
components 347 to 358 AutoSend profile 253
direct-attach FC drives 59
user interface 70 to 71 creating/modifying
entry/exit pool 48
accessories profiles 252 to 255
free pool 48
how to order 442 critical alarm
partitions 45 to 48
media and bar-code notification 255 to 256
storage pool 49
labels 442 deleting profiles 255
asterisk (*)
USB drive 445 log set forwarding
bar code in MLM reports 163
activation key code, entering 271 recipient 257
bar codes in MLM record 192
adding a new user 267 mail recipients 251
expired cleaning
address, drives requirements 250
cartridge 122
direct-attach FC 219 AutoSupport, using
in password field 267
E-QIP partition 231 to 233 creating a new HHM
attention required notification
F-QIP-attached 226 ticket 93 to 96
drive health 197
SCSI ID, direct-attach creating a new support
media health 178 ticket 258 to 262
drive 221
system 76 overview 248 to 250
address, F-QIP ports 225 to 226
auto discovery for MLM-enabled updating a ticket 262 to 263
address, IP address
media, enabling 166 to 167
camera 290 to 293 average status, media health 177
Auto Drive Clean
E-QIP ports 231 to 233
cleaning partition
library 278 to 279 description 47
address, SMTP 281 configuring a cleaning B
Administrator group partition 236 to 238
default user name 71 description 49 to 51 backup
privileges 71 enabling 216 auto-save configuration 286
agency declarations requirements for using 50, encryption keys 320 to 324
EU Declaration of 132 library
Conformity 475 to 476 using to manually clean a configuration 285 to 289
FCC notice 477 drive 413 MLM database 187 to 189
491
Index – C
backup software best practices (continued) BlueScale Vision camera

cleaning cartridge accessibility protecting library’s saved description 29
when using Auto Drive data 421 to 425 See also camera
Clean 124 RXT media 433 to 438 born on date for MLM-enabled
compatibility 459 tape media 425 to 433 media, definition 176
drive cleaning without Auto blackout period for broadcast capacity
Drive Clean 124 PostScan 169 to 170 configuring 168 to 169
importing media into new block sizes, optimizing RXT description 168
partition 128 to 132 performance 435 bulk media
restoring encrypted blockages, removing 345 exports 141
data 326 to 329 BlueScale Drive Lifecycle imports 135
updating media Management
inventory 154 bus expansion module
description 23
use PostScan blackout periods architecture 55 to 56
See also DLM
during backup description 41
BlueScale Encryption
window 183 location 30
components 306
using an RXT drive 37 SCSI connectors 41
key management 324 to 325
backups, continuing while buttons
overview 306
accessing the library camera reset 342
interior 347 Professional Edition,
do not use keyboard Enter
description 307
cleaning tape drives 411 key 81
Standard Edition,
resetting the RCM 338 in status bar 76
description 307
updating drive firmware 416 library power 84
See also encryption
updating library QIP reset 39, 40, 339 to 340
BlueScale EnergyAudit
firmware 395 refresh display 76
description 24
using the USB drive 105 reset, LCM 35, 338
See also power consumption
bar-code labels
BlueScale Hardware Health
asterisk (*) in Inventory
Monitoring
screen 122
asterisk (*) in MLM
description 92 C
record 192 See also HHM
BlueScale Media Lifecycle cables
asterisk (*) in MLM AC connector types 453
reports 163 Management
description 25 chassis grounding wire 406
CLN prefix for cleaning
See also MLM Ethernet, requirements 461
cartridges 124
BlueScale software Fibre Channel,
custom sequences 442 requirements 461
media 42 description 23
Gigabit Ethernet,
placement on cartridges 124 overview 23 to 25 requirements 461
requirements for cleaning version shown on status SCSI, requirements 461
partition 133 bar 77, 389
camera, configuring
role in maintaining the library See also firmware
disabling status bar icon 277
inventory 120 See also user interface
enabling status bar
specifications 468 to 471 BlueScale Software Support key icon 277 to 278
TeraPack magazine 42 expired key 394 IP address, default 291
best practices required for firmware setting a fixed IP
updates 270 address 290 to 293
encryption passwords 310
See also library, firmware setup wizard administrator
entry/exit pool 429
BlueScale user interface name 344
export and protect encryption
features 72 to 78 UDP broadcast discovery 343
keys 320 to 325
See also touch screen using DHCP addressing 344
Gigabit Ethernet 439
See also user interface using the setup
MLM 161 to 163
See also web interface wizard 342 to 345
492
User Guide 91010000
Index – C
camera, description 29 cartridges (continued) chambers (continued)

camera, troubleshooting Spectra Certified Media, changing number in a
reset button 342 MLM-enabled 157 partition 242
resetting to DHCP See also media description 29
addressing 340 to 345 cautions editing partitions 242
camera, using deleting encryption keys 330 changing users 81
accessing software using deleting partitions 245 CHAP (Challenge Handshake
icon 78 do not rewind cleaning Authentication Protocol),
BlueScale Vision viewer cartridges 411 configuring 235 to 236
application 102 to 104 emailing encryption keys 322 chassis grounding 403 to 406
connecting to network 102 encryption key moniker Check Key Files, using to validate
Ethernet connector, length 315 exported key 323
location 102 executing firmware updates cleaning cartridges
icon on status bar 78 during backups 105, 107 asterisk (*) next to slot
overview 102 hardware reconfiguration 64 number 122
viewing documentation 104 installing chamber Born on Date report,
capacity shelves 353 MLM 176
adding 270 label cleaning cartridges 410 Cleans Remaining report,
lost encryption keys 317 MLM 176
hardware ID to purchase
additional 271 lost encryption user CLN bar-code prefix 124
in broadcast view 168 password 312, 315 do not rewind 411
library specifications 450 media 4 exchanging 144 to 146
maximum media storage 450 moving the library 4 expired 50, 122
on-demand, description 270, packaging components for Exported Media report,
444 shipping 448 MLM 176
TeraPack magazines 123 reset after firmware exporting 144 to 146
upgrades 270, 444 update 400 for LTO 467
Capacity-on-Demand (CoD) resetting library importing into cleaning
components 338 partition 132 to 135
See capacity
use approve cleaning importing with no cleaning
See upgrades
cartridges 411 partition 411 to 413
carrying cases, description 442
using EDU with QIP-encrypted label when stored in
cartridges data 318 library 410
adding to MLM database 156, Certified Media MLM health status icons 177
157
cleaning cartridges 159 purchasing 442
asterisk (*) in MLM
description 441 requirements 411
record 192
for use with MLM 157 tracking use 414
asterisk (*) in MLM
report 163 MLM alert 165 using 411
bar-code labels 124 MLM-enabled 156 cleaning notification
cleaning, import into cleaning purchasing 442 LTO 367
partition 132 to 135 See also media SDLT 380, 381
export/exchange 140 to 144 chamber shelves cleaning partition
import into entry/exit installing 352 to 354 assign chambers 238
pool 128 to 132 removing 350 to 351 associating with a data
import into storage chambers partition 216
pool 135 to 138 assigning to cleaning configuring 236 to 238
LTO MAM, description 157 partition 238 description 47
preparing for use 123 to 125 assigning to data exchanging cleaning
setting write-protect partition 215 to 217 cartridges 144 to 146
switch 125 exporting cleaning
cartridges 144 to 146
493
Index – C
cleaning partition (continued) configuration, AutoSupport configuration, library (continued)

for Global Spare 236 configuring alarms 255 to 256 user-based security 71
importing cleaning creating/modifying verifying backup file 288
cartridges 132 to 135 profiles 251 to 255 web server port 274
Maintenance TeraPack deleting profiles 255 configuration, MLM
requirement 124 log set forwarding 257 alerts 165
media type 237, 238 mail recipients 251 broadcast capacity 168
naming 237 requirements 250 configure PostScan blackout
using for manual drive configuration, camera IP periods 169 to 170
cleaning 413 address 290 to 293, 340 to 345 enable/disable 165
cleaning tape drives 408 to 414 configuration, DLM, enable/ Media Auto
cleans remaining, MLM disable 165 Discovery 166 to 167
report 176 configuration, encryption non-certified media 165
CoD, See capacity assign key to configuration, partitions
command processing, progress partition 317 to 320 confirm and save
bar 78 create key 315 to 317 settings 239 to 241
compact flash card initialization mode 314 creating cleaning
configuration data stored 36 password 314 to 315 partitions 236 to 238
saving drive dumps 363 requirements 312 creating data
saving traces 335 configuration, library partitions 209 to 236
compatibility accessing the System Setup drive visibility 224 to 225, 230
between LTO-4 and F-QIP screen 269 entry/exit pool 215 to 217
encryption 306 backing up, automatic 286 E-QIP iSCSI options 233
host interface 460 backing up, E-QIP port IP
LTO read/write 467 manual 286 to 289 addresses 231 to 233
MLM media 171 to 173 date and time 275 F-QIP port
software 459 display refresh rate 274 addressing 225 to 226
software, using emulation 294 to 295 modifying 242 to 245
emulation 294 enable and configure overview 206
compliance Observatory 296 to 297 robotic control path
FCC notice 477 enable email for auto-save visibility 223 to 224, 229
hazardous materials file 282 to 283 storage pool 215 to 217
directives 478 to 479 enable for user access 219, 223, 228
KCC 476 StorNext 301 to 303 configuration, system settings
regulatory agency 475 to 476 enable/disable metrics changing 273 to 285
safety agency 477 monitoring 276 defaults 274
components enable/disable Soft connectivity
Power 276
front panel 27 drives 55 to 58
firmware package
identifiers 51 to 52 example of using QIPs 57
servers 298 to 299
interior 28 to 29 overview, using QIPs 52 to 58
IP address 278 to 279
power supply 31 QIPs 52 to 54, 57 to 58
library name, as identifier for
rear panel 30 to 33 remote access 274 SCSI bus 55 to 56
configuration file mail recipients 280 to 281 transporter 52 to 54
auto-save, using to restore restore using a manual using direct-attached FC
library 111 to 115 backup 115 to 116 drives 55
creating 286 to 288 restore using auto-saved using SCSI drives,
using to restore file 111 to 115 example 57 to 58
library 115 to 116 Rotation Manager 300 connectors
Configuration toolbar, settings checklist 65 AC power 31
overview 74 bus expansion module 41
SNMP 283 to 285
494
User Guide 91010000
Index – D
connectors (continued) data partitions (continued) DLM (continued)

E-QIP 40 Auto Drive Clean icon 241 how it works 195
Ethernet, camera 102 configuring new 209 to 236 requirements for drive
Ethernet, LCM 36 export/exchange test 201
F-QIP 39 media 140 to 144 saving report 198
international power 455 importing media, entry/exit tape usage 200
keyboard, mouse, and pool 129 to 132 testing a drive 201 to 204
monitor 36 importing media, storage documentation
LCM 35 pool 135 to 138 check release notes for
main AC power 32 media type 211 updates 18
network cables 460 naming 211 related to drive use 18
specifications, AC power 453 using Auto Drive Clean 216 related to library use 17
USB port 36 database, MLM typographical conventions 19
contacting Spectra Logic 5 deleting records 191 Drive Bay Assembly, See DBA
controller, See QIPs download as a CSV drive cleaning notification
file 192 to 194 BlueScale interface 409
cooling requirements 456 to 457
maximum number of LTO 367
copying firmware from USB
records 160
drive 107 SDLT 380, 381
date
cord locks Drive Control Module (DCM),
in status bar 76 firmware version 98
electrical shock warning 403,
453 setting 275 drive dump files
installing 404 to 405 DBA retrieving 362 to 364
cover, TeraPack magazine 427 description 30 saving 363
creating an encryption key 315 identifiers 52 Drive Lifecycle Management, See
Critical Alarms location 30 DLM
AutoSend profile 253 QIP-attach drives 57 Drive Performance Monitor
configuring in DCM firmware, description 397 enabling/disabling 276
AutoSupport 255 to 256 DCM, firmware version 98 using 89 to 90
description 249 to 250 default settings drive sled
custom bar-code labels, camera, fixed IP address 344 connector locations 37
purchasing 442 system configuration 274 description 37
user names and passwords 71 drive identifiers 37
deleting interface connectors 38
D encryption key 330 drives, configuring
library users 268 adding new 419
data MLM records 191 as Global Spare 213 to 214
compressing before partitions 245 assigning to partitions 216
encryption 308 DHCP, using for drive-based encryption 319
integrity and security provided camera IP address 344 element addresses after
by TAP 35 E-QIP IP address 232 installing additional 64
library capacity 450 library IP address 278 to 279 Fibre Channel, direct-attach
restoring direct-attach configuration partition 217 to 219
encrypted 326 to 329 port visibility description 57
Fibre Channel
data cartridges partition 217 to 219 port visibility, E-QIP 230
See cartridges SCSI partition 220 to 221 port visibility,
See media DLM F-QIP 224 to 225
data partitions drive health status 200 replacing 420
architecture 47 enable/disable 165, 196 SCSI IDs 221
assign chambers and generating reports 198 to 200 SCSI, direct-attach
drives 215 partition 220 to 221
health status icons 197
495
Index – E
drives, configuring (continued) drives, using encryption (continued)

SCSI, in an E-QIP activating Global Spare initialization mode 314 to 315
partition 227 to 236 drive 107 to 110 library-based 309
SCSI, in an F-QIP DLM health status icons 197 password to access 310
partition 225 to 226 DLM monitoring 197 to 200 performed by F-QIP 40
drives, connectivity Global Spare icons 109 performed by LTO-4
direct-attach Fibre identifiers in BlueScale drives 463
Channel 55 interface 52 read/write unencrypted
direct-attach SCSI 55 to 56 LTO-4 encryption tapes 123
QIP-attached SCSI 57 to 58 compatibility 306 requirements for using 312
drives, firmware reclaiming a Global Spare 110 restoring encrypted
current version 98 related documentation 18 data 326 to 329
device drivers 414 supported interfaces 38 reusing encrypted
updating using firmware supported types 36 tapes 331 to 332
tape 417 to 418 viewing performance using direct-attach drives 319
updating using ITDT 416 metrics 89 to 90 using EDU with QIP-encrypted
view current viewing status 98 data 329
version 415 to 416 WWN assigned to FC using partitions to manage 47
drives, general information drive 99 encryption key
descriptions 36 to 38 assigning to a
purchasing upgrades 445 partition 317 to 320
creating a moniker 315 to 317
drives, monitoring with DLM E deleting 330
generating reports 198 to 200
saving a report 198 EE pool, See entry/exit pool export before deleting 330
drives, specifications EE port, See TAP exporting 320 to 324
environmental, RXT 472 email guidelines for
heat dissipation 456 configuring protecting 324 to 325
performance, LTO 462 to 465 recipients 280 to 281 importing using USB
drive dump results 363 drive 327
performance, SDLT 465
enabling for auto-save importing using web
read/write compatibility, LTO
file 282 to 283 interface 328 to 329
generations 467
Spectra Logic offices 5 moniker 310
drives, troubleshooting
trace results 335 password to import/
all types 364
export 310
DLM tape usage 200 See also mail recipients
protect against lost 317
drive errors, reported by emulation
rules for creating
DLM 200 changes to STK L700 emulation
monikers 316
LTO 365 to 379 mode 294
validating exported 323
power-cycling 362 configuring 294 to 295
verifying backup 323
resetting 360 to 361 description 294
EnergyAudit
retrieving dump enabling options 271
description 24
files 362 to 364 encryption
See also power consumption
RXT 381 to 383 BlueScale Encryption
overview 306 entering information
SDLT 379 to 381
configuring 312 to 317 using external keyboard 82
sense code lookup 359
data compression 308 using soft keyboard 82
serial number 98
deleting key 330 using the web interface 81
test using DLM 201 to 204
drive-based 309 entry/exit pool
using Knowledge Base 359
enabling for F-QIP best practices 429
partitions 318 configuring 215 to 217
exporting key 320 to 324 exporting media 141 to 143
496
User Guide 91010000
Index – F
entry/exit pool (continued) error messages (continued) fan assembly

importing media 128 to 132 SDLT drive cleaning installing 354
loading empty notification 380, 381 removing 350
magazines 139 to 140 Ethernet connector fax numbers, Spectra Logic 5
partition requirements 206 camera 102 FC drive, See Fibre Channel drives
preparing for use 139 to 140 E-QIP, location 40 features
understanding 48 LCM, location 35 BlueScale user interface
viewing inventory 120 to 122 use on LCM or RCM 36 overview 23 to 25
entry/exit port Ethernet network library hardware 26 to 27
See entry/exit pool camera IP address 290 to 293 user interface 72 to 78
See TAP configuring library port Fibre Channel
environmental specifications settings 274 cable requirements 461
library, operating 458 E-QIP IP address 231 to 233 connectivity 52 to 58
library, shipping and E-QIP iSCSI options 233 protocol support 461
storing 458, 472 library IP address 278 to 279 WWN assigned to FC
RXT drives 472 Ethernet protocol used by drive 99
RXT media 474 E-QIP 227 WWN assigned to FC
tape media 466 EU Declaration of partition 100 to 101
E-QIP Conformity 475 to 476 Fibre Channel drives
connectors 40 events, configuring connection requirements 38
alarms 255 to 256 connector locations 37
description 40
exported media, MLM 176 direct-attach 38
reset button 40
exporting drive sled connectors 38
E-QIP, partition configuration
encryption key 320 to 324 loop IDs 219
CHAP settings 235 to 236
media, Advanced Import/ sled connector locations 37
drive visibility on ports 230
Export 147
Ethernet protocol 227 Fibre Channel QIP, See F-QIP
exporting drive or QIP,
iSCSI configuration Fibre Mode for F-QIP, partition
definition 212
options 233 configuration 226
exporting QIP port addressing
network address 231 to 233 filter, replacing 386 to 388
E-QIP-attach SCSI drive
port addresses 231 to 233 firmware, drives
partition 231
port addressing 231 to 233 current version 415 to 416
F-QIP-attach SCSI drive
error codes partition 226 preparing to update 415
for drive troubleshooting 359 exporting/exchanging media updating RXT drives 436
for library from cleaning updating tape
troubleshooting 333 partition 144 to 146 drives 414 to 418
LTO-2 drives 375 to 379 from data partition 141 to 144 firmware, library
LTO-3 drives 368 to 374 BlueScale Software Support
LTO-4 drives 368 to 374 key required for
updates 270
RXT drives 382 to 383
SDLT drives 380
F check release notes for updated
information 18
error condition fabric, loop ID configuring a package
drives, reported by DLM 200 direct-attach FC drive 219 server 298 to 299
HHM threshold, status exporting F-QIP 226 current version 77, 389
notification 78 F-QIP-attach SCSI drive 226 downloading 393
media 178 failover for individual
system, status notification 76 configuring using dual-port components 390
error messages LTO-4 FC drives 59 managing
for library 88 power supplies 31 packages 402 to 403
LTO drive cleaning robotic control path 208 Package Update screen 298
notification 367
497
Index – G
firmware, library (continued)

preparing to update 392 G H
requirements for using
firmware tape 417 gateway address handling media
storing on USB drive 393 setting for E-QIP 232 best practices, RXT 437
support requirements for setting for library 279 best practices, tape media 426
updates 64, 389, 394, 443 General toolbar, overview 73 hard address
supported packages 389 Gigabit Ethernet for direct-attach FC
updating, best practices 439 drives 219
advanced 400 to 402 cable requirements 461 F-QIP 226
updating, protocol support 461 Hardware Health Monitoring
standard 395 to 400 using DHCP addressing 232 description 24
upgrade policy 443 using iSNS 233 See also HHM
upgrading from a USB See also E-QIP hardware ID
drive 397 locating 271
See also IP SANs
upgrading, best practices 389, required to purchase
See also iSCSI
389 options 271
Global Spare
flash codes hardware upgrades
backup application
LTO-2 375 to 379 power supplies 445
guidelines 108
LTO-3 368 to 374 requirements when
cartridge in drive following
LTO-4 368 to 374 reset 336 purchasing 446
SDLT 380 cleaning the drive 236 throughput 445
flex bays configuring 213 to 214 hardware, reconfiguration
description 30 description 24 caution 64
location 30 drive status icons 109 hazardous materials directives,
F-QIP compliance 478 to 479
partition requirements 213
connectors 39 heat dissipation 456
reclaiming 110 to 110
description 39 HHM
use requirements 107
enabling encryption 318 creating an AutoSupport
using 107 to 110
fabric mode 226 ticket 93 to 96
good status
loop mode 226 icon 78
drive health 197
reset button 39 using to monitor library
media health 177 health 92
See also QIPs system 76 viewing library health
F-QIP, partition configuration grounding wire data 96 to 98
auto-negotiate fibre electrical shock warning 403,
mode 226 453
port addressing 225 to 226 installing 406
using SCSI drives 222 to 226 grouped media, advantages 43
I
free pool groups IBM LTO, See LTO
contains magazines after library users 71 icons
configuration restore 113
security 71 camera 78
description 48
guidelines DLM drive health 197
front panel
MLM 161 to 163 enabling the camera
component descriptions 27
protecting encryption icon 277 to 278
component locations 27 keys 324 to 325 Error condition 76
installing 355 to 356 protecting library’s saved Global Spare drive 109
removing 348 to 349 data 421 to 425
Information 76
using tape media 425 to 433
keyboard 79
Maintenance 78
498
User Guide 91010000
Index – K
icons (continued) initialization IP address

MLM media health 177 encryption availability 308 camera 290 to 293
Notice 76 library power-on 84 displayed on status bar 77
refresh button 76 secure mode, no encryption on E-QIP 231 to 233
status bar 76 startup 308 library gateway address 279
Switch User 81 standard mode, encryption library,
system messages 76 enabled on startup 308 configuring 278 to 279
System OK 76 initialization mode, library, using DHCP 278
encryption 314 to 315 IP SANs, best practices 439
system status 76
installation overview 61 IPv6 support, description 279
identifiers
installing iSCSI
for drives 37, 52
air filter 387 best practices 439
for QIPs 52
chamber shelves 352 to 354 E-QIP configuration
used by BlueScale
interface 51 to 52 fan assembly 354 options 233
Import/Export TeraPack Cases front panel 355 to 356 See also Gigabit Ethernet
screen side access panels 358 iSNS, using in an E-QIP
Advanced Import/Export 147 interfaces partition 233
available options 137 connectivity 52 to 58 ITDT, using to update LTO drive
import media to cleaning drive connections 39 firmware 416
partition 134 Fibre Channel 461
import media to entry/exit Gigabit Ethernet 461
pool 130 library connections 39 K
using to export media 142, SCSI bus 461
145 supported for host 460 key
using to import media 137 USB 461 entering activation code 271
importing an encryption key interior components See also encryption key
using USB drive 327 access warning 347 key management tasks 324 to 325
using web accessing from the keyboard
interface 328 to 329 front 348 to 356 LCM connectors 36
importing cleaning cartridges accessing from the supported characters 82
into cleaning side 357 to 358 touch screen 82
partition 132 to 135 descriptions 28 to 29 using Enter key 82
into data partition 411 to 413 Internet, IPv6 support, using external 82
importing media description 279 using the web interface 81
Advanced Import/Export 147 interoperability, software 459 Knowledge Base
bulk imports 135 inventory about 333
entry/exit pool 129 to 132 backup software, updating accessing 5, 333
individual tapes 128 to 132 after an import 154
drive sense code lookup 359
into a cleaning bar-code information 42
library sense code lookup 333
partition 132 to 135 description 120
into storage pool 136 to 138 during PostScan
storage pool 135 to 138 operation 183
TAP operation 131 expired cleaning L
using entry/exit cartridge 122
labels, bar-code
pool 128 to 132 locating media 150 to 152
best practices, tape media 426
improper packaging, charges for managing dense storage 42
damage 448 for cleaning cartridges 124
moving media within a
initial configuration, overview 63 partition 150 to 154 ordering custom bar-code
sequences 442
storing in NVRAM 42
placement on cartridges 124
viewing 120 to 122
499
Index – L
labels, bar-code (continued) library, components (continued) library, firmware

RXT media 438 rear panel 30 to 33 advanced update
specifications 468 to 471 touch screen, description 33 procedure 400 to 402
LC library, configuring check release notes for updated
description 33 adding capacity 270 information 18
web server 35 auto-save configuration file, download updates 393
See also operator panel description 282 expired BlueScale Software
backing up Support key 394
See also user interface
settings 285 to 289 standard update
See also web interface
date and time 275 procedure 395 to 400
LCM
emulation 294 to 295 viewing current version 77,
capturing traces 334 to 336 389
configuration data on compact enable camera icon 277 to 278
library, installation
flash card 36 enable email for auto-save
file 282 to 283 moving 64
connecting a USB drive 105
enable media auto overview 61
connector locations 35
discovery 166 to 167 recycling 478
description 35 to 36
enable/disable metrics library, maintaining
Ethernet connection 36
monitoring 276 replacing the air
inserting a USB drive 104 filter 386 to 388
enable/disable Soft
location 30 Power 276 updating firmware 388 to 402
resetting 338 enabling firmware library, overview
restoring library updates 270 BlueScale features 23 to 25
configuration 111 to 116 enabling/disabling connectivity 52 to 59
USB port 36 performance hardware features 26 to 27
See also LC monitoring 276
library, specifications
LEDs enabling/disabling power
data capacity 450
codes, SDLT drive cleaning consumption
monitor 276 environmental 458
notification 380, 381
Global Spare tape host interfaces supported 460
LTO status 366
drive 213 to 214 shock and vibration
power supply module status,
initial installation 63 limits 459
drive frame 32
IP address 278 to 279 size and weight, installed 451
SDLT tape drives 380
mail recipients 280 to 281 size and weight, shipping 452
library configuration
Observatory 296 to 297 library, troubleshooting
in auto-save configuration
file 286 package server 298 to 299 accessing interior
components 347 to 358
restore from auto-save restoring a saved
file 111 to 115 configuration 111 to 116 calibrate touch screen 407
restore from manual Rotation Manager 300 capturing traces 334 to 336
backup 115 to 116 setting name 274 cartridge in Global Spare
Library Control Module (LCM), See following a reset or power-
setting web server port 274
LCM cycle 336
SNMP 283 to 285
Library Controller (LC), See LC recovering media after power
StorNext support 301 to 303 failure 336
library messages, checking 88 system settings 273 to 285 removing blockages 345
library software license 3 system settings, defaults 274 resetting a QIP 339 to 340
library, cautions and warnings 4 users, adding new 267 resetting camera to DHCP
library, components users, deleting 268 addressing 340 to 345
AC power connectors 32 users, modifying existing 268 resetting library 337
front panel 27 to 28
resetting the LCM 338
interior 28 to 29
sense code lookup 333
main AC power switches 32
using Knowledge Base 333
power supplies 31
500
User Guide 91010000
Index – M
library, using logging in/logging out of MAM, description 157

activating Global Spare tape library 81 Manage Package Servers
drive 107 to 110 loop ID screen 299
best practices, saved for direct-attach FC media
data 421 to 425 drives 219 caution 4
BlueScale software version on F-QIP-attach SCSI drive MLM alerts 165
status bar 77 partition 225 to 226 using multiple types 43
check release notes for loop mode, F-QIP 226 Media Auto Discovery, how it
documentation LTO works 157
updates 18 cartridge capacities 466 Media Check
connectivity cartridge MAM 157 MLM reporting 171
overview 52 to 58
drive specifications 462 to 465 tracking non-MLM-enabled
importing cleaning
read/write compatibility 467 media 160
cartridges 132 to 135
recycling encrypted Media Lifecycle Management, See
importing media 127 to 138
tapes 309, 331 to 332 MLM
logging in 79 to 80
tapes per TeraPack media, general information
logging out or switch users 81 magazine 42 accessories 442
name used in email troubleshooting bar-code labels,
messages 274 drives 365 to 379 purchasing 442
power-off procedure 84 LTO-4 encryption 309, 463 carrying cases 442
power-on sequence 84 LVD SCSI, See SCSI Certified Media,
preparing entry/exit description 441
pool 139 to 140
purchasing certified
reclaiming a Global Spare 110 media 442
related documentation 17 M See also cartridges, MLM, RXT
restrictions while PostScan media
magazines
runs 182 media, import/export
in free pool 113
saved metadata 423 bulk imports 135
in TAP after a power
security, users and groups 71 during PostScan
failure 336
Soft Power to power operation 183
Maintenance TeraPack 124
off 85 to 86 exchanging from entry/exit
See also TeraPack magazine
software compatibility 459 pool or storage pool 143
mail recipients
switching or logging out exporting from entry/exit pool
user 81 AutoSupport 251
or storage pool 141 to 143
viewing drive status 98 configuring 280 to 281
exporting/exchanging while
viewing media See also email running PostScan 140
inventory 120 to 122 mailing address, Spectra Logic 5 importing into a new
viewing metrics 87 to 92 main office, Spectra Logic 5 partition 135 to 138
viewing status 76 maintenance importing into entry/exit
WWN for FC best practices 437 pool 128 to 132
partition 100 to 101 drive firmware 414 to 418 importing into storage
library, using name displayed on library firmware 388 to 400 pool 136 to 138
status bar 77 replacing the air importing while running
license, library software 3 filter 386 to 388 PreScan or PostScan 127
load count, MLM 176 tape drive cleaning 408 to 414 overview 127, 127 to 128
local access, touch screen Maintenance TeraPacks preparing entry/exit
interface 70 for cleaning partitions 124 pool 139 to 140
Log Set Forwarding identifying 124 update backup software
configuring recipient 257 inventory 154
See also TeraPack magazine
description 248 using a specific
Maintenance toolbar,
location 147 to 149
See also AutoSupport overview 74
501
Index – M
media, inventory media, using (continued) MLM (continued)

description 120 recycling encrypted configuring PreScan for a
during PostScan tapes 331 to 332 partition 220, 222, 228
operation 183 requirements when using enable/disable 165
expired cleaning cartridge MLM 171 to 173 features 156 to 160
indicator 122 rotation example 430 to 433 generating reports 175 to 179
viewing 120 to 122 saving MLM how it works 156 to 160
media, RXT reports 179 to 181 initiating manual
best practices 433 to 438 storage guidelines, tape discovery 173
description 43 media 427 to 428 library firmware
specifications 473 to 474 tape media, best compatibility 171 to 173
practices 425 to 433 manually add a tape to
media, using
TeraPack magazines 42 PostScan
availability of MLM
reports 171 type for cleaning queue 184 to 185
partition 238 media auto
enable/disable MLM 165
type for data partition 211 discovery 166 to 167
enabling MLM auto
discovery 166 to 167 usage information in DLM Media Auto Discovery,
report 200 description 157
environmental specifications,
tape 466 Medium Auxiliary Memory, See media
MAM compatibility 171 to 173
Exported Media report,
MLM 176 messages pause PostScan operation 186
generating MLM date and time stamp 275 PostScan, how it
reports 175 to 179 HHM notification 93 works 182 to 183
handling guidelines, tape icons, MLM media health 177 PreScan and PostScan,
media 426 icons, system status 76 description 159
in cleaning partitions 132 library name 274 PreScan and PostScan,
enabling 159
labeling guidelines 426 LTO cleaning notification 367
PreScan, how it works 181
located in entry/exit pool 48 SDLT cleaning
notification 380 report options for saving 180
located in free pool 48
types 76 saving reports 179 to 181
located in storage pool 49
metadata stopping media
locating in library 150 to 152
discovery 175
LTO cartridge capacities 466 best practices 421 to 425
tracking non-MLM-enabled
LTO WORM media 467 definition 421
media 160
manually add to PostScan types 423
using 175 to 194
queue 184 to 185 See also encryption keys
MLM database
MLM best See also library configuration
adding cartridges 156, 157
practices 161 to 163 See also MLM database
backed up in auto-save
MLM Born on Date metrics file 286
report 176 drive performance 89 to 90 backing up 187 to 189
MLM health score 177 power consumption 91 deleting records 191
MLM health status icons 177 storage density 91 description 158
MLM Last Write/Read Time MLM
report 176 download as a CSV
best practices 161 to 163 file 192 to 194
MLM Load Count report 176
broadcast capacity 168 maximum number of
MLM Media Health
configure PostScan blackout records 160
report 176
periods 169 to 170 restoring 117, 190
MLM Remaining Capacity
configuring 164 to 166 restoring using auto-save
report, MLM 176
configuring PreScan and file 111 to 115
MLM Write Errors report 176
PostScan for MLM records, asterisk (*) next to
moving in partition through partition 217 to 218 bar-code label 192
user interface 150 to 154
502
User Guide 91010000
Index – N
MLM reports network connectivity, See partitions (continued)

asterisk (*) next to bar-code connectivity deleting 245
label 163 network settings, configuring for description 45
Born on Date 176 library 278 to 279 precautions before
Cleans Remaining 176 deleting 245
Exported Media 176 PreScan and PostScan
Last Write/Read Time 176 O overview 159
Load Count 176 understanding 45 to 48
Media Health 176 Observatory using multiple,
Remaining Capacity 176 configuring 296 to 297 advantages 47
Write Errors 176 description 296 See also cleaning partitions
modes, encryption using 297 See also data partitions
secure initialization, no On/Off main AC switches 32 See also partitions, configuring
encryption on startup 308 operating environment See also partitions, using
standard initialization, library 458 partitions, configuring
encryption enabled on RXT drives 472 assigning an encryption
startup 308 RXT media 474 key 317 to 320
monikers, encryption tape media 466 assigning drives 216
considerations 310 Operator group changing number of
creating 315 to 317 chambers 242
default user name 71
rules for creating 316 cleaning, for automatic drive
privileges 71
monitor, LCM connector 36 cleaning 236 to 238
operator panel
mouse, LCM connector 36 confirm and save
description 33 settings 239 to 241
moving the library, cautions 4 See also touch screen creating automatically 210
See also user interface data, new 209 to 236
See also web interface enabling
N options encryption 317 to 320
capacity 270, 444 entry/exit pool
names enabling with activation requirements 206
as identifier used in library code 271 E-QIP, using SCSI
messages 274 requirements when drives 227 to 236
cleaning partitions 237 purchasing 271, 446 F-QIP port visibility for
data partitions 211 viewing currently drives 224 to 225
library identifier for remote enabled 271 F-QIP, using SCSI
access 274 drives 222 to 226
library, displayed on status Global Spare requirements for
bar 77
library, used in email
P PostScan 213
maximum data partitions 206
messages 274 media type, cleaning
package server,
network configuring 298 to 299 partition 238
E-QIP IP address 231 to 233 Package Update screen 298 media type, data
E-QIP iSCSI configuration packages, See firmware partition 211
options 233 MLM PreScan 220, 222, 228
packaging, improper when
interface cable shipping 448 MLM PreScan and
requirements 461 PostScan 217 to 218
partitions
IP address, library 278 to 279 modify an existing 242 to 245
cleaning, for automatic drive
See also fabric, loop ID cleaning 47 overview 206
Network Camera Setup Wizard, conceptual illustration 46 robotics control path 212
use to configure
configure user access 221
camera 342 to 344
data, for virtual libraries 47
503
Index – P
partitions, configuring (continued) PostScan Power Drive On/Off utility, use

running PreScan or PostScan cleaning the Global Spare with caution 362
while creating, modifying, drive 183 power off, using Soft Power
or deleting 207 configure blackout control 85 to 86
storage pool periods 169 to 170 power supplies
requirements 206 configuring for description 31
user access 219, 223, 228 partition 217 to 218 location 31
using direct-attach FC creating partitions while purchasing 445
drives 217 to 219 running 207 status LEDs 31
using direct-attach SCSI enabling 159 power supply bay 31
drives 220 to 221 exporting/exchanging media power switches, main AC,
partitions, using while running 140 description 32
importing cleaning Global Spare PreScan
cartridges 132 to 135 requirements 213, 213
configuring for
importing media 127 to 138 how it works 182 to 183 partition 217 to 218, 220,
importing media the first importing media while 222, 228
time 135 to 138 running 127 creating partitions while
preparing entry/exit library operation running 207
pool 139 to 140 restrictions 182 enabling 159
viewing inventory 120 to 122 manually add a tape to how it works 181
WWN for FC queue 184 to 185
importing media while
partition 100 to 101 operations not permitted while running 127
passwords running 186
privileges, security 71
default 80 pausing operation 186
profiles in AutoSupport
encryption 314 to 315 queue processing 182
creating/
encryption features using blackout periods during modifying 251 to 255
access 310 backup window 183
deleting 255
entering or changing 267 power
progress bar 78
guidelines for creating 310 chassis grounding 403 to 406
protecting encryption
to import/export encryption cord and connector types 453 keys 324 to 325
key 310 cord locks 404 to 405 protocol support
used with encryption 310 enabling/disabling Soft E-QIP 461
performance, optimizing Power 276
Ethernet (E-QIP) 227
RXT 435 to 436 grounding wire 406
Fibre Channel 461
phone numbers, Spectra Logic input specifications 453
SCSI 461
offices 5 requirements 453 to 455
purchasing
policies, RMA 448 Soft Power
cleaning cartridges 442
pools confirmation 85 to 86
custom bar-code labels 442
description 48 Soft Power, description 85
drives 445
example of use 46 turn off library 84
media and accessories 442
See also entry/exit pool turn on library 84
power supplies 445
See also free pool using Soft Power 85 to 86
TeraPack magazines 442
See also storage pool power button
USB drives 445
poor status description 34
drive health 197 location 27, 84
media health 178 power consumption
port visibility on QIPs 57, 225, 230 enabling/disabling
monitoring 276
specifications 456 to 457
viewing metrics 91
504
User Guide 91010000
Index – Q
regulatory agency resetting

Q compliance 475 to 476 camera to DHCP 340 to 345
remaining capacity, MLM 176 caution after firmware
QIPs remote access update 400
connectivity 52 to 54, 57 to 58 exporting encryption key 322 caution, trace data 338
connectivity example 57 importing encryption drives 360 to 361
description 39 key 328 to 329 LCM 338
description of exporting 54 remote access, See web interface library 337
drive visibility 224 to 225, 230 Remote Library Controller (RLC), QIPs 339 to 340
encryption 54 See RLC restore
Fibre Channel (F-QIP), remote support, description 77 encrypted data 326 to 329
description 39 removing library
Fibre Channel configuration air filter 387 configuration 111 to 116
example 57 chamber shelves 350 to 351 MLM database 117, 190
Gigabit Ethernet (E-QIP), fan assembly 350 Retrieve Drive Dump utility for
description 40 library front panel 348 to 349 retrieving drive dump file 363
identifiers 52 side access panels 357 to 358 returns, using an RMA 448
location 30 repair, RMA policy 448 RLC
port visibility 225, 230 reports description 70
reset using Reset Controller generating for See also web interface
utility 339 DLM 198 to 200 RMA numbers, using 448
resetting 339 to 340 generating for robot, See transporter
WWN, F-QIP 54 MLM 175 to 179 robotics
See also E-QIP MLM, Born on Date 176 control path failover 208
See also F-QIP MLM, Cleans Remaining 176 control path, configuring 212
Quad Interface Processors, See QIPs MLM, Exported Media 176 control path, QIP-attached
Quantum SDLT, See SDLT MLM, Last Write/Read drive partition 58
Time 176 F-QIP hard addressing 226
MLM, Load Count 176 F-QIP soft addressing 226
R MLM, Media Health 176 port visibility, E-QIP 229
MLM, Remaining port visibility,
RAID Capacity 176 F-QIP 223 to 224
description 434 MLM, Write Errors 176 removing blockages 345
levels for RXT media 434 saving for DLM 198 selecting control path 212
overview 434 saving for MLM 179 to 181 robotics control path 208
RAID level, impact on RXT transfer requirements direct-attach drives 53
rates 435 bar-code labels 468 to 471 Rotation Manager
rear panel components 30 to 33 environmental, library 458 configuring 300
rebooting library 337 environmental, RXT description 300
recycling encrypted LTO-4 drives 472
RXT drives
media 309 environmental, RXT
description 37
redundancy, power supplies 31 media 474
enable SCSI disconnects 436
refresh display environmental, tape
media 466 environmental
setting refresh rate 274
specifications 472
status bar button 77 network cables 461
factors affecting
time of last update 77 power 453 to 455
performance 435 to 436
updating information 77 Reset Controller utility
LTO emulation 37
regulations, safety to reset drives 340, 361
optimum block sizes 435
compliance 477 to reset QIPs 339
specifications 471 to 472
troubleshooting 381 to 383
505
Index – S
RXT media SDLT shipping

best practices 433 to 438 drive specifications 465 library environment 458, 472
description 43 LEDs 380 RMA on return label 448
factors affecting tapes per TeraPack shock and vibration limits,
performance 435 to 436 magazine 42 library 459
handling 437 troubleshooting side access panels
preparing for use 126 drives 379 to 381 installing 358
specifications 473 to 474 secure initialization 308 removal warning 347
storing, best practices 437 security removing 357 to 358
supported RAID configuring users 71 slots, upgrading capacity 270, 444
levels 434 to 435 default users 71 SLS
See also media groups 71 description 45
privileges 71 See also partitions
Security toolbar, overview 75 SMPT address, setting 281
S self-maintenance SNMP, configuring 283 to 285
drive firmware 414 to 418 soft address
safety agency compliance 477 library firmware 388 to 400 drives, F-QIP-attached 226
sales, contacting 5 replacing the air for direct-attach FC
Save Library Configuration utility, filter 386 to 388 drives 219
using 286 to 288 tape drive cleaning 408 to 414 robotics, F-QIP 226
saving data to a USB drive 106 Send Log Sets soft keyboard
SCD codes configuring 251 to 255 description 70
LTO drive cleaning description 248 on touch screen 82
notification 367 sense codes Soft Power
LTO-2 drives 375 to 379 drive troubleshooting 359 description 85
LTO-3 drives 368 to 374 drives, lookup on web enabling/disabling 276
LTO-4 drives 368 to 374 site 359 using 85 to 86
RXT drives 382 to 383 library, lookup on web software
WORM media error 367 site 333
BlueScale Software Support
SCSI serial number key, required for firmware
cable requirements 461 drive 98 updates 270
protocol support 461 See also hardware ID compatibility 459
SCSI bus servers, firmware license for library 3
connectivity 55 to 56 packages 298 to 299 using emulation for
daisy-chaining direct-attach service access, space compatibility 294
drives 56 requirements 451 software support key,
SCSI bus, optimizing RXT service contract enabling 270
performance 436 entering BlueScale Software specifications
SCSI drives Support key 270 AC power connectors 453
connection requirements 38 required for firmware AC power cord 453
update 64, 389, 394, 443
drive sled connectors 38 bar-code labels 468 to 471
service contract, extending or
in E-QIP partitions 231 cooling
renewing 443
in F-QIP partitions 225 to 226 requirements 456 to 457
service options 447
QIP requirements 38 data capacity 450
setup wizard, camera
sled terminator location 37 environmental, library 458
default administrator
SCSI ID, for direct-attach environmental, RXT
name 344
drives 221 media 474
using 342 to 344
SCSI terminator, description 38 environmental, tape
SFPs, supported types 439 media 466
Shared Library Services, See SLS heat dissipation 456
506
User Guide 91010000
Index – T
specifications (continued) status bar Switch User, using to change users

LTO media capacity 466 BlueScale software version 77 or log out 81
LTO tape drives 462 to 465 description 76 switches, main AC power 32
power 453 to 455 enabling the camera system
power icon 277 to 278 configuration defaults 274
consumption 456 to 457 refresh display 76 configuration
RXT drives 471 to 472 remote access icon 77 settings 273 to 285
RXT media 473 to 474 system status icon 76 configuration settings
SDLT tape drives 465 time of last refresh 77 checklist 65
service access space status icons, descriptions 76 system messages
requirements 451 status LED date and time stamp 275
shipping size and weight 452 LTO tape drives 366 HHM notification 93
shock and vibration, power supply module, drive icons 76
library 459 frame 32 icons, MLM media health 177
size and weight 451 RXT drive 381 System OK icon 76
Spectra Certified Media SDLT tape drive 380
cleaning cartridges 159, 442 storage density, viewing
description 441 metrics 91 T
MLM-enabled 157 storage pool
purchasing 442 configuring 215 to 217 TAP
Spectra Logic description 49 advantages to using 35
contacting 5 exporting media 141 to 143 description 34
manuals, obtaining 17 importing media 136 to 138 inserting a TeraPack
web shopping 443 importing media for first magazine 131
Spectra PC time 136 location 27
See LCM partition requirements 206 tape drives
See RCM viewing inventory 120 to 122 configure Global
standard initialization, storing media, best practices Spare 213 to 214
encryption 308 RXT media 437 configuring Auto Drive
static addressing, E-QIP IP tape media 427 to 428 Clean 236 to 238
address 232 storing the library, device drivers 63
status environment 458, 472 is cleaning required 408
attention required, system 76 StorNext, using with T-Series LTO, drive cleaning
attention, drive health 197 libraries 301 to 303 notification 367
average, media health 177 stylus, location 34 LTO, status LED 366
error, system 76 su, See superuser LTO, WORM media
subnet mask errors 367
for drives 98
library 279 manual cleaning, no cleaning
General Status screen 73
partition 411 to 413
good, drive health 197 setting for E-QIP 232
manual cleaning, using
good, media health 177 setting for library 279
cleaning partition 413
information notification 76 superuser
reclaim Global
library messages 88 default user name 71 Spare 110 to 110
poor, drive health 197 deleting last 268 required materials for
poor, media health 178 privileges 71 cleaning 411
System OK 76 support SDLT, drive cleaning
unknown, media health 178, firmware packages 389 notification 380, 381
197 using specifications, LTO 462 to 465
using status bar 76 AutoSupport 258 to 263 specifications, SDLT 465
See also technical support troubleshooting,
support ticket, opening 448 LTO 365 to 379
507
Index – T
tape drives (continued) throughput traces (continued)

use Global Spare 107 to 110 upgrades 445 saving to compact flash 335
viewing status 98 See also transfer rate saving to USB drive 335
See also drives time saving to USB during backup
tape media in status bar 76 operations 105
best practices 425 to 433 setting 275 transfer rate
environmental toolbar options LTO-2 drive 465
specifications 466 Configuration, Controllers 74 LTO-3 drive 464
MLM-enabled 157 Configuration, Drives 74 LTO-4 drive 463
preparing for use 123 to 125 Configuration, MLM 74, 74 RXT drive 471
rotation example 430 to 433 Configuration, Partitions 74 RXT, impact of RAID
write-protecting 125, 428 Configuration, System 74 level 435
See also cartridges General, General Status 73 SDLT drive 465
See also media General, Import/Export 73 transporter
tape rotation General, Inventory 73 configuring robotics control
example 430 to 433 path 212
General, Metrics 73
using Rotation Manager 300 connectivity 52 to 54
General, MLM 73
target, visibility 57 description 29
Maintenance,
TBA, description 31 AutoSupport 74 troubleshooting
technical support Maintenance, Diagnostics 74 accessing interior
components 347 to 358
accessing the Knowledge Maintenance, Package
Base 5 Update 74 calibrate touch screen 407
contacting 5 Maintenance, Tools 74 capturing traces 334 to 336
firmware updates 64, 389, Security, Edit Users 75 check library firmware
394, 443 levels 389 to 391
Security, Encryption 75
using Knowledge Base 333 collect trace data before
Security, Switch User 75
resetting 338
TeraPack Access Port, See TAP toolbars
drive sense codes 359
TeraPack Bay Assemblies, See TBA Configuration 74
drives 364
TeraPack case or container General 73
drives, using Knowledge
See magazines Maintenance 74 Base 359
See TeraPack magazine Security 75 general information,
TeraPack magazine user interface 72 library 333
capacity 123 touch screen library error codes 333
cover 427 calibrating 407 library sense codes 333
description 42 description 33 library, using Knowledge
efficiency from grouped location 27 Base 333
media 43 touch screen interface LTO drive cleaning
handling and storing description 70 notification 367
media 42 LTO status LED 366
logging in 79 to 80
importing a cleaning LTO WORM media 367
logging out 81
cartridge 411 to 413
overview 70 to 78 LTO-2 375 to 379
inserting cartridges 125
soft keyboard description 70 LTO-3 368 to 374
inserting into TAP 131
using 79 to 82 LTO-4 368 to 374
mixed media support 43
using soft keyboard 82 magazine in TAP after power
pre-loaded media 42 failure 336
See also LC
purchasing 442 recovering media after power
See also user interface
storage density 29 failure 336
traces
See also magazine removing blockages 345
capturing 334 to 336
See also media resetting a QIP 339 to 340
emailing results 335
See also Maintenance TeraPacks
508
User Guide 91010000
Index – U
troubleshooting (continued) USB drive (continued) user interface (continued)

resetting library 337 saving drive dumps to 363 logging out 81
resetting the camera to saving traces to 335 Maintenance toolbar,
DHCP 340 to 345 using for firmware AutoSupport 74
resetting the LCM 338 upgrade 397 Maintenance toolbar,
retrieving drive dump USB key, See USB drive Diagnostics 74
files 362 to 364 USB port Maintenance toolbar,
RXT drives 381 to 383 description, LCM 36 MLM 74
SDLT drive cleaning interface support 461 Maintenance toolbar, Package
notification 380, 381 Update 74
location, LCM 35
SDLT tape drives 379 to 381 Maintenance toolbar,
using for firmware
using DLM drive Tools 74
upgrade 393
test 201 to 204 map of toolbar options 75
USB storage device, See USB drive
web site sense code moving media within a
user groups
lookup 333, 359 partition 150 to 154
overview 71
typing overview 70 to 78
privileges 71
using external keyboard 82 refreshing displayed
user interface information 77
using soft keyboard 82
accessing 70 to 71 Security toolbar, Edit
using the web interface 81
accessing the BlueScale Vision Users 75
typographical conventions 19 viewer 78 Security toolbar,
attention required Encryption 75
notification 76 Security toolbar, Switch
U command processing progress User 75
bar 78 setting date and time 275
UDP broadcast, using to discover Configuration toolbar, soft keyboard 70
camera 343 Controllers 74
status bar 76
Ultrium, See LTO Configuration toolbar,
System OK notification 76
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Drives 74
toolbars 72
See USB drive Configuration toolbar,
MLM 74 typing, soft keyboard 82
See USB port
Configuration toolbar, typing, using external
unknown status keyboard 82
Partitions 74
drive health 197 typing, web browser 81
Configuration toolbar,
media health 178 using 79 to 82
System 74
upgrades web 35
entering information 81 to 82
adding capacity 270 user privileges required to
error notification 76
drives 445 access drives screen 409
feature overview 23 to 25
purchasing capacity 270, 444 access encryption settings 310
features 72 to 78
requirements when access Utilities screen 417
General tool bar, General
purchasing 271
Status 73 add a user 267
upgrades, firmware
General tool bar, Import/ back up MLM database 188
policy 443 Export 73 calibrate touch screen 407
tape drive 414 to 418 General tool bar, change library
using USB drive 397 Inventory 73 configuration 269
USB drive General tool bar, Metrics 73 configure AutoSupport
connecting to LCM 105 General tool bar, MLM 73 profiles 251
for firmware upgrades 107 HHM notification 78 configure emulation 294
importing encryption key 327 information notification 76 configure encryption 313
inserting in LCM 104 locating media in configure MLM 164
purchasing 445 library 150 to 152 configure StorNext 302
saving data to 107 logging in 79 to 80
509
Index – V
user privileges required to users (continued)

(continued) deleting last superuser 268 W
create cleaning partitions 237 logging in 79 to 80 warnings
create data partitions 209 logging out 81 AC power 4
create HHM AutoSupport modifying existing 268 install cord locks 403, 453
ticket 93 overview 71 install grounding wire 403, 453
delete a user 268 types of privileges 71 library weight 4
delete MLM database using media lifting or moving the library 4
records 191 best practices, RXT side access panel removal 347
delete partitions 245 media 433 to 438 warranty 447
enable/disable Soft best practices, tape Certified Media 447
Power 276 media 425 to 433 web interface
export media from storage utilities
pool 141 available functions when
calibrate touch screen 407 using 81
export MLM database 192
current firmware levels 390 description 70
export/exchange cleaning
HHM: View Data 96 to 98 entering information 81
cartridges 144
Reset Controller, to reset logging in 79 to 80
export/exchange media from a
drives 340, 361 logging out 81
specific location 147
Restore Library overview 70 to 78
import media into entry/exit Configuration 115 to 116
pool 129 using 79 to 82
Restore Library Configuration
import media into See also user interface
from Auto
partitions 133 web server
Save 111 to 112
import media into storage communication port 274
Retrieve Drive Dump, to
pool 136 in LCM 35
retrieve drive dump
import/export media to storage file 363 reserved port number 274
pool 412 Save Library web site
manage firmware Configuration 286 to 288 drive sense code lookup 359
packages 402
Knowledge Base 5
modify a user 268
library sense code lookup 333
modify partitions 242
open AutoSupport ticket 258 V obtaining Spectra Logic
manuals 17
reclaim Global Spare verifying configuration backup
file 288 shop 443
drive 110
virtual library, See partitions Spectra Logic 5
respond to HHM
notification 93 virtualization web site, Spectra Logic
restore Auto Save library description 45 determining software
configuration 111 See also partitions interoperability 459
restore library configuration See also SLS interoperability tables 459
file 115 visibility World Wide Name, See WWN
restore MLM database 111, configuring for drives 230 WORM media
117, 190 description 57 description 467
use Global Spare drive 108 drives 224 to 225, 230 description, LTO 467
use Soft Power 85 ports on QIPs 225, 230 error conditions 367
users robotic control write errors, MLM 176
adding new 267 path 223 to 224, 229 write-protect
changing logged in 81 voltage, AC input for library 453 setting for cartridges 125
configure partition tape media 428
access 219, 221, 223, 228 WWN
configuring 266 to 268 assigned to FC drive 99
configuring for library assigned to FC
security 71 partition 100 to 101
deleting 268 for F-QIPs 54
510
User Guide 91010000

2297

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Descrição original:

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

2297

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

T-Series Mid-Range Libraries

T200, T380, and T680

Part Number 91010000 Revision D

Warnings and Cautions

Contacting Spectra Logic

Chapter 1 – Library Overview 21

Chapter 2 – Architecture Overview 45

Chapter 3 – Installation Overview 61

Chapter 4 – Introducing the BlueScale User Interface 69

Chapter 5 – Operating the Library 83

Using a USB Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Chapter 6 – Importing, Exporting, and Moving Media 119

Chapter 7 – Media Lifecycle Management 155

Chapter 8 – Drive Lifecycle Management 195

Chapter 9 – Using Partitions 205

Chapter 10 – AutoSupport 247

Chapter 11 – Configuring the Library 265

Chapter 12 – Configuring and Using Encryption 305

Chapter 13 – Library Troubleshooting 333

Chapter 14 – Drive Troubleshooting 359

Chapter 15 – Maintaining the Library & Drives 385

Appendix A – Best Practices 421

Working with RXT Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

Appendix B – Media & Upgrades 441

Appendix C – Service and Support 447

Appendix D – Specifications 449

Interoperability and Software Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

Appendix E – Regulatory & Safety Standards 475

Glossary of Terms 481

BlueScale User Interface Screens

Spectra T200, T380, and T680 Libraries

This document uses an arrow (>) to describe a series of menu selections.

REGISTER YOUR LIBRARY

Topic Described beginning on...

Auto Drive Clean

Drive Lifecycle Management

Encryption and Key Management

Hardware Health Monitoring

Media Lifecycle Management

Shared Library Services (SLS) Partitioning

Soft Power Control

BlueScale Vision Camera

High-Density TeraPack Media Storage

Support for Multiple Tape Formats

Front Panel Components

Fans and air filter

Figure 1 Library front and side panel components (T380 shown).

Figure 2 Library interior components (T380 shown).

LEDs (one on each

Figure 3 The BlueScale Vision camera and LEDs.

Rear Panel Components

Empty drive bay

Empty controller bay

Drive Bay Assembly QIP or bus

Library Control BlueScale Vision

Power supply Main AC power cord

Figure 4 Library rear components (T380 2N redundant power supply option

A minimum of one DBA must be installed in the library. One additional

Power supply bay with AC power cord

Figure 5 The library power supply components (2N configuration shown).

 Power supply modules convert the AC input power to the DC power

Each power supply module has two indicator LEDs (shown in

Additional Components In addition to the components shown in Figure 4

Power supply modules convert the AC input power to the DC power

Spectra Logic RXT150 drive and RXT media packs. No changes to

Grouped media. The cartridges in a TeraPack magazine are treated as a